Fr340 Service

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.
com
SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER 330/340
FUJIFILM SCANNER AND LASER PRINTER
FRONTIER SLP-800SC
FRONTIER SLP-1000SE
Servicing and Electrical Circuit Diagrams
System Disk Ver.3.0 or later First Edition

PP3-C1025E
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
INTRODUCTION
This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the Fujifilm Digital Minilab
FRONTIER 330/340 laser printer processor SLP-800SC/SLP-1000SE.
This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SLP-800SC/
SLP-1000SE. When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel.
Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations
! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply on the power
distribution board are both set to the OFF position.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power supply section, and this can cause electric shocks and/or
short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the
machine and/or bodily injury.
! CAUTION
The dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing with servicing procedures.
• Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints.
• When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.
• Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are
connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.
• The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).
Service Manual Appropriations
1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.
K Manual copying in whole or in part.

K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
SETUP AND MAINTENANCE MENU 1

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2
MESSAGES AND ACTIONS 3
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 4
MAINTENANCE MENU 5
OPERATION SECTION 6
FILM CARRIER SECTION 7
SCANNER SECTION 8
PAPER SUPPLY SECTION 9
PAPER FEED SECTION 10
REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS 11
PRINTER EXIT SECTION 12
PROCESSOR SECTION (F330) 13
PROCESSOR SECTION (F340) 14
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F330) 15
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F340) 16
PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM 17
DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F330) 18
DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F340) 19
ELECTRICAL SECTION 20
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 21
APPENDIX 22
CONTENTS
1. SETUP AND MAINTENANCE MENU ............................................................................... 1-1
2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 User Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ........................................................................ 2-3
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection................................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.1 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection.................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 CD-ROM Drive Inspection........................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.3 Lane Changing Linkage Lubrication......................................................................... 2-5
2.3.4 Scanner Section Gear and Threaded Shaft Lubrication........................................... 2-6
2.3.5 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Lubrication ................................................................ 2-7
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.7 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement ............................................................................ 2-8
2.3.8 Sub-scanning Section Roller Cleaning..................................................................... 2-9
2.3.9 Registration Section Roller Cleaning........................................................................ 2-9
2.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Inspection..................................................................... 2-10
2.3.11 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection ........................................................ 2-11
2.3.12 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection................................................................ 2-13
2.3.13 Replenisher Pump/Filters Inspection...................................................................... 2-14
2.3.14 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication ....................................................................... 2-15
2.3.15 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning .................................................. 2-16
2.3.16 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication ............................................................... 2-16
2.3.17 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication......................................................................... 2-17
2.3.18 Circulation Pump Inspection................................................................................... 2-17
2.3.19 Processing Tank Heater Inspection ....................................................................... 2-18
2.3.20 Solution Hose/Clamp Inspection ............................................................................ 2-18
2.3.21 Circulation Filter (PS1/PS2/PS3) Replacement (F340).......................................... 2-20
2.3.22 Processing Rack Roller/Bearing Inspection ........................................................... 2-21
2.3.23 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Lubrication ........................................................................ 2-22
2.3.24 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning .................................................................. 2-23
2.3.25 Sorter Feed Section Cleaning (F340)..................................................................... 2-23
3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ............................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Error Indication Outline........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Message Number ..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Message Icon ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 X-#### Actions ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Messages and Actions ........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Refreshing Backup Restoration....................................................................................... 3-120
3.4 OS Recovery and Backup for Refreshing........................................................................ 3-121
3.4.1 OS Recovery ........................................................................................................ 3-121
3.4.2 Backup for Refreshing.......................................................................................... 3-124
4
4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Simple Upgrade................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Update ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 Reinstallation ....................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4 New Installation ................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.5 Reversion .......................................................................................................................... 4-18
5. MAINTENANCE MENU ......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Operational Procedure ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01)............................................................................ 5-6
5.2.1 Connection to Imaging Controller (0100) ................................................................. 5-6
5.2.2 Image Export Settings (0101)................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Production Information (0120).................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.4 Timer Setup (0121) .................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.5 Data Backup (0122) ................................................................................................. 5-9
5.2.6 Error Information Check (0123).............................................................................. 5-10
5.2.7 DI Manager Administrative Setting (0124) ............................................................. 5-11
5.2.8 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125) .......................................................................... 5-12
5.2.9 Installation Information Confirmation (0126) .......................................................... 5-13
5.2.10 Installation Information Setup (0140) ..................................................................... 5-14
5.2.11 Clear Error Log (0141) ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.12 Shipping Information Reference (0142) ................................................................. 5-16
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02) ............................................................................... 5-17
5.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (0200)................................................................................ 5-17
5.3.2 Print Size Setup (0220) .......................................................................................... 5-19
5.3.3 Paper Magazine Registration (0221)...................................................................... 5-21
5.3.4 Monitor Adjustment (0222) ..................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.5 Special Film CH Setting (0223) .............................................................................. 5-24
5.3.6 Monotone Correction Setting (0224) ...................................................................... 5-27
5.3.7 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)..................................................................... 5-28
5.3.8 Back Printing Format Setting (0226) ...................................................................... 5-36
5.3.9 Index Conditions (0227) ......................................................................................... 5-38
5.3.10 Image Correction Setup (0240) .............................................................................. 5-39
5.3.11 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (0241) ................................................... 5-40
5.3.12 Paper Condition Method Setup (0242)................................................................... 5-40
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03) ............................................................................. 5-42
5.4.1 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (0300) ........................................................... 5-42
5.4.2 Brightness Correction (0301) ................................................................................. 5-42
5.4.3 Input Check (0320)................................................................................................. 5-44
5.4.4 Focus Position Adjustment (0321) ......................................................................... 5-44
5.4.5 I/O Check (0340) .................................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.6 Carrier Inclination Display (0341) ........................................................................... 5-47
5.4.7 CCD Data Display (0342)....................................................................................... 5-48
5.4.8 Operation Information Display (0343) .................................................................... 5-51
5.4.9 Lens Registration (0344) ........................................................................................ 5-51
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345) .............................................................................. 5-52
5.4.11 Optical Magnification Calibration (0346) ................................................................ 5-53
5
5.4.12 Focus Calibration (0347) ........................................................................................ 5-55

5.4.13 Spectral Calibration (0348)..................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.14 Darkness Correction (0349) ................................................................................... 5-59
5.4.15 DC Offset Cancel (0350) ........................................................................................ 5-59
5.4.16 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0351).................................................................... 5-60
5.4.17 Pixel Correction (0352)........................................................................................... 5-61
5.4.18 CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment (0353)............................................................. 5-62
5.4.19 CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment (0354) ............................................................... 5-63
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)................................................................................ 5-65
5.5.1 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (0400).................................................................. 5-65
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420)........................................................................... 5-65
5.5.3 NC100AC Input Check (0421)................................................................................ 5-67
5.5.4 M69D Input Check (0422) ...................................................................................... 5-68
5.5.5 NC100AC Working Information Display (0423)...................................................... 5-69
5.5.6 M69D Working Information Display (0424) ............................................................ 5-70
5.5.7 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425)......................................................................... 5-71
5.5.8 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (0440) ..................................................................... 5-72
5.5.9 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441)............................................................................. 5-72
5.5.10 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (0442) .................................................. 5-73
5.5.11 NC100AC Installation Information Display (0443).................................................. 5-75
5.5.12 NC100AC Installation Information Setup (0444) .................................................... 5-75
5.5.13 NC100AC I/O Check (0445)................................................................................... 5-76
5.5.14 M69D I/O Check (0446) ......................................................................................... 5-77
5.5.15 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (0447)....................................................................... 5-78
5.5.16 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (0448) .................................................................. 5-79
5.5.17 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (0449)................................................... 5-81
5.5.18 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (0450) .......................................................................... 5-82
5.5.19 NC100AC Nest Section Operation (0451).............................................................. 5-82
5.5.20 NC100AC Feeding Operation (0452) ..................................................................... 5-83
5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05) ................................................................................ 5-85
5.6.1 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (0520) .................................................................. 5-85
5.6.2 Test Pattern Printing (0521) ................................................................................... 5-86
5.6.3 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522) .......................................... 5-88
5.6.4 Paper Feed (0523) ................................................................................................. 5-89
5.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (0524) ....................................................................... 5-90
5.6.6 Printer Input Check (0525) ..................................................................................... 5-90
5.6.7 Precut Length Setting (0526) ................................................................................. 5-91
5.6.8 Image Position Fine Adjustment (0527) ................................................................. 5-91
5.6.9 Printer I/O Check (0540) ........................................................................................ 5-92
5.6.10 Filter Replacement History (0541).......................................................................... 5-93
5.6.11 Laser Exposure Check (0542)................................................................................ 5-93
5.6.12 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543) ................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.13 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544) ............................................................................... 5-94
5.6.14 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (0545) ................................................................................ 5-94
5.6.15 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (0546)................... 5-95
5.6.16 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (0547) ..... 5-95
5.6.17 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548) ................................................... 5-97
5.6.18 Laser History Display (0549) .................................................................................. 5-98
6
5.6.19 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550) .................................................. 5-99
5.6.20 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551) ......................................................... 5-100
5.6.21 Back Printer Test (0552) ...................................................................................... 5-101
5.6.22 Printer Operation Data Display (0553) ................................................................. 5-101
5.6.23 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (0554)................................................. 5-102
5.6.24 Clearing All Operation Data (0555) ...................................................................... 5-102
5.6.25 Side Register Calibration (0556) .......................................................................... 5-103
5.6.26 Data Saving (0557) .............................................................................................. 5-104
5.6.27 Data Download (0558) ......................................................................................... 5-104
5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06) ........................................................................ 5-106
5.7.1 Sorter Operating Condition Setup (0600) (F340 Only)......................................... 5-106
5.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (0620) .............................................................. 5-106
5.7.3 Replenisher Rate Setting (0621) .......................................................................... 5-107
5.7.4 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622) ................................................................. 5-107
5.7.5 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623) .......................................................... 5-108
5.7.6 Processor Input Check (0624).............................................................................. 5-110
5.7.7 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625) ...................................................... 5-111
5.7.8 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0640) ..................................... 5-112
5.7.9 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0641) ............................................ 5-113
5.7.10 Processor I/O Check (0642)................................................................................. 5-118
5.7.11 Processor Operation Data Display (0643)............................................................ 5-119
5.7.12 Clearing Selected Operation Data (0644) ............................................................ 5-120
5.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (0645)......................................................... 5-121
5.7.14 Installation (0646)................................................................................................. 5-121
5.7.15 PS Solution Concentration Management (0647) (F340 Only).............................. 5-122
5.7.16 Sorter Fine Adjustment Value Setup (0648) (F340 Only)..................................... 5-124
5.8 Self-Diagnostic/Trouble Help (09) ................................................................................... 5-125
5.9 Register/Delete................................................................................................................ 5-126
5.9.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020) .......................................................................... 5-126
5.9.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021) ............................................................................ 5-127
5.9.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)......................................................................... 5-127
5.9.4 Custom Button Registration/Saving (1023) .......................................................... 5-127
5.10 Special Operations (99)................................................................................................... 5-130
5.10.1 Paint (9940).......................................................................................................... 5-130
5.10.2 Explorer (9941)..................................................................................................... 5-130
5.10.3 Command (9942) ................................................................................................. 5-131
5.10.4 Screen Keyboard (9943) ...................................................................................... 5-131
6. OPERATION SECTION ......................................................................................................... 6-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1 Monitor................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.1 Monitor Replacement ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Mouse Replacement ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2 Tabletop Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Keyboard Replacement............................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.4 Light Table (Optional) Replacement......................................................................... 6-7
7
7. FILM CARRIER SECTION.................................................................................................... 7-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section) ........................................................... 7-8
7.1.1 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 7-8
7.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement.............................................. 7-8
7.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement ........................... 7-9
7.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 7-9
7.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement ..................... 7-10
7.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor
LED (LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement .............................................................. 7-10
7.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement .................................. 7-11
7.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement.......................................... 7-11
7.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement............................. 7-12
7.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement........................................... 7-12
7.1.11 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 7-13
7.1.12 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 7-13
7.1.13 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement....................................................... 7-14
7.1.14 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement...................................................... 7-15
7.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 7-15
7.1.16 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/D109L)
(LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ...................................................................... 7-16
7.1.17 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement ............................... 7-16
7.1.18 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement ...................................... 7-17
7.1.19 Dummy Head Replacement ................................................................................... 7-17
7.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................... 7-18
7.1.21 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement.................................................. 7-19
7.1.22 Film Mask Replacement......................................................................................... 7-19
7.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) ............................................................. 7-20
7.2.1 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 7-20
7.2.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation.................................................................... 7-20
7.2.3 Bottom Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 7-21
7.2.4 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................... 7-21
7.2.5 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement ...................................................................... 7-22
7.2.6 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement.......... 7-22
7.2.7 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement ...................................................... 7-23
7.2.8 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 7-23
7.2.9 Solenoid (S101) Replacement ............................................................................... 7-24
7.2.10 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ....... 7-24
7.2.11 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation................................................................... 7-25
7.2.12 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement........ 7-25
7.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement ......... 7-26
7.2.14 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement .......................................................................... 7-26
7.2.15 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ................................................................. 7-26
7.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement ................................................... 7-27
7.2.17 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement ............................................................. 7-27
(DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement ...................................................................... 7-28
7.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement .................................................. 7-28
8
7.2.20
IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement ...... 7-29
7.2.21
IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P)
(DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement...................................................................... 7-29
7.2.22 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement.............................................................. 7-30
7.2.23 Opposite Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 7-30
7.2.24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ......................................................... 7-31
7.2.25 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement........................................................................... 7-32
7.2.26 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation............................................................. 7-32
7.2.27 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement .......................................................................... 7-33
7.2.28 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement............................................................ 7-35
7.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement ............................................................................ 7-37
7.3 Nest Section ...................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.3.1Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 7-39
7.3.2Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 7-39
7.3.3Door Open/Close/Cartridge Sensor (D112/D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board)
Replacement .......................................................................................................... 7-40
7.3.4 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................... 7-40
7.3.5 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation........................................................ 7-42
7.3.6 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................... 7-42
7.3.7 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 7-44
7.3.8 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... 7-45
7.3.9 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement.............................................................. 7-46
7.3.10 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................ 7-47
7.3.11 Door Motor (M104) Replacement........................................................................... 7-47
7.3.12 Door Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................... 7-48
7.3.13 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement ................................... 7-49
7.3.14 Spool Rack Replacement....................................................................................... 7-49
7.3.15 Spool Replacement ................................................................................................ 7-50
7.3.16 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ......................................................................... 7-51
7.3.17 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 7-52
7.3.18 Cartridge Holder Replacement............................................................................... 7-53
7.3.19 Set Lever Stopper Replacement ............................................................................ 7-53
7.3.20 Cam Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 7-54
7.4 Winding Section................................................................................................................. 7-55
7.4.1 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................................... 7-55
7.4.2 Winding Gear Replacement ................................................................................... 7-55
7.4.3 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................... 7-56
7.4.4 Film Guide Replacement........................................................................................ 7-57
7.5 Carrier Base Section ......................................................................................................... 7-58
7.5.1 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 7-58
7.5.2 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement ............................. 7-58
7.5.3 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation..................................................................... 7-59
7.5.4 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement...................................................................... 7-63
7.5.5 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 7-65
7.5.6 Gear Replacement ................................................................................................. 7-65
7.5.7 Ball Catch Replacement......................................................................................... 7-66
7.5.9 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................... 7-69
9
7.5.10 Carrier Table Slider Guide Replacement ............................................................... 7-70

7.5.11 Carrier Base Assembly Replacement .................................................................... 7-70
7.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) ........................................................................ 7-74
7.6.1 MNC Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................................... 7-74
7.6.2 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement ........................................................ 7-75
7.6.3 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement ........................................................... 7-76
7.6.4 Negative Mask Adjustment..................................................................................... 7-77
8. SCANNER SECTION ............................................................................................................. 8-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1 Light Source Section ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.1 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 8-4
8.1.2 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement................................... 8-5
8.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation....................................................... 8-6
8.1.4 Light Source Filter Replacement (F330 Serial Number 8001 and after/F340) ......... 8-7
8.1.5 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement .......................................... 8-8
8.1.6 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement.............................................................. 8-9
8.1.7 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement................................................................... 8-12
8.1.8 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation.............................................. 8-14
8.1.9 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............................................ 8-15
8.1.10 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement ..................................................... 8-16
8.1.11 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement......................................................................... 8-16
8.1.12 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement.......................................................... 8-17
8.2 Scanner Section ................................................................................................................ 8-19
8.2.1 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 8-19
8.2.2 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation......................................................... 8-20
8.2.3 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement............................................................ 8-21
8.2.4 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................................... 8-21
8.2.5 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement............................................. 8-24
8.2.6 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement.............................................................. 8-24
8.2.7 Shutter/Gear Replacement..................................................................................... 8-25
8.3 Lens Unit ........................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.3.1 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement................................................. 8-26
8.3.2 Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................................... 8-26
8.3.3 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ................................................................. 8-28
8.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section ................................................ 8-29
8.4.1 Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/
Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement ............................ 8-29
8.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement ........................................ 8-30
8.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement...................................................... 8-30
8.4.4 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement........................................................................ 8-31
8.4.5 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement..................................... 8-33
8.4.6 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment ......................................................................... 8-34
10
9. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................. 9-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1 Paper Magazine .................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.1.1 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement..................................................................... 9-4
9.1.2 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement ......................................................................... 9-6
9.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.4 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement................................................................ 9-10
9.1.5 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................. 9-11
9.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to D310) Replacement ............................................... 9-11
9.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement .......................... 9-13
9.2 Paper Magazine Table ...................................................................................................... 9-14
9.2.1 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 9-14
9.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement .......................................................... 9-14
9.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement .......................................................... 9-17
9.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation......................................................... 9-19
9.3 Paper Supply Drive Section............................................................................................... 9-20
9.3.1 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 9-20
9.3.2 Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement ............................................................. 9-20
9.3.3 Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement ................................................................... 9-21
9.4 Cutter Unit ......................................................................................................................... 9-22
9.4.1 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement ............................................................ 9-22
9.4.2 Cutter Unit Replacement ........................................................................................ 9-23
9.4.3 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement ............................... 9-24
9.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement ............................................................... 9-24
10. PAPER FEED SECTION ..................................................................................................... 10-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1 Feed Section Cover........................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.1 Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 10-3
10.1.2 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324A/B) Replacement .......... 10-3
10.1.3 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement .......... 10-4
10.1.4 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 10-5
10.1.5 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement ............... 10-6
10.1.6 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement............................................................ 10-7
10.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement................................................ 10-7
10.2 Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.1 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................................... 10-9
10.2.2 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement .................................................................. 10-10
10.2.3 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement........................................ 10-11
10.2.4 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement ............................................................ 10-11
10.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement ............................................................ 10-12
10.2.6 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement........................................................... 10-13
10.2.7 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement ............................................................. 10-14
10.2.8 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement ........................................ 10-15
10.2.9 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ................................................... 10-16
10.2.10 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement ................................................................... 10-18
10.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement.............................................................................. 10-19
11
10.2.12 Feed Nip Camshaft Replacement ........................................................................ 10-20

10.3 Back Printer Section ........................................................................................................ 10-21
10.3.1 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................................................. 10-21
10.3.2 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement.................................................................... 10-22
10.3.3 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement..................................................... 10-25
10.3.4 Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement............................................ 10-25
10.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 10-26
10.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment............................................................ 10-29
10.3.7 Platen Replacement ............................................................................................. 10-30
11. REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS ......................................................... 11-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1 Cover and Electrical Parts ................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.1 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 11-4
11.1.2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement......................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement............................................... 11-8
11.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement......................................................................... 11-9
11.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement .................................................................................... 11-10
11.2 Laser Unit ........................................................................................................................ 11-11
11.2.1 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................................... 11-11
11.2.2 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement ....................................... 11-14
11.3 Sub-scanning Unit ........................................................................................................... 11-15
11.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................... 11-15
11.3.2 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement................................................................. 11-17
11.3.3 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement ................................................. 11-19
11.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement .......................... 11-20
11.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation.................................................................. 11-20
11.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement....................................................... 11-20
11.3.7 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement ............................................... 11-21
11.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement................................. 11-21
11.3.9 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement .......................... 11-22
11.3.10 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement .................................................... 11-22
11.3.11 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement.................................................................. 11-23
11.3.12 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................................................................. 11-23
11.3.13 Nip Belt Replacement........................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.14 Nip Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 11-24
11.4 Registration Unit .............................................................................................................. 11-27
11.4.1 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 11-27
11.4.2 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement ............................. 11-27
11.4.3 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement ....................................................... 11-28
11.4.4 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement ............................................................... 11-28
11.4.5 Width Detecting Sensor (D314P) Replacement ................................................... 11-28
11.4.6 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 11-29
11.4.7 Width Detecting Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement ........................................... 11-30
11.4.8 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement.......................................................... 11-30
11.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement....................................................................... 11-31
11.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement................................... 11-31
11.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement............................................................. 11-31
12
11.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement.......................................................... 11-32

11.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement.............................................. 11-32
11.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 11-33
11.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 11-33
11.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation..................................................................... 11-34
11.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 11-35
11.4.18 Exit Feed Roller Replacement.............................................................................. 11-35
11.4.19 Roller Nip Camshaft Replacement ....................................................................... 11-36
11.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement ....................................................................... 11-36
12. PRINTER EXIT SECTION ................................................................................................... 12-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1 Printer Exit Unit.................................................................................................................. 12-3
12.1.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................. 12-3
12.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement .............. 12-6
12.1.3 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement......................................... 12-7
12.1.4 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement .......................................................... 12-8
12.1.5 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ....................................... 12-9
12.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement..................................................... 12-9
12.1.7 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement ........................................... 12-10
12.1.8 Anti-static Brush Replacement ............................................................................. 12-11
12.1.9 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .......................................... 12-11
12.1.10 Up/Down Gear Replacement ............................................................................... 12-12
12.1.11 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................. 12-12
12.1.12 Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 12-13
12.1.13 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 12-16
12.1.14 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement .................................................................... 12-16
12.1.15 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement .................................................................. 12-18
12.1.16 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement .................................................................... 12-18
12.1.17 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment................................................................... 12-20
12.1.18 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment against the Sub-scanning Unit Exit
Guide Plate........................................................................................................... 12-23
12.1.19 Adjustment Confirmation ...................................................................................... 12-25
13. PROCESSOR SECTION (F330) ....................................................................................... 13-1

Parts Location (F330) ........................................................................................................ 13-2
13.1 Crossover Racks (F330).................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................... 13-3
13.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly..................................... 13-3
13.2 Processing Racks (F330) .................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2 Roller Replacement................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation............................................................. 13-10
13.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement......................................................................... 13-10
13.3 Processor Drive System (F330) ...................................................................................... 13-12
13.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 13-12
13.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ....................................................... 13-12
13
13.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement......................................................... 13-12

13.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 13-12
13.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement....................................................................... 13-12
13.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement ...................................................... 13-12
13.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................ 13-12
13.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................... 13-12
14. PROCESSOR SECTION (F340) ....................................................................................... 14-1

Parts Location (F340) ........................................................................................................ 14-2
14.1 Crossover Racks (F340).................................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.1 No.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................... 14-3
14.2 Processing Racks (F340) ................................................................................................ 14-10
14.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................... 14-10
14.2.2 Roller Replacement (P1/P2)................................................................................. 14-13
14.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation (P1/P2) ............................................... 14-18
14.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement (P1/P2) ........................................................... 14-19
14.2.5 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS1/PS4) .......................................................... 14-20
14.2.6 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS2/PS3) .......................................................... 14-22
14.2.7 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS1) ............................................................. 14-23
14.2.8 Roller/Gear/Center Guide Replacement (PS2/PS3) ............................................ 14-26
14.2.9 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS4) ............................................................. 14-29
14.3 Processor Drive System (F340) ...................................................................................... 14-33
14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 14-33
14.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ....................................................... 14-33
14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement......................................................... 14-34
14.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 14-35
14.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement....................................................................... 14-35
14.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement ...................................................... 14-38
14.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................ 14-39
14.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................... 14-40
14.4 PS Processing Tanks (F340)........................................................................................... 14-41
14.4.1 PS Solution Replacement .................................................................................... 14-41
14.4.2 PS Partition Board Replacement.......................................................................... 14-43
14.4.3 Partition Board Blade Assembly/Seal Replacement ............................................ 14-44
14
15. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F330) ................................. 15-1

Parts Location (F330) ........................................................................................................ 15-2
15.1 Sub-tanks (F330)............................................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.1 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement ............................................ 15-3
15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement ...................................................................... 15-4
15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section (F330) ............................................... 15-5
15.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 15-5
15.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 15-5
15.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement................................... 15-5
15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement ......................... 15-5
15.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement............................................................................ 15-5
15.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement................................................................... 15-6
15.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement.............................................................................. 15-7
15.3 Waste Solution System (F330).......................................................................................... 15-8
15.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 15-8
15.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing.................................................................. 15-8
15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement ............................................. 15-8
15.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement ........................................................................ 15-8
15.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement........................................................................ 15-8
15.4 Processing Solution Replacement (F330) ......................................................................... 15-9
15.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions .......................................................... 15-9
15.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining ............................. 15-10
15.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation .......................... 15-11
15.4.4 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure .......................................................... 15-13
15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit ........................................ 15-14
15.4.6 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit ....................................... 15-15
16. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F340) ................................. 16-1

Parts Location (F340) ........................................................................................................ 16-2
16.1 Sub-tanks (F340)............................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.2 P1/P2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement ........................................................... 16-3
16.1.3 PS Solution Level Sensor Replacement ................................................................ 16-4
16.1.4 Leak Sensor (FS421) Replacement ....................................................................... 16-5
16.1.5 DTL24 Circuit Board Replacement......................................................................... 16-6
16.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section (F340) ............................................... 16-7
16.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 16-7
16.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 16-8
16.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement ......................... 16-9
16.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement.......................................................................... 16-10
16.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement................................................................. 16-11
16.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement............................................................................ 16-12
16.2.8 Hose Connection.................................................................................................. 16-15
16.3 Waste Solution System (F340)........................................................................................ 16-16
16.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 16-16
16.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing................................................................ 16-17
15
16.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement ........................................... 16-17

16.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement ...................................................................... 16-18
16.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement...................................................................... 16-20
16.4 Processing Solution Replacement (F340) ....................................................................... 16-21
16.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions ........................................................ 16-21
16.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining ............................. 16-22
16.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation .......................... 16-24
16.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-49E) ........................................................... 16-28
17. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 17-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section........................................................................................... 17-5
17.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 17-5
17.1.2 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing...................................................... 17-5
17.1.3 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement....................... 17-6
17.1.4 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement............................ 17-6
17.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 17-7
17.1.6 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement...................................................... 17-9
17.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement...................... 17-10
17.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement............................................. 17-11
17.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System................................................................... 17-12
17.2.1 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 17-12
17.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............................................. 17-12
17.2.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement ........................................................................... 17-13
17.2.4 Replenisher Pump Replacement.......................................................................... 17-13
17.2.5 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement................................................................ 17-15
17.2.6 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement ............................................................ 17-16
17.2.7 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation......................................... 17-17
17.2.8 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation......................................... 17-17
17.2.9 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement ........................... 17-17
17.2.10 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement........................................ 17-19
17.2.11 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement........................... 17-20
17.2.12 P1R Tank Replacement ....................................................................................... 17-21
17.2.13 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement .......................................................................... 17-23
17.2.14 PSR Tank Replacement....................................................................................... 17-24
17.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System................................................................................. 17-26
17.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement ........................................................ 17-26
17.3.2 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement .......................................... 17-27
17.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement.............................................................. 17-29
16
18. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F330) ................................................................................ 18-1

Parts Location (F330) ........................................................................................................ 18-2
18.1 Dryer Unit (F330)............................................................................................................... 18-3
18.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 18-3
18.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ............................................................................... 18-3
18.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement .................................................... 18-4
18.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement ................................................ 18-5
18.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement..................................................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................ 18-8
18.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................. 18-10
18.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement.................................................................... 18-11
18.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement........................................................................ 18-13
18.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 18-14
18.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement ................ 18-15
18.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417) Replacement............. 18-15
18.2 Sorter (F330) ................................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2.1 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ............................................................. 18-18
18.2.2 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation.............................................................................. 18-19
18.2.3 Sorter Belt Replacement ...................................................................................... 18-20
18.2.4 Belt Tension Adjustment ...................................................................................... 18-23
18.2.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 18-24
18.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement .................................................................. 18-25
18.2.7 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement .......................................................................... 18-26
18.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F330) .................................................................................... 18-28
18.3.1 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 18-28
18.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement............................................................................ 18-28
18.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement ............................ 18-30
19. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F340) ................................................................................ 19-1

Parts Location (F340) ........................................................................................................ 19-2
19.1 Dryer Unit (F340)............................................................................................................... 19-3
19.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ............................................................................... 19-3
19.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement .................................................... 19-5
19.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement ................................................ 19-6
19.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement..................................................................... 19-7
19.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................ 19-9
19.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................. 19-11
19.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement.................................................................... 19-12
19.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement........................................................................ 19-15
19.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 19-16
19.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement ................ 19-17
19.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417) Replacement............. 19-18
19.2 Belt Sorter (F340) ............................................................................................................ 19-20
19.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation.............................................................................. 19-20
19.2.2 Sorter Flapper Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ................................................ 19-20
19.2.3 Sorter Flapper Position Sensor (D414) Replacement .......................................... 19-21
17
19.2.4 Sorter Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 19-22

19.2.5 “Sorter Full” Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 19-22
19.2.6 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 19-23
19.2.7 “Sorter Full” Sensor Replacement........................................................................ 19-24
19.2.8 “Sorter Full” Sensor LED Replacement................................................................ 19-24
19.2.9 Belt Drive Motor (M403) Replacement ................................................................. 19-25
19.2.10 Belt Drive Gear Replacement............................................................................... 19-26
19.2.11 Belt/Pulley/Flapper Up-Down Cam Replacement ................................................ 19-27
19.2.12 Plug-in Connector Replacement .......................................................................... 19-31
19.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F340) .................................................................................... 19-33
19.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement............................................................................ 19-33
19.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement ............................ 19-35
20. ELECTRICAL SECTION ..................................................................................................... 20-1

20.1 Power Supply Input Section .............................................................................................. 20-5
20.1.1 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation............................................................ 20-5
20.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement......................................................... 20-5
20.1.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test ................................................................. 20-6
20.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ................................................... 20-7
20.1.5 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement ....................................................... 20-7
20.1.6 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 20-8
20.1.7 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement............................................................................... 20-9
20.1.8 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement....................................................................... 20-9
20.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement ................................................... 20-10
20.1.10 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement ............................. 20-10
20.1.11 Step Down Transformer Replacement ................................................................. 20-12
20.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 20-13
20.2 DC Power Supply Section ............................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................... 20-14
20.2.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 20-14
20.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement .......................................................................... 20-15
20.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement ..................................................................... 20-16
20.2.5 DC Power Supply Replacement........................................................................... 20-16
20.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment ........................................................................................ 20-17
20.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section ......................................................................... 20-19
20.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing .................................. 20-19
20.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement............................................. 20-19
20.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement......................................................... 20-21
20.3.4 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement .............. 20-22
20.3.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................... 20-23
20.3.6 GMB22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................ 20-25
20.3.7 CTC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 20-26
20.3.8 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement ......................................................................... 20-26
20.3.9 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 20-27
20.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 20-28
20.3.11 Start Switch Replacement .................................................................................... 20-28
20.4 Main Control Unit Section................................................................................................ 20-29
18
20.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement ........................................................................... 20-29

20.4.2 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement................................................................... 20-31
20.5 Control Circuit Board Section .......................................................................................... 20-33
20.5.1 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement................................................................. 20-33
20.5.2 CTP22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 20-33
20.5.3 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22/24 Circuit Board Discharged......... 20-34
20.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement............................................ 20-36
20.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement.............................................. 20-37
20.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement ....................... 20-39
21. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................. 21-1

21.1 I/O Parts Diagram.............................................................................................................. 21-2
21.1.1 Scanner Section ..................................................................................................... 21-2
21.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC ................................................................................... 21-4
21.1.3 Printer Section........................................................................................................ 21-6
21.1.4 Processor Section .................................................................................................. 21-9
21.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams........................................................ 21-12
21.2.1 Input Power Supply Section ................................................................................. 21-12
21.2.2 Printer Rear Section ............................................................................................. 21-13
21.2.3 Processor Rear Section ....................................................................................... 21-14
21.2.4 Scanner Section ................................................................................................... 21-15
21.3 Block Diagram ................................................................................................................. 21-16
21.4 Wiring Diagrams .............................................................................................................. 21-17
21.4.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ........................................................................ 21-17
21.4.2 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 21-18
21.4.3 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 21-20
21.4.4 CTC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .............................................................. 21-21
21.4.5 CTP22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram............................................................... 21-24
21.4.6 LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.................................................................... 21-27
21.4.7 LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 21-28
21.4.8 PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 21-29
21.4.9 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram ......................................................................... 21-30
21.4.10 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .............................................................. 21-31
21.4.11 PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.................................................................... 21-33
21.4.12 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit)..................................................... 21-34
21.4.13 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System)................. 21-35
21.4.14 Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................. 21-36
21.4.15 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram ........................................................ 21-37
21.5 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams ........................................................................................ 21-38
21.5.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 21-38
21.5.2 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram .............................................................. 21-42
21.6 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit .......................... 21-57
21.6.1 DC Power System ................................................................................................ 21-57
21.6.3 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22/24 Circuit Board ..................... 21-60
21.6.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board........................... 21-60
21.6.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22/24 Circuit Board...................... 21-61
21.6.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22/24 Circuit Board...................... 21-62
21.6.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board........................... 21-63
19
21.7 DC Voltage Adjustment ................................................................................................... 21-65

21.7.1 DC Voltage Check List ......................................................................................... 21-65
21.7.2 Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages .......................... 21-67
22. APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................... 22-1

22.1 Adjustment Jigs ................................................................................................................. 22-2
22.2 Required Adjustments After Parts Replacement ............................................................... 22-4
22.2.1 Operation Section/Film Carrier Section.................................................................. 22-4
22.2.2 Scanner Section ..................................................................................................... 22-4
22.2.3 Printer Section........................................................................................................ 22-6
22.2.5 Electrical Section.................................................................................................... 22-7
22.2.4 Processor Section .................................................................................................. 22-7
22.3 Index.................................................................................................................................. 22-8
20
1. SETUP AND MAINTENANCE MENU
1
1-1
Password
Laboratory
No. Submenu No. Menu F330 F340 Operator SE
Manager
— 0000 7777
01 System 0100 Connection to Imaging Controller* K K K K K

Operation Setup
and Check 0101 Image Export Settings K K K K K
0120 Production Information K K K K
0121 Timer Setup K K K K
0122 Data Backup K K K K
0123 Error Information Check K K K K
0124 DI Manager Administrative Setting* K K K K
0125 Timer Waiting Time Setup K K K K
0126 Installation Information Reference K K K K
0140 Installation Information Setup K K K
0141 Clear Error Log K K K
0142 Shipping Information Reference K K K
02 Print Condition 0200 Paper Condition Setup K K K K K

Setup and
Check 0220 Print Size Setup K K K K
0221 Paper Magazine Registration K K K K
0222 Monitor Adjustment K K K K
0223 Special Film Channel Setting K K K K
0224 Monotone Correction Setting K K K K
0225 Custom Setting Register/Delete K K K K
0226 Back Printing Format K K K K
0227 Index Conditions K K K K
0240 Image Correction Setup K K K
Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.

0241 K K K
Setting
0242 Paper Condition Method Setup K K K
03 Scanner 0300 Unexposed Frame Detection Level K K K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0301 Bright Correction K K K K K
0320 Input Check K K K K
0321 Focus Position Adjustment K K K K
0340 I/O Check K K K
0341 Carrier Inclination Display K K K
0342 CCD Data Display K K K
* These menus are displayed when the optional software “DI Print/Data Writing Service (C4/C5)” has been installed.
1-2
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
03 Scanner 0343 Working Information Display K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0344 Lens Registration K K K
0345 Optical Axis Adjustment K K K
0346 Optical Magnification Calibration K K K
0347 Focus Calibration K K K
0348 Spectral Calibration K K K
0349 Dark Correction K K K
0350 DC Offset Cancel K K K
0351 LED Light Amount Adjustment K K K
0352 Pixel Correction K K K
0353 CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment K K K
0354 CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment K K K
04 Carrier 0400 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup K K K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0420 Mask Position Adjustment K K K K
0421 NC100AC Input Check K K K K
0422 M69D Input Check K K K K
NC100AC Working Information

0423 K K K K
Display
0424 M69D Working Information Display K K K K
0425 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup K K K K
0440 NC100AC Sensor Calibration K K K
0441 Focus Offset Adjustment K K K
NC100AC Sensor Calibration

0442 K K K
Information
NC100AC Installation Information

0443 K K K
Display
NC100AC Installation Information

0444 K K K
Setup
0445 NC100AC I/O Check K K K
0446 M69D I/O Check K K K
0447 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete K K K
0448 NC100AC Machine Data Setup K K K
NC100AC Magnetic Information

0449 K K K
Reading
0450 NC100AC Magnetic Verify K K K
1-3
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
04 Carrier 0451 NC100AC Nest Section Operation K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0452 NC100AC Feeding Operation K K K
05 Printer 0520 Paper Feed Length Adjustment K K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0521 Test Pattern Printing K K K
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature

0522 K K K K
Setup
0523 Paper Feed K K K K
0524 Printer Temperature Display K K K K
0525 Printer Input Check K K K K
0526 Precut Length Setting K K K K
0527 Image Position Fine Adjustment K K K K
0540 Printer I/O Check K K K
0541 Filter Replacement History K K K
0542 Laser Exposure Check K K K
0543 R Laser (R-LD) Data K K K
0544 G Laser (G-SHG) Data K K K
0545 B Laser (B-SHG) Data K K K
0546 Scan/Scan Home Position Parameter K K K
Main Scan/Laser Beam

0547 K K K
Synchronization Rough Adjustment
Laser Beam Synchronization Fine

0548 K K K
Adjustment Print
0549 Laser History Display K K K
Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT)

0550 K K K
Copy
0551 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment K K K
0552 Back Printer Test K K K
0553 Printer Operation Data Display K K K
Clearing Selected Printer Operation

0554 K K K
Data
0555 Clearing All Operation Data K K K
0556 Side Register Calibration K K K
0557 Data Saving K K K
0558 Data Download K K K
1-4
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
06 Processor 0600 Sorter Operating Condition Setup – K K K K

Adjustment/
Maintenance 0620 Processing Temperature Setting K K K K
0621 Replenisher Rate Setting K K K K
0622 Low Volume Processing Setup K K K K
0623 Processor Temperature Calibration K K K K
0624 Processor Input Check K K K K
0625 Processor Operating Condition Setup K K K K
0640 Pump Output Measurement/Setting K K K
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/

0641 K K K
Setting
0642 Processor I/O Check K K K
0643 Processor Operation Data Display K K K
Clearing Selected Processor

0644 K K K
Operation Data
0645 Processor Operation Data Display 2 K K K
0646 Installation K K K
PS Solution Concentration
0647 – K K
Management
0648 Sorter Fine Adjustment Value Setup – K K
09 Self-Diagnostics/ 0920 Trouble-Help K K K K

Trouble Help
0940 Trouble-Help (SE) K K K
0941 Help Update K K K
0942 Image Processing CB Check K K K
0943 Paper Feed Check K K K
NC100AC Magnetic Data Test

0944 K K K
(IX240)
0945 Scanner Section Diagnostics K K K
0946 Laser Diagnostics K K K
0980 NC100AC Sensor Test K K K
10 Register/Delete 1020 Shop Log Register/Delete K K K K
1021 Template Register/Delete K K K K
1022 Holiday File Register/Delete K K K K
1023 Custom Button Registration/Saving K K K K
1-5
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
99 Special 9940 Paint K K K

Operations
9941 Explorer K K K
9942 Command K K K
9943 Screen Keyboard K K K
1-6
2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
2.1 User Maintenance Schedule....................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ............................................. 2-3

2
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection ...................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection ....................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 CD-ROM Drive Inspection............................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Lane Changing Linkage Lubrication ........................................................................... 2-5
2.3.4 Scanner Section Gear and Threaded Shaft Lubrication ............................................ 2-6
2.3.5 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Lubrication................................................................... 2-7
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection ........................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.7 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.8 Sub-scanning Section Roller Cleaning ....................................................................... 2-9
2.3.9 Registration Section Roller Cleaning .......................................................................... 2-9
2.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Inspection........................................................................ 2-10
2.3.11 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection ......................................................... 2-11
2.3.12 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection .................................................................. 2-13
2.3.13 Replenisher Pump/Filters Inspection ........................................................................ 2-14
2.3.14 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication .......................................................................... 2-15
2.3.15 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning .................................................... 2-16
2.3.16 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication.................................................................. 2-16
2.3.17 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication ........................................................................... 2-17
2.3.18 Circulation Pump Inspection...................................................................................... 2-17
2.3.19 Processing Tank Heater Inspection........................................................................... 2-18
2.3.20 Solution Hose/Clamp Inspection ............................................................................... 2-18
2.3.21 Circulation Filter (PS1/PS2/PS3) Replacement (F340) ............................................. 2-20
2.3.22 Processing Rack Roller/Bearing Inspection ............................................................. 2-21
2.3.23 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Lubrication............................................................................ 2-22
2.3.24 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning ..................................................................... 2-23
2.3.25 Sorter Feed Section Cleaning (F340)......................................................................... 2-23
2-1
2.1 User Maintenance Schedule
Implementation Period Every Day

Every Every Every 3 Every
Pre-operational Post-operational Week Month Months Year
Item Check Check
Diffusion Box Clean
Light Source LED Circuit Board Cover Clean
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Clean
Control Strip Process/Check
Magnetic Heads of Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Clean
No.6 Crossover Rack Wash
Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Unit Wash
Dryer Air Filter Clean
Crossover Racks Wash
Upper Section of P1 Processing Rack Wash
Dryer Entrance Guide/Roller Clean
Light Source Cooling Air Filter Clean
Image Processing Section Cooling Air Filters Clean
Power Supply Section Cooling Air Filter Clean
Control Section Cooling Air Filter Clean
Solution Heater Cooling Air Filters Clean
Auto Washing Nozzles Clean
Circulation Filters** Replace
Processing Racks Wash
Exposure Section Cooling Air filter Replace
Printer Section Feed Rollers/Guides Clean
Densitometer White Board Clean
Auto Washing Nozzle Joint Rubbers Replace
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Execute*
Paper Magazine Inside/Rollers Clean (at the time of paper end)
*: Message to indicate execution will appear on the screen one month after initial installation and every three months thereafter.
**: P1, P2 and PS4 only for F340.
2-2
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table
Implementation Period (Every) Every 6 Every Every 2 Every 3 Every 5 Refer to
Item Months Year Years Years Years Subsection:
Main Control Floppy Disk Drive Inspect 2.3.1
Unit CD-ROM Drive Inspect 2.3.2
2
UPS Battery Replace 17.4.2
Separate
Hard Disk Replace
Manual
Carrier Section Lane Changing Linkage Lubricate 2.3.3
Carrier Base Sliding Guide Replace 7.5.10
Scanner Section Gears/Threaded Shaft Lubricate 2.3.4
Printer Section Back Printer Inspect 5.6.21
Main Scanning Position/Laser 5.6.16/
Inspection
Beam Synchronization 5.6.17
Magazine Setting Bevel Gears Lubricate 2.3.5
Cutter Unit Inspect Replace* 2.3.6/9.4.2
Laser Unit Air Filter Replace 2.3.7
Sub-scanning Section Rollers Clean 2.3.8
Registration Section Rollers Clean 2.3.9
Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replace 11.3.2
Front Feed Rubber Belt Replace 11.3.11
Processor Measure
PSR Replenisher Pump Output 5.7.8
Section /Set up
Measure
P1/P2 Auto Washing Output 5.7.9
/Set up
Inspect/
Replenisher Level Sensors 2.3.10
Clean
Inspect/
Processing Solution Level Sensors 2.3.11
Clean
Inspect/
Waste Solution Level Sensor 2.3.12
Clean
Replenisher Pumps Inspect 2.3.13
PS4 Leak Sensor *1 Inspect 5.7.15
Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubricate 2.3.14
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Inspect/
2.3.15
Nozzles Clean
Processing Rack Drive Gears Lubricate 2.3.16
Processor Drive Chain Lubricate 2.3.17
Processing Solution Temperature Inspect/
5.7.5
Sensors Calibrate
Circulation Pumps Inspect 2.3.18
Replenisher Filters Inspect 2.3.13
Processing Tank Heaters Inspect 2.3.19
Solution Hoses and Clamps Inspect 2.3.20
Circulation Filters (PS1/PS2/PS3) *1 Replace 2.3.21
Processing Rack Rollers/Bearings/Gears Inspect 2.3.22
Dryer Rack Drive Gears Lubricate 2.3.23
Inspect/
Dryer Rack Rollers 2.3.24
Clean
Sorter Feed Section *1 Clean 2.3.25
PS Tank Separate Plate Blade Assembly *1 Replace 13.4.3
*: Replace the cutter unit after every million sheets.
*1: F340 only
2-3
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection
2.3.1 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection
1. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down

the system.
2. Insert the formatted floppy disk into the disk drive.
CD1055
3. Wait 10 seconds and press the START switch to START Switch

start up the system.
• The “Non-System disk or disk error. Replace

and strike any key when ready.” message
appears.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, follow the steps

below.
1) Clean the magnetic heads of the floppy disk CD105
drive using a cleaning floppy disk.
2) Repeat Steps 1 to 3.
3) If the message does not appear, replace the
main control unit.
4. Remove the floppy disk.
5. Press the reset button using a thin pointed object

such as the tip of the ballpoint pen.
• The system starts up. Reset Button
CD1212
2-4
2.3.2 CD-ROM Drive Inspection
1. Press the CD-ROM eject button. CD-ROM Eject Button

2
• The CD-ROM drive tray is ejected.
2. Push in the CD-ROM drive tray lightly.
• The CD-ROM drive tray is stored.
NOTE: If the CD-ROM drive does not operate properly,

the CD-ROM drive may be faulty and
replacement of the main control unit is
necessary.
Tray
CD1167
2.3.3 Lane Changing Linkage Lubrication
1. Remove the table top cover (see Subsection 6.2.2).
2. Apply the recommended grease to the sliding

points of the linkage.
Recommended Grease:
FUJI MINILAB GREASE (P/N: 891G02003) or
equivalent
3. Reinstall the removed parts.
RD528
2-5
2.3.4 Scanner Section Gear and Threaded Shaft Lubrication
1. Remove the scanner front cover unit Conjugate Length

(see Subsection 8.2.1). Drive Base
2. Position the conjugate length drive base up.
3. Wipe grease off the conjugate length variable

gears.
4. Apply the recommended grease to the gears.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent
Conjugate Length
Variable Gears
CD1168
5. Wipe grease off the lens drive threaded shaft.

Lens Drive Threaded Shaft
6. Apply the recommended grease to the lens drive
threaded shaft.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent
CD1169
2-6
2.3.5 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Lubrication
1. Remove the screw and then the magazine set

2
lever.
Magazine Set Lever
Screw
CD368
2. Remove the three screws and then the magazine

table front cover.
Screws (3)
Magazine Table
Front Cover
3. Wipe grease off the bevel gears. CD369
4. Apply the recommended grease to the bevel Bevel Gears

gears.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent
CD1171
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection
1. Check the edges of the prints.
2. If they are rough, replace the cutter with a new

one (see Subsection 9.4.2).
2-7
2.3.7 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement
Removal
1. Shut down the system by performing the post-

operational checks and turn OFF the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply.
2. Open the magazine door and remove the front

upper cover.
Magazine Door
Front Upper Cover
CD006
3. Loosen the one screw, remove the other screw Screw (Remove) Screw (Loosen)
and then the filter section cover. Filter Section Cover
CD708
4. Loosen the screw and remove the air filter. Air Filter
Installation
Install the air filter in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, click the [Replace] button in the
Menu 0541 “Filter Replacement History” screen.
Screw (Loosen)
CD709
2-8
2.3.8 Sub-scanning Section Roller Cleaning
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit

2
(see Subsection 11.3.1).
2. Wipe dirt off the sub-scanning unit rollers using a

cloth moistened with water while turning the knob.
Knob Rollers (4)

CD1174-2
2.3.9 Registration Section Roller Cleaning

2. Open the feed section upper door.
Feed Section
Upper Door
CD954
3. Wipe dirt off the registration unit entrance rollers Entrance Rollers Registration Unit
using a cloth moistened with water while turning
the knob in the arrow direction as shown.
Knob
CD1175R
2-9
4. Wipe dirt off the registration unit exit rollers using

a cloth moistened with water while turning the
knob.
5. Close the feed section upper door.
Exit Rollers
Knob
CD1176
2.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Inspection
1. Open the Menu 0624 “Processor Input Check”

screen.
2. Remove the screw and then the P1R /PSR level Screw
inspection hole cover.
P1R/PSR Level Inspection

Hole Cover
RD527
2-10
3. Remove the two screws and then the P2R level Screws (2)
inspection hole cover.
2
4. The sensors are normal if their levels match the
screen display.
5. Reinstall the level inspection hole covers.
P2R Level
Inspection
Hole Cover
RD526
2.3.11 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection
1. Open the Menu 0624 “Processor Input Check”

screen.
2. Remove the circulation filter section cover.
3. Remove the screw and then the PS1 solution level Screw
P1 Solution Level Sensor
sensor.
RD248
2-11
4. Wipe dirt off the P1 solution level sensor using a P1 Solution Level Sensor
cloth moistened with water.
CD1174-1
5. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and move it

up and down. The sensor is normal if its level P1 Solution
matches the 0624 screen display. Level Sensor
6. Reinstall the P1 solution level sensor.
7. Follow Steps 3 through 6 for the following solution Water

level sensors.
F330: P2 to PS4
F340: P2
EZ243
8. F340: Remove the screw and then the PS1 <F340>

solution level sensor. Screw PS1 Solution Level Sensor
PS2/PS4: Temperature Sensor

PS1/PS3: Cover
RD251
2-12
9. F340: Move the sensor float up and down. The <F340>

sensor is normal if its level matches the screen PS1 Solution Level Sensor
display. 2
Float
RD252
10. F340: If the float does not move smoothly, wash it <F340>
in warm water. PS1 Solution Level Sensor
11. F340: Reinstall the PS1 solution level sensor. Float
12. F340: Follow Steps 8 through 11 for the PS2 to

PS4 solution level sensors.
13. Reinstall the circulation filter section cover.
Warm Water
GD1925
2.3.12 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection
1. Open the circuit board bracket

2. Remove the waste solution tank cap.
3. Wipe dirt off the level sensor using a cloth

moistened with water.
Waste Solution Tank Cap

CD330
2-13
4. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in

circuit breaker and start the system up by
pressing the START switch.
5. Open the next page of the menu 0624 “Processor

Input Check” screen.
6. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and move it

up and down. The sensor is normal if its level
matches the screen display.
7. Reinstall the level sensor and removed parts.
Sensor
Water
CD1088
2.3.13 Replenisher Pump/Filters Inspection
1. Remove the replenisher pump section cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the replenisher

pump bracket.
Replenisher Pump Bracket Screws (2)

RD149
2-14
3. Inspect all replenisher pumps for leaks and

bellows for deterioration.
2
4. Inspect the replenisher filters and replace them
with new ones if they are excessively fouled
Replenisher Pumps Replenisher Filters

RD150
2.3.14 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication
1. Shut down the system after performing the post-

Green Knob
2. Remove the dryer section cover

3. Open the dryer unit.
4. Wipe grease off the dryer rack drive chain and

sprockets while turning the green knob.
5. Apply the recommended grease to the drive chain RD092

while turning the green knob.
Recommended Grease: Drive Chain

FUJI MINILAB GREASE (P/N 891G02003) or
equivalent.
6. Close the dryer unit and reinstall the dryer section

cover.
RD156
2-15
2.3.15 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning
1. Open the replenisher box door and remove the

replenisher cartridge.
2. Clean the washing nozzles using a toothbrush. Toothbrush
3. Install the replenisher cartridge and close the

door.
Washing Nozzles
RD545
2.3.16 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication
1. Shut down the system after performing the post- Drive Gears
2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
3. Apply the recommended grease to the drive

gears.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent.
4. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks. RD155
2-16
2.3.17 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication

2
2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks. Drive Chain
3. Wipe off grease from the drive chain and

sprockets.
4. Apply the recommended grease to the drive

chain.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent.
5. Reinstall the crossover racks.

RD154
2.3.18 Circulation Pump Inspection
1. Remove the circulation pump section cover


circuit breaker and start the system up by
pressing the START switch.
3. Open the third page in the Menu 0642 “Processor

I/O Check” screen.
4. Check the pumps for proper operation by clicking

the [ON] and [OFF] buttons for “PU401 to PU406
Circulation Pumps”.
5. Reinstall the circulation pump section cover.
2-17
2.3.19 Processing Tank Heater Inspection
1. Start the system up and open the “Processor

Temperature Check” screen in the pre-operational
check menu.
2. Check that the temperatures increase properly.
3. If the temperature increases slowly or does not

rise, the circulation filters are clogged or the safety
thermostat or heater may malfunction.
2.3.20 Solution Hose/Clamp Inspection
1. Remove:
• Circulation pump section cover

• Replenisher section cover
• Replenisher pump section cover
2. Loosen the two screws and remove the front Screws (2) Front Upper Connector Cover
upper connector cover.
RD145
2-18
3. Open the harness clamp, remove the two screws Front Upper Connector Bracket
Screws (2)
and then the front upper connector bracket.
2
Harness Clamp
RD146
4. Loosen the two screws and remove the front lower Screws (2) Front Lower Connector Cover
connector cover.
RD143
5. Loosen the left-hand screw, remove the right- Front Lower Connector Bracket
hand screw and then the front lower connector
bracket.
6. Check the solution circulation system and

replenishment system for:
1) Sign of solution leaks at each joint.
2) Loose hose clamps.
3) Collapsed, bent or cracked hoses.
7. If necessary, repair or replace the parts.
8. Reinstall the removed parts. Screw (Loosen)
Screw (Remove)
RD144
2-19
2.3.21 Circulation Filter (PS1/PS2/PS3) Replacement (F340)
1. Drain the PS1, PS2 and PS3 processing solutions

2. Remove the No.3 crossover rack, PS1, PS2 and

PS3 processing racks.
3. Remove the filter replacement jig from the inside Circulation Filter Section Cover
of the circulation filter section cover.
Filter Replacement Jig

RD482
4. Remove the PS1 circulation filter using the filter Filter Replacement Jig PS1 Circulation Filter
replacement jig.
5. Follow Steps 2 and 3 to drain remaining solution

in the bottom of the PS1 tank.
RD223
6. Attach a new circulation filter to the replacement “TOP” Mark

jig with its “TOP” mark facing up.
Replacement Jig
New Circulation Filter
RD044
2-20
7. Install the circulation filter to the bottom of the PS1 tank. Replacement Jig
8. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 to replace PS2 and 2

PS3 tank filters.
9. Store the filter replacement jig inside of the

circulation filter section cover.
10. Reinstall the PS1, PS2 and PS3 processing racks

and No.3 crossover rack.
11. Fill the PS1, PS2 and PS3 processing tanks

(see Subsection 14.4.1). New Circulation Filter
RD046
2.3.22 Processing Rack Roller/Bearing Inspection
1. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks and <F330>

wash them with warm water
(30°C to 40°C/86°F to 104°F).
2. Remove the P1 processing rack and wash it with

warm water.
3. Check for:
ø20 Black Soft
ø20 Gray Soft
• smooth rotation by turning the rollers by hand. ø20 Black Hard
ø20 Gray Soft
• paper passage without deflection by turning the ø20 White Soft
knob by hand. ø20 Black Soft
ø20 Gray Hard
• damage of the roller surface. ø15 Black Hard
• deterioration of the roller nip coil spring. ø30 Black Soft
ø30 Black Hard
ø15 Black Hard

CD225
<F340>
ø20 Ivory soft

ø20 Black soft
ø20 Gray soft
ø20 Black hard
ø20 Brown hard
ø20 Gray soft
ø20 Ivory soft
ø20 Brown hard
ø20 White soft
ø20 Black hard
ø30 Black soft
ø20 Ivory soft
RD502
2-21
4. Return the P1 processing rack and install the Splash-prevention Cover

contamination-prevention cover over the P1 tank.
5. Install the splash-prevention cover over the dryer

fan section.
6. Remove the P2 to PS4 processing rack and

perform Step 3.
IMPORTANT:
Take special care to prevent overflow of the P2
solution into the P1 solution.
7. If the soft rollers on the racks are slimy, wipe them

Contamination-prevention Cover
clean with a cloth moistened with warm water.
RD105
8. Replace the parts if necessary.
9. Remove the contamination-prevention cover and

splash prevention cover.
10. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
2.3.23 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Lubrication
1. Open the dryer unit. Dryer Rack

Drive Gears
2. Wipe grease off the dryer rack drive gears.
3. Apply the recommended grease to the dryer rack

drive gears.
Recommended Grease:
equivalent.
4. Close the dryer unit.

RD546
2-22
2.3.24 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning

<F330>
2
Spring (No Mark)
(see Subsection 19.1.1). Spring (Black Mark)
Spring (Red Mark)
2. Wipe dirt off the dryer rack rollers using a cloth
moistened with water.
3. Inspect the dryer rollers for:

ø32 Black soft
ø20 Black hard
• smooth rotation by turning them by hand. ø20 Black soft
ø20 White hard
• paper passage without deflection by turning the ø20 White hard
ø20 White hard
knob by hand. ø20 White hard
ø20 Brown hard
• surface damage. ø20 White soft
ø22 Black hard
• nip coil spring deterioration. ø20 Black hard
ø16 Black hard
CD226
4. Clean or replace the parts if necessary.
5. Reinstall the dryer section cover. <F340>
ø20 Black Hard

ø20 Gray Soft
ø20 Black Soft
ø20 Ivory Soft
ø20 Black Hard
ø20 Black Soft
ø20 White Hard
ø20 White Hard
ø20 White Hard
RD503
2.3.25 Sorter Feed Section Cleaning (F340)
1. Wipe dirt off the guides under the three sorter <F340>
feed belts using a cloth moistened with water. Sorter Feed Belts
RD571
2-23
3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS
3.1 Error Indication Outline .............................................................................. 3-2

3.1.1 Message Number........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Message Icon ................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 X-#### Actions............................................................................................................... 3-2
3
3.2 Messages and Actions................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Refreshing Backup Restoration............................................................. 3-120
3.4 OS Recovery and Backup for Refreshing ............................................. 3-121

3.4.1 OS Recovery .............................................................................................................. 3-121
3.4.2 Backup for Refreshing .............................................................................................. 3-124
3-1
3.1 Error Indication Outline
3.1.1 Message Number

The messages are identified by the following four codes.
Symbol Error
E Trouble (Error requires action of the service representative.)
W Mismatching of condition (Error can be corrected by the operator.)
I Information
X Software trouble
The first two digits indicate the location or operation

of the error which occurred.
No. Error Location
11XX Scanner
12XX CTC circuit board
13XX Scanner image processing
14XX Film carrier
15XX Operation
21XX Scanner to printer interface
22XX Printer operation
23XX Printer control
24XX Paper feed
25XX Laser printer
26XX Processor
3.1.2 Message Icon

Icon Error
Errors with code “E” (Take measures after turning OFF the power supply.)
Errors with code “E” , “W” or “X” (Error can be recovered.)
For code “I” (Informations)
3.1.3 X-#### Actions

X-#### errors (software error)
Take the following actions.
1. Write down the error number.

2. Restart the system.
3. Reinstall the software if the problem persists.
4. Create a report in the specified format.
3-2
3.2 Messages and Actions
No. Message Factor Actions
W-1101 Film or mask not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. A film or mask is not installed. 1. Install the film or mask correctly.
Install film or mask. 2. Film leading end sensor/mask 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
sensor -to- CYS circuit board -to- replace the harness.
plug-in connector -to- CTC circuit
board, poorly connected or broken 3
harness
3. Faulty CYS circuit board 3. Replace the CYS circuit board.
4. Faulty CTC circuit board 4. Replace the CTC circuit board.
E-1102 No optical magnification calibration An operation such as scanning was
data. attempted without first performing the
optical magnification calibration.
Optical magnification calibration not (Causes of the error message)
done. 1. The calibration after the lens was 1. Perform “Optical Magnification
exchanged has not been Calibration (0346).”
Consult your technical performed.
representative.
I-1103 Carrier installation data will be written Confirmation message before writing –
into the carrier EEPROM. data to the EEPROM
Do not remove the carrier.

W-1104 Scanner correction not performed. A scanning operation was attempted Perform the scanner correction in
without first performing scanner “Pre-operational Check.”
Perform the scanner correction in “ 1. adjustment/maintenance.
Pre-operational Check ”.
W-1105 Carrier not installed correctly or no An operation such as scanning was
carrier installed. attempted without the carrier.
(Causes of the error message)
Install carrier correctly. 1. The carrier is not installed. 1. Install the carrier.
2. Plug-in connector -to- CTC circuit 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
board, poorly connected or broken replace the harness.
harness
W-1107 Carrier upper cover opened. An operation such as scanning was
attempted while the carrier cover was
Remove carrier and then close carrier left open.
cover. (Causes of the error message)
1. The carrier upper cover was 1. Remove the carrier and close the
opened after the carrier was upper cover.
installed.
2. Upper cover open/close sensor 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
(D120) -to- CYS circuit board -to- replace the harness.
board, poorly connected or broken
harness
3. Faulty D120 3. Replace the sensor.
W-1108 Removing cartridge failed. Error occurred when ejecting the Remove the IX240 cartridge.
IX240 cartridge.
Remove cartridge referring to
manual.
W-1109 Film inserted into the carrier or it Scanner correction was attempted NC100AC: Remove film.
remains in the carrier, so the scanner with film or mask left installed. M69D: Install the calibration mask.
correction cannot be performed.
Remove the carrier and then take out

the film or cartridge.
3-3

W-1110 Diffusion box not installed. Scanning was attempted without the
diffusion box installed.
Install it. (Causes of the error message)
1. The diffusion box is not set 1. Install the diffusion box correctly.
correctly.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201/ 2. Replace the sensor.
D202)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/
harness between the diffusion box replace the harness.
sensor and CTP circuit board
4. Faulty CTP circuit board 4. Replace the CTP circuit board.
W-1111 No data for focus calibration. An operation such as scanning was Perform “Focus Calibration (0347).”
attempted without first performing the
Focus calibration not performed. focus calibration.
Perform the focus calibration in 1. The necessary data set has not
“ Setup and Maintenance ” – been created.
“ 03. Scanner Adjustment / 2. The necessary data set was
Maintenance ”. deleted by mistake.
W-1112 No focus position adjustment data for An operation such as scanning was Install the correct carrier/mask and
each carrier. attempted without first performing the perform “Focus Position Adjustment
focus position adjustment. (0321).”
Focus position adjustment for each (Causes of the error message)
carrier not performed. 1. The necessary data set has not
been created.
Perform the focus position 2. The necessary data set was
adjustment in “ Setup and deleted by mistake.
Maintenance ” – “ 03. Scanner
Adjustment / Maintenance ”.
I-1113 Write the working information to the Writing confirmation message. To write, click [OK]. To cancel, click
EEPROM of the carrier. [Cancel].

I-1114 Measuring. An operation such as the optical Wait until the operation is completed.
magnification calibration, focus
Please wait. calibration, or LED light amount
adjustment is in progress.
W-1115 Dark correction not performed. Scanning was attempted before Perform the scanner correction in
doing the darkness correction. “Pre-operational Check”.
Perform the scanner correction in
“Pre-operational Check”.
W-1116 Brightness correction not performed. Scanning was attempted before Perform the scanner correction in
doing the brightness correction. “Pre-operational Check”.
Perform the scanner correction in
E-1117 No lens data registered. An operation such as scanning was
attempted without the lens data
Lens registration not performed. registered.
Call your technical representative. 1. The necessary data set was 1. Register “Lens ID No.” and “Lens
deleted by mistake. focal distance” in “Lens Register
(0344).”
E-1118 No optical magnification calibration An operation such as scanning was
data. attempted without first performing the
Optical magnification calibration not (Causes of the error message)
performed. 1. The calibration that was registered 1. Perform “Optical Magnification
after the lens was exchanged has Calibration (0346).”
Call your technical representative. not been performed.
3-4

E-1119 No focus position adjustment data for No focus position adjustment data for Perform “Focus Position Adjustment
each carrier. each carrier. (0321)”.
Focus position adjustment for each

carrier not performed.
3
Perform the focus position
adjustment in “Setup and
Maintenance” - “03. Scanner
Adjustment/Maintenance”.
W-1120 Wrong combination of carrier, mask The film carrier and diffusion box do
and diffusion box. not match.
Install the carrier and diffusion box in 1. 135 diffusion box is installed. 1. Install the 120 diffusion box.
a correct combination. 2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box 2. Connect wires properly.
sensors (D201, D202)
W-1121 Carrier not installed correctly or no An operation such as scanning was
carrier installed. attempted without the carrier
installed.
Install carrier correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. The carrier pressure cover was left 1. Remove the carrier and close the
open after the carrier was pressure cover.
installed.
2. Upper cover open/close sensor 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
harness
W-1122 Film inserted into the carrier. An operation such as scanning was
attempted with film remaining.
Take out the film. (Causes of the error message)
1. The cartridge was left in the 1. Remove the cartridge.
carrier.
2. Cartridge sensor (D115) -to- CYS 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
circuit board -to- plug-in connector replace the harness.
-to- CTC circuit board, poorly
connected or broken harness
W-1123 No film. (Causes of the error message)
1. Scanning was attempted without 1. Set the film.
Try again. the film installed.
2. Film leading end sensor (D101/ 2. Reconnect the harness or repair/
D104) -to- CYS circuit board -to- replace the harness.
harness
3. Faulty D101/D104 3. Replace the sensor.
W-1124 Film not inserted correctly. The leading frame was fixed while no Insert the film properly.
film appeared in the mask opening.
Remove the film.
3-5

E-1126 DC offset cancel failed. The level is not within the specified
range even if the DC level is set to the
Restart the system. If problems lower limit.
persist, consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image 1. Perform “Image Processing CB
processing section circuit boards Check (0942)” and follow the
instruction found in this Menu
0942.
2. Faulty harness between the image 2. Repair or replace the harness.
processing section and the CCD
circuit board
3. Faulty power supply unit 3. Replace the PWR circuit board.
* The light source and CTC circuit

board are not related to the cause
of this problem.
E-1127 DC offset cancel failed. The DC offset could not be adjusted
normally.
Restart the system. If problems (Causes of the error message)
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image 1. Perform “Image Processing CB
representative. processing section circuit boards Check (0942)” and follow the
0942.
2. Blown fuse (FE5, FE7) in the CTC 2. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
3. Blown fuse (FH3, FH32, FH38, or 3. Replace the fuse.
FH39) in the PWR circuit board
W-1128 Reading of data from the carrier EEPROM reading failure
EEPROM failed. (Causes or the error message)
1. Incorrectly installed carrier 1. Reinstall the carrier and try again.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect, repair or replace the
harness between the CTC circuit harness.
board and the CYS circuit board.
E-1129 Writing of data into the carrier EEPROM writing failed.
EEPROM failed. Consult your (Causes or the error message)
technical representative. 1. Incorrectly installed carrier 1. Reinstall the carrier and try again.
W-1130 The auto light amount adjustment The auto light amount adjustment
failed because the output in the could not be completed in the auto
scanner section is too much. focus mode or during brightness
correction.
Check the light source, scanner and (Causes of the error message)
carrier sections, and then film. 1. Faulty CCD, light source, and 1. Perform “Image Processing CB
image processing section circuit Check (0942)” and follow the
boards instruction found in this Menu
0942.
E-1131 DC offset cancel failed. The level is not within the specified
range even if the DC level is set to the
Call your technical representative. upper limit.
1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image 1. Perform “Image Processing CB
processing section circuit boards Check (0942)” and follow the
0942.
3-6

W-1132 Auto-focus failure. Focusing incorrect in auto-focus.
The auto focus function could not
Check if the film is set correctly. achieve proper focus.
1. The carrier is not firmly pressed 1. Install the carrier correctly.
against the carrier base. 3
2. The film is not firmly pressed. 2. Check the state of the carrier
upper mask, or perform “NC100AC
Input/Output Check (0445)” to
check mask pressing operation.
3. Faulty scanner drive section (Lens/ 3. Repair the drive section.
Conjugate length variable motor)
4. There is an obstacle in the optical 4. Remove the obstacle.
path (between the original
negative and the lens).
5. The original negative is not set, or 5. Set the original negative or check
the current process focused the it for other state.
optical system on an unexposed
part of a film.
W-1133 Incorrect carrier ID. Incorrect carrier is going to be used Install the correct carrier.
to perform adjustment/maintenance.
Install correct carrier.
W-1134 Diffusion box not installed. Adjustment/maintenance was Install the diffusion box.
attempted with no diffusion box
Install it. installed.
W-1135 Incorrect diffusion box. (Causes of the error message)
1. Adjustment was attempted with an 1. Install the correct diffusion box.
Install the correct diffusion box. incorrect diffusion box installed.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201/ 2. Replace the sensor.
D202)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/
harness between the diffusion box replace the harness.
sensor and the CTC circuit board
I-1136 Download the machine data to the EEPROM writing confirmation To write, click [OK]. To cancel, click
memory of the carrier. message. [Cancel].
OK?
W-1137 Scanner correction was not done The scanner correction was Install the calibration mask to the
because of lack of mask. attempted without the calibration M69D.
mask.
Install the calibration mask.
W-1138 Scanner correction not performed. Light source shading correction was Perform scanner correction.
not performed in NC100AC or M69D.
Install the carrier again for auto film
carrier.
When using the manual film carrier,

install the calibration mask.
W-1139 Mask not installed correctly. Mask was not correctly installed Install the mask correctly.
during the focus position adjustment.
Install mask correctly.
W-1140 Mask not installed. A mask specially designed for the Install a mask specially designed for
brightness correction is not installed the brightness correction.
Install mask. for the spectral calibration, focus
position adjustment, or brightness
correction.
I-1141 Stabilizing lamp. Adjustment/maintenance was Wait until the lamp stabilizes.
performed while lamp was stabilizing.
Please wait. (Max. 10 min)
I-1142 Dark correction is in progress. Adjustment/maintenance was Wait until dark correction completes.
performed during the darkness
Please wait. correction.
3-7

W-1143 The display data will be cleared. Clear confirmation Operational Click [OK] or [Cancel].
information data
OK?
I-1144 Initializing. The mechanism is being initialized Wait until the initialization is
after maintenance on a carrier or completed.
Please wait. other parts has been performed.
I-1145 Perform the bright correction. The brightness correction for the Install the manual film carrier with the
spectral calibration is going to start. calibration mask and then click [OK].
Install the calibration mask and then
install the manual film carrier.
I-1146 Measurement was completed The spectral calibration is now Click [OK].
correctly. completed.
I-1147 Sensor calibration data will be written Confirmation message on writing Wait until writing is completed.
into carrier EEPROM. data into the EEPROM

I-1148 Correction data will be written into the Confirmation message on writing Wait until writing is completed.
carrier EEPROM. data into the EEPROM

E-1152 Communication error occurred. Timeout occurred between the
(####) scanner PC and SH.
Consult your technical 1. Communication error due to the 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
representative. SCSI cable between the main
control unit and the GHT circuit
board
2. Faulty GMB circuit board 2. Replace the GMB circuit board.
3. The GHT circuit board is faulty or 3. Reconnect or replace the CHT
the board is not installed correctly. circuit board.
4. Faulty SCSI board in the main 4. Replace the SCSI board in the
control unit. main control unit.
W-1153 Auto-focus failure. During the auto focus operation, the
peak was always at the highest
Check if carrier film and mask is position even though the same
installed correctly. operation was tried again.
1. The carrier is raised off the 1. Install the carrier correctly.
surface.
2. The manual film carrier mask is 2. Install the mask correctly.
not installed correctly.
3. The film is not pressed correctly 3. Confirm whether or not the film is
against the surface or film curling installed.
is excessive.
4. Focus position maladjustment 4. Perform “Focus Position
Adjustment (0321).”
5. Home position detection failure of 5. Replace the CCD unit.
the scanner-related mechanism
drive section, or other drive system
failure
W-1154 The manual film carrier not installed. The M69D carrier is not installed. Install the M69D carrier.
Install the manual film carrier.

W-1155 The auto film carrier not installed. The NC1000AC carrier is not Install the NC100AC carrier.
installed.
Install the auto film carrier.
3-8

W-1156 Auto-focus failure. During the auto focus operation, the
peak was always at the lowest
Check if the carrier/mask is installed position even though the same
correctly. operation was tried again.
1. The carrier is raised off the 1. Install the carrier correctly. 3
surface.
2. The manual film carrier mask is 2. Install the mask correctly.
not installed correctly.
3. The film is not pressed correctly 3. Confirm whether or not the film is
against the surface or film curling installed.
is excessive.
4. Focus position maladjustment 4. Perform “Focus Position
5. Home position detection failure of 5. Replace the CCD unit.
the scanner-related mechanism
drive section, or other drive system
failure
W-1157 No FD or wrong FD inserted. A floppy disk insertion error occurred
during the spectral calibration.
Insert the calibration FD into the (Causes of the error message)
drive. 1. The floppy disk used for the 1. Insert the correct floppy disk.
spectral calibration is not inserted.
2. The data on the floppy disk is 2. Use an error-free floppy disk.
corrupted.
3. The FDD in the main control unit is 3. Replace the main control unit.
faulty.
W-1159 Image data judge error occurred. Image data criterion error occurred
during the spectral calibration.
Insert film again. (Causes of the error message)
1. The spectral calibration chart is 1. Try the operation again after
upside down, reversed or out of checking the procedure and
sequence. original used.
2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged 2. Try the operation again after
between the positive and negative checking the original used.
films when writing data into a
floppy disk.
3. Incorrect chart 3. Replace or clean the chart.
4. Incorrect shade 4. Check whether or not the shield
mask and external light satisfy the
required conditions.
W-1160 Calculating of adjustment parameter A calculation error occurred with a
failed. spectral adjustment parameter during
the spectral calibration.
Measurement cancelled. (Causes of the error message)
1. The spectral calibration chart is 1. Try the operation again after
upside down, reversed or out of checking the procedure and
sequence. original used.
2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged 2. Try the operation again after
between the positive and negative checking the original used.
films when writing data into a
floppy disk.
3. Incorrect chart 3. Replace or clean the chart.
4. Incorrect shade 4. Check whether or not the shield
mask and external light satisfy the
required conditions.
I-1161 The edge of the mask opening not The edge of the mask opening not Adjust mask position with the position
detected. detected in menu “Mask Position adjustment buttons.
Adjustment”.
Press the [Position Adjust] button to
adjust the position of the mask
opening.
3-9

I-1162 The edge of the mask opening not The position of the mask opening is Adjust mask position with the position
detected. out of correction range in menu adjustment buttons.
“Mask Position Adjustment”.
Press the [Position Adjust] button to
adjust the position of the mask
opening.
W-1163 An error occurred during the pre- Pre-scan error in spectral calibration.
scan. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software. If the
Measurement cancelled. error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
2. Faulty hardware 2. Perform “Image Processing CB
Check (0942)” and follow the
0942.
W-1164 An error occurred during the pre- An error occurred during the pre-
scan. scanning process used for the
spectral calibration.
error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
0942.
W-1166 An error occurred during the fine- An error occurred during the fine-
scan. scanning process used for the
spectral calibration.
1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system. If the error
occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
0942.
E-1167 CCD AD Timing auto adjustment The auto adjustment level of the AD
failure. timing is not within the specified
range.
Try again or restart the system. If (Cause of the error message)
problems persist, consult your 1. Faulty CCD unit or ADC circuit 1. Proceed to Menu 0942 “Image
technical representative. board Processing Circuit Board Check”
and replace the abnormal CCD
unit or ADC circuit board.
2. Faulty LED light source (not lit or 2. Check the diffusion box. Proceed
dark) to Menu 0340 “I/O Check” to check
the LED and replace the LED,
harness or CTC circuit board.
3. Faulty power supply 3. Replace the fuse on the DC power
supply or power supply unit.
W-1169 Wrong mask. The 135M mask is not installed when
the spectral calibration is performed.
Install the mask again. (Causes of the error message)
1. A mask other than the specified 1. Install the correct mask.
one is installed.
2. Faulty mask sensor 2. Replace the sensor.
3. Mask sensor -to- CYS circuit 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/
board -to- plug-in connector -to- replace the harness.
CTC circuit board, poorly
3-10

W-1173 Downloading of data failed. Downloading was performed while Select the backed-up carrier.
the back-up carrier was not selected
Select the backup-complete carrier. in the film carrier information setup
menu.
I-1174 Downloading of data completed. Downloading completion message. –
3
Remove carrier and then reinstall it.
I-1175 Delete the saved machine data. Machine data delete confirmation To delete, click [OK]. To cancel, click
message [Cancel].
OK?
W-1176 Adjusting of LED light amount failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Foreign matter is caught in the 1. Remove the foreign matter.
Check if the carrier and mask are set carrier.
correctly. 2. LED is not lit due to poorly 2. Reconnect the harness or repair/
connected or broken harness. replace the harness.
3. Faulty LED 3. Replace the LED.
5. Faulty CCD unit 5. Replace the CCD unit.
W-1179 Deleting of stored machine Deleting of stored machine
information failed. information failed.
(Cause of the error message)
1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again (NOTE 1)
2. Faulty HD of the main control unit 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1180 Wrong feeding lane. Wrong feeding lane. Menu for factory adjustment
Switch to 135 lane.

W-1182 Couldn’t perform the scanner (Causes of the error message)
correction for this carrier. 1. The pre-operational check was 1. Install the NC100AC and re-
attempted using the SC135A. execute this operation in the 135
Install the auto film carrier. feed lane.
2. Faulty carrier position sensor 2. Replace the sensor.
(D121, D122)
W-1183 Couldn’t perform the scanner The 135F mask is not installed in the
correction for this mask. auto film carrier NC100AC.
Install the 135F mask in the auto film 1. The 135H mask is installed, or no 1. Install the 135F mask and try the
carrier. mask is installed. operation again.
2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119) 2. Replace the sensor.
W-1184 Couldn’t do the scanner correction (Causes of the error message)
with this mask. 1. The scanner correction was 1. Install the calibration mask.
attempted without using the
Install the calibration mask. calibration mask for the manual
film carrier.
2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119) 2. Replace the sensor.
W-1185 Couldn’t perform the scanner The scanner correction was Switch the feed lane to the 135 feed
correction for this lane. attempted in the auto film lane.
carrier(NC100AC) IX240 feed lane.
Switch to 135 lane.
I-1186 Results are stored. This message shows that the self- –
diagnostic file is stored.
W-1188 Wrong diffusion box. The scanner correction was
attempted using the 120 diffusion
Install the 135 diffusion box. box.
1. The combination of the carrier and 1. Install the correct diffusion box.
the diffusion box is inappropriate.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201, 2. Replace the sensor.
D202)
3-11

E-1189 A communication error occurred (Causes of the error message)
between the input mechanical control 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
CB and image processing CB. communication cable
(CTC-GHT) 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software.
Restart the system. If problems again. (NOTE 1)
persist, consult your technical 3. Faulty CTC circuit board 3. Replace the CTC circuit board.
representative.
I-1190 Reading image. The spectral calibration is in process. Wait until the spectral calibration is
completed.
Please wait.
I-1191 Cancel measurement? The spectral calibration is canceled. Click [OK] or [Cancel].
I-1192 Insert the next film. Message that prompts the operator to Set the next film for the spectral
No.#### set the film used for the spectral calibration.
calibration.
W-1193 Auto light amount adjustment failed The auto light amount adjustment,
due to the lack of light amount. which is used in the auto focus and
brightness correction, failed because
Check the light source, scanner and the LED is not lit, or the light source
carrier sections, and then film. section failed mechanically.
1. An obstacle is on the diffusion box 1. Remove the obstacle.
or in the carrier.
2. The original is too dark (such as 2. Check the film.
an unexposed positive film).
3. The LED is not lit (faulty LED 3. Replace the LED circuit board, the
circuit board, harness, and CTC harness, or the CTC circuit board.
circuit board)
4. Abnormality in the image 4. Perform “Image Processing CB
processing section and the circuit Check (0942)” and follow the
boards related to the CCD instruction found in this Menu
0942.
W-1194 Film mask not installed. Brightness correction was performed Install the film mask correctly.
without film mask.
Remove carrier and check film mask.
I-1197 Setting scanner correction data. Scanner correction table setup is in Wait until the setup is completed.
progress.
Please wait.
W-1199 Auto focus failed. Contrast too low for auto focusing. Re-execute “Focus Position
Adjustment”.
Check if the film is set correctly.
E-1200 Error occurred while setting the An error is detected during the setup
scanner correction table. of the scanner correction table.
(Cause of error message)
Processing cancelled. 1. Poor connection cable and 1. Reconnect the cable or connector
connector between the CCD and correctly.
the main control unit
2. Faulty HD of the main control unit 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1201 Scanner correction data is abnormal. The scanner correction failed in the
mask edge detection.
After the scanner correction is (Cause of the error message)
completed, install carrier correctly 1. The lane of the NC100AC was not 1. Change to the correct lane.
and then perform the scanner changed correctly.
correction in Pre-operational Check. 2. Maladjusted mask position. 2. Execute Menu 0420 “Mask
Position Adjustment”.
NOTE 1: The refreshing backup can be restored (see Section 3.3).
3-12

W-1202 The pixel sensitivity correction not When the brightness correction is Perform the scanner correction in the
done. performed as the scanner pre-operational check or the “Pixel
maintenance, the light source Sensitivity Correction” in “Bright
Perform the correction using the 135 shading cannot be performed Correction (0301).”
lane for auto film carrier. because the pixel sensitivity
correction has not been conducted. 3
When using the manual film carrier,
perform the correction with the
calibration mask.
I-1203 The correction value registered. Registration confirmation message Click [OK].
displayed when the mask opening
position correction is performed.
I-1204 The setting value stored. Confirmation display used when Click [OK].
setting the monitor frame ratio
W-1205 Wrong carrier. A carrier other than the specified one
is installed during maintenance or
Install the correct carrier. adjustment.
1. A carrier type other than the 1. Set the correct carrier.
specified type is used.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
harness between the plug-in replace the harness.
connector and CTC circuit board
W-1206 Chart pattern not detected. An error occurred while executing the
1. The reference chart is not 1. Install the reference chart and
installed. execute the operation.
2. The carrier base is out of place. 2. Perform “Optical Axis Adjustment
(0347)” and then “Optical
Magnification Adjustment (0346).”
W-1219 Wrong character type of lens ID. Inappropriate characters are entered. Enter the lens ID as shown in the
label on the lens cone.
Enter the correct lens ID.
W-1220 Lens ID digit out of range. Seven or more characters were Enter the lens ID as shown in the
entered as the lens ID in “Lens label on the lens cone.
Enter the correct lens ID. Registration (0344)”.
W-1221 Lens focal point distance out of The focal length is outside of the Enter as shown in the label on the
range. specified range. lens cone.
Enter the correct focal point distance.

I-1222 Following adjustment data will be Registration data to be updated when Re-execute “Optical Magnification
deleted. replacing the lens unit Calibration (0346)”, “Focus
Calibration (0347)”, and “Focus
Perform the following menu again. To Position Adjustment (0321).”
start adjustment, set the focusing
chart.
“ “ Optical Magnification Calibration ” -
“ Focus Calibration ” - “ Focus
Position Adjustment ” ”
I-1223 Following adjustment data will be The operator attempted to register Re-execute “Focus Calibration (0347)
deleted. data after executing “Optical ” and “Focus Position Adjustment
Magnification Calibration (0346).” (0321).”
Perform the following menu again.
“ “ Focus Calibration ” - “ Focus
Position Adjustment ” ”
E-1224 Optical magnification calibration error (Cause of error message)
1. Dust or dirt on lens or focusing 1. Clean the lens and focusing chart
chart jig jig.
2. Faulty lens 2. Replace the lens unit.
3-13

I-1226 Focus calibration is in progress. The focus calibration is being Wait until completion.
performed as the scanner
Please wait. maintenance.
I-1227 Following adjustment data will be The operator attempted to register Re-execute “Focus Position
deleted. data after re-executing “Focus Adjustment (0321).”
Calibration (0347).”
Perform the following menu again.
“Focus Position Adjustment ”
I-1228 DC offset cancel completed normally. Normal completion message for the Click [OK].
DC offset adjustment.
I-1229 Dark correction is in progress. Dark correction is executing. Wait until completion.
Please wait.
W-1230 The focus position adjustment for this NC100AC-135 carrier adjustment Perform “Focus Position Adjustment
carrier not done. check. (0321)”.

Maintenance” - “03 Scanner
W-1231 The focus position adjustment for this NC100AC-240 carrier adjustment Perform “Focus Position Adjustment
carrier not done. check. (0321)”.

Maintenance” - “03 Scanner
W-1232 The focus position adjustment for this Message that confirms that the
carrier not done. operator has not adjusted the M69D
mask.
Perform the focus position (Causes of the error message)
adjustment in “ Setup and 1. The necessary data has not been 1. Install the correct carrier and mask
Maintenance ” – “ 03. Scanner created. and perform “Focus Position
Adjustment / Maintenance ”. Adjustment (0321).”
I-1234 Insert film. The operator is requested to insert a Insert film.
film to be used for the focus position
adjustment as the scanner
maintenance.
I-1235 Focus position adjustment is in The focus position adjustment is Wait until the adjustment is
progress. being performed as the scanner completed.
maintenance.
Please wait.
I-1236 Checking the barcode opening Reading the barcode opening section Message for factory test
section.
I-1237 Reading the barcode Reading the barcode Message for factory test
3-14

E-1238 Warming-up of the light source not The warm-up for the LED is not When the temperature cannot be
completed. completed 10 minutes after the measured:
system startup.
persist, consult your technical Check the warm-up for the LED as
representative. per “I/O Check (0340).” 3
When the temperature cannot be When the temperature cannot be
measured: measured:
1) Poorly connected or broken 1) Reconnect the connecter, or
harness between the LTC repair/replace the harness.
circuit board and the LED
2) Faulty LTC circuit board 2) Replace the LTC circuit board.
3) Faulty LED 3) Replace the LED.
When the Peltier element is faulty: When the Peltier element is faulty:
1) Abnormality with the Peltier 1) Replace the LED.
element
When the power is faulty: When the power is faulty:

1) Blown fuse in the PWR circuit 1) Replace the fuse.
board
2) Poorly connected or broken 2) Reconnect the connecter, or
harness between the PWR repair/replace the harness.
circuit board and the LTC circuit
board
3) Faulty LTC circuit board 3) Replace the LTC circuit board.
W-1239 Downloading of data failed. Writing of data into the carrier
EEPROM failed in the film carrier
information setup menu.
(Causes or the error message)
1. Incorrectly installed carrier 1. Reinstall the carrier and try again.
W-1242 Auto-exposure adjustment failure. The auto light amount adjustment
failed because the light amount was
Check the light source, scanner and unstable during the auto focus,
carrier sections, and then film. brightness correction, and so on.
1. Faulty light source section (such 1. Remove the obstacle or replace
as the light source not lit or there is the LED, harness, or CTC circuit
an obstacle) board.
2. External light is detected. 2. Install the shade mask.
3. Abnormality in the CCD circuit 3. Perform “Image Processing CB
board, ADC circuit board, or image Check (0942).”
processing section
E-1244 CCD overflow-voltage auto The CCD overflow-voltage auto
adjustment failure. adjustment level is not within the
target range.
Try again or restart the system. If (Causes of the error message)
problems persist, consult your 1. The AD timing adjustment has not 1. Perform the AD timing adjustment
technical representative. been performed.
2. Faulty CCD circuit board and the 2. Perform “Image Processing CB
related places Check (0942).”
3. Faulty light source section (not lit 3. Replace the LED unit, harness,
or dark) CTC circuit board, or diffusion box.
3-15

W-1245 Too many gray pixels. (Causes of the error message)
1. There is dust or an obstacle in the 1. Clean the dust or remove the
Check and clean the optical system. diffusion box or scanner optical obstacle.
system.
2. Vignetting is produced during 2. Eliminate the cause of the
readout and light is not sensed vignetting.
evenly over the whole surface of
CCD.
3. Faulty CCD 3. Replace the CCD unit.
W-1246 Too large gray pixel. (Causes of the error message)
1. There is dust, dirt or an obstacle in 1. Clean the dust or remove the
Check and clean the optical system. the diffusion box or scanner optical obstacle.
system.
2. There is vignetting. 2. Eliminate the cause of the
vignetting.
3. Faulty CCD 3. Replace the CCD unit.
I-1248 The feeding operations were The feeding operations of the –
completed correctly. NC100AC completion message
I-1249 The nest section was completed The nest section of the NC100AC –
correctly. completion message
E-1253 Image processing CB failure. Writing data to or reading data from Perform “Image Processing CB
(GIA) the GIA circuit board has detected a Check (0942)” and then follow the
failure. instructions in this self-diagnostic
Consult your technical (Causes of the error message) test.
representative. 1. Faulty GIA circuit board
2. Faulty GHT circuit board (if an
error related to another image
processing circuit board is
included)
3. Faulty GMB circuit board (if an
error related to another image
processing circuit board is
included)
W-1257 Writing data to floppy disk failed. FD writing error
1. Write protected floppy disk 1. Position the tab on the floppy disk
to “Write Enable”.
2. Faulty floppy disk 2. Replace the floppy disk.
3. Faulty floppy disk drive 3. Replace the main control unit.
W-1258 Couldn’t perform because the carrier An adjustment such as the overflow Remove the carrier and re-execute
is installed. voltage auto adjustment was the operation.
attempted while the carrier was
Remove the carrier and perform it installed.
again.
W-1259 Wrong diffusion box. (Causes of the error message)
1. The operator attempted to perform 1. Install the 120 diffusion box.
Install the 120 diffusion box. maintenance using the 135
diffusion box.
2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box 2. Repair or replace the sensor.
sensor (D201, D202)
I-1262 Writing of data into the floppy disk FD writing completion message –
completed.
W-1263 Wrong value. A value outside of the specified range Correct the value.
was entered during scanner or carrier
Set the correct value again. maintenance.
I-1265 Writing of data into the carrier Writing data into the EEPROM is now –
EEPROM completed. completed.
Remove carrier and then reinstall it.
3-16

W-1266 Wrong carrier type. NC100AC-specific maintenance or
adjustment was attempted using a
Install the auto film carrier. carrier other than NC100AC.
1. NC100AC is not set. 1. Install NC100AC.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ 3
connector and CTC circuit board.
W-1267 Wrong feeding lane. An operation such as magnetic
information readout was attempted
Switch to IX240 lane. while NC100AC is not at the IX240
feed lane.
1. NC100AC is not at the IX240 feed 1. Set the carrier in the IX240 feed
lane. lane.
harness between the IX240 carrier replace the harness.
position sensor (D121) and CTP
circuit board
W-1268 Carrier or feeding lane changed. The manual film carrier was
exchanged to another type of carrier
Press the [OK] button to exit, and try during spectral calibration.
again. (Causes of the error message)
1. The manual film carrier was 1. Install the manual film carrier.
exchanged with another type of
carrier.
2. The feed lane is changed. 2. Install the carrier correctly.
3. Poorly connected plug-in 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/
connector or broken harness replace the harness.
E-1269 Detecting of leading frame failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Unexposed film was used. 1. Check the film for exposure.
harness between the unexposed replace the harness.
frame sensor (D108, D109) and
CTP circuit board.
3. Faulty sensor (D108, D109) 3. Replace the sensor.
I-1270 Light source temperature not stable The scanner correction was
yet. Do the scanner correction after attempted while the LED temperature
the temperature becomes stable. control was not completed.
Press the [END] button to exit the 1. The optical source stays without 1. Try it again after a while.
scanner correction. the temperature control for a
Press the [Run] button to start the longer time than usual because
scanner correction ignoring the the room temperature is low.
stabilization of the light source 2. Faulty LTC circuit board 2. Replace the LTC circuit board.
temperature.
E-1271 Temperature of light source in Abnormal LED temperature: High
warming-up too high Restart the (45–60°C)
system. If problems persist, consult (Causes of the error message)
your technical representative. 1. Faulty light source cooling fan 1. Replace the fan.
(F201)
2. Faulty light source temperature 2. Replace the light source assembly.
sensor (D203)
3. Faulty Peltier element (LH201) 3. Replace the Peltier element.
4. Faulty LTC circuit board 4. Replace the LTC circuit board.
3-17

E-1272 Temperature of light source in Abnormal LED temperature: Low (0–
warming-up too low 35°C)
Restart the system. (Causes of the error message)
If problems persist, consult your sensor (D203)
technical representative. 2. Faulty Peltier element (LH201) 2. Replace the Peltier element.
E-1273 Temperature of light source out of the Abnormal LED temperature: nearly
range (nearly High-temp) (41–45°C)
1. Faulty light source cooling fan 1. Replace the fan.
If problems persist, consult your (F201)
technical representative. 2. Faulty light source temperature 2. Replace the light source assembly.
sensor (D203)
3. Faulty Peltier element (LH201) 3. Replace the Peltier element.
E-1274 Temperature of light source out of the Abnormal LED temperature: nearly
range (nearly Low-temp) (35–39°C)
Restart the system. 1. Room temperature too low 1. Increase room temperature.
If problems persist, consult your sensor (D203)
technical representative. 3. Faulty Peltier element (LH201) 3. Replace the Peltier element.
I-1275 Correcting the scanner. The scanner correction is in progress. Wait until the scanner correction is
completed.
Please wait.
W-1276 Scanner correction data setting not The light source shading correction
performed. table is not set.
Install the carrier again or switch lane 1. While the auto film carrier was 1. Switch the film feed lane or
again. used, the film was inserted after perform the scanner correction in
suspending the light source the pre-operational check.
shading correction on the print
screen.
W-1277 LED light amount adjustment not The table used to adjust the LED light
done. amount is unavailable.
Perform the LED light amount 1.The LED light amount is not 1. Perform the adjustments in the
adjustment in “ Setup and adjusted. order of “LED Light Amount
Maintenance ” – “ 03. Scanner Adjustment (0351)” and “Spectral
Adjustment / Maintenance ”. Calibration (0348).”
carrier.
4. Malfunction of the CCD shutter 4. Replace the CCD unit.
W-1278 Mask removed. The mask is out of place.
Processing cancelled. 1. The mask was removed while the 1. Install the mask and try it again.
scanner was being corrected.
2. Mask sensor -to- CYS circuit 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
board -to- plug-in connector -to- replace the harness.
CTC circuit board, poorly
3. Faulty mask sensor (D118/D119) 3. Replace the sensor.
W-1279 Diffusion box removed. The diffusion box was out of place.
Processing cancelled. 1. The diffusion box was removed. 1. Install the diffusion box.
D202)
3. Faulty diffusion box 3. Repair or replace the diffusion box.
3-18

W-1280 Film inserted. The carrier needs to be removed Remove the film, release the lock
because film was installed during a lever, and then lock it again to re-
Processing cancelled. scanner correction. execute the scanner correction.
Remove the carrier and then take out

the film or cartridge. 3
I-1281 Select the mask type to be corrected. Message about duplicated selection Select 135-mount or 240-mount.
for mask (for 135/IX240 mount)
I-1282 Select the mask type to be corrected. Message about duplicated selection Select 6×9 or full-panorama.
for mask (for 6×9/FULLPAN)
W-1283 Scanner correction not performed. The pixel sensitivity correction table
does not exist.
Perform the correction using the 135 (Causes of the error message)
lane for auto film carrier. 1. The operator attempted to perform 1. Perform the pre-operational check,
scanning without first performing or “Bright Correction (0301).”
When using the manual film carrier, the scanner correction.
perform the correction with the
calibration mask.
W-1284 DC offset adjustment not done. This message appears when trying Perform the scanner correction.
scanning while offset adjustment is
Perform the scanner correction in not done.
W-1285 Deleting of stored machine Data deleting was performed while Select back-up carrier and delete
information failed. the back-up carrier was not selected data again.
in the film carrier information setup
Select the backup-complete carrier. menu.
E-1287 CTC CB not defined. CTC circuit board not defined.
(Cause of error message)
1. CTC circuit board is not CTC22 or 1. Check the CTC circuit board and
CTC24. install correct one.
W-1289 No film in the mask opening, or the (Causes of the error message)
film edge was detected in the mask 1. The leading frame was set while 1. Take the film out and try the
opening. there was no film at the mask operation again.
opening section.
Insert it again. 2. Faulty film sensor 2. Replace the sensor.
W-1290 Carrier not installed correctly or no Density linearity inspection was Install the M69D carrier and mount
carrier installed. performed with no manual film carrier mask correctly.
installed.
Install the Mount mask and then
W-1291 Mask not installed correctly or no Density linearity inspection was Install the M69D carrier and 135-
carrier installed. performed with no 135-mount mask mount mask correctly.
installed.
Install the Mount mask and then
E-1292 Communication error between the CCD or GIA circuit board failure. Perform “Image Processing CB
scanner section CB and the image Check (0942)”.
processing CB (CCD-GIA)
Consult your technical

representative.
E-1295 Image processing CB not detected. (Causes of the error message)
(GIA) 1. The GIA circuit board is not 1. Correctly install the GIA circuit
installed correctly. board.
Consult your technical 2. The GHT circuit board is not 2. Correctly install the GHT circuit
representative. installed correctly. board.
3-19

W-1296 The film carrier is inoperative. The film carrier is inoperative.
Check if the carrier and mask are set 1. Blown fuse FE5 or FE7 in the CTC 1. Correct the cause and replace the
correctly. circuit board fuse.
2. Blown fuse FH2, FH32 or FH39 in 2. Correct the cause and replace the
the PWR circuit board fuse.
4. Faulty PWR circuit board 4. Replace the PWR circuit board.
W-1297 Light amount of light source reduced. More than 50% on “R” and more than
25% on “G”, “B” and “IR” of light
If the problems persist, consult your amount reductions was detected
technical representative. during the LED light amount
adjustment.
1. Fouled diffusion box, lens, LED or 1. Clean the diffusion box, lens, LED
optical path in CCD or CCD.
E-1301 Image processing section failure. Errors in the GPA DSP processing
Image processing not completed. (Causes of the error message)
(GPA) 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
Restart the system. If problems again.
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty GPA circuit board 2. Replace the GPA circuit board.
representative. 3. Faulty GMB circuit board 3. Replace the GMB circuit board.
4. Faulty GHT circuit board 4. Replace the GHT circuit board.
E-1302 Image processing not completed Timeout in the GPA-DSP processing
within the time. (Causes of the error message)
(GPA) 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
Restart the system. If problems again.
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty GPA circuit board 2. Replace the GPA circuit board.
representative. 3. Faulty GMB circuit board 3. Replace the GMB circuit board.
E-1303 Communication error occurred in Abnormal end in the GPA-DSP
image processing. processing
(GPA) (Causes of the error message)
Restart the system. If problems Reinstall it if the problem occurs
persist, consult your technical again.
representative. 2. Faulty GPA circuit board 2. Replace the GPA circuit board.
W-1406 #### not installed or paper end The magazine is not installed.
processing in progress. (Causes of the error message)
1. The magazine is not set. 1. Set the magazine.
Install the magazine, and then start 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 2. Replace the sensor.
printing. 3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/
harness between the magazine ID replace the harness.
sensor and the CTP circuit board
W-1407 The incorrect magazine installed. The widths of the print size and the
magazine paper do not match.
Press [OK] to change magazine, or (Causes of the error message)
change print size. 1. A magazine of which size does not 1. Set an appropriate magazine.
match the print size is installed.
2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
to D310)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connector, or
harness between the magazine ID repair/replace the harness.
3-20

W-1408 Back print cannot be performed with Back printing is specified with
specified paper. medium weight paper.
Press [Continue] to perform printing 1. Incorrect magazine or incorrect 1. Set an appropriate magazine, or
without back print. print mode change the print size.
2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor. 3
to D310)
3. Poorly connected or broken harness 3. Reconnect the connector, or
between the magazine ID sensor repair/replace the harness.
and the CTP circuit board
W-1410 An error occurred during the auto An error occurred during the auto
correction. setup for a roll of film.
Do the pre-scan again. 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
again. (NOTE 1)
2. Faulty main control unit 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1411 An error occurred during the auto An error occurred during the auto
correction. setup for a frame.
Reinstall it if the same problem
occurs again. (NOTE 1)
W-1417 An error occurred during creating of An error occurred during the auto
image. setup.
W-1418 #### not installed or paper end The index format consistency check
processing in progress. detected absence of the magazine.
Install the magazine, and then start 1. The magazine is not installed. 1. Set an appropriate magazine.
printing. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
to D310)
W-1419 Selected paper width and index print The paper size does not match in the
size mismatched. index format consistency check.
Press the [OK] button and replace 1. The magazine currently installed 1. Install the correct magazine.
magazine, or change the index does not match the print size.
format. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
If you press [Output], an incorrect to D310)
index print will be outputted. 3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connecter, or
I-1420 Printer processor is busy, so post- (Causes of the error message)
operational check not performed. 1. The output section was busy 1. Perform the post-operational
printing when the post-operational check after the print process has
Upon completion of printing, perform check started. been completed.
“3. Post-operational check”. 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software.
again. (NOTE 1)
3-21

I-1421 Printer processor is busy. (Causes of the error message)
1. An incorrect operating message 1. Perform the post-operational
Please wait a moment, and then (printing is in process, jammed check when the printer finishes
perform “Post-operational check”. paper is being run out, warm-up is printing.
in process)
W-1422 A communication error occurred A message saying that the output
between the main control section and section did not respond is received
printer processor. when the post-operational check
started.
1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 1. Connect the cable correctly or
cable between the main control replace it.
unit and the GHT circuit board
again. (NOTE 1)
E-1425 Initializing of printer processor failed.
The output device initialization failed
Consult your technical when the system started (interface or
representative. communication error)
1. Communication error between the 1. Connect the SCSI cable correctly
Press [End] to shut down the system. main control unit and the GHT or replace it.
Press the [Stand-alone] button to circuit board
start up the scanner only at the next 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software. If the
start-up. error occurs again, reinstall the
system software. (NOTE 1)
3. Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, 3. Replace the fuse.
W-1427 A communication error occurred A magazine status acquisition error
between the main control section and occurred during the system startup.
printer processor. (Causes of the error message)
Check the connection, and then Reinstall it if the same problem
press the [Retry] button. occurs again. (NOTE 1)
2. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly 2. Reconnect or replace the cable.
contacting connector between the
main control unit and the GHT
circuit board
FH27, FH29, or FH30) in the PWR
circuit board
3-22

W-1428 A communication error occurred Failed to acquire the magazine status
between the main control section and when the system was started.
Check the connection, and then Reinstall it if the problem occurs
press the [Retry] button. again. (NOTE 1) 3
2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 2. Reconnect or replace the cable.
cable between the main control
unit and the GHT circuit board
3. Poorly connected or broken serial 3. Reconnect or replace the cable.
cable between the GHT circuit
board and the GTP circuit board
FH27, FH29, or FH30) in the PWR
circuit board
E-1432 Communication error occurred A SCSI communication error
between main controller and image occurred when image processing
processor. conditions for a frame were
(Sending parameter failed) transferred to the GMB circuit board.
Restart the system. If problems 1. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly
persist, consult your technical contacting connector between the 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
representative. main control unit and the GHT
circuit board
E-1433 Communication error occurred An error occurred when the JOB list
between main controller and image (Do FineIp_xxx) started.
processor. (Causes of the error message)
(Image processing control failure) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
cable
Restart the system. If problems 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software.
persist, consult your technical Reinstall it if the problem occurs
representative. again. (NOTE 1)
3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT 3. Check the GHT circuit board for
circuit board good contact or replace it.
4. Poorly connected or faulty GPA 4. Check the GPA circuit board for
5. Poorly connected or faulty GMB 5. Check the GMB circuit board for
E-1434 A communication error occurred The JOB list failed.
between the main control section and (Causes of the error message)
image processing section. 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
(Image processing CB failure) cable
Restart the system. If problems Reinstall it if the problem occurs
persist, consult your technical again. (NOTE 1)
representative. 3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT 3. Check the GHT circuit board for
6. Faulty main control unit. 6. Replace the main control unit.
3-23

W-1436 Software error. An index frame image could not be
edited correctly.
occurs again.
W-1438 Software error. The HW parameters could not be
acquired correctly from SIP.
W-1439 Software error. SIP index print image could not be
processed correctly.
W-1440 Software error. SIP index print image could not be
obtained correctly.
W-1442 Software error. An error (DoFinelp_xxx) occurred
when a JOB list started.
E-1443 Communication error occurred A SCSI error occurred when
between main controller and image transferring the image process
processor. condition and image process start
(Parameter setting error) commands into the GMB circuit
board during file print such as index
Restart the system. If problems or DSC print.
persist, consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
cable
again. (NOTE 1)
3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT 3. Check the GHT circuit board for
3-24

W-1445 Pre-scan not done correctly. An error occurred in GMB circuit
board during pre-scanning.
Do the pre-scan again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty power supply to GMB circuit 1. Inspect or repair the power supply
board system for the GMB circuit board..
2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 2. Reconnect or replace the SCSI 3
cable cable.
W-1446 Reading of parameter from the A scan data parameter error from SIP
image-processing module failed. occurred during the consistency
check.
W-1447 FID cannot be read. An error occurred while reading FID.
The installed film may be 1. Dusty film transfer path 1. Clean the film feed path.
undeveloped. 2. The mask position is out of 2. Perform the mask position
adjustment. correction as per “Mask Position
Click the [Cancel] button to rewind Adjustment (0420).”
the film, and check if the film is 3. The optical axis is out of 3. Perform the optical axis
already developed. adjustment. adjustment as per “Optical Axis
If developed, enter CID of the film
and then click the [OK] button.
W-1448 Back printer unit not installed. The back printer is not set up
correctly.
Install back printer properly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrect back printer setup 1. Correctly set up the back printer.
position.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector. Repair
harness between the back printing or replace the harness.
set sensor and the CTP circuit
board.
3. Faulty back printing set sensor 3. Replace the sensor.
(D320)
W-1449 No valid frame detected during frame The number of detected frames was
detection. zero.
Do the pre-scan again. 1. The optical path is obstructed 1. Perform the scanner correction at
during the brightness correction the pre-operational check.
while the pre-operational check is
being conducted.
3. Faulty CCD unit 3. Replace CCD unit.
W-1450 Error occurred while reading Magnetic information read error
magnetic information. (Causes of the error message)
1. Magnetic information on the film is 1. Check the film for this problem.
Clean the magnetic head and then try corrupted.
pre-scan again. 2. Dirty magnetic head 2. Clean the magnetic head.
3. Faulty magnetic head 3. Replace the magnetic head.
I-1451 Film reversed. The 135 film was reversely inserted. Insert the film correctly.
Press the [Scan Cancel] key to eject

the film, and insert it again.
3-25

W-1453 Film bar code cannot be read. Illegible 135 barcode
Process continued. 1. The mask position is out of 1. Perform the mask position
adjustment. correction as per “Mask Position
Correction (0420).”
2. Dusty 135 film feed path 2. Clean the 135 film feed path.
3. A film with notch was inserted. 3. Continue the process.
4. Blown fuse (FH3) in the PWR 4. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
W-1455 Magnetic data registered on film Magnetic information data error
failure. (Causes of the error message)
1. Magnetic information on the film is 1. Check the film for this problem.
Continue the process ignoring the corrupted.
magnetic information. 2. Dirty magnetic head 2. Clean the magnetic head.
3. Faulty magnetic head 3. Replace the magnetic head.
W-1461 Reading of image file failed. File print image cannot be obtained 1. Check the image file and the file
from the DI Controller. format.
Image import printing cancelled. 2. Restart the DI Controller.
W-1468 Mask type not recognized correctly. The carrier mask type sent from the Set the mask correctly.
scanner system is incorrect.
Install the mask again.
W-1471 Image file cannot be generated. An image file used for digital image
export cannot be created. (Disk
Image export printing cancelled. FULL, etc.)
1. The hard disk in the DI Controller 1. Delete the unnecessary files and
is full. re-execute it again.
2. Communication errors with the DI 2. Perform the pre-operational check.
Controller.
W-1473 Template data is not correct. Composite formats to be sent to the
extended SIP cannot be set.
Delete this template, and register it (Causes of the error message)
again. 1. The hard disk in the Frontier is full. 1. Delete all templates and re-
register them.
In case of the template edited by 2. Faulty hard disk in the Frontier. 2. Replace the main control unit.
editing tool, edit it correctly.
W-1479 Template image size does not match Template and print sizes specified in Change the print size or template so
print size. frame/character print do not match. that both sizes match.
Confirm print size and template size.

W-1480 Cannot be printed with this cropping. The specified cropping area is out of Set the cropping area so that it is
the range. within the range.
Re-crop within the image area.
E-1481 Hard disk failure occurred during the A hard disk error occurred when data
data copy. was copied during the post-
operational check.
Data copy cancelled. (Causes of the error message)
Consult your technical Reinstall it if the problem occurs
representative. again. (NOTE 1)
E-1482 Hard disk failure occurred. A hard disk error was detected when
file was imported from or exported to
Consult your technical the imaging controller.
representative. (Causes of the error message)
again. (NOTE 1)
3-26

E-1483 Index image data cannot be read. An image data file used for the index
edition cannot be read.
Consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
again. (NOTE 1) 3
W-1484 Initializing of printer processor failed. The output device initialization failed
during the system startup.
Press the [Stand-alone] button, and (Causes of the error message)
only the film scanner will be started 1. Communication error between the 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
up. main control unit and the GHT
circuit board
3. Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, or 3. Replace the fuse.
W-1485 Couldn’t generate image file due to Image file output failed because of
insufficient disk space. (Use digital the insufficient disk space.
imaging service without Imaging (Causes of the error message)
controller, press the [Cancel] button 1. The hard disk in the DI Controller 1. Re-execute it after a while or
and then select “CD-R Writing”.) has insufficient space. delete the unnecessary files from
the DI Controller.
Please wait a moment and then press 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software.
the [Retry] button. If problems persist, 3. Faulty DI Controller software 3. Restart the DI Controller. Reinstall
consult your technical representative. the software if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
4. Faulty hard disk in the DI 4. Replace the hard disk in the DI
Controller Controller.
W-1486 Writing image file failed. An image file failed to be output
because the network is disconnected.
Check the network connections and (Causes of the error message)
press the [Retry] button. If problems 1. Poorly connected communication 1. Reconnect the cable.
persist, consult your technical cables
representative. 2. Communication network failure 2. Repair or replace the
communication network.
W-1487 Selected print size and paper width (Causes of the error message)
mismatched. 1. The widths of the print size and the 1. Set the widths of the print size and
paper in the magazine do not the paper in the magazine
Press [OK] to change magazine, or match. correctly.
change print size. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
Press [Output] to output forcibly. to D310)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connector or repair
harness between the magazine ID or replace the harness.
W-1488 Template and paper widths (Causes of the error message)
mismatched. 1. The widths of the template and the 1. Set the widths of the template and
paper in the magazine do not the paper in the magazine
Press [OK] and replace magazine. match. correctly.
Press [Output] to output forcibly. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
to D310)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connector or repair
harness between the magazine ID or replace the harness.
3-27

W-1492 Carrier not installed. An operation such as scanning was
attempted without a carrier installed.
Install carrier and press [OK]. (Causes of the error message)
1. A carrier is not installed. 1. Install a carrier.
connector and the CTC circuit
board
3. Faulty carrier 3. Replace the carrier
circuit board
W-1494 An error occurred in calling the An error occurred when the exposure
exposure condition retrieve. conditions were retrieved.
Return to the state just after the pre- 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
scan. Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
W-1495 Select the correct magazine paper The magazine paper type (surface
type. type or emulsion type) does not
match.
Press [Output] to output forcibly. (Causes of the error message)
1. The magazine does not match the 1. Set the correct magazine.
print size.
2. Faulty magazine ID sensor (D306 2. Replace the sensor.
to D310)
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connecter, or
sensor and the CTP board
I-1501 Selected function cannot be used. A function currently not available was –
selected.
I-1502 Insert the floppy disk into the FD A message that requests the operator Insert a floppy disk and then click
drive. to exchange the floppy disk during [OK].
data backup
W-1503 The floppy disk not inserted, so #### A floppy disk is not inserted during
not performed. data backup to floppy disk.
Insert the floppy disk into the FD 1. A floppy disk is not inserted. 1. Insert a floppy disk.
drive. 2. Faulty floppy disk drive 2. Replace the main control unit.
I-1504 Insert the next floppy disk into the FD Message that prompts the operator to Insert the next floppy disk and then
drive. insert the next floppy disk when click [OK].
backing up data to more than one
floppy disk.
W-1505 Insert the correct floppy disk into the The inserted floppy disk was
FD drive. inappropriate.
1. Faulty floppy disk 1. Insert an error-free floppy disk.
2. The inserted floppy disk is set to 2. Set the floppy to the write-enable
the read-only mode. mode.
E-1506 Reading of control information file The file necessary to display data on
failed. the screen could not be read.
Couldn’t display the selected screen. 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software. If the
To use this function, consult your system software. (NOTE 1)
technical representative. 2. Faulty main control unit 2. Replace the main control unit.
3-28

E-1507 Data backup completed abnormally. Failed to back up data.
1. The FD is faulty. 1. Use a new FD.
2. The FD is set to the read-only 2. Set the FD to the write-enable
mode. mode.
3. There is an insufficient disk space 3. Delete the unnecessary files. 3
in the hard disk in the main control
unit.
W-1510 Date value exceeds the limit. The date entered exceeds the limit
(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2037/12/31 value.
23:59:59) (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrectly entered date 1. Enter the current date correctly.
Set the correct date. 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software. If the
W-1511 Next timer-ON time exceeds the limit. The next system startup time
(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2037/12/31 exceeds the limit value. Check the
23:59:59) present time.
Confirm the present time. 1. Incorrect present time 1. Enter the present date correctly.
W-1512 The FD free space insufficient. The FD currently being used has no
disk space available.
Insert the correct floppy disk into the (Causes of the error message)
FD drive. 1. The floppy disk is full. 1. Insert an empty FD.
W-1513 An unsettled order exists. This message appears when you try Press the [Sort] key.
to select a menu that cannot be
Settle the order. executed until sorting of the print is
complete.
W-1521 PU800B is not turned ON or is Communication error occurred when
disconnected. downloading data from the PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B, 1. The power for PU800B is turned 1. Turn the PU800B power on.
press the [Retry] button. off.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the cable correctly or
harness of the PU800B replace the cable.
communication cable
disconnected. uploading data to the PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B, 1. The power for PU800B is turned 1. Turn the PU800B power on.
press the [Retry] button. off.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the cable correctly or
communication cable
disconnected. sending the bill of charges for the
PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B, (Causes of the error message)
press [Retry] to retry. 1. The power for PU800B is turned 1. Turn the PU800B power on.
To stop printing of the price table, off.
press the [Stop] button. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the cable correctly or
communication cable
3-29

W-1524 Couldn’t read the backup data for A file read error occurred when
PU800B. downloading data from the PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B. 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software. If the
W-1525 Couldn’t write to the backup data for A file write error occurred when
PU800B. uploading data to the PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B. 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software. If the
I-1526 Production information log file not A read error occurred while reading –
found. data from the production information
log file.
A new file will be created.
W-1527 Production information cannot be An error occurred while writing data
written into file. on the production information log file.
To use this function, consult your 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software. If the
technical representative. error occurs again, reinstall the
E-1530 FDi device registration failed. Error in registering FDiA logical
Couldn’t provide the service. output devices (cannot be recovered)
Consult your technical 1. The Imaging Controller power is 1. Start the Imaging controller.
representative. turned off.
2. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Connect the LAN cable correctly.
3. Faulty software on the imaging 3. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
controller
4. Faulty PC on the imaging 4. Repair or replace the PC.
controller side
W-1533 The image file output is stopped. Failed to print the external input data. Try to input data from the external
source again.
Resume printing by selecting “Digital
Image” as “Input Device”.
W-1534 Order not unlocked. A communication error occurred on
the Imaging controller side while the
Check the network connections, and Frontier was processing an order.
then press the [Retry] button. (Causes of the error message)
2. Faulty software on the Imaging 2. Restart the Imaging controller. If
controller the error occurs again, reinstall the
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1535 Couldn’t provide the service. A communication error occurred on
software. (NOTE 1)
E-1536 Error occurred during the order An inappropriate status was detected
completion. because there was no device
authority.
Incorrect order status. (Causes of the error message)
Change the status in the Imaging controller the error occurs again, reinstall the
Controller. software. (NOTE 1)
3-30

E-1537 An error occurred in the Imaging Other errors in the FDiA
Controller. (Causes of the error message)
Couldn’t provide the service. controller the error occurs again, reinstall the
software. (NOTE 1)
Consult your technical 3
representative.
W-1538 Registering with FDi not done. The FDiA logical output device is not
registered.
To register it, perform the “Pre- (Causes of the error message)
operational Check”. 1. The pre-operational check has not 1. Perform the pre-operational check.
been conducted.
E-1539 Error occurred during the order end The order was already queued to be
process. deleted.
The status shows “Wait to delete”. 1. Faulty software on the Imaging 1. Restart the Imaging controller. If
Change the status in the Imaging software. (NOTE 1)
Controller.
I-1540 No order of the selected paper width. Printable order not found in Lab-In. Change the paper magazine
appropriate for the external input.
Replace magazine.
W-1541 Couldn’t provide the service. A communication error occurred on
2. Faulty software on the Imaging 2. Restart the DI controller. If the
controller error occurs again, reinstall the
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1542 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred due to the status
changes during normal printing.
Check the network connections, and (Causes of the error message)
then press the [Retry] button. 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 1. Connect the LAN cable correctly.
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1543 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred due to the status
changes during abnormal printing.
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1544 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred when the message
informing that one order had finished
Check the network connections, and was received.
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1545 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred while the order was
being deleted.
software. (NOTE 1)
3-31

W-1546 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred when the status
changed while no orders were
Check the network connections, and registered.
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1547 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred while an order was
being read.
software. (NOTE 1)
W-1548 Printer processor not in standby. An error occurred when an image file
was printed (while the external input
Check the network connections, and was selected).
To cancel the image import, press the 1. The printer section was not in the 1. Set the printer to the standby
[Cancel] button. standby mode while the external mode and press [Retry].
input was selected.
E-1549 Error occurred while deleting the Every order except for the one
order. currently being registered is deleted.
The status of the order to be deleted 1. Faulty software on the Imaging 1. Restart the Imaging controller. If
does not become “Creating”. controller the error occurs again, reinstall the
software. (NOTE 1)
Change the status on the Imaging
Controller.
E-1551 Dialog cannot be displayed. The function used to manage
character string resource returned an
Message definition file not found or error while a dialog was being
defective. generated.
To use this function, consult your 1. The message file is corrupted. 1. Reinstall the system software.
technical representative. (NOTE 1)
2. Faulty hard disk 2. Replace the main control unit.
E-1552 Could not start up the Red-eye/Soft/ An error occurred when starting Red
Cross plug-in. Eye/Soft/Cross plug-in.
The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in not 1. Faulty system software (A1) 1. Reinstall the system software.
installed or the file may be corrupted. (NOTE 1)
2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 2. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
To use this function, consult your 3. Faulty hard disk 3. Replace the main control unit.
technical representative.
E-1553 Couldn’t continue the Red-eye/Soft/ A read error occurred while Red Eye/
Cross. Soft/Cross plug-in was being read.
Could not find the file that was 1. Faulty system software (A1) 1. Reinstall the system software.
required for the Red-eye/Soft/Cross (NOTE 1)
plug-in or the file may be corrupted. 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 2. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
To use this function, consult your
3-32

E-1554 Couldn’t continue the Red-eye/Soft/ A write error occurred while Red Eye/
Cross. Soft/Cross plug-in was being written.
Could not create the file that was 1. Faulty system software (A1) 1. Reinstall the system software.
required for the Red-eye/Soft/Cross (NOTE 1)
plug-in. 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 2. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1) 3
To use this function, consult your
W-1556 This frame cannot be selected. A mounted print frame number does
not match the specified one.
Frame No. to specify template not (Causes of the error message)
matched. 1. Large index or template frame 1. Specify the frame number that
number does not match the matches the template.
Select another frame again. specified one.
2. A frame number could not be read. 2. Reinsert the film.
I-1564 Printing external file. Cannot be complete because an Wait until completion.
external file is being printed.
Wait!
W-1566 Printing the image file. Couldn’t Pre-scanning was attempted while an Insert the film after the process has
perform the pre-scan. image file was being exported. been completed.
Eject film.
After printing of the image file, insert

the film.
I-1569 Printing external file. Cannot be complete because an Wait until completion.
external file is being printed.
Wait!
E-1571 Message definition file not found or An error occurred while reading the
defective. character string resource.
Check message definition file. 1. Faulty system software (A1) 1. Reinstall the system software.
(NOTE 1)
W-1574 Frame with selected No. already A frame was overwritten although the –
mounted. numbered frame was already
mounted.
Frame overwritten.
W-1575 Preparing of variety printing is not This message appears when pre- Perform pre-scan after completing
completed yet. scan is performed during template variety print preparation.
setting.
So pre-scanning cannot be done.
The film is fed out.

W-1580 Editing error log info failed. An error occurred while editing error
log information.
1. Poorly connected communication 1. Connect the cable correctly.
cable
2. Faulty system software (A1) 2. Reinstall the system software.
(NOTE 1)
W-1581 Editing working information failed. An error occurred while editing
working information.
cable
(NOTE 1)
3-33

W-1583 Editing system information failed. An error occurred while editing the
system configuration information.
cable
(NOTE 1)
W-1584 Editing quality information failed. An error occurred while editing
quality information.
cable
(NOTE 1)
W-1586 The image export service is not This message appears when Insert the film after selecting the
selected, pre-scan not performed. performing pre-scan during the image export service.
selection of service to be exported.
Eject film. Select the image export
service, and then insert the film.
I-1587 Reading print mag. fine adjust data. Data are being loaded from the Wait until the process is completed.
registry.
Please wait.
I-1588 Saving print mag. fine adjust data. Data are being saved to the registry. Wait until the process is completed.
Please wait.
W-1589 Carrier/mask and composite type Pre-scan couldn’t be performed Check the carrier and mask for the
mismatch, so pre-scan not because the carrier/mask and the composite type.
performed. composite type of the template
mismatched.
Film is fed out.
W-1591 Frame specified on invoice not The frame specified by an invoice Confirm whether or not the film is
detected. cannot be detected. inserted.
Check the film.

W-1592 Could not detect frame(s) specified in Error message when frame cannot be Check the film.
the “Re-order Sheet” screen. detected after pre-scan.
Check the film.

I-1593 #### The template is being set. Wait until the process is completed.
Please wait.
I-1598 Processing Red-eye/Soft/Cross Red eye/Soft/Cross startup is in Wait until completion.
####. progress.
Please wait.
E-1599 An error occurred. Red eye/Soft/Cross failed to start up.
Couldn’t continue the “Red-eye/Soft/ 1. The carrier or mask is removed 1. Restart Red eye/Soft/Cross plug-
Cross”. during Red eye/Soft/Cross startup. in.
Complete the “Red-eye/Soft/Cross” (NOTE 1)
plug-in. 3. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 3. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
W-1701 This is the last frame. When the film mode is “Manual,” the Click [OK] to terminate the operation
[START/ENTER] key was pressed at or press the frame return key to
Press [OK] to eject film. the last frame of the film. return to the previous frame.
3-34

W-1702 The carrier or mask removed, so the The carrier or mask was removed Correctly install the carrier or mask
custom setting information is not while the dialog box related to the and then perform the custom setting
displayed correctly. custom setting was displayed. again.
The related dialog(s) closed.

3
Install the carrier or mask, and then
try again.
W-1703 Invalid custom setting. The selected custom setting number Print with the master settings or
is invalid. select a correct custom setting
Changed to master settings. number.
W-1705 Because the exposure condition This message appears when the film Insert the film after completing the
retrieve in progress, pre-scan not was inserted while the exposure exposure condition retrieve.
performed. condition retrieve was in progress.
Eject film.
W-1711 Reading of order information failed. This message appears when an error
occurs due to a network
Check if the network connection is disconnection during reading of order
properly done. in auto printing.
1. The Imaging Controller power is 1. Start the Imaging controller.
turned off.
3. Faulty software on the imaging 3. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
controller
4. Faulty PC on the imaging 4. Repair or replace the PC.
controller side
W-1712 DI Service is not finished. This is the message that appears Try again after the B3/B4 is
when you exit printing while the B3/ completed.
Retry when DI Service finished. B4 is being started up.
W-1720 There is a print whose order Switching between 1st Print and Select 1st print or reorder after order
registration is not done yet. Reprint is tried while there is a print of registration is done.
which order registration is not done.
I-1721 When [1st Print] is selected, the This is the confirmation message –
frame order will be discarded. after the All-frame specifying
command is issued.
Press [OK] to discard the frame order
information.
I-1722 A film remains in the carrier. This message appears when –
inserting the film while the sub-menu
To start the service, it is fed out. screen is opened.
I-1723 The settings in this dialog will be This message appears when the Proceed to the dialog and set up
discarded because the carrier is wrong carrier is installed when correctly.
changed. pressing the button in the “Index
Conditions” dialog.
W-1724 Because the exposure condition data This message appears when the –
for the specified frame is not found, exposure conditions cannot be called
the exposure conditions cannot be up because the data is not found.
called.
W-1725 Because mismatch of carrier/mask This message appears when the Check carrier/mask/composite type.
and composite type occurred, the exposure conditions cannot be called
exposure conditions cannot be up because mismatch of Carrier/
called. mask and composite type occurred.
W-1727 The exposure data not found or an The [All] function cannot be used, Check exposure condition data and
incorrect input type is selected. because no data is found or carrier/mask/composite type.
The [All] cannot be used. mismatch of carrier/mask and
composite type occurred.
The [All] will be cleared.
3-35

W-1728 The lens auto correction cannot be This message appears when the –
set correctly, because the carrier or carrier or mask is removed while the
mask is removed. “Lens Auto Correction” dialog is
displayed.
Related dialogs are closed.
Install the carrier or mask, and then

try it again.
I-1732 Couldn’t change the film drive mode This message appears when the –
to ####. selected film drive mode is invalid
depending on the carrier type.
“Semi” is used.
W-1734 This floppy disk already contains any This message appears when a Replace the floppy disk. To overwrite,
data. customizing file exists in the floppy click the [OK] button.
disk.
If you overwrite it, press the [OK]
button.
W-1735 A paper size with more than This message appears when a paper Check the print size.
203.0mm width and with less than size with more than 203.0mm in width
152.0mm length exists. and with less than 152.0mm in length
exists.
It may cause a trouble.
I-1736 Print size has been changed. This message prompts you to check if Check paper width of the magazine.
a correct print size is selected before
Check the paper width of the 135 negative sheet index printing,
magazine. template simple selection or template
selection.
I-1737 Nega sheet index printing is This message appears during the Wait until processing completes.
processing. negative sheet index printing.
Please wait.
W-1739 Lens correction cannot perform when This message shows that lens
the free cropping is selected. correction cannot perform when free
cropping is selected.
1. Under free cropping 1. Wait until completing free
cropping.
2. Lens type other than “No. 0 No” is 2. Select below
selected for “Lens Manual Correct Lens Auto Correction: OFF
Setup”. Lens manual Correct Setup: Lens
type “No. 0 No”
W-1740 Cannot perform the free cropping This message shows that free Lens Auto Correction: OFF
because the lens correction was cropping cannot be performed when Lens manual Correct Setup: Lens
done. the lens correction was done. type “No. 0 No”. After rescanning,
select free cropping.
E-1746 The storage capacity of the drive is This message appears when the disk Increase the disk space more than
insufficient, so the variety printing space of the C drive is insufficient. 100MB.
cannot be done. To use this function, The disk space is required more than
consult your technical representative. 100MB for the systems.
E-1750 More frames than the specified This message appears when the Change number of frames or use
frames are detected. system recognizes the strip film but piece film with specified number of
cannot find the frame with the starting frames.
Change the number of frames, or use frame No. in the negative sheet index
the piece film with the same number print.
of frames.
3-36

W-1751 Could not start displaying the image. The real-time display is unavailable.
[REALTIME_START] is
Eject film. 0= Setting template.
1= Image export service is not
selected.
2= “Original Selection” screen is 3
displayed.
3= “Template Selection” screen is
displayed.
4= Printing the image file.
5= Manual film carrier is installed
when the 1-pass digitizing is
selected.
6= Carrier, mask, and template type
mismatched.
7= Calling of all exposure conditions
is specified.
8= The “Image Preview” screen is
displayed.
9= Printing or setting up the negative
sheet index.
10=The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in
is already started up.
11=Negative sheet index printing is
not performed with the current
carrier.
12=Negative sheet index printing is
not performed with the current
mask.
[REALTIME_USERACT] is
0=
1= Use the 135 lane of the auto film
carrier.
2= Install the 135 mask in the auto
film carrier.
1. A template used for mounted print 1. Wait until the template setting
or frame/character is being finishes.
installed.
2. The “Output destination selection” 2. Select the output destination using
screen is being displayed for the “Output destination selection”
exporting image file. screen.
3. The “Original selection” screen is 3. Close the “Original selection”
being displayed. screen.
4. The template selection screen for 4. Select the template using the
mounted print or frame/character template selection screen, and
is being displayed. then wait until it is set.
5. Exporting image files is in 5. Wait until the file is output.
progress.
6. The manual film carrier is installed 6. Set the auto film carrier.
during the single scan digitizing.
7. The carrier or mask type does not 7. Install the carrier or mask
fit the composite type. corresponding to the composite
type.
8. The “Image preview” screen used 8. Close the “Image preview” screen.
for mounted print or frame/
character is being displayed.
9. The batch retrieval of exposure 9. Close the “Exposure condition
conditions is in progress. retrieve setup” screen.
10. Negative sheet index screen is 10. Wait until the negative sheet
displaying or print is processing. index screen is closed or
processing is completed.
11. The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in 11. Quit the Red eye/Soft/Cross plug-
is starting. in screen.
3-37

W-1753 Eject film. The pre-scanning cannot be
performed.
The film was inserted under the
condition that the waiting time for the
leading frame position determination
was 0 second.
1. A template used for mounted print 1. Wait until the template setting
or frame/character is being finishes.
installed.
2. The “Output destination selection” 2. Select the output destination using
screen is being displayed for the “Output destination selection”
exporting image file. screen.
3. The “Original selection” screen is 3. Close the “Original selection”
being displayed. screen.
4. The template selection screen for 4. Select the template using the
mounted print or frame/character template selection screen, and
is being displayed. then wait until it is set.
5. Exporting of image files is in 5. Wait until the file is output.
progress.
6. The manual film carrier is installed 6. Set the auto film carrier.
during the single scan digitizing.
7. The carrier or mask type does not 7. Install the carrier or mask
fit the composite type. corresponding to the composite
type.
8. The “Image preview” screen used 8. Close the “Image preview” screen.
for mounted print or frame/
character is being displayed.
9. The batch retrieval of exposure 9. Close the “Exposure condition
conditions is in progress. retrieve setup” screen.
10. Negative sheet index screen is 10. Wait until the negative sheet
displaying or print is processing. index screen is closed or
processing is completed.
11. The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in 11. Quit the Red eye/Soft/Cross plug-
is starting. in screen.
W-1754 Couldn’t provide the service. An error occurred while a service
name list was being read.
Check the network connections. (Causes of the error message)
1. The DI controller power is turned 1. Start the DI controller.
If the network connections are off.
correct, consult your technical 2. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Connect the LAN cable correctly.
representative. 3. Faulty software on the DI controller 3. Reinstall the software. (NOTE 1)
4. Faulty PC on the DI controller side 4. Replace the PC.
I-1757 The selected original type cannot be This message appears when the Install the correct carrier or select
used for this carrier. carrier is changed and a wrong original type properly.
original is selected while the “Original
Selection” dialog is displayed.
I-1758 The template was not settled, This message appears when the Select template before the preview
because the template is not selected settlement of template fails while the screen.
or it is currently being set. preview appears on the order screen.
W-1762 “Print Mode Select” cannot be done A different type of service was Wait until one sheet of mounted print
while the scanned image is mounted. requested while a mounted or frame/ is completed, or select [Print] or
character printing was in progress. [Cancel] on the image preview
Complete a mounted print, or press screen.
the [Print] or the [Cancel] in the
“Image Preview” screen, and then
select it again.
W-1763 The printing operation cannot be The process in progress was forcibly Wait until one sheet of mounted print
canceled while the image is mounted. terminated while mounted or frame/ is completed, or select [Print] or
character printing was in progress. [Cancel] on the image preview
Complete a mounted print, or press screen.
the [Print] or the [Cancel] button in
the “Image Preview” screen, and then
try it.
3-38

W-1764 Cannot replace the magazine while This message instructs you not to Exit this screen to replace the paper
the Printing Status Notice screen is replace the magazine while the magazine.
displayed. Printing Status Notice screen
appears.
To replace it, exit this screen.
I-1765 Film driving mode was changed. This message appears when the film – 3
driving mode is changed during the
view and check of images.
W-1771 Cannot perform the billing service for This message appears when an error
DSC. occurred during the DSC billing
output.
Check the network connections. (Cause of the error message)
1. Poor connection of cable to FDiA 1. Connect the cable securely.
2. Faulty cable to FDiA 2. Replace the cable.
E-1772 Couldn’t open the service menu This message appears when the
setting file. service menu setting file does not
exist or when it cannot be opened.
1. No setting file 1. Make setting file.
2. Abnormal floppy disk 2. Retry with the other FD.
E-1773 Incorrect parameter is written in the This message appears when value Set up the file correctly.
service menu setting file. written in the service menu setting file
exceeds the range.
E-1774 Couldn’t find the digitizing service This message appears when the Stop printing/digitizing.
that was registered in the service digitizing service that was registered
menu setting file. in the service menu setting file cannot
be found in the Imaging Controller.
1. Poor connection to DIC 1. Connect cable to the DIC properly.
2. No data file 2. Confirm service menu customize
data file (ServiceMenuButton.
csv).
E-1775 1st service menu not found. This message appears when the Set up button 1 to “Display”. Set up
service menu button 1 is not the parameter correctly.
Check the service menu setting file. displayed, or when any parameter
error occurs.
E-1776 Proper service type is not registered This message appears when the Set up the proper service to button 1.
for the 1st service menu. Check the proper service is not registered for
service menu setting file. the service menu button 1.
W-1777 Carrier not installed. This message appears when the Install the carrier correctly.
carrier is not installed when the
Install it, and then select the service service menu button is pressed.
menu again.
W-1778 The carrier for %FILM_TYPE% is not This message appears when the Install the proper carrier correctly.
installed. proper carrier is not installed when
the service menu button is pressed.
Replace it, and then select the
service menu again.
W-1779 Because the wrong carrier is This message appears when the Install the proper carrier correctly.
installed, the film type cannot be set proper carrier is not installed when
to %FILM_KIND%. the service menu button is pressed.
Replace it, and then select the

service menu again.
E-1780 Could not detect the frame No. Could Starting frame number of the film Enter the frame number correctly, or
not print with this film strip. strip was not detected in the 135 insert the proper film strip.
negative sheet index print.
Select the strip to match the specified
number of frames.
W-1782 Could not call the exposure Inconsistency of image setting Set up the custom setting correctly.
conditions, because they do not parameters
match the current custom settings.
3-39

W-1785 The carrier/lane cannot be changed The carrier was changed from the Return the lane to the original
during ordering process. original one during the reorder. position.
Return it to the original position.

E-1786 The carrier/lane was changed during The carrier/lane was changed during Return the lane to the original
“Frame order” re-ordering. “Frame order” reordering, and film position.
inserted.
Couldn’t perform pre-scan.
Eject film.
W-1787 The magazine is not installed This message appears when the Install the paper magazine.
properly. magazine is not installed properly
when the service menu button is
Install it properly. pressed.
I-1788 The frame information will be This message appears when the –
discarded. service menu button is pressed when
you select the frame.
OK?
E-1789 Couldn’t open the function key setting This message appears when the
file. function key setting file is not found,
or when it cannot be opened.
1. No setting file 1. Make setting file.
2. Abnormal floppy disk 2. Try again with the other FD.
E-1790 The parameter is not correctly written This message appears when Set up the file correctly.
in the function key setting file. parameter to be set in the function
key setting file exceeds the range.
W-1791 Cannot send the status information. This message appears when sending Connect the LAN cable correctly.
Check the network connections. of the status information failed
because of the network
disconnection.
W-1792 The specified frame size and the Reorder printing by “Frame Order” is Install the carrier correctly.
installed carrier mismatched. selected when the MNC is installed.
Replace the carrier with the correct

one, and then select the service
menu again.
I-1793 After the execution of the order, the This message appears when starting –
frame information will be discarded. the order during the order
specification.
I-1794 The frame ordering information will This message appears when controls –
be discarded. return from reorder printing to normal
printing.
OK?
W-1795 The carrier that is appropriate to the This message appears when you Install the carrier correctly.
reorder printing is not installed. select the reordering service while
the M59D is installed.
Replace the carrier, and then select
the service menu again.
I-1796 #### This message appears when –
registering and saving of the custom
button is currently done.
I-1797 Return the customized data of the This message appears when the –
custom button to the default values. [Initialize] button is pressed in the
“Custom Button Registration/Saving”
screen.
3-40

E-1798 Processing of customized data for This message appears when
custom button is not completed registering, saving or initializing of the
normally. custom button is aborted.
1. No file 1. Check that the file in the system
environment (D:\Fujifilm\Frontier 3
\Param\OPE).
2. Faulty FD 2. Check the FD.
3. Faulty FDD or HD of the main 3. Replace the main control unit.
control unit
W-1799 The mask is not installed, so setting This message appears when the Install the mask correctly.
of original type is not done. mask is not installed when the
service menu button is pressed.
Install the mask, and then select the
service menu again.
E-1801 Conjugate length variable upper limit Conjugate length variable upper limit
sensor (D212) failure. sensor (D212) failure
Restart the system. If problems 1. Disconnected conjugate length 1. Reconnect the connector.
persist, consult your technical variable home position sensor
representative. (D211) connector
3. Disconnected D212 connector 3. Reconnect the connector.
5. Faulty conjugate length drive 5. Replace the drive section (gear
system ASSY, etc.).
* This error may be recovered by

performing “I/O Check (0340).”
E-1802 Conjugate length variable lower limit Conjugate length variable lower limit
sensor (D213) failure. sensor (D212) failure
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty conjugate length drive 1. Replace conjugate length drive
persist, consult your technical system system (motor or gear assembly).
representative. 2. Foreign matter is caught in D213. 2. Remove the foreign matter.
3. Blown fuse (FE2) in the CTC 3. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
E-1803 Conjugate length variable home Conjugate length variable home
position sensor (D211) failure. position sensor (D211) deleting error
Restart the system. If problems 1. Disconnected D211 connector 1. Reconnect the connector.
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty D211 2. Replace the sensor.
representative. 3. Faulty conjugate length drive 3. Replace the drive section (gear
system ASSY, etc.).
4. Faulty conjugate length variable 4. Replace the motor.
motor (M201)
5. Shipping fixture remains in the 5. Remove the shipping fixture.
scanner section.
circuit board
circuit board
E-1804 Conjugate length variable home Conjugate length variable home
position sensor (D211) failure. position sensor (D211) Clearing error
Restart the system. If problems 1. Disconnected conjugate length 1. Remove the scanner cover and
persist, consult your technical variable motor (M201) connector reconnect the motor connector if
representative. disconnected.
2. Faulty M201 2. Replace the motor.
3. Faulty drive gear 3. Replace the drive gear ASSY.
3-41

E-1805 Lens home position sensor (D214) Lens home position detecting error
1. Disconnected lens drive motor 1. Reconnect the connector.
Restart the system. If problems (M202) connector
persist, consult your technical 2. M202 meshing error 2. Replace the lens unit.
representative. 3. Disconnected lens home position 3. Reconnect the connector.
sensor (D214) connector
circuit board
circuit board
E-1806 Lens home position sensor (D214) Lens home position clearing error
1. Disconnected lens drive motor 1. Reconnect the connector.
Restart the system. If problems (M202) connector
persist, consult your technical 2. M202 meshing error 2. Replace the lens unit.
representative.
E-1807 Shutter home position sensor (D215) Shutter home position detecting error
1. Disconnected shutter home 1. Reconnect the connector.
Restart the system. If problems position sensor (D215) connector
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty D215 2. Replace the sensor.
representative. 3. Disconnected shutter motor 3. Reconnect the connector.
(M203) connector
circuit board
circuit board
E-1811 Scanner cooling fan (F202) stopped. Scanner cooling fan failure
Restart the system. If problems 1. Disconnected scanner cooling fan 1. Remove the scanner cover and
persist, consult your technical (F216) connector reconnect the fan connector if
representative. disconnected.
2. Faulty F216 2. Replace the fan.
circuit board
circuit board
E-1812 Light source cooling fan (F201) Light source cooling fan failure
stopped. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected light source cooling 1. Remove the scanner cover and
Restart the system. If problems fan (F201) connector reconnect the fan connector if
persist, consult your technical disconnected.
representative. 2. Faulty F201 2. Replace the fan.
circuit board
circuit board
E-1813 Image processing section cooling fan Scanner mechanical/Image
1 (F203) stopped. processing section cooling fan 1
(F203) failure
persist, consult your technical 1. Disconnected F203 connector 1. Reconnect the connector.
representative. 2. Faulty F203 2. Replace the fan.
circuit board
circuit board
3-42

E-1814 Image processing section cooling fan Scanner mechanical/Image
2 (F204) stopped. processing section cooling fan 2
(F204) failure
persist, consult your technical 1. Disconnected F204 connector 1. Reconnect the connector.
representative. 2. Faulty F204 2. Replace the fan. 3
circuit board
circuit board
E-1825 The temperature of the light source Abnormal temperature of the LED
controller out of the range. controller
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty light source 1. Replace the LED.
persist, consult your technical 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
representative. harness between the CTC circuit replace the harness.
board and LED
E-1826 Carrier motor driver temperature Abnormal temperature of the carrier
beyond the specified temperature motor driver
range. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty feed motor in the carrier 1. Replace the motor.
Restart the system. If problems 2. Feed motor -to- plug-in connector - 2. Replace the harness.
persist, consult your technical to- CTC circuit board, short-
representative. circuited harness
E-1827 Scanner motor driver temperature Abnormal temperature of the scanner
beyond the specified temperature motor driver
range. (Causes of the error message)
1. Short-circuited conjugate length 1. Replace the motor.
Restart the system. If problems variable motor
persist, consult your technical 2. Conjugate length variable motor - 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
representative. to- plug-in connector -to- CTC replace the harness.
circuit board, poorly connected or
broken harness
E-1828 An error occurred in the 3.3V power 3.3 V power supply failure
supply (PERR_3V) in the light source (Causes of the error message)
section. 1. Blown fuse (FE3) in the CTC 1. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
Restart the system. If problems 2. Faulty CTC circuit board 2. Replace the CTC circuit board.
persist, consult your technical
representative.
E-1829 An error occurred in the P5V power P5V power supply failure
supply (PERR_5V) in the scanner (Causes of the error message)
section. 1. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC 1. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
Restart the system. If problems 2. Faulty CTC circuit board 2. Replace the CTC circuit board.
persist, consult your technical
representative.
E-1831 The connector between the input LED connector was disconnected.
mechanical control CB and the light (Causes of the error message)
source section disconnected. 1. Disconnected connector (CTC6, 1. Reconnect the connector.
(CTC-LED) CTC7, CTC8, CTC9) in the CTC
circuit board
Restart the system. If problems 2. Blown fuse (FE3) in the CTC 2. Replace the fuse.
persist, consult your technical circuit board
representative.
3-43

E-1833 An error occurred in the piezoelectric An error occurred in the piezoelectric
actuator power unit (ZERRPZR) in actuator power unit.
the scanner section. (Causes of the error message)
Restart the system. If problems harness between the PZR circuit replace the harness.
persist, consult your technical board and the CTC circuit board
representative. 2. Blown fuse (FH37) in the PWR 2. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
3. Faulty PZR circuit board 3. Replace the PZR circuit board.
E-1834 An error occurred in the motor power 24V1 motor power supply failure
supply (PERR_24V1) in the scanner (Causes of the error message)
section. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
harness between the scanner and replace the harness.
Restart the system. If problems the CTC circuit board
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty CTC circuit board 2. Replace the CTC circuit board.
representative. 3. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR 3. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
E-1836 An error occurred in the power supply Excessive current control error
CB in the scanner section. (Causes of the error message)
(PZR22) 1. Short-circuited piezoelectric 1. Replace the CCD unit.
actuator
Restart the system. If problems 2. Broken harness between the PWR 2. Replace the harness.
persist, consult your technical circuit board and the PZR circuit
representative. board
circuit board
circuit board
E-1841 Warming of light source section Temperature control error
failed. (Temperature could not be
measured.)
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty LTC circuit board 1. Replace the LTC circuit board.
representative. 2. Faulty PWR circuit board 2. Replace the PWR circuit board.
harness between the LTC circuit repair/replace the harness.
board and the CTC circuit board
E-1842 Warming of light source section Temperature control error (Peltier
failed. element is faulty.)
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty Peltier element or broken 1. Replace the light source section.
persist, consult your technical harness
representative. 2. Faulty LTC circuit board 2. Replace the LTC circuit board.
harness to the light source repair/replace the harness.
temperature sensor (D203)
E-1843 Warming of light source section Temperature control error (LTC power
failed. supply failure)
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty LTC circuit board 1. Replace the LTC circuit board.
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty PWR circuit board 2. Replace the PWR circuit board.
representative. 3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Reconnect the connector, or
harness to the light source repair/replace the harness.
temperature sensor (D203)
W-1857 Diffusion box removed. No diffusion box was found just
before driving the piezoelectric
Remove carrier, and then install actuator.
diffusion box. (Causes of the error message)
1. Diffusion box is not installed, or 1. Install the diffusion box.
incorrectly installed.
D202)
3-44

W-1860 Inserting the film. Couldn’t perform AF was requested during film Perform the AF again.
the AF. insertion.
Perform the AF again.

W-1901 An error occurred during storing of An error occurred while exposure
exposure conditions. conditions were being stored to a 3
Storing of exposure conditions will data file.
not be done from the next time. (Causes of the error message)
again.
W-1902 Memory full. Couldn’t print. Data could not be output to the DI Wait until the DI Controller outputs
Controller because digitizing process image data.
Wait until the memory space is continued, thus causing insufficient
available, and then start printing. memory space.
W-1903 Image data full. Couldn’t print. Data could not be output to the DI Wait until the DI Controller outputs
Controller because digitizing process image data.
Please wait a moment, and start continued, thus causing insufficient
printing. memory space.
E-1904 Image processing CB failure. The DSP is unavailable due to the

(GPA) problem.
Call your technical representative. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector, or
harness between the GMB and the repair/replace the harness.
GPA circuit boards
2. Faulty GPA circuit board 2. Replace the GPA circuit board.
E-1905 Image processing CB printing The DSP is unavailable due to a
function failure. problem.
Call your technical representative. Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
3. Faulty GPA circuit board 3. Replace the GPA circuit board.
E-1906 Image processing CB pre-scan The DSP is unavailable due to the
function failure. problem.
Call your technical representative. Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
3. Faulty GPAcircuit board 3. Replace the GPAcircuit board.
I-1907 Printing. Animation scanning cannot be Re-execute it after a while.
started because the DSP is busy.
Please wait.
I-1908 Available frame not detected. No frame is detected during
Eject film. animation scanning. (All the frames
are unexposed.)
1. All the frames of the inserted film 1. Check the film.
are unexposed.
2. Faulty unexposed frame sensor in 2. Replace the sensor.
the carrier
3-45

I-1909 Light source not stabilized. After the The scanner LED is not stabilized.
stabilization, positioning of image will (Causes of the error message)
be displayed. 1. Faulty LED 1. Replace the LED.
Press the [End] to exit the image
position adjustment.
Press the [Run] button to start the
image position adjustment ignoring
the stabilization of the light source
temperature.
W-1910 Carrier not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. A carrier is not installed. 1. Install the carrier.
Install the carrier and then start pre- 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector, or
scan. harness between the plug-in repair/replace the harness.
board
W-1911 Mask for MFC not installed. The mask sensor in the manual film
carrier does not function.
Install the mask and then start pre- (Causes of the error message)
scan. 1. The mask is installed incorrectly 1. Correctly install the mask.
floating above the target surface.
2. Faulty mask sensor 2. Replace the MNC circuit board.
3. Faulty MNC circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
harness between the plug-in repair/replace the harness.
board
W-1912 Carrier upper cover opened. A scanning was attempted while the
upper cover was open.
Close it and then start pre-scan. (Causes of the error message)
1. The upper cover is open. 1. Correctly install the mask.
2. Faulty cover sensor (D120) 2. Replace the sensor.
3. Faulty CYS circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
harness between the plug-in repair/replace the harness.
board
W-1914 Image not read correctly. An image acquisition error occurred
during animation scanning.
again. (NOTE 1)
W-1915 Image not read correctly. A read error occurred during
animation scanning.
again. (NOTE 1)
I-1916 Scanner correction not performed The scanner cannot be corrected Re-execute it after a while.
because printing is currently being because DSP is busy.
done. After printing it will be started.
Please wait.
3-46

W-1917 Paper width and print size of negative This message appears when a paper Replace the magazine with the
sheet index mismatched. width mismatch is detected in the correct one.
format check in negative sheet index
Press [OK] and replace with the printing.
magazine of #### mm.
3
If you press [Output], an incorrect
negative sheet index printing will be
outputted.
W-1918 No frame for negative sheet index This message appears when the –
printing. desired frame in negative sheet index
printing is not found.
Printing of negative sheet index
cancelled.
I-1919 Scanner correction not performed This message appears when scanner –
because printing is currently being correction is not started because all
done. image processors are in use.
Perform the scanner correction again

after printing.
E-1920 Unsupported configuration. The old and new hardware
combination is not supported.
If problems persist, consult your (Cause of the error message)
technical representative. 1. AD100 densitometer has been 1. Connect the AD200 densitometer.
connected to the F340.
2. LED22 circuit board has been 2. Install the LED24 circuit board.
installed to the F340.
3. F340 system software has been 3. Install the proper system software.
installed to the F330.
E-1998 Error table item(####) cannot be The item(s) required for the error
omitted. table file is(are) not written.
Sub-system: #### (Causes of the error message)
(####) 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
Error No.: #### Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
E-1999 Error table items (####) are incorrect. Incorrect values are written in the
Sub-system: #### error table file.
(####) (Causes of the error message)
Error No.: #### 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
again. (NOTE 1)
E-2102 A communication error occurred A communication time-out occurred.
between the film scanner and the (Causes of the error message)
printer processor. 1. Poorly connected SCSI cable 1. Connect the SCSI cable correctly
(Command time-out) or replace it.
Restart the system. If problems 3. Faulty CTP circuit board 3. Replace the CTP circuit board.
persist, consult your technical 4. Blown fuse due to a broken 4. Replace the fuse.
representative. harness in the PWR circuit board
or the LDD circuit board
E-2104 Cannot be performed due to IPC Communication time-out occurred.
communication error. (Cause of the error message)
1. Poor connection between the main 1. Reconnect the cable correctly.
control unit and the printer
E-2105 Cannot be performed due to IPC Communication time-out occurred.
timeout. (Cause of the error message)
1. Poor connection between the main 1. Reconnect the cable correctly.
control unit and the printer
3-47

W-2106 Printer setup and maintenance is in An uncalibrated magazine was Quit “Setup and Maintenance”
progress. installed during printer maintenance. screen, and perform paper condition
setup.
Perform the paper condition setup
after the operation.
E-2107 Data file not opened. The file could not be opened when
saving/loading data.
This message appears when (Causes of the error message)
performing the installation. It is not an 1. The file used to save or load data 1. Reinstall the system software.
error message. is corrupted. (NOTE 1)
In other case of the installation,
consult your technical representative.
E-2109 A communication error occurred Data cannot be sent to the printer
between the film scanner and the processor.
(SCSI sending error: Code No.= 1. GMB circuit board power supply 1. Check or repair the power system
####) failure related to the GMB circuit board.
2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 2. Connect the SCSI cable correctly
If problems persist after the restart, cable or replace it.
consult your technical representative. 3. Faulty system software 3. Restart the system software. If the
* Open the main control unit, and

disconnect/connect each circuit
board (especially memory board).
Sometimes this method solves the
problem.
W-2110 A communication error occurred Data cannot be sent to the printer
between the film scanner and the processor.
(Sending error: Code No.=####) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI 1. Correctly connect the SCSI cable
cable or replace it.
Do countermeasures referring to the 2. Faulty system software 2. Restart the system software. If the
manual. error occurs again, reinstall the
E-2202 CB failure detected in printer When the circuit board diagnostic test
processor. detects an error
(Error code: ####) (Causes of the error message)
1. CTP circuit board power supply 1. Check or repair the power system
Consult your technical failure related to the CTP circuit board.
representative. 2. Blown fuse in the PWR circuit 2. Replace the fuse.
board
E-2301 Printing not performed in the printer A printing command received from
processor. Printing request not the client while the printer processor
received. is busy.
1. Blown fuse FH28 in PWR circuit 1. Replace the fuse.
board
3-48

I-2305 The data in the printer processor SRAM information key is not found.
backup memory was updated. (Causes of the error message)
1. When the software upgrade is 1. This message does not mean an
This message does not mean performed abnormality exists.
abnormality when the software 2. Insufficiently recharged backup 2. Recharge the battery for 1 or 2
version is updated. battery days. 3
3. Faulty backup battery 3. Replace the CTP circuit board.
For other than the version-up, consult 4. Faulty backup circuit 4. Replace the CTP circuit board.
your technical representative.
E-2306 Current time of printer processor was During the first initialization after the
changed to the time of film scanner. power ON, time data read from the
timer IC is abnormal.
If this error persists, consult your 1. Faulty system software 1. Restart the system software.
technical representative. Reinstall it if the problem occurs
again. (NOTE 1)
I-2307 The laser warm-up in the exposure (Causes of the error message)
section not completed. 1. When the print command was 1. Wait until the temperature control
received while the laser finishes.
Please wait. temperature control was not
completed
2. Blown fuse in the LDD circuit 2. Replace the fuse.
board
3. Faulty LDD circuit board 3. Replace the LDD circuit board.
I-2308 Warming up the processing tanks. When the print command was Wait until the temperature control
received while the solution finishes.
Please wait. temperatures had not reached the
setting values
I-2311 Printing. When the processor shutdown was –
If processing stopped, paper will attempted with the processor in
remain in processor. operation
Shut down the processor?

I-2312 The dryer unit or the dryer section The processor cover is open when
cover opened. driving/stopping the processing rack.
Close it. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector, or
harness between the dryer unit repair/replace the harness.
detecting interlock switch (D416)
and PAC circuit board
3. Faulty PAC circuit board 3. Replace the PAC circuit board.
I-2313 Magazine door opened. This message appears when the Close the magazine door.
magazine cover is left open at the
Close it. printing start-up.
I-2314 Front upper cover or feeding section This message appears when the B- Close the cover or door.
upper/lower cover opened. system cover is left open at the start-
up.
Close it.
I-2315 Dryer section or dryer section cover This message appears when the Close the dryer unit or cover.
opened. processor cover is opened at the
printing start-up.
Close it.
I-2316 Back printer unit not installed. This message appears when the Install the back printer unit correctly.
back printer is not installed at the
Check it. start-up.
I-2317 Opening the replenisher cartridge. This message appears when the kit Wait until opening operation is
replenisher section is being driven. completed.
Please wait.
3-49

W-2407 Auto-loading of paper failed. The paper end sensor and splice
sensor do not change their state even
Refer to manual for guidance. if the paper leading end is pulled out
by a preset length.
1. Paper supply motor (M301) does 1.
not rotate, or the drive system is
faulty.
1) Poorly connected or broken 1) Reconnect the connector, or
harness between M301 and the repair/replace the harness.
PDC circuit board
2) Faulty M301 2) Replace the motor.
3) Faulty PDC circuit board 3) Replace the PDC circuit board.
4) Disengaged or worn timing belt 4) Reinstall or replace the belt.

in the paper supply section
5) Disengaged or worn timing 5) Reinstall or replace the pulley.
pulley in the paper supply
section
6) Increased load in the drive 6) Inspect or repair the drive
section section.
2. Paper splice sensor (D301) does 2.
not detect paper.
harness between D301 and the repair/replace the harness.
CTP circuit board
2) Faulty D301 2) Replace the sensor.
3) Faulty CTP circuit board 3) Replace the CTP circuit board.
3. Paper cannot be rewound. 3.

1) Broken magazine drive pulley 1) Replace the pulley.
2) Paper slippage due to dirty 2) Clean the roller.
rollers
3) Broken or disengaged 3) Repair or replace the spring.
magazine nip spring
4) Reverse-prevention lock in the 4) Replace the cutter guide or
magazine cannot be unlocked magazine.
(broken cutter guide pin, bent
or scuffed magazine lock pin)
4. Paper does not reach the sensor. 4.
1) D301 cannot detect paper 1) Cut the paper’s leading end
because the paper’s leading straight.
end is cut aslant. 2) Adjust the length of the paper
2) Paper protrudes too much that protrudes from the
when setting it. magazine.
3) Paper hit the magazine nip 3) Inspect or replace the
roller. magazine nip roller section
guide.
4) Paper is set aslant. 4) Set the paper correctly.
5) Magazine table is incorrectly 5) Inspect or repair the table.
set.
6) Magazine shutter malfunction 6) Replace the cutter guide or
(broken cutter guide pin, faulty magazine.
magazine shutter section)
7) Faulty magazine end detecting 7) Replace the magazine end
plate detecting plate or magazine.
circuit board
3-50

W-2409 Auto-rewinding of paper failed. The paper end sensor and splice
sensor do not change their state even
Refer to manual for guidance. if the paper leading end is rewound
by a preset length.
1. Paper supply motor (M301) does 1. 3
faulty.
PDC circuit board
section
section section.
not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
rollers
magazine nip spring
W-2411 Paper remains in printer section. (Causes of the error message)
1. The magazine door was opened 1. Remove the paper.
Remove paper. while the paper was being fed.
harness between the interlock repair/replace the harness.
switch (D322) and the CTP circuit
board
3. Faulty D322 3. Replace the interlock switch.
3-51

E-2412 The cutter malfunctions. The outputs of the home position and
closing sensors did not change
Call your technical representative. during operation.
1. Cutter drive motor (M307) does 1.
not rotate.
PDC circuit board
2. Cutter home position sensor 2.
(D312) does not change the state.
CTP circuit board
4) Deformed detecting plate 4) Repair the detecting plate.
3. Cutter blade does not function 3.
1) Broken drive gear 1) Replace the motor.
2) Paper is caught in the cutter 2) Remove paper.
section.
3) Faulty cutter blade sliding 3) Replace the cutter unit.
section
W-2421 Paper end processing completed. The paper end sensor detected the
paper end.
Install the paper in the magazine. (Causes of the error message)
1. The feed section stopped when 1. Set a new roll of paper or replace
the paper end process stopped. the magazine.
harness between the paper end repair/replace the harness.
sensor (D311) and the CTP circuit
board
5. Paper end detecting plate on the 5. Repair the detecting plate, or
magazine side that is deformed or replace the magazine.
out of place.
W-2423 Unknown magazine ID is set. A magazine replaced at the time of
paper end had a different ID from the
Set correct magazine ID. one used before the replacement.
1. Magazine has been changed. 1.
1) A magazine that was different 1) Change the print size or install
from the one used before the the original magazine.
replacement was installed.
2) The ID chip has been changed. 2) Install the original ID chip or
register the ID.
2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to 2.
D310) does not detect the
magazine ID.
harness between the magazine repair/replace the harness.
ID sensor and the CTP circuit
board
2) Faulty magazine ID sensor 2) Replace the sensor.
3. The magazine is incorrectly 3.
installed.
1) The ID chip is not installed. 1) Install the ID chip.
2) The magazine table is out of 2) Inspect or repair the magazine
place or broken. table.
3) The sensor bracket is deformed 3) Inspect or repair the bracket.
or out of place.
3-52

W-2424 Magazine ID not registered. When a magazine of which ID is not
registered is installed
Set the paper magazine in the “Setup (Causes of the error message)
and Maintenance” - “02 Print 1. The ID of the currently installed 1. Install the correct magazine.
Condition Setup and Check” menu. magazine is not registered.
2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to 2. 3
D310) does not detect the
magazine ID.
board
installed.
or out of place.
W-2426 Identifying of magazine failed. The magazine is not installed in the
specified position.
Check magazine, and then reinstall it. (Causes of the error message)
If problems persist when it is correctly 1. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to 1.
installed, consult your technical D310) does not detect the
representative. magazine ID.
board
installed.
or out of place.
W-2429 Magazine door opened. Magazine section door is left opened Close the magazine door and reprint
during paper processing. fogged prints.
Close it. Paper may become fogged if
it exists.
W-2430 Magazine door opened. Magazine section’s door is left Close the magazine door.
opened during other operation except
Close it. printing.
W-2431 Front upper cover or feeding section This message appears when the Remove paper from the printer and
upper/lower cover opened. printer door is left opened during the close the door or cover.
paper processing.
Remove paper from printer and close
door.
W-2432 Back printer unit not installed. Back printer is not installed when
starting printing.
Do countermeasures referring to the (Causes of the error message)
manual. 1. Back printer is not installed. 1. Correctly install the back printer
unit.
harness between the back printer repair/replace the harness.
set sensor (D320) and the CTP
circuit board
3-53

W-2434 Front upper cover or feeding section This message appears when the Close the door or cover.
upper/lower cover opened. printer door is left open during the
paper processing.
Close it.
I-2435 Magazine installed. Paper magazine of which paper Press [OK] to resume printing.
condition setup is already performed
Printing resumed. is installed.
W-2436 Front upper cover or feeding section (Causes of the error message)
upper/lower cover opened. 1. The cover is open. 1. Close the cover.
Close it. harness between the sensor repair/replace the harness.
(D323, D324, D325) and the PDC
circuit board
3. Faulty sensor (D323, D324, D325) 3. Replace the sensor.
4. Faulty PDC circuit board 4. Replace the PDC circuit board.
W-2441 Specified magazine ID differs from The ID of the installed magazine Set the magazine that was installed
the stored ID. does not match the specified one. during scanning.
Install magazine with ID=####.

W-2442 As it is W-2507 message under The output maintenance is attempted Solve W-2507 before performing the
display, the printer maintenance not while Message W-2507 is displayed. output maintenance.
started.
W-2443 As it is I-2435 message under The output maintenance is attempted Wait until Message I-2435
display, the printer maintenance not while Message I-2435 is displayed. disappears.
started.
W-2446 As paper is being fed, the printer The output maintenance is attempted Wait until paper feeding completes.
maintenance not started. while the printer is feeding paper.
W-2447 As printing is being done, the printer The output maintenance is attempted Wait until printing completes.
maintenance not started. during printing.
W-2448 As paper end process is being done, The output maintenance is attempted Process paper end before performing
the printer maintenance not started. during paper end process. the output maintenance.
W-2449 As post-operational check is being The printer maintenance is attempted Cancel the post-operational check to
done, the printer maintenance not during post-operational check. perform the printer maintenance.
started.
W-2450 Paper remains in printer section. (Causes of the error message)
(Paper supply section) 1. A sheet of paper is left in the 1. Remove the paper.
printer section.
Remove paper. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector, or
sensor (D306 to D310) and the
CTP circuit board
3. Faulty sensors (D306 to D310) 3. Replace the sensor.
W-2451 Paper remains in printer section. Back printer entrance sensor detects
(Paper supply section or back printer paper when the initialization finishes.
section) (Causes of the error message)
1. Back printer entrance sensor 1. Remove the paper.
Remove paper. (D302) detects paper.
CTP circuit board
3-54

W-2452 Paper remains in printer section. The registration sensor detects a
(Back printer section) sheet of paper remaining when the
initialization finishes.
Remove paper. (Causes of the error message)
1. Registration sensor (D303) 1. Remove the paper.
detects paper. 3
CTP circuit board
W-2453 Paper remains in printer section. The registration sensor detects a
(Register section) sheet of paper remaining when the
initialization finishes.
1. Registration sensor (D303) 1. Remove the paper.
detects paper.
CTP circuit board
W-2454 Paper remains in printer section. The pre-exposure sensor detects a
(Sub-scanning section) sheet of paper remaining when the
initialization finishes
1. Pre-exposure sensor (D304) 1. Remove the paper.
detects paper.
CTP circuit board
3. Faulty sensor D304 3. Replace the sensor.
W-2455 Paper remains in printer section. The processor entry sensor detects a
(Exit section) sheet of paper remaining when the
initialization finishes
1. A piece of paper is left in the feed 1. Remove the paper.
section.
harness between the processor repair/replace the harness.
entry sensor (D305) and CTP
circuit board
3. Faulty sensor (D305) 3. Replace the sensor.
3-55

E-2460 The registration nip motor (M309) When the mechanical section fails
malfunctions. during the initialization
Consult your technical 1. Registration nip motor (M309) 1.
representative. does not rotate.
harness to M309 repair/replace the harness.
2. Registration nip roller stops at the 2.
home position.
harness between the repair/replace the harness.
registration nip home position
sensor (D316) and CTP circuit
board
3. Faulty nip release mechanism 3.
1) Broken cam 1) Replace the cam.
2) Broken bearing 2) Replace the bearing.
3) Disengaged or worn gear 3) Reinstall or replace the gear.
4) Foreign matter is caught in the 4) Remove the foreign matter.
nip release mechanism.
5) Increased load in the drive 5) Inspect/repair the drive section.
section
circuit board
E-2461 Width detecting drive motor (M310) When the mechanical section fails
failure. during the initialization
1. Width detecting drive motor 1.
Consult your technical (M310) does not rotate.
representative. 1) Poorly connected or broken 1) Reconnect the connector, or
PDC circuit board
2. Width detecting home position is 2.
not detected.
harness between the width repair/replace the harness.
detecting home position sensor
(D315) and CTP circuit board
3. Faulty width detecting slide 3.
mechanism.
1) Deformed home position 1) Repair the plate.
detecting plate
pulley
4) Increased load in the slide 4) Clean/replace the slide shaft,
bearing or inspect/replace the width
detecting guide
slide mechanism.
circuit board
3-56

E-2462 Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) When the mechanical section fails
failure. during the initialization
Consult your technical 1. Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) 1.
1) Poorly connected or broken 1) Reconnect the connector, or 3
PDC circuit board
2. Sub-scanning nip home position 2.
sensor (D317) does not detect the
nip home position.
harness between D317 and repair/replace the harness.
CTP circuit board
1) Broken cam (deformed 1) Replace the cam.
detecting plate/broken stopper)
pulley
section
E-2464 Feed nip motor (M313) failure. When the mechanical section fails
during the initialization
representative. 1. Feed nip motor (M313) does not 1.
rotate.
PDC circuit board
2. Feed nip home position sensor 2.
(D319) does not detect the nip
home position.
CTP circuit board
3-57

E-2465 Exit section up/down belt motor When the mechanical section fails
(M314) failure. during the initialization
Consult your technical 1. Exit section up/down motor (M314) 1.
PDC circuit board
2. Feed nip home position sensor 2.
(D319) does not detect the home
position.
CTP circuit board
3. Faulty up/down release 3.
mechanism
section
circuit board
3-58

W-2466 Paper is not properly installed in the (Causes of the error message)
magazine. 1. Incorrectly set paper in the 1. Check outputted prints. If the
magazine image is misaligned, insert the
Blurring of image may occur. Check magazine in a dark bag and reset
the outputted print. the paper correctly.
2. Width detecting waiting position is 2. 3
incorrect.
1) Side registration calibration has 1) Perform “Side Register
not been performed. Calibration (0556).”
3) Disengaged or worn timing 3) Reinstall or replace the pulley
pulley
4) Increased load in the slide 4) Clean/replace the slide shaft,
bearing or inspect/replace the width
detecting guide.
5) The magazine ID does not 5) Replace with the correct ID
match the paper width. chip, or correct the setting.
ID sensor (D306 to D310) and
the CTP circuit board
7) Faulty sensor (D306 to D310) 7) Replace the sensor.
3. Paper feed position is incorrect. 3.
1) Paper width guide in the 1) Correct the width guide
magazine is incorrectly set. position.
2) Flanges in the magazine is 2) Correct the flange position.
incorrectly set.
3) Positioning pin in the magazine 3) Replace the magazine.
is incorrectly set.
4) Broken cutter guide positioning 4) Replace the cutter guide.
hole
5) Faulty magazine table 5) Inspect/repair the magazine
table.
6) Disengaged feed roller or nip 6) Inspect/repair the nip roller/
spring in the magazine spring.
7) Disengaged feed roller or nip 7) Inspect/repair the nip roller/
spring in the feed section spring.
8) Paper is incorrectly set (aslant) 8) Correctly set the paper.
in the magazine
9) Paper skewing due to dirty 9) Clean the roller.
roller
4. Width detecting sensor (D314) 4.
malfunction
1) LED in D314 is not lit. 1) Replace the sensor.
CTP circuit board
3) Deformed or broken width 3) Replace the width detecting
detecting guide guide.
W-2467 Can’t rewind because paper is being The rewind request from the PC was Try the operation again after the
fed. received while paper was being fed. paper feed is completed.
Try again after the completion of

feeding paper.
3-59

W-2470 Paper jam occurred in printer. The paper end sensor and splice
(Paper supply section) sensor do not change their state even
if the paper leading end is pulled out
Remove paper. by a preset length.
1. Paper supply motor (M301) does 1.
faulty.
PDC circuit board
section
section section.
not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
rollers
magazine nip spring
4. Paper does not reach the sensor. 4.
1) D301 cannot detect paper 1) Cut the paper’s leading end
because the paper’s leading straight.
end is cut aslant.
2) Paper protrudes too much 2) Adjust the length of the paper
when setting it. that protrudes from the
magazine.
3) Paper hit the magazine nip 3) Inspect or replace the
roller. magazine nip roller section
guide.
4) Paper is set aslant. 4) Set the paper correctly.
5) Magazine table is incorrectly 5) Inspect or repair the table.
set.
6) Magazine shutter malfunction 6) Replace the cutter guide or
(broken cutter guide pin, faulty magazine.
magazine shutter section)
7) Faulty magazine end detecting 7) Replace the magazine end
plate detecting plate or magazine.
circuit board
3-60

W-2471 Paper jam occurred in printer. Paper feed error
(Paper supply section - Feeding (Causes of the error message)
section) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1.
1) The nip roller or spring is out of 1) Inspect/repair the nip roller and
Remove paper. place. spring.
2) Paper remains in the printer. 2) Remove the paper. 3
3) Deformed or incorrectly 3) Check/repair the guide plate.
installed guide plate
4) The curl of the paper is 4) Replace the paper.
excessive.
2. Feed drive motor 1 (M302) does 2.
faulty.
PDC circuit board
4) Disengaged or worn feed drive 4) Reinstall or replace the gear.
gear
section
3. Back printer entrance sensor 3.
(D302) does not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
(Feeding section - Back printer (Causes of the error message)
1) Back printer clearance is 1) Adjust the clearance correctly.
Remove paper. incorrectly adjusted.
place. spring.
excessive.
faulty.
PDC circuit board
gear
section
3. Back printer entrance sensor 3.
(D302) does not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
3-61

(Back printer section - Register (Causes of the error message)
1) Back printer clearance is 1) Adjust the clearance correctly.
Remove paper. incorrectly adjusted.
place. spring.
excessive.
faulty.
PDC circuit board
gear
section
3. Registration sensor (D303) does 3.
not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
4. Faulty feed roller nip or pre- 4.
registration roller nip mechanism
(The rollers do not nip paper.)
1) Broken nip release cam 1) Replace the cam.
2) Broken nip release arm 2) Reinstall or replace the arm.
3) Faulty mechanism fine 3) Perform fine adjustment again.
adjustment
3-62

(Register section - Sub-scanning (Causes of the error message)
1) Abnormal width detecting 1) (Refer to E-2466.)
Remove paper. operation
2) The magazine ID does not 2) Replace with the correct ID 3
match the paper width. chip, or correct the setting.
3) Abnormal magazine ID 3) (Refer to W-2426.)
detection
4) Deformed, damaged or 4) Inspect or repair the width
incorrectly installed width detecting section.
detecting section
5) Disengaged nip roller or spring 5) Inspect, repair or replace the
nip roller or spring.
6) Deformed or incorrectly 6) Inspect, repair or replace the
installed guide plate. guide plate.
roller
8) Paper remains in the printer. 8) Remove the paper.
9) Heavily curled paper 9) Replace the paper.
2. Registration drive motor (M304) 2.
does not rotate, or the drive
system is faulty.
PDC circuit board
3) Disengaged or worn drive gear 3) Reinstall or replace the gear.
3. Registration sensor (D303) or pre- 3.
exposure sensor (D304) does not
detect paper.
harness between D303/D304 repair/replace the harness.
and the CTP circuit board
2) Faulty D303/D304 2) Replace the sensor.
4. Faulty registration nip or first sub- 4.
scanning roller nip (The rollers do
not nip paper.)
1) Broken nip release cam 1) Replace the cam.
2) Broken nip release arm 2) Reinstall or replace the arm.
3) Faulty mechanism fine 3) Perform the fine adjustment
adjustment again.
5. Sub-scanning drive motor (M305) 5.
does not rotate, or the drive
system is faulty.
PDC circuit board
3) Faulty motor driver 3) Replace the motor driver.
4) Disengaged or broken steel 4) Reinstall or replace the steel
belt belt.
5) Abnormal steel belt tension 5) Adjust the belt tension again.
section system.
6. Exit section up/down belt 6.
malfunction
2) Faulty mechanism fine 2) Perform the fine adjustment
adjustment again.
section section.
3-63

(Exit section) (Causes of the error message)
1. Paper jamming occurred. 1.
Remove paper. 1) The nip roller or spring is out of 1) Inspect or repair the nip roller
place. and spring.
2) Deformed, incorrectly installed 2) Repair or replace the feed belt.
or broken feed belt
3) Deformed or incorrectly 3) Inspect or repair the guide
installed guide plate plate.
rollers
excessive.
2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not 2.
rotate, or the drive system is faulty.
PDC circuit board
3) Disengaged or worn exit drive 3) Reinstall or replace the gear.
motor drive gear
4) Disengaged or worn exit drive 4) Reinstall or replace the belt.
timing belt
5) Disengaged or worn exit drive 5) Reinstall or replace the pulley.
pulley
section section.
3. Processor entry sensor (D305) 3.
does not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
malfunction
2) Incorrectly adjusted up/down 2) Adjust the lowest position of the
belt. up/down belt.
3) Faulty mechanism fine 3) Perform mechanical fine
adjustment adjustment.
section section.
W-2476 Paper jam occurred in printer. The error recovery process used to Wait until the process is completed.
cope with a jam is in progress.
The error recovery process is in
progress. Please wait.
I-2477 Loading paper. (Causes of the error message)
1. The feed section initialization is in 1. Wait until the auto load operation
Please wait. progress during the system startup is complete.
or after a cover is closed.
circuit board
3-64

W-2478 Paper jam occurred in printer or Paper feed error
processor section. (Causes of the error message)
(Exit section - Processor section) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1.
1) The nip roller or spring is out of 1) Inspect or repair the nip roller
Remove paper. place. and spring.
2) Deformed, incorrectly installed 2) Repair or replace the feed belt. 3
or broken feed belt
3) Deformed or incorrectly 3) Inspect or repair the guide
installed guide plate plate.
rollers
5) Paper remains in the printer. 5) Remove the paper.
excessive.
2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not 2.
rotate, or the drive system is faulty.
PDC circuit board
3) Disengaged or worn exit drive 3) Reinstall or replace the gear.
motor drive gear
4) Disengaged or worn exit drive 4) Reinstall or replace the belt.
timing belt
5) Disengaged or worn exit drive 5) Reinstall or replace the pulley.
pulley
section section.
3. Processor entry sensor (D305) 3.
does not detect paper.
CTP circuit board
malfunction
2) Incorrectly adjusted up/down 2) Adjust the lowest position of the
belt. up/down belt.
3) Faulty mechanism fine 3) Perform mechanical fine
adjustment adjustment.
section section.
circuit board
I-2479 Paper-end processing. The paper end process is in Wait until the process is completed.
progress.
Please wait.
W-2480 Paper width and print size Paper width and print size Replace the paper magazine with
mismatched. mismatched. correct one.
Press [OK] to install the correct

magazine.
Press [Output] to output forcibly.

W-2481 Unexposed images remain. But they Specified magazine ID differs from Replace the paper magazine with
cannot be printed because of the installed magazine’s ID. correct one.
magazine ID mismatch.
Press [OK] to replace magazine with

ID=####.
3-65

W-2482 Unexposed images remain. But they Paper width and print size Replace the paper magazine with
cannot be printed because of paper mismatched. correct one.
width mismatch.
Press [OK] to replace the correct

magazine. Press [Output] to output
forcibly. Press [Print Stop] to cancel
print instruction in “2.Print” menu.
W-2483 Unexposed images remain. But they Specified magazine ID differs from Replace the paper magazine with
cannot be printed because of the installed magazine’s ID. correct one.
magazine ID mismatch.
Press [OK] to replace magazine with

ID=####.
Press [Print Stop] to cancel print

instruction in “2.Print” menu.
W-2484 Preparing in the printer processor. A printing command received from Wait until printer processor
the client while the printer processor preparation is completed.
Please wait. is busy.
W-2485 Magazine door opened. Magazine door open is detected Close the door and reprint if the prints
during paper processing. are fogged.
Close it. Paper may become fogged if
it exists.
W-2490 Cannot be performed due to printing. The output maintenance is attempted Wait until printing completes.
during printing.
W-2491 Cannot be performed due to paper The output maintenance is attempted Perform the output maintenance after
end process. during paper end process. paper end process.
W-2492 Cannot be performed due to feeding The output maintenance is attempted Wait until paper feeding completes.
paper. during the paper feeding.
W-2493 Error occurred in getting master Error occurred in getting master Clear the error.
magazine ID. magazine ID.
W-2495 Master magazine is not loaded. Upkeep printing is attempted without Install the master magazine.
the master magazine.
Load it.
W-2496 Printing completed because of paper Paper end has occurred during the Load new paper in the magazine.
end. output maintenance.
Printing canceled.
Install new paper, and start printing

again.
W-2497 Condition upkeep printing not Paper jamming has occurred during Solve paper jamming.
performed due to lack of conditions. upkeep printing.
E-2501 Anti-dust shutter abnormal. The mechanical shutter linked to the
optical system did not function. (The
Consult your technical shutter-open signal could not be
representative. detected by the shutter-open sensor.)
1. Blown fuse (FC07) in the LDD 1. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
harness that includes the repair/replace the harness.
connector in the laser unit
4. Faulty laser unit 4. Replace the laser unit.
3-66

E-2502 Anti-dust fan malfunctions. The mechanical fan linked to the
optical system did not function. (The
Consult your technical rotation sensor did not function.)
harness that includes the repair/replace the harness. 3
connector (JROS) in the laser unit
2. Poorly connected fan connector 2. Reconnect the connector.
circuit board
E-2503 The polygon malfunctions. The mechanical polygon did not
function. (The rotation sensor did not
Consult your technical function.)
harness that includes the replace/repair the harness.
connector (JROS) in the laser unit
2. Poorly connected connector 2. Reconnect the connector.
(JPLG) at the rear of the laser unit
3. Blown fuse (FC06) in the LDD
circuit board 3. Replace the fuse.
4. Blown fuse (FH12) in the PWR
circuit board 4. Replace the fuse.
5. Faulty LDD circuit board
6. Faulty PWR circuit board 5. Replace the LDD circuit board.
6. Replace the PWR circuit board.
E-2506 The exposure section cooling fan The fan in the exposure section did
malfunctions. not function. (The rotation sensor did
not function.)
representative. 1. Poorly contacting connector for the 1. Reconnect the connector.
cooling fan
circuit board
3. Faulty cooling fan 3. Replace the fan.
4. Faulty LDD 4. Replace the LDD circuit board.
W-2507 Condition setup for present paper not When a magazine is installed, a
performed. message indicating that the density
measurement has not been
When replacing the paper with the performed is displayed.
one with different emulsion number, 1. The magazine has been replaced. 1. Perform the paper condition setup.
make sure to perform condition setup
for paper.
E-2508 The communication error occurred in A timeout with the optical section
the printer processor. (LDA) occurred.
(GHT-LDA) (Causes of the error message)
Consult your technical harness between the GHT and replace the harness.
representative. LDA circuit boards
3. Faulty LDA circuit board 3. Replace the LDA circuit board.
3-67

E-2509 R-laser (R-LD) information failure. Incorrect data read from the
EEPROM in the laser unit during the
Call your technical representative. system startup.
1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 1. Replace the laser unit.
2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
or JML2) or broken harness replace the harness.
between the laser unit and the
JML circuit board
circuit board
4. Abnormal system software 4. Restart the system. Reinstall it if
the problem occurs again.
(NOTE 1)
E-2510 G-laser (G-SHG) information failure. Incorrect data read from the
2. Poorly contacting connector 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
(JML6) or broken harness replace the harness.
JML circuit board
circuit board
(NOTE 1)
E-2511 B-laser (B-SHG) information failure. Incorrect data read from the
2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
or JML2) or broken harness replace the harness.
JML circuit board
circuit board
(NOTE 1)
E-2512 R laser (R-LD) temperature outside Laser temperature is outside of the
specified range. specified range during the
initialization.
Warming-up of laser stopped. (Causes of the error message)
1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the 1. Replace the fuse.
If problems persist after the restart, LDD circuit board
consult your technical representative. 2. Poorly contacting connector or 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
broken harness between the laser replace the harness.
unit and the LDD circuit board
3-68

E-2513 G laser (G-SHG) temperature outside Laser temperature is outside of the
initialization.
If problems persist after the restart, (JML5) or broken harness replace the harness. 3
consult your technical representative. between the laser unit and the
JML circuit board
LDD circuit board
E-2514 B laser (B-SHG) temperature outside Laser temperature is outside of the
initialization.
If problems persist after the restart, (JML8) or broken harness replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. between the laser unit and the
JML circuit board
LDD circuit board.
E-2515 R-laser (R-LD) temperature error When laser temperature is outside of
occurred. the specified range
Warming-up of laser stopped. 1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the 1. Replace the fuse.
LDD circuit board
If problems persist after the restart, 2. Broken wire in the laser unit 2. Replace the laser unit.
E-2516 G-laser (G-SHG) temperature error When laser temperature is outside of
LDD circuit board
E-2517 B-laser (B-SHG) temperature error When laser temperature is outside of
LDD circuit board
W-2518 A temperature error detected in the When the ambient temperature is
printer. outside of the specified range
Warming-up of laser stopped. 1. The current temperature is above 1. Measure the internal temperature,
(or below) the specified range. and adjust it (using an air
Check it referring to the manual. conditioner) to within 5 to 45
degrees centigrade as per “Printer
Temperature Display (0524).”
harness of the temperature sensor replace the harness.
3. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) 3. Replace the fuse.
in the LDD circuit board
4. Faulty LDD circuit board 4. Replace the LDD circuit board
5. Faulty temperature sensor 5. Replace the sensor.
3-69

E-2519 AOM temperature error occurred. An abnormal temperature was
observed at the AOM immediately
If problems persist after the restart, before the exposure.
consult your technical representative. (Causes of the error message)
harness between the LDD circuit replace the harness.
board and the AOM driver
2. Blown fuse in the LDD circuit 2. Replace the fuse.
board
3. Faulty AOM driver 3. Replace the AOM driver.
E-2520 Excessive R laser (R-LD) current The LD current limiter detected an
detected. excessive current.
If problems persist after the restart, 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 1. Replace the laser unit.
consult your technical representative. 2. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) 2. Replace the fuse.
E-2521 Excessive G laser (G-SHG) current The LD current limiter detected an
E-2522 Excessive B laser (B-SHG) current The LD current limiter detected an
E-2523 R laser (R-LD) current value outside The PD current is not within the
specified range. specified range.
If problems persist after the restart, 1. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) 1. Replace the fuse.
consult your technical representative. in the LDD circuit board
2. Broken wire in the laser unit 2. Replace the laser unit.
E-2524 G laser (G-SHG) current value The PD current is not within the
outside specified of range. specified range.
2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH14) in the 2. Replace the fuse.
PWR circuit board
E-2525 B laser (B-SHG) current value The PD current is not within the
outside specified range. specified range.
2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH15) in the 2. Replace the fuse.
PWR circuit board
W-2526 R laser (R-LD) is about to its lifetime.
Laser deterioration was detected in
the latest post-operational check.
No problem for the moment, but (Causes of the error message)
consult your technical representative. 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 1. Replace the laser unit.
2. Deteriorated laser 2. Replace the laser unit.
3-70

W-2527 G laser (G-SHG) is about to its Laser deterioration was detected in
lifetime. the latest post-operational check.
No problem for the moment, but 1. The temperature has not been 1. Perform temperature optimization
consult your technical representative. periodically set to an optimum by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG)
value. Optimal Temperature Setup 3
2. Incorrect data in the laser unit (0522).”
2. Replace the laser unit.
W-2528 B laser (B-SHG) is about to its Laser deterioration was detected in
lifetime. the latest post-operational check.
No problem for the moment, but 1. The temperature has not been 1. Perform temperature optimization
consult your technical representative. periodically set to an optimum by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG)
value. Optimal Temperature Setup
2. Incorrect data in the laser unit (0522).”
2. Replace the laser unit.
E-2529 SOS detection failed. When SOS cannot be detected
If problems persist after the restart, 1. Cable to the AOM driver is not 1. Confirm that the AOM driver is
consult your technical representative. connected or the wires are properly connected.
incorrectly swapped (check them
for the correct colors).
E-2530 Electrical failure occurred in the The power supply voltages are
exposure section. outside of the specified range.
If problems persist, call your technical 1. The cable between the LDD and 1. Connect the cable properly.
representative. PWR circuit boards is not
connected.
3. Blown fuse(s) (FH9 to FH15) in the 3. Replace the fuse.
LDD circuit board
W-2532 G laser (SHG) temperature SHG needs to be set.
adjustment required. (Causes of the error message)
1. Three months have passed since 1. Perform temperature optimization
Set the G-SHG opt. temp. in “G,B the setting was last performed. by referring to “G, B Laser (SHG)
Laser(SHG) Opt. Temp. Setup” in the Optimal Temperature Setup
“Setup and Mainte.” - “05. Printer (0522).”
Adj./Mainte.” menu.
W-2533 10 days passed since the last paper The paper condition setup for the Perform the paper condition setup.
condition setup. master magazine has not been
performed for 10 days.
We recommend paper condition
setup.
E-2534 An error detected by R-laser(R-LD) Laser thermistor detects an error.
sensor. (Causes of the error message)
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the laser unit replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. and the JML circuit board
2. Faulty JML circuit board 2. Replace the JML circuit board.
E-2535 An error detected by G-laser(G-SHG) Laser thermistor detects an error.
3-71

E-2536 An error detected by B-laser(B-SHG) Laser thermistor detects an error.
W-2537 Laser temperature adjustment not After the initialization, the ambient
started because the ambient temperature has been outside of the
temperature is too low(high). specified range for more than the
specified period.
Adjust the ambient temp. between 15 (Causes of the error message)
to 30-C. (Laser temp. adjustment will 1. The current temperature is above 1. Measure the internal temperature,
be started when the ambient temp. (or below) the specified range. and adjust it (using an air
exceeds 5-C.) conditioner) to within 5 to 45
degrees centigrade as per “Printer
Temperature Display (0524).”
harness of the temperature replace the harness.
sensor.
(THA20)
W-2538 Anti-dust filter of laser unit is about to
The air filter has not been replaced
its lifetime. during the specified period.
No problem for the moment, but 1. The specified time has elapsed 1. Replace the filter and click the
consult your technical representative. since the filter was last replaced. [Replace] button in “Filter
Replacement History (0541).”
E-2539 Anti-dust filter of laser unit is about to The air filter has not been replaced
its periodic replacing time. during the specified period.
Consult your technical 1. The specified time has elapsed 1. Replace the filter and click the
representative. since the filter was last replaced. [Replace] button in “Filter
Replacement History (0541).”
W-2540 Ambient temperature too low (high). The ambient temperature is outside
of the range between 15 to 30
Adjust the ambient temperature degrees centigrade (by default).
between 15 to 30-C. (Causes of the error message)
1. The current temperature is above 1. Measure the internal temperature,
(or below) the specified range. and adjust it (using an
airconditioner) to within 15 to 30
degrees centigrade as per
“Displaying the Internal Printer
Temperature (0524).”
harness of the temperature sensor replace the harness.
4. Faulty LDD circuit board 4. Replace the LDD circuit board
W-2541 Periodic time to set the optimal SHG needs to be set.
temperatures of B laser (SHG). (Causes of the error message)
1. Three months have passed since 1. Perform temperature optimization
Set the B-SHG opt. temp. in “G,B the setting was last performed. by referring to “G, B Laser (SHG)
Laser(SHG) Opt. Temp. Setup” in the Optimal Temperature Setup
“Setup and Mainte.” - “05. Printer (0522).”
Adj./Mainte.” menu.
3-72

E-2542 R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature error R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature is
occurred. outside of the specified range.
1. Disconnected connector (JML1, 1. Reconnect the connector.
If problems persist after the restart, JML2)
consult your technical representive. 2. Broken harness between the laser 2. Repair/replace the harness.
unit and the JML circuit board 3
3. Faulty JMLcircuit board 3. Replace the JML circuit board.
W-2550 Reading of print length failed due to Print length cannot be obtained when Resolve the error.
error. performing upkeep print.
W-2551 Density measurement cannot be The [Measure] button is clicked after Enable density measurement
allowed. density measurement is canceled.
W-2552 The density measurement is not Density measurement time-out
complete within a specified time. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected cable when density 1. Connect the cable correctly.
is measuring.
2. Damaged densitometer when 2. Inspect and replace the
density is measuring densitometer.
W-2553 The densitometer may malfunction. Data size from the densitometer is
abnormal.
representative. 1. Densitometer error (red LED 1. Reset the densitometer. (NOTE 2)
lights)
2. Faulty densitometer 2. Replace the densitometer.
W-2554 Check the outputted upkeep print and Density measurement operation error
then perform the density for upkeep printing
measurement again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Densitometer error (red LED 1. Reset the densitometer. (NOTE 2)
lights)
W-2555 Density measurement failed due to The [Measure] button is clicked but
the error occurrence. measurement cannot be started
because error has been occurred in
the densitometer.
lights)
W-2556 Initializing is in progress, so Density measurement has been Wait until initialization completes.
temperature measurement cannot be started during densitometer
started. After initialization, retry initialization.
measurement.
NOTE 2: Press the densitometer reset switch.
Reset Switch (AD200)
3-73

W-2557 Temperature measurement cannot be The [Measure] button is clicked but
started. measurement cannot be started
because error has occurred in the
Press the [Reset] button of the densitometer.
densitometer, and then retry it. (Causes of the error message)
lights)
W-2558 Check the connection of the Density measurement is attempted
densitometer and the power cable, but no response returns from the
retry it. densitometer.
If problems persist, consult your 1. Disconnected cable when density 1. Connect the cable correctly.
technical representative. is measuring.
2. Damaged densitometer when 2. Inspect and replace the
density is measuring densitometer.
W-2559 Canceling of densitometer Density measurement interrupting
measurement failed. operation failed.
Check if the paper remains. 1. Chart jamming in densitometer 1. Reset the densitometer to eject
the chart. If the chart does not
eject, remove it by hand and reset
the densitometer. (NOTE 2)
W-2561 Detecting of leading end of the print The leading end of the print upkeep
failed. chart cannot be detected when
measuring density.
Insert the upkeep print into the (Causes of the error message)
densitometer correctly, and perform 1. Insufficiently inserted chart. 1. Insert the chart fully.
the measurement again.
W-2562 Detecting of leading end of the print The leading end of the condition
failed. setup chart cannot be detected when
measuring density.
Insert the condition setup print into (Causes of the error message)
the densitometer correctly, and 1. Insufficiently inserted chart. 1. Insert the chart fully.
perform the measurement again.
W-2563 Paper is inserted wrongly or Pattern reading failed when
incorrectly. measuring print upkeep chart density.
Insert the upkeep print into the 1. Incorrect chart insertion direction 1. Insert the chart correctly.
densitometer correctly, and perform 2. Tilted chart or out of lane 2. Adjust chart guides correctly.
the measurement again. 3. Inserted print is not for upkeep 3. Insert the print upkeep chart.
printing.
3-74

W-2564 Paper is inserted wrongly or Pattern reading failed when
incorrectly. measuring condition setup chart
density.
the densitometer correctly, and 1. Incorrect chart insertion direction 1. Insert the chart correctly.
perform the measurement again. 2. Tilted chart or out of lane 2. Adjust chart guides correctly. 3
3. Inserted print is not for condition 3. Insert the condition setup chart.
setup.
W-2565 Detecting of trailing end of the print Chart does not eject from the
failed. densitometer.
Insert the upkeep print into the 1. Chart jamming in densitometer 1. Reset the densitometer to eject
densitometer correctly, and perform the chart. If the chart does not
the measurement again. eject, remove it by hand and reset
W-2566 Detecting of trailing end of the print Chart does not eject from the
failed. densitometer.
Insert the condition setup print into 1. Chart jamming in densitometer 1. Reset the densitometer to eject
the densitometer correctly, and the chart. If the chart does not
perform the measurement again. eject, remove it by hand and reset
W-2567 Coming-out of the print failed. Chart does not eject from the
densitometer.
Insert the upkeep print into the (Causes of the error message)
densitometer correctly, and perform 1. Chart jamming in densitometer 1. Reset the densitometer to eject
the measurement again. the chart. If the chart does not
W-2568 Coming-out of the print failed. Chart does not eject from the
densitometer.
the densitometer correctly, and 1. Chart jamming in densitometer 1. Reset the densitometer to eject
perform the measurement again. the chart. If the chart does not
W-2569 Check the outputted setup print and Density measurement operation error
then perform the density for condition setup printing
measurement again. (Causes of the error message)
lights)
E-2571 GMB CB is abnormal. GMB CB is abnormal.
Consult your technical 1. Faulty GMB circuit board 1. Replace the GMB circuit board.
representative.
3-75

W-2572 The exposure section cooling air filter The exposure section cooling air filter Replace the air filter.
is about to its periodic replacing time. use time exceeds 54,000 minutes.
Replace it referring to the manual.

W-2601 Paper jam occurred in the processor Paper is not fed out after the specified
section. time has passed.
#### sheet of paper remain in 1. Incorrectly installed unit 1. Reinstall each unit.
processor. (processing rack, crossover rack,
dryer rack, etc.)
Remove paper. 2. Paper remains in the processor 2. Remove paper.
due to a power failure during paper
feed.
3. Poorly connected connector 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/
(CTP19) or broken harness replace the harness.
between the Dryer section exit
sensor (D411) and the CTP circuit
board
5. Faulty processing rack or 5. Clean or replace the parts or unit.
crossover rack
W-2602 Paper remains in the processor The power is turned OFF while paper Remove the paper in the processor or
section. is in the processor. dryer section.
Remove paper.
W-2604 Sorter driving abnormal. The sorter driving is abnormal.
Consult your technical 1. Faulty sorter flapper position 1. Replace the sensor.
representative. sensor (D414)
2. Faulty sorter flapper drive motor 2. Replace the motor.
(M404)
E-2606 Replenisher cartridge opening drive Replenisher cartridge section is
motor (M402) failure. faulty.
Consult your technical 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
representative. harness between the replenisher replace the harness.
cartridge opening drive motor
(M402) and the CTP circuit board
harness between the cartridge box replace the harness.
sensor (D408, D409) and the CTP
circuit board
4. Faulty D408 or D409 4. Replace the sensor.
harness between the replenisher replace the harness.
door detecting interlock
switch(D410) and the PAC circuit
board
6. Faulty D410 6. Replace the interlock switch.
W-2607 PSR replenisher nearly empty. When the PSR lower limit sensor
detects “solution low” during the FA
Mix the replenisher. process
1. The PSR tank is empty. 1. Add two liters of water.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Correctly connect, repair, or
harness between the PSR replace the harness.
external replenisher solution level
sensor (FS418) and the CTP16 in
3. Faulty FS418 3. Replace the sensor.
3-76

W-2609 The dryer unit or the dryer cover Dryer unit or dryer section cover is
opened. opened while paper is processed in
the processor.
Processing cancelled. (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit 1. Correctly install the dryer unit.
Paper may remain. 2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover 2. Correctly install the dryer cover. 3
Remove paper, and then start (incorrectly tightened
processing. thumbscrews)
harness between the dryer unit replace the harness.
and the PWR circuit board
4. Blown fuse related to the interlock 4. Replace the fuse.
switch
5. Faulty PWR circuit board 5. Replace the PWR circuit board
W-2610 PSR empty. Evaporation correction This message appears when the Pour 8L of PSR.
cancelled. PSR lower sensor detects “no
solution” during the evaporation
Replenish 8L of PSR. correction.
W-2611 The dryer unit or the dryer section Dryer unit or dryer section cover is
cover opened. left open while paper is processed in
the processor.
Close the cover. (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit 1. Correctly install the dryer unit.
2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover 2. Correctly install the dryer cover.
(incorrectly tightened
thumbscrews)
3. Deformed interlock detecting plate 3. Repair/replace the detecting plate.
harness between the dryer unit replace the harness.
and the PWR circuit board
E-2614 P1 processing tank temperature not Solution temperature does not rise
rising. more than 1°C within 30 minutes.
The heaters (H401 to H404) turned 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
off. harness between the P1 solution replace the harness.
tank heater (H401) and the PAC6
If problems persist after the restart, in the PAC circuit board
consult your technical representative. 2. Faulty electrical section 2. Repair the electrical section.
3. Faulty H401 3. Replace the heater.
4. Clogged hose, nozzle or 4. Clean the hose or nozzle, or
circulation filter replace the circulation filter.

harness between the P1 replace the harness.
circulation pump (PU401) and the
PAC circuit board
6. Faulty P1 solution temperature 6. Replace the sensor.
sensor (TS401)
3-77

E-2615 P2 processing tank temperature not Solution temperature does not rise
rising. more than 1°C within 30 minutes.
off. harness between the P2 solution replace the harness.
heater (H402) and the PAC6 in the
If problems persist after the restart, PAC circuit board

PAC circuit board
sensor (TS402)
E-2616 PS1/2/3 processing tank Solution temperature does not rise
temperatures not rising. more than 1°C within 30 minutes.
Processing tank heaters (H401 to 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
H404) turned off. harness between the PS1/2/3 replace the harness.
solution heater (H403) and the
If problems persist after the restart, PAC5 in the PAC circuit board
harness between the PS1/2/3 replace the harness.
circulation pump (PU403/PU404/
PU405) and the PAC circuit board
6. Faulty PS1/2/3 solution 6. Replace the sensor.
temperature sensor (TS403)
E-2617 PS4 processing tank temperatures Solution temperature does not rise
not rising. more than 1°C within 30 minutes.
Processing tank heaters (H401 to 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
H404) turned off. harness between the PS4 solution replace the harness.
heater (H404) and the PAC5 in the
If problems persist after the restart, PAC circuit board
harness between the PS4 replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
6. Faulty PS4 solution temperature 6. Replace the sensor.
sensor (TS404)
7. Blown fuse in the CTP circuit 7. Replace the fuse.
board
E-2618 Dryer section temperature not rising. Solution temperature does not rise
more than 1°C within 1 minute during
Dryer section heaters (H406) turned heat-up.
off. (Causes of the error message)
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the dryer heater replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. (H406) and the PAC circuit board
2. Faulty electrical section 2. Repair the electrical section.
3-78

E-2619 P1 processing tank temperature is Abnormal P1 solution temperature
out of range. (Causes of the error message)
The heaters (H401 to H404) turned harness between the P1 solution replace the harness.
off. heater (H401) and the PAC6 in the
PAC circuit board 3
If problems persist after the restart, 2. Faulty electrical section 2. Repair the electrical section.
consult your technical representative. 3. Faulty H401 3. Replace the heater.
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS401)
E-2620 P2 processing tank temperature is Abnormal P2 solution temperature
The heaters (H401 to H404) turned harness between the P2 solution replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS402)
E-2621 PS1/2/3 processing tank temperature Abnormal PS1/PS2/PS3 solution
is out of range. temperature
off. harness between the PS1/2/3 replace the harness.
solution heater (H403) and the
If problems persist after the restart, PAC5 in the PAC circuit board
harness between the PS1/2/3 replace the harness.
circulation pump (PU403/PU404/
3-79

E-2622 PS4 processing tank temperature is Abnormal PS4 solution temperature
The heaters (H401 to H404) turned harness between the PS4 solution replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
harness between the PS4 replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS404)
E-2623 Dryer section temperature is out of Abnormal dryer temperature
range. The heaters (H406) turned off. (Causes of the error message)
Heater (H406) turned off. harness between the dryer heater replace the harness.
(H406) and the PAC circuit board
E-2624 P1 safety thermostat (D401) Safety thermostat in P1 processing
activated. tank is activated.
The heaters (H401 to H404) turned 1. Clogged hose, nozzle or 1. Clean the hose or nozzle, or
off. circulation filter replace the circulation filter.
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the P1 replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. circulation pump (PU401) and the
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS401)
E-2625 P2 safety thermostat (D402) Safety thermostat in P2 processing
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the P2 replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS402)
E-2626 PS1/2/3 safety thermostat (D403) Safety thermostat in PS1/2/3
activated. processing tank is activated.
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the PS1/2/3 replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. circulation pump (PU403/PU404/
3-80

E-2627 PS4 safety thermostat (D404) Safety thermostat in PS4 processing
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ 3
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the PS4 replace the harness.
PAC circuit board
sensor (TS404)
E-2628 Safety thermostat in dryer section Safety thermostat in the dryer section
(D406) activated. is activated.
The heater (H406) turned off. 1. Faulty dryer fan (F405) 1. Replace the fan.
If problems persist after the restart, harness between the dryer air replace the harness.
consult your technical representative. temperature sensor (TS406) and
the CTP13 in the CTP circuit board
3. Faulty TS406 3. Replace the sensor.
dryer duct.
W-2629 P1 solution level has fallen. The solution level of the P1
processing tank is low.
Temperature adjustment stopped. (Causes of the error message)
1. Solution leak 1. Repair the solution leak.
Refer to manual for guidance. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector, or
harness between the P1 solution repair/replace the harness.
level sensor (FS401) and the
CTP15 in the CTP circuit board
W-2630 P2 solution level has fallen. The solution level of the P2
harness between the P2 solution repair/replace the harness.
W-2631 PS1 solution level has fallen. The solution level of the PS1
harness between the PS1 solution repair/replace the harness.
3. Faulty sensor (FS403) 3. Replace the sensor.
3. Safety FS404 3. Replace the sensor.
3-81

harness between the sensor repair/replace the harness.
(FS406) and the CTP15 in the
CTP circuit board
W-2635 P1R replenisher solution level has When the P1R lower limit sensor
fallen. detects “solution low” during the FA
process
Mix the replenisher. (Causes of the error message)
1. P1R solution level is low. 1. Replenish the P1R.
harness between the P1R external repair/replace the harness.
replenisher sensor (FS416) and
W-2636 P2RA replenisher solution level has P2RA lower limit sensor has detected Replenish the P2RA.
fallen. “solution low” level.
Printing can continue a little further.

W-2637 P2RB replenisher solution level has P2RB lower limit sensor has detected Replenish the P2RB.
fallen. “solution low” level.
Printing can continue a little further.

W-2638 P1R replenisher empty. When the P1R lower limit sensor
detects “Completely no solution”
Add replenisher. during the FA process.
1. No solution in the P1R tank. 1. Replenish the P1R.
replenisher level sensor (FS416)
and the CTP16 in the CTP circuit
board
W-2639 P2RA replenisher empty. This message appears when P2RA Replenish the P2RA.
lower sensor detects that “completely
Mix the replenisher. no solution” is resolved.
W-2640 P2RB replenisher empty. This message appears when P2RB Replenish the P2RB.
lower sensor detects that “completely
Prepare replenisher solution. no solution” is resolved.
3-82

W-2644 W2 waste tank nearly full. When the external waste solution
sensor detects “Solution exists”
Collect it in the recovery tank. (Causes of the error message)
1. The external waste solution level 1. Collect the waste solution.
sensor (FS420) detected “Solution
exists.” 3
harness between FS420 and the repair/replace the harness.
W-2645 W2 waste tank full. When the external waste solution
sensor detected “solution completely
Collect it in the recovery tank. full”
1. The external waste solution level 1. Collect the waste solution.
sensor (FS420) detected “Solution
exists.”
harness between FS420 and the repair/replace the harness.
W-2648 PSR replenisher nearly empty. When water level is lowerd 3 liters
after the PSR upper limit sensor
Pour 4L of replenisher and then put detects “No solution”
one FSC tablet into the port. (Causes of the error message)
1. PSR solution level is low. 1. Add one FSC and four liters of
PSR.
harness between the PSR upper replace the harness.
W-2649 PSR replenisher empty. When the PSR lower limit sensor
detects “solution low”
Pour 8L of replenisher and then put (Causes of the error message)
two FSC tablet into the port. 1. The PSR tank is empty. 1. Add two FSCs and eight liters of
PSR.
harness between the PSR lower replace the harness.
W-2650 Waste solution tank nearly full. When the internal waste solution
sensor detects “Solution exists.”
Collect it in the recovery tank in the (Causes of the error message)
W2 manner. 1. The waste solution level sensor 1. Collect the waste solution.
(FS415) indicates “Solution exists.”
harness between FS415 and the replace the harness.
4. Faulty CTP circuit board 4. Replace the CTP circuit board
3-83

W-2651 Waste solution tank full. When the external waste solution
sensor detects “solution completely
Collect it in the recovery tank in the full”
W2 manner. (Causes of the error message)
1. The waste solution level sensor 1. Collect the waste solution.
(FS415) indicates “Solution exists.”
harness between FS415 and the replace the harness.
4. Faulty CTP circuit board 4. Replace the CTP circuit board
E-2657 P1R replenishment pump (PU408) or When the integrated discharge up to
P1R replenisher stirring valve (S410) the P1R upper limit sensor exceeds
malfunctions. the specified value (2498 ml)
harness between P1R replenisher repair/replace the harness.
pump (PU408) and the PAC3 in
the PAC circuit board
2. Faulty PU408 2. Replace the pump.
harness between P1R stirring repair/replace the harness.
valve (S410) and the PDC12 in the
PDC circuit board
4. Faulty S410 4. Replace the stirring valve.
harness between P1R cartridge repair/replace the harness.
washing valve (S407) and the
PDC12 in the PDC circuit board
6. Faulty S407 6. Replace the washing valve.
harness between P1R upper level repair/replace the harness.
sensor (FS407) and the CTP16 in
E-2658 P2RA replenishment pump (PU409) When the integrated discharge up to
or P2RA replenisher cartridge the P2RA upper limit sensor exceeds
washing valve (S408) malfunctions. the specified value (971 ml)
harness between the P2RA repair/replace the harness.
replenisher pump (PU409) and the
PAC3 in the PAC circuit board
cartridge washing valve (S408)
and the PDC12 in the PDC circuit
board
harness between the P2RB upper repair/replace the harness.
3-84

E-2659 P2RB replenishment pump (PU410) When the integrated discharge up to
or P2RB replenisher cartridge the P2RB upper limit sensor exceeds
washing valve (S409) malfunctions. the specified value (971 ml)
harness between the P2RB repair/replace the harness. 3
harness between the P2RB repair/replace the harness.
board
W-2660 PSR replenisher empty. When the PSR lower limit sensor
1. The PSR tank is empty. 1. Add eight liters of water into the
PSR.
harness between the PSR replace the harness.
external replenisher level sensor
CTP circuit board
I-2662 Performing the evaporation Evaporation replenishment is in Wait until the process is completed.
correction. progress.
Warming-up will be started after the

evaporation correction.
Please wait.
E-2663 P1R replenisher pump (PU408) When the integrated discharge
malfunctions. between the P1R upper and lower
limit sensors exceeds the specified
Call your technical representative. value
harness between the P1R repair/replace the harness.
harness between the P1R lower repair/replace the harness.
3-85

E-2664 P2RA replenisher pump (PU409) When the integrated discharge
malfunctions. between the P2RA upper and lower
harness between the P2RA lower repair/replace the harness.
E-2665 P2RB replenisher pump (PU410) When the integrated discharge
malfunctions. between the P2RB upper and lower
harness between the P2RB lower repair/replace the harness.
W-2666 P2R replenisher nearly empty. When the P2R lower limit sensor
1. The replenisher solution level is 1. Replenish the P2R tank.
low.
harness between the external repair/replace the harness.
board
W-2667 P2R replenisher empty. When the P2R lower limit sensor
detects “solution completely empty”
Mix the replenisher. during the FA process
1. The P2R tank is empty. 1. Replenish the P2R tank.
board
W-2670 Replenisher cartridge not loaded. (Causes of the error message)
1. The replenisher cartridge is not 1. Install a new replenisher cartridge.
Install new replenisher cartridge. installed.
harness between the replenisher repair/replace the harness.
cartridge sensor (D407) and the
3-86

W-2671 Replenisher door open. The replenisher box door is open.
Close it. 1. The replenisher box door is open. 1. Close the replenisher box door.
harness between the replenisher repair/replace the harness.
door detecting interlock switch 3
(D410) and the PWR4 in the PWR
circuit board
W-2672 PSR replenisher nearly empty. When the PSR upper limit level
sensor detects “solution low”
Pour replenisher until this message (Causes of the error message)
disappears. 1. The replenisher solution level is 1. Add PSR until the message
low. disappears.
harness between the PSR upper repair/replace the harness.
E-2673 Opening of replenisher cartridge When the lower limit sensor does not
failed. detect “solution exists” within a
specific time after the cartridge is
Call your technical representative. opened.
1. Faulty replenisher cartridge 1. • Check if any solution remains in
opening the cartridge due to an opening
failure. If an opening error
occurred, also check whether or
not the opening section is
broken.
• If an opening error occurred but
no abnormality was found, drain
off the P1R,P2RA,P2RB
replenisher tanks, set a new
replenisher cartridge and
resume operation.
2. Clogged replenishment pipe(s) 2. Check whether or not foreign
matter is caught in the hopper
section, the hose of the
replenisher tank is clogged, or
solution has leaked from the
hopper section. If any abnormality
is found, correct it.
3. Faulty replenisher tank lower level 3. Replace the sensor.
sensor (FS414)
3-87

W-2674 The replenisher cartridge that is When the lower limit sensor detected
currently used is empty. “solution low in all tanks” within
specific a preset time after the valve
Insert a new replenisher cartridge. was opened
1. An empty replenisher cartridge is 1. Install a new replenisher cartridge.
installed.
2. The replenisher cartridge is not 2. Install a new replenisher cartridge.
installed.
harness between the lower level repair/replace the harness.
sensor (FS411,FS412,FS413) and
4. Faulty sensor 4. Replace the sensor.
(FS411,FS412,FS413)
harness between the cartridge repair/replace the harness.
setting sensor (D407) and the
E-2675 P1R replenisher cartridge washing When the P1R replenisher upper limit
valve (S407) or P1R replenisher sensor detects “solution low”
stirring valve (S410) malfunctions. (Causes of the error message)
Call your technical representative. harness between the P1R stirring repair/replace the harness.
valve (S410) and the PDC12 in the
PDC circuit board
2. Faulty S410 2. Replace the stirring valve.
harness between the P1R repair/replace the harness.
board
harness between the auto washing repair/replace the harness.
pump (PU407) and the PDC9 in
the PDC circuit board
6. Faulty PU407 6. Replace the washing pump.
harness between the P1R upper repair/replace the harness.
E-2676 P2RA replenisher cartridge washing When the P2RA replenisher upper
valve (S408) malfunctions. limit sensor detects “solution low”
board
harness between the P2RA upper repair/replace the harness.
3-88

E-2677 P2RB replenisher cartridge washing When the P2RB replenisher upper
valve (S409) malfunctions. limit sensor detects “solution low”
cartridge washing valve (S409) 3
board
W-2680 Number of prints exceeds limit. The integrated replenishment of P1R Clear the error previously displayed.
exceeded the specified value.
Cancel printing.
I-2681 Mixing replenisher. Replenisher box door opening is –
designated during replenisher mixing.
Please wait. (Causes of the error message)
1. When replenisher mixing is in
progress during system start-up.
2. When installation opening is
specified during opening
3. When the solution exceeds the
specified amount
W-2686 Washing solution nearly empty. When the washing solution level
sensor detects “solution low” during
Replenish the cleaning water. the FA process.
1. Low solution level 1. Add eight liters of water into the
tank.
harness between the external replace the harness.
washing solution level sensor
CTP circuit board
W-2688 Washing solution empty. When the washing solution level
sensor detects “solution completely
Replenish the cleaning water. empty” during the FA process.
1. Low solution level 1. Add eight liters of water into the
tank.
harness between the external replace the harness.
washing solution level sensor
CTP circuit board
I-2689 The replenisher is mixed. The previous opening conditions Replace the replenisher cartridge.
were detected.
Replace the replenisher cartridge.
3-89

I-2691 Solution remains in the replenisher When the replenisher lower limit
tank. sensor detects “solution exists”
Consult your technical 1. Solution remains in the replenisher 1. Drain the solution.
representative. tank.
harness between the lower level replace the harness.
sensor (FS411, FS412, FS413)
board
3. Faulty lower level sensor (FS411, 3. Replace the sensor.
FS412, FS413)
I-2692 Intermittent operation. The auto intermittent operation is in Wait until completion.
progress.
Please wait.
I-2693 Processing... Auto washing was attempted while Wait until the process is completed.
the processor section was
Please wait. processing.
W-2701 Sorting failed. Paper overlapping occurred when
sorting.
Check the number of prints that were (Causes of the error message)
outputted in the sorter. 1. The next paper caught up with the 1. Clean the processing rack.
paper in the processor.
2. Paper jamming occurred at the 2. Remove paper.
dryer exit.
3. The actuator of the dryer section 3. Release the actuator.
exit sensor (D411) was stuck.
E-2702 An error occurred in the solution The thermistor connector is out of
temperature sensors (TS401 to place.
TS404 and TS406). (Causes of the error message)
The connectors of the solution harness at the temperature sensor repair/replace the harness.
temperature sensors may be (TS401, TS402, TS403, TS404,
disconnected. TS406)
Consult your technical (TS401, TS402, TS403, TS404,
representative. TS406)
E-2703 An error occurred in the solution Short-circuited thermistor
temperature sensors (TS401 to (Causes of the error message)
TS404 and TS406). 1. Temperature sensor (TS401, 1. Replace the sensor.
TS402, TS403, TS404, TS406) is
The solution temperature sensors short-circuited.
may be shorted.

representative.
W-2704 PSR replenisher empty. 3.5 liters of solution has been used Add one FSC and 4 liters of PSR.
after the PSR upper level sensor
Pour 4L of FRSS, and then put one detects “solution low.”
FSC tablet into the port.
W-2705 PSR replenisher nearly empty. When the washing solution level
sensor detects “solution low”
Pour replenisher until this message (Causes of the error message)
disappears, and then put one FSC 1. Low solution level 1. Add PSR until the message
tablet into the port. disappears, and the add one FSC.
harness between the PSR lower repair/replace the harness.
level sensor (FS414) and the CTP
circuit board
W-2740 As processor section is in process, Output maintenance mode is Wait until processing is completed.
the printer maintenance not started. attempted during processing.
3-90

W-2750 Control strip processing error The control strip does not reach to
occurred. the dryer section exit sensor (D411)
within the specified period.
Control strip processing has been (Cause of the error message)
canceled. 1. No control strip 1. Set the control strip.
2. Jammed control strip. 2. Remove the jammed control strip. 3
E-2751 Flapper drive is abnormal. Even if the fixed time flapper
(F340 only) operated, the position detection
The flapper drive motor or the flapper sensor did not change.
position sensor is abnormal. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty flapper mechanism 1. Repair flapper mechanism.
Consult your technical 2. D414 -to- JS01 sorter plug-in 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
representative. connector -to- JD414 connector - replace the harness.
to- CTP18 connector in CTP circuit
harness
4. M404 -to- JS01 sorter plug-in 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/
connector -to- PDC9 connector in replace the harness.
PDC circuit board, poorly
7. Faulty PDC circuit board 7. Replace the PDC circuit board.
E-2752 The connection of the DTL CB failed. A DTL CB connection port is 1.
(F340 only) (Causes of the error message)
The connection between CTP and 1. DTL circuit board -to- CTP circuit 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
DTL CB malfunctions or the DTL CB board, poorly connected or broken replace the harness.
is abnormal. harness
2. Faulty DTL circuit board 2. Replace the DTL circuit board.
Consult your technical 3. Faulty CTP circuit board 3. Replace the CTP circuit board.
representative.
E-2753 Measuring of concentration of PS4 Even if the data is read five times, it
(F340 only) tank processing solution failed. still does not match.
The leak sensor or the leak sensor 1. Faulty leak sensor (FS421) 1. Replace the FS421.
CB malfunctions. 2. Faulty DTL circuit board 2. Replace the DTL circuit board.

representative.
W-2753 Measuring of concentration of PS4 Result of concentration measurement
(F340 only) tank processing solution failed. is NG.
The leak sensor or the leak sensor 1. Too high PS4 processing solution 1. Collect waste solution. Remove
CB malfunctions. concentration the PS2 rack and pour 4 liters of
FRSS into the PS4 tank.
Consult your technical 2. Broken PS3 to PS4 partition blade 2. Replace the PS3 to PS4 partition
representative. plate.
3. Faulty leak sensor (FS421) 3. Replace the leak sensor (FS421).
4. Faulty DTL circuit board 4. Replace the DTL circuit board.
W-2754 The temperature of the PS4 tank PS4 processing temperature is
(F340 only) processing solution is out of range. outside the range of setting
temperature setting range ±2
Wait a moment. degrees.
1. Warming-up of PS4 processing 1. Wait until warming-up completes.
tanks has not been completed.
W-4101 Incorrect order No. Enter correct Order number is not entered. Click the [Re-entry] button and enter
order No. order number.
W-4102 Incorrect sort No. Enter correct sort Sort number is not entered. Click the [Re-entry] button and enter
No. sort number.
3-91

W-4103 Incorrect CD-ID. The CD-ID is not 12 digits, or not Click the [Re-entry] button and enter
entered. the CD-ID correctly.
To continue the operation without
entering the CD-ID, press [Run].
To re-enter the CD-ID, press [Re-

entry].
W-4105 Image data exporting failed. An abnormality occurred when
registering image data to the Imaging
Check the connection with the Controller.
Imaging controller. (Cause of the error message)
1. Poor connection to DIC. 1. Check the cable for poor
Order No. #### connection.
W-4106 Registering order failed. Error occurs in order registration
process when order is finished.
Check the connection with the (Cause of the error message)
Imaging controller. 1. Poor connection to DIC. 1. Check the cable for poor
connection.
Order No. ####
W-4107 Retrieving order list information The F-DIA returns error signal when Check the cable to the Imaging
failed. the order condition setup dialog box Controller for poor connection.
is displayed.
Check the connection with the
Imaging controller.
W-4108 This order No. already exists. The order number is already Enter the order number correctly.
registered in the Imaging Controller.
Re-enter another order No.
W-4109 This order already contains the The entered sort number is included Change the sort number in the
specified sort No. in the intended order correction. normal printing screen and retry
order correction.
Quit this service, change the sort No.,
and then resume the operation.
W-4110 This order No. cannot be modified, The entered sort number does not Enter sort number correctly.
because it is not registered. exist in the Imaging Controller at
order correction operation.
Enter a correct order No.
W-4111 This sort No. does not exist in this The entered sort number does not Enter sort number correctly.
order. exist in the Imaging Controller when
reprinting at order correction
Enter a correct sort No. operation.
W-4112 The film mask is not supported with The selected film mask is not Select a film mask correctly.
this image export service. supported for the service.
W-4113 Order currently created. The image data is outputting. Wait until image output is completed.
Wait.
W-4114 Couldn’t complete the service An order is currently processed. Press the [Sort/Order] button to
because an order is currently display the “Order Data Display”
processed. screen, and then select the [Yes]
button in the “Check for End of
Press the [Sort/Order] button to Order”.
display the “Order Data Display”
screen, and then select the [Yes]
button in the “Check for End of
Order”.
W-4115 The sort No. cannot be changed The sort number has been changed. The sort number will be returned
during this image export service. automatically.
The sort No. was restored to match

the order condition.
3-92

W-4116 The number of image export become Scanning times exceed maximum Create the other order number and
maximum. limit for a order. continue operation.
Press SORT and continue as a next

order.
W-4117 Imaging controller not recognized. The Imaging controller cannot be Register the logical device by 3
recognized. performing pre-operational checks.
Perform pre-operational check.
W-4118 Not enough free space to copy files. The disk space in the Imaging Ensure disk space to copy the files.
Controller is insufficient.
W-4119 This order being used. The order number is being used in Wait until the program is completed.
the other program.
W-4120 Order not found. The order has been deleted forcibly. Cancel all prints and set up the order
condition again.
W-4121 Creating order that already exists The entered order number exists in Change the order number and
was tried. the Imaging Controller when creating continue order condition setup.
a new order.
W-4122 Correcting no-exist order tried. The order number does not exist in Change the order number and set up
the Imaging Controller, or has been the order condition setup again.
deleted forcibly.
W-4123 Insufficient memory Insufficient memory Add a memory in the Imaging
Controller.
W-4124 A wrong film mask installed in the The installed film mask is not Install a correct film mask.
selected printer supported for the service.
W-4125 The sort No. cannot be changed The sort number has been changed. The sort number will be returned
during the image export service. automatically.
The sort No. was restored to match

the order condition.
W-4126 Entered order No. created in other The input order No. is already used in Change the order No.
service. another service.
Re-enter other order No.
W-4127 Error occurred in the external I/O A F-DIA function, returned bus or file Check the connection to the Imaging
related interface. is abnormal. Controller, contents of DB, and file for
abnormality.
W-4128 Specified order is creating. [All/Order] or [Page/Order] has been Wait until order creation is completed.
clicked during creating an order.
Wait for created.
After output image, continue

operation.
W-5001 Perforation rupture exists. Torn perforations were found while
the film was being inserted using the
Frame position may not detected 135 lane.
correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Film with torn perforation(s) 1. Repair the tearing, or print with the
Remove carrier and then film, and manual film carrier.
mend the rupture. 2. Film jamming 2. Repair the leading end of the film.
3. Faulty upstream perforation sensor 3. Replace the sensor.
(D102)
4. D102 -to- CYS circuit board -to- 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/
plug-in connector -to- CTC circuit replace the harness.
harness
3-93

W-5002 Perforation rupture exists. Torn perforations were found while
the film was being ejected using the
Frame position may not detected 135 lane.
correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Film with torn perforation(s) 1. Repair the tearing, or print with the
Remove carrier and then film, and manual film carrier.
mend the rupture. 2. Film jamming 2. Repair the leading end of the film.
3. Faulty upstream perforation sensor 3. Replace the sensor.
(D102)
harness
W-5004 Too long film. The film is too long when using the
135 lane.
Remove carrier and then film. (Causes of the error message)
1. A film length of 2 m or more was 1. Use the manual film carrier or cut
used. the film.
2. Dirty or faulty 135 frame sensor 2. Clean or replace the sensor.
(D107)
harness
E-5005 An error detected by mask motor The LHP motor home position
home position sensor (D117). detection error occurred when using
the 135 lane.
Install the carrier again. If problems (Causes of the error message)
persist, consult your technical 1. The mask motor home position 1. Connect it properly to the
representative. sensor (D117) is not connected. connector.
2. The mask motor (M103) is not 2. Connect it properly to the
connected. connector.
circuit board
6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC 6. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
harness
3-94

E-5006 An error detected by mask motor The LHP motor home position
home position sensor (D117). detection error occurred when using
the 135 lane.
Install the carrier again. If problems (Causes of the error message)
persist, consult your technical 1. The mask motor home position 1. Connect it properly to the
representative. sensor (D117) is not connected. connector. 3
2. The mask motor (M103) is not 2. Connect it properly to the
connected. connector.
circuit board
6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC 6. Replace the fuse.
circuit board
harness
W-5007 Too short film. A film length of 76 mm or less was
used when using the 135 lane.
1. A film length of 76 mm or less was 1. Use the manual film carrier.
used.
2. Faulty 135 frame sensor (D107) 2. Replace the sensor.
harness
4. Faulty CYS circuit board 4. Replace the CYS circuit board
5. Faulty CTC circuit board 5. Replace the CTC circuit board
W-5010 Film sensors (D101 to D111) The calibration result of the sensor
deteriorated. exceeds the difference between the
EEPROM value and the specified
Remove the carrier, clean the sensor value. (Both DA and AD)
and install the carrier again. If (Causes of the error message)
problems persist, consult your 1. Dirty sensor glass (D101 to D111) 1.
technical representative. 1) Clean the glass surface.
2) First load data from the EPROM as
per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration
Information (0442)” and then write
data to the EPROM.
2. Faulty sensor (D101 to D111) 2. Replace the sensor.
3. Sensor (D101 to D111) -to- CYS 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/
W-5016 135 film cannot be used. A 135 film was inserted while not in
the feed lane control sequence.
1. The carrier is not at the 135 feed 1. Set the carrier in the 135 feed
position. lane.
3. Sensor (D101, D122) -to- CYS 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/
3-95

W-5018 Feeding of film failed. Incorrect number of perforation holes
were detected while the 135 lane was
More than the specified number of used: Upstream perforation buffer
perforations detected. overflow
Remove carrier and then clean 135 1. Dirty glass of the upstream 1. Clean the sensor glass.
feeding lane. perforation sensor (D102)
2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 2. Clean the feed roller.
3. D102 calibration failure 3. Perform the sensor calibration as
(0440).”
harness
W-5021 Feeding of film failed. Film feeding stopped because the Remove the film from the carrier.
fine-adjustment key was pressed.
Feeding stopped by pressing the key
during film insertion.
Remove carrier and then film.

W-5022 Feeding of film failed. Film feed error while using the 135
lane. A perforation obstruction of 8.2
Remove carrier and then film. mm occurred in both directions.
1. Dirty glass of the upstream 1. Clean the sensor glass.
perforation sensor (D102)
(0440).”
harness
W-5023 Feeding of film failed. Film feed error occurred while using
the 135 lane: the load correction is
Remove carrier and then film. outside of the 5-mm tolerance.
perforation sensor (D102) or
downstream perforation sensor
(D103)
2. Slippage caused by a dirty feed 2. Clean the feed roller.
roller
3. Sensor (D102, D103) calibration 3. Perform the sensor calibration as
failure per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration
(0440).”
3-96

W-5024 Feeding of film failed. A film feed error occurred while using
the 135 lane: the unload correction is
perforation sensor (D102) or 3
(D103)
roller
(0440).”
lane.
1. Dirty glass of the downstream 1. Clean the sensor glass.
roller
(0440).”
harness
lane.
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5031 Film remains in 135 feeding lane. A switching error occurred when a Remove the carrier, take out the film,
film was still loaded while using the and reinstall the carrier.
Remove carrier and then film. 135 lane.
3-97

W-5032 Film remains in 135 feeding lane. A switching error occurred near the
(Around 135 upstream perforation upstream perforation sensor when a
sensor (D102)) film was still loaded while using the
135 lane.
1. The film remains in the 135 feed 1. Remove the film.
lane.
harness of D102 replace the harness.
harness
W-5033 Film remains in 135 feeding lane. A switching error occurred near the
(Around 135 downstream perforation downstream perforation sensor when
sensor (D103)) a film was still loaded while using the
135 lane.
1. The film remains in the 135 feed 1. Remove the film.
lane.
2. Dirty glass of the downstream 2. Clean the sensor glass.
harness at the sensor (D103) replace the harness.
harness
W-5034 Film remains in 135 feeding lane. A switching error occurred at around
(Around 135 leading end sensor the leading end sensor when a film
(D101)) was still loaded while using the 135
lane.
circuit board
2. Dirty glass of the 135 leading end 2. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D101)
harness
W-5035 Carrier not locked. The carrier was not locked in five
seconds after it was loaded. Warning
Lock it. against a unlocked carrier
1. Unlocked carrier 1. Lock the carrier.
2. Faulty carrier sensor (D123) 2. Replace the sensor.
harness
3-98

W-5036 Feeding of film failed. (Causes of the error message)
Remove carrier and then film. perforation sensor (D102) or
(D103)
2. Slippage caused by a dirty feed 2. Clean the feed roller. 3
roller
(0440).”
W-5040 The 135 lane cannot be used. This message appears when the Remove the film and change to the
operation is restored after the film 135 lane.
Remove film and then select the 135 removal except while the 135 lane is
lane. driven.
W-5053 Carrier not installed. A carrier is not detected: a timeout of
2 seconds occurred in CYS
Install carrier. communication.
circuit board
2. Faulty carrier 2. Replace the carrier.
W-5054 Carrier upper cover opened. The pressure cover was open when
the carrier was going to be installed.
Remove carrier and then close carrier (Causes of the error message)
cover. 1. The upper cover is open. 1. Remove the carrier and close the
carrier upper cover.
2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/ 2. Clean or replace the sensor.
close sensor (D120)
harness
E-5055 Carrier EEPROM data failure. Abnormal EEPROM data in the
carrier. Checksum discrepancy
representative. 1. The carrier was removed during 1. Replace the carrier.
carrier initialization.
2. The carrier was removed while 2. Replace the carrier.
pushing the carrier lock lever.
E-5056 Carrier EEPROM data failure. (Causes of the error message)
1. The EEPROM software version 1. Replace the carrier.
Consult your technical stored in the carrier does not
representative. comply with the specifications.
W-5057 Carrier installing error occurred. Abnormal carrier installation process,
or abnormal IPL process of CYS
Install the carrier again. (Causes of the error message)
circuit board
3-99

E-5059 An error detected by 135, IX240 Both carrier position sensors failed to
carrier position sensor (D121, D122). detect the feed lane when it is
switched.
persist, consult your technical 1. Carrier position sensor (D121, 1. Properly connect it to the
representative. D122) is not connected. connector.
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Repair or replace the harness.
harness between the sensor
(D121, D122) and the CTC circuit
board,
E-5063 An error detected by 135, IX240 Both carrier position sensors
carrier position sensor (D121, D122). incorrectly detect the feed lane
simultaneously.
persist, consult your technical 1. Carrier position sensor (D121, 1. Connect it properly to the
representative. D122) is not connected. connector.
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Repair or replace the harness.
harness between the sensor
(D121, D122) and the CTC circuit
board
W-5064 Too long film. Buffer error: the sampling count
exceeded 21000.
1. A film of two meters in length or 1. Continue processing it using the
more was used. manual film carrier, or cut the film.
(D107)
harness
W-5065 Too many pieces of tape. Incorrect number of tapes: the
detected value exceeded 20.
1. Dirty or faulty check tape sensor 1. Clean or replace the sensor.
(D106)
harness
E-5066 Too many frames. Incorrect number of frames: the
detected value exceeded 80.
Remove carrier and then remove film. (Causes of the error message)
1. A film with 80 or more frames was 1. Continue processing it using the
used. manual film carrier, or cut the film.
(D107)
harness
3-100

W-5067 Inserting of film failed. Film load error: Ten unsuccessful
attempts were made to load the film
Remove carrier and then film. while using the 135 lane.
If problems persist, clean the feeding 1. Dirty feed roller 1. Clean the feed roller.
rollers. 2. A film with the bent leading end 2. Repair or reshape the leading end. 3
3. Faulty feed motor (M101) 3. Replace the motor.
4. Faulty film sensor (D101, D102) 4. Replace the sensor.
W-5068 Carrier upper cover opened. (Causes of the error message)
1. The upper cover is open. 1. Remove the carrier and close the
Remove carrier and then close carrier carrier upper cover.
cover. 2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/ 2. Clean or replace the sensor.
close sensor (D120)
harness
E-5069 Writing EEPROM data into carrier Carrier EEPROM data writing failure
failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Abnormal carrier EEPROM data 1. Perform data writing again. If the
Consult your technical error recurs, replace the carrier.
representative.
E-5072 Communication error between input CYS communication error
mechanism control CB and carrier. (Causes of the error message)
(CTC-CYS) 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect the connector or repair/
harness between the carrier and replace the harness.
Install the carrier again. the plug-in connector
2. Faulty carrier 2. Replace the carrier.
If problems persist, consult your
W-5083 The lock of the carrier is released. (Causes of the error message)
1. Five or more seconds elapsed 1. Remove the film, lock the carrier,
Remove the carrier or lock it. from when the carrier was and unlock the carrier.
unlocked to when the carrier was
removed.
2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
W-5084 The lock of the carrier is released. The carrier was unlocked although
paper jamming did not occur and a
Remove carrier and then film. film was present along the film feed
lane.
1. The carrier was unlocked while a 1. Remove the film, lock the carrier,
film was in the carrier. and unlock the carrier.
2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
3-101

W-5085 The lock was released during the (Causes of the error message)
initialization of the carrier. 1. The carrier was unlocked during 1. Lock the carrier again.
carrier initialization.
Remove the carrier or lock it again. 2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
W-5086 The auto film carrier not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. The auto film carrier is not 1. Install the auto film the carrier.
Install the auto film carrier. installed.
board
E-5090 Communication error between input Carrier/Internal communication error
mechanism control CB and carrier. (Cause of the error message)
(CTC-Carrier) Restart the system. 1. Poor contact of carrier plug-in 1. Reinstall the carrier or replace the
connector plug-in connector.
If problems persist, consult your 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair
technical representative. harness between the CTC and the or replace the harness.
CYS circuit boards
4. Faulty CTC circuit board. 4. Replace the CTC circuit board.
W-5094 Film was inserted during the “Setup Maintenance mode is started during Remove the film and restart the
and Maintenance”. film insertion. maintenance mode.
Quit the “Setup and Maintenance”,

and retry printing from the “Main
Menu” screen.
W-5095 Feeding of film failed. Feeding gap generated which is
20mm or more between a screen
Remove carrier and then film. sensor and upper PAFO sensor.
(0440).”
harness
W-5096 Feeding of film failed. It was fed until after [a film] end went
into the opening.
Remove carrier and then film. (Cause of the error message)
1. Abnormal frame sensor (D107) 1. Clean the frame sensor and
perform Menu 0440 “NC100AC
Sensor Calibration”.
3-102

W-5101 Cartridge remains in carrier. Cartridge present error when using
the 240 lane.
Remove cartridge. (Causes of the error message)
1. A cartridge is in the carrier. 1. Remove the cartridge.
2. The cartridge set lever is in the 2. Return the cartridge set lever to
operating position . the cartridge setting position. 3
3. Faulty cartridge sensor (D115) 3. Replace the sensor.
harness
W-5102 Feeding of film failed. A film load jam occurred while using
the 240 lane: the load correction is
1. Dirty glass of the IX240 perforation 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5103 Feeding of film failed. Film load jam while using the 240
lane: a perforation interval exceeding
Remove carrier and then film. 29 mm and a perforation length
exceeding 8 mm were detected
during the fine scanning.
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-103

during the fine scanning.
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
lane: the film was fed a distance of 11
Remove carrier and then film. mm after the DTP perforation during
film feed.
1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
lane: TAP-hole length is more than 8
Remove carrier and then film. mm.
1. Dirty IX240 perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-104

W-5107 Feeding of film failed. Film rewind jam while using the 240
lane: the hole count detected while
Remove carrier and then film. rewinding exceeded the hole count
detected while loading.
1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass. 3
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
lane. The rewind direction correction
Remove carrier and then film. is outside of the 5-mm tolerance.
If problems persist, check the original 1. Dirty glass of perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
type. (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
If problems persist, check the original during the fine rewind scanning.
type. (Causes of the error message)
1. Dirty glass of perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
(D105) 2. Clean the feed roller.
2. Slippage caused by a dirty feed
roller 3. Perform the sensor calibration as
3. D105 calibration failure per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration
(0440).”
4. Replace the sensor.
4. Faulty D105 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/
5. D105 -to- CYS circuit board -to- replace the harness.
harness 6. Replace the CYS circuit board.
6. Faulty CYS circuit board 7. Replace the CTC circuit board.
7. Faulty CTC circuit board
3-105

If problems persist, check the original during the fine rewind scanning.
type. (Causes of the error message)
1. Dirty glass of perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
lane: Perforation was detected in TAP
Remove carrier and then film. or MTP during the FID feeding.
sensor (D104) or perforation
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
lane: TAP hole length exceeding 8
Remove carrier and then film. mm was detected.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-106

W-5113 Feeding of film failed. Perforation width error while using the
240 lane: a perforation interval
Remove carrier and then film. exceeding 9 mm was detected during
the pre-feed.
If problems persist, check the original (Causes of the error message)
type. 1. Dirty glass of perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass. 3
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
the pre-feed.
type. 1. Dirty glass of perforation sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
Remove carrier and then film. exceeding 29 mm was detected
during the pre-feed.
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-107

the pre-feed.
(D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
E-5117 Feeding of film failed. Perforation width error while using the
240 lane: a TAP was not detected at
Remove carrier and then film. the last frame.
If problems persist, check the original 1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass.
type. sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
240 lane: a TAP perforation length
the feed.
type. 1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-108

240 lane: a TAP (DTP) perforation
Remove carrier and then film. length exceeding 8 mm was detected
during the feed.
type. 1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass. 3
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5121 Unprocessed cartridge. IPI error while using the 240 lane
Not used. (Causes of the error message)
1. The film is not processed. 1. Replace the cartridge with the one
If it is a processed cartridge, fold IPI. already processed.
When IPI is damaged, consult your 2. The cartridge cannot be set in the 2. Check whether or not the cartridge
technical representative. feed position. is in the installation position.
3. Faulty IPI detection pin 3. Check whether or not the
detection pin functions correctly.
4. Faulty IPI sensor (D113) 4. Replace the sensor.
harness
W-5122 Feeding of film failed. Inserted film direction error while
using the 240 lane
1. Dirty glass of the leading sensor 1. Clean the sensor glass.
Check inserting direction and surface (D104) or the perforatin sensor
of film and then insert it again. (D105)
If problems persistÅC check the roller
original type. 3. Sensor (D104, D105) calibration 3. Perform the sensor calibration as
(0440).”
3-109

E-5123 An error occurred by supply motor Home position detection by the spool
home position sensor (D114). motor is incorrect while using the 240
lane.
1. Supply motor home position 1. Connect it properly to the
If problems persist, consult your sensor (D114) or supply motor connector.
technical representative. (M102) is not connected.
harness
circuit board
W-5124 The IX240 lane cannot be used. Cartridge was tried to be installed
while not in the 240 feed lane control
Remove carrier and then cartridge. sequence.
1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed 1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed
position. position.
(D121) or cartridge sensor (D115)
harness
W-5125 The IX240 lane cannot be used. An attempt was made to install the
cartridge while not in the 240 feed
Remove carrier and then film. lane control sequence.
1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed 1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed
position. position.
(D121) or leading end sensor
(D104)
W-5126 Film perforation error. DTP detection error while using the
240 lane: the DTP was detected
Remove carrier and then film. within 66 mm after the TAP was
detected.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-110

W-5127 Film perforation error. Holes were detected in the film while
using the 240 lane: the number of
Remove carrier and then film. perforations is greater than the
specified value during the TAP.
1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass. 3
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5128 Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. Feed lane switching error while using
the 240 lane: Attempt was made to
Remove carrier and then film. switch the feed lane while a film
remained in the 240 feed lane.
sensor (D104) or perforation
sensor (D105) 2. Clean the feed roller.
2. Slippage caused by a dirty feed
roller 3. Perform the sensor calibration as
3. Sensor (D104, D105) calibration per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration
failure (0440).”
4. Replace the sensor.
4. Faulty sensor (D104, D105) 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/
5. Sensor (D104, D105) -to- CYS replace the harness.
circuit board -to- plug-in connector
connected or broken harness 6. Replace the CYS circuit board.
6. Faulty CYS circuit board 7. Replace the CTC circuit board.
7. Faulty CTC circuit board
W-5129 Inserting of film failed. Film load error while using the 240
lane:
Remove carrier and then film. (Cause of the error message)
1. Dirty feed roller 1. Clean the feed roller.
If problems persist, clean the feeding 2. The leading end is bent or other 2. Repair or reshape the film leading
rollers. problems end.
3. Faulty feed motor (M101) 3. Replace the motor.
circuit board
3-111

W-5130 Film rupture. Holes were detected in the film while
using the 240 lane: the number of
Remove carrier and then film. perforations is greater than the
specified value during the MTP.
1. Dirty glass of the perforation 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5131 Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. Film remains in the 240 feed lane
(Around IX240 TAP and leading end while using the 240 lane
sensor (D104)) (TAP sensor )
Remove carrier and then film. 1. Dirty glass of the leading end 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5132 Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. Film remains in the 240 feed lane
(Around IX240 perforation sensor while using the 240 lane
(D105)) (MTP sensor )
Remove carrier and then film. 1. Dirty glass of the perforation 1. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D105)
roller
(0440).”
harness
3-112

E-5133 An error occurred in cartridge door. Door motor initialization error
1. The door open/close sensor 1. Connect it properly to the
Install the carrier again. (D112) or door motor (M104) is not connector.
connected.
If problems persist, consult your 2. Faulty D112 2. Replace the sensor.
technical representative. 3. Faulty M104 3. Replace the motor. 3
harness
7. Faulty door open/close 7. Replace the unit in the nest
mechanism section.
E-5134 An error occurred in cartridge door. Door motor drive error while using the
240 lane
Remove carrier and then cartridge. 1. The door open/close sensor 1. Connect it properly to the
(D112) is not connected. connector.
If problems persist, consult your 2. The door motor (M104) is not 2. Connect it properly to the
technical representative. connected. connector.
6. Faulty door open/close 6. Replace the unit in the nest
mechanism section.
W-5135 Film not drawn from cartridge. Leading end load error while using
the 240 lane: Inconsistency in the
Remove carrier and then cartridge. motor drive.
1. The cartridge does not contain a 1. Confirm that the film is installed.
film.
2. The connector of the leading end 2. Connect it properly to the
sensor (D104) or feed motor connector.
(M102) is not connected.
3. Dirty or faulty D104 3. Clean or replace the sensor.
harness
W-5136 Film not drawn from cartridge. Leading end load error while using
the 240 lane: The leading end does
Remove carrier and then cartridge. not reach the MTP.
roller
2. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Clean the sensor.
3. D105 or the feed motor (M101) is 3. Properly connect it to the
not connected. connector.
harness
6. Faulty motor (M101) 6. Replace the motor.
3-113

W-5137 Feeding of film failed. Rewind error while using the 240
lane: The TAP sensor detects the TAP
Remove carrier and then film. when the rewind operation ends.
sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5140 Magnetic head is stained. Magnetic information verification
May not read magnetic data. error while using the 240 lane
Remove carrier and then clean the 1. Dirty magnetic head 1. Clean the magnetic head.
magnetic head. 2. Magnetic head-related mechanism 2. Replace the magnetic head ASSY.
problem
harness at the magnetic head replace the harness.
connector (D116, MG101)
4. Faulty MRH circuit board 4. Replace the magnetic head ASSY
or circuit board.
5. Faulty MWH circuit board 5. Replace the magnetic head ASSY
or circuit board.
6. CYS circuit board -to- plug-in 6. Reconnect the connector or repair/
connector -to- CTC circuit board, replace the harness.
poorly connected or broken
harness
W-5141 Feeding of film failed. (Causes of the error message)
Remove carrier and then film. sensor (D104)
roller
(0440).”
harness
W-5154 Cartridge lever locked. Cartridge lock error while using the
240 lane
Release the lever lock. (Causes of the error message)
1. The cartridge lock lever is in the 1. Set the cartridge lock lever to the
locked state. unlocked position.
3-114

W-5160 The IX240 lane cannot be used. The operator installed an IX240
cartridge while the 135 feed lane was
Remove cartridge and then select the selected.
IX240 lane. (Causes of the error message)
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed 1. Set the carrier to the 240 feed
while the carrier was set to the 135 lane. 3
feed lane.
2. 135 carrier position sensor (D122) 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
-to- CYS circuit board -to- plug-in replace the harness.
connector -to- CTC circuit board,
poorly connected or broken
harness
W-5161 The IX240 lane cannot be used. An IX240 cartridge was installed
when the carrier was set midpoint
Remove film and then select the between the two lanes.
IX240 lane. (Causes of the error message)
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed 1. Set the carrier to the 240 position.
when the carrier was set midpoint
between the two lanes.
2. IX240 carrier position sensor 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
harness
W-5162 Cartridge remains. Switching error occurred when a
cartridge was installed while using
Remove carrier and then cartridge. the 240 lane.
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed in 1. Remove the cartridge.
the cartridge holder.
2. The cartridge set lever is set to the 2. Return the cartridge lever to the
set position. front.
W-5203 The manual film carrier not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. The manual film carrier is not 1. Install the manual film carrier.
Install the manual film carrier. installed.
board
I-6101 Performing the diagnostics... Self-diagnostics Wait until self-diagnostics complete.
Please wait.
I-6102 CCD/ADC CB Function check Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
completed.
I-6103 CCD/LED Light source check Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
completed.
I-6104 Reading of the magnetic information Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
is normal.
3-115

W-6105 The inclination adjustment for Self-diagnostics Try again. If problems persist, adjust
magnetic head is required. the magnetic head for inclination.
Retry reading the magnetic head. If

the same message is not displayed, it
shows that the problems are solved.
W-6106 Inspections for carrier drive system Self-diagnostics Try again. If problems persist, inspect
and magnetic head are required. the drive system and magnetic head
and repair if necessary.
W-6107 Dust or debris on the specific track, Self-diagnostics Try again. If problems persist, replace
head-contact error, or head the magnetic head.
deterioration may occur.

W-6108 Carrier not installed correctly or no Bar-code diagnostic has been carried Try again after installing the carrier
carrier installed. out with no auto film carrier installed correctly.
or one incorrectly installed.
Install the auto film carrier, and try
again.
W-6109 Film inserted into the carrier. Take out Bar-code diagnostic has been carried Try again after removing the film.
the film. out with film in the carrier.
I-6110 No data is displayed. No data is displayed in the scanner –
data diagnostics.
Couldn’t find the pixel sensitivity table
data and the light source shading
table data.
I-6111 Copying the files. Copying message in the scanner Wait until completion.
data diagnostics.
Please wait.
I-6112 The vignette was detected. The vignette was detected in the –
scanner data diagnostics.
Confirm it.
E-6114 An error occurred during the CDD/ The CDD/ADC CB operating test is Follow the instructions in the screen.
ADC CB operating test. (CCD - ADC) abnormal.
Check the CCD CB, ADC CB, coaxial

cable, and the PWR CB.
E-6115 An error occurred during the CCD/ The CCD/LED light source test is Check the shutter operation, LED
LED light source test. abnormal. light source, CTC and PWR circuit
board.
Check the shutter operation, LED
light source, CTC CB and the PWR
CB.
I-6201 Initializing of the light source section Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
completed.
E-6202 Initializing of the light source section Light source section diagnostics: The error occurs again, replace the
failed. Initialization diagnostics failed. LED light source.
E-6205 Couldn’t read the status of the Self-diagnostics
exposure control CB (LDD). (Cause of the error message)
1. Poor connection or faulty LDD 1. Connect connectors securely, or
Replace it. circuit board repair or replace the harness.
3-116

E-6206 Power not supplied. Self-diagnostics
Replace fuse of the exposure control 1. Blown fuse on LDD circuit board 1. Replace the fuse.
CB (LDD). 2. Faulty LDD power supply system 2. Inspect and repair the Slot 3 A/B
and 4 A/B system of the Allpha
400 DC power supply. 3
E-6207 Laser temperature out of range. Self-diagnostics
Check if the connectors 1. Poorly connected connector to 1. Connect the LDD7, LDD10 or
(LDD12,10,7) are properly connected LDD circuit board LDD12 connector correctly.
to the exposure control CB (LDD), 2. Faulty LDD circuit board 2. Replace the LDD circuit board.
and then restart the system.
E-6208 Laser current values inappropriate. Self-diagnostics Replace the laser unit with a new
(Laser is about to its lifetime) one.
Replace the laser unit.

E-6209 Laser current values inappropriate. Self-diagnostics Replace the laser unit with a new
(PD disconnection) one.

I-6210 The diagnostics for laser-exceeded Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
current completed.
E-6211 PD current values inappropriate. Self-diagnostics Replace the LDD circuit board.
(+13V/-13V Power source error)
Replace the exposure control CB

(LDD).
E-6212 PD current values inappropriate. (LD Self-diagnostics Replace the laser unit with a new
disconnection) one.

E-6213 PD current values inappropriate. Self-diagnostics
(LDD - LDA) (Cause of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or open circuit of 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
Replace the laser unit or the harness between the laser unit repair it.
harnesses between the exposure and the LDD circuit board
control CBs. 2. Faulty laser unit 2. Replace the laser unit with a new
one.
E-6214 The B-laser temperature is not Self-diagnostics Replace the laser unit with a new
optimized. (B-laser error) one.

I-6215 Optimizing of the B-laser completed. Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
CB (LDD). 2. Faulty power supply system of 2. Inspect and repair the Slot 3 A/B
LDD circuit board and 4 A/B system of the Allpha
400 DC power supply.
E-6218 The laser temperature is not Self-diagnostics
converged. (Cause of the error message)
1. Poorly connected connector to 1. Connect the LDD6, LDD9 or
Check if the connectors (LDD13,9,6) LDD circuit board LDD13 connector securely.
are properly connected to the 2. Faulty LDD circuit board 2. Replace the LDD circuit board.
exposure control CB (LDD), and then
restart the system.
3-117

E-6220 The “####” EEPROM connectors Light source section diagnostics; Shut down the system, connect the
disconnected. EEPROM Diagnostics failed. connector and then restart the
(Connection defect) system.
Turn OFF the system, connects the
connectors, and then restart the
system.
E-6221 The address “####” for “####” color is Light source section diagnostics;
incorrectly entered with “####”. Total EEPROM Diagnostics failed. (Values
#### of values is out of range. are out of range)
1. Broken machine data in EEPROM 1. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.
CB (LDD). 2. Faulty power supply system of 2. Inspect and repair the Slot 3 A/B
LDD circuit board and 4 A/B system of the Allpha
400 DC power supply.
E-6223 R, G and B EEPROM connectors Light source section diagnostics; Shut down the system, connect the
disconnected. EEPROM Diagnostics failed. connectors and then restart the
(Connection defect) system.
Turn OFF the system, connects the
connectors, and then restart the
system.
I-6224 The diagnostics for EEPROM Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
completed.
I-6225 Fuse FC3 of the exposure control CB Self-diagnostics Click [OK].
(LDD) is normal.
E-6226 Power not supplied. Self-diagnostics Replace the fuse FC3 on the LDD
circuit board.
Replace fuse FC3 of the exposure
control CB (LDD).
(LDD) is normal.
circuit board.
control CB (LDD).
(LDD) is normal.
circuit board.
control CB (LDD).
I-6231 Performing the diagnostics. Diagnostic execution message Wait until the diagnostics is
completed.
Do not open the magazine door and
the cover.
Please wait.
W-6232 An error message is not selected. An error message is not selected. Select an error message and perform
again.
Select an error message, and
perform it.
W-6233 Couldn’t perform the diagnostics The paper is currently fed. Wait until the printer stops.
because the paper is currently fed.
Please wait until the printer stops.
3-118

W-6234 Couldn’t perform the diagnostics The message dialog “The paper Close the dialog box and perform it
because the following message condition setup of the magazine not again.
dialog is currently displayed. performed” is currently displayed.
The paper condition setup of the

magazine not performed. 3
Perform it again.
W-6235 Couldn’t perform the diagnostics Printing is currently being done. Wait until printing is completed.
because printing is currently being
done.
Perform it again.
3-119
3.3 Refreshing Backup Restoration
OS and application software files are compressed

and stored in the HDD. They can be restored by
performing this operation.
1. Shut down the system by performing Post-

operational Check.
2. Press the start switch.
3. On the “Boot Menu” screen, select “SAVE/

RESTORE” using the [↓] key on the operating
keyboard within five seconds.
4. Press the [START/ENTER] key.
5. Select “Restore” by pressing the [ALT] and [2]

keys at the same time.
6. Select “1: Execute” using the [1] key.
• Restoration starts and the “Image Center 5.0-

Scripting Process” screen appears.
• In approximately 25 minutes, restoration

completes and then the system starts.
3-120
3.4 OS Recovery and Backup for Refreshing
3.4.1 OS Recovery
If the machine stops during starting up or the system

freezes when changing the screen, although
“Refreshing Backup Restoration” (see Section 3.3) is 3
performed, reinstallation of “OS Windows 2000” may
clear that problem.
Reinstall the OS by following the steps below using

“Recovery CD”.
1. Shut down the system and press the start switch. Start Switch
• The main control unit starts up.
• The count down screen appears and the access

lamp for the CD-ROM drive blinks.
CD105
2. Press the eject button of the CD-ROM drive Recovery CD

immediately during the access lamp blinks, and
insert the “Recovery CD”.
RD547-1
• The recovery CD menu screen appears.
3. Press the [1] key on the operation keyboard.
3-121
• The execute selection screen appears.
4. Press the [1] key on the operation keyboard.
• The recovery program starts up.
• The “Scripting Process” screen appears.
• In approximately 6 minutes, the processing bar

screen appears.
• In approximately two minutes, the “success

restore sectors to a:pmbr” screen appears.
3-122
5. Remove the “Recovery CD”.
6. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker.
Recovery CD
RD548-1
• The main control unit stops. Built-in Circuit Breaker
CD104
7. Press the power switch of the main control unit for
7 seconds.
• The main control unit restarts up.
• The program executes the following operation

automatically.
1) Windows 2000 setup

2) Shutdown
3) Restart
4) Shutdown
5) Restart
6) Windows 2000 startup
8. Perform the following operation.
1) Reinstallation of A1 system software

(see Section 4.3)
2) Reinstallation of optional software
(see Optional Software Manual).
3) Backup for refreshing
3-123
3.4.2 Backup for Refreshing
OS and application software files are compressed

and stored by performing this operation. They will be
restored if necessary.
1. Shut down the system by performing Post-

operational Check.
2. Press the start switch.
3. On the “Boot Menu” screen, select “SAVE/

RESTORE” using the [↓] key on the operation
keyboard within five seconds.
4. Press the [START/ENTER] key.
5. Select “Save 1” using the [1] key.
6. Select “1: Execute” using the [1] key.
• Backup starts and “Image Center 5.0-Scripting

Process” screen appears.
• In approximately 25 minutes, backup completes

and then the system starts.
3-124
4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
4.1 Simple Upgrade ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Update .......................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Reinstallation............................................................................................... 4-9
4.4 New Installation ......................................................................................... 4-15

4
4.5 Reversion ................................................................................................... 4-18
4-1
4.1 Simple Upgrade
In the “Simple Upgrade”, you can upgrade the

FRONTIER 330/340 System Software(A1) by
following the simple guidance messages on the
screen.
NOTE: Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive with its printed

surface facing the front.
To open the tray of the CD-ROM drive, press the
eject button.
1. Insert the FRONTIER 330/340 System (A1) Disk FRONTIER 330/340 System (A1) Disk
into the CD-ROM drive.

the system.
3. Press the START switch.
• The installer is started and the system software

is upgraded automatically.
RD547-1
NOTE: • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used,

the “[L-003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print
Service screen appears. Click the [Cancel] button.
• If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1)
software is necessary, refer to the Installation
Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).
• The “SETUP” dialog box appears.
4-2
4.1 Simple Upgrade
4. Remove the FRONTIER 330/340 (A1) Disk from

the CD-ROM drive.
5. Click the [OK] button.
• The system is shut down.
6. Press the START switch to restart the system. 4
FRONTIER 330/340
System (A1) Disk
RD548-1
NOTE: When the message “E-2305” appears at the

time of the restart, click the [OK] button to clear
it.
• The system software restart and upgrade has

been completed.
7. Perform printing operation after executing “Paper

Condition Setup” and “Pre-operational Checks”.
4-3
4.2 Update
In the “Update”, the FRONTIER 330/340 System

Software (A1) is upgraded.
IMPORTANT:
If the “Free space in the hard disk is insufficient”
message appears, delete the variety print service
template data.
RD547-1

operational checks.
4. Insert the backup FD into the FD drive

immediately after the Windows2000 startup
screen is displayed.
NOTE: The backup FD is either for the film scanner or

printer processor.
CD1055
• After starting up Windows, “(L-100) Simple

Upgrade” screen appears.
4-4
4.2 Update
5. Remove the backup FD from the FD drive.
CD1056
• The “Model Selection” dialog box appears.
7. Select the appropriate model and click the

[Next >] button.
• “Procedure Selection 1 (C-001)” dialog box

appears.
8. Select “SE maintenance” and click the [Next >]

button.

appears.
9. Select “Update” and click the [Next >] button.
4-5
4.2 Update
• The “Starting Update (C-010)” dialog box

appears.
10. Click the [Yes] button.
NOTE: If the error message “Insufficient disk space on

drive D. Installation not performed.” is displayed,
delete unnecessary files or template data files,
then start installation again.
• The “File Copy (C-020)” dialog box appears.
11. Check version information and click the [Next >]

button.
• The update processing starts.
• After approximately 16 minutes, the “Inherited

Data Transport Medium Selection (C-050)”
dialog box appears.
12. Select “Inherit data from former version of

application” and click the [Next >] button.
NOTE: When data in FD is used, select “Inherit data

from FD”.
• The “Update Completion (C-080)” dialog box

appears.
• The “Setup Completion (C-090)” dialog box

appears.
4-6
4.2 Update
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not

used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box
appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used,

the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears.
NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) 4

15. Click the [Cancel] button.
• The “SETUP” completion dialog box appears.
16. Remove the FRONTIER 330/340 System (A1)

Disk from the CD-ROM drive.
FRONTIER 330/340
System (A1) Disk
RD548-1
19. Press the START switch to restart the system.
CD1056
4-7
4.2 Update
• After the system restarts, the error message “E-

2305” appears.
20. Click the [OK] button to clear the message.
4-8
4.3 Reinstallation
The reinstallation procedure must be performed if any

of the following parts have been replaced or after
reinstallation of “OS Windows 2000” using the
Recovery CD (see Subsection 3.4.1).
• Main control unit

• CTP22/24 circuit board
• CTC22/24 circuit board 4
• GHT22 circuit board
• The Windows desktop screen is displayed.
2. Execute “[Shift] Starting Up” and rename the

“FUJIFILM” folder in the “D” drive such as
“FUJIFILM-1”, etc. except when the main control
unit has been replaced.
RD547-1
4-9
4.3 Reinstallation
NOTE: Proceed to Step 11 when the main control unit

has been replaced.
4. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.
5. Click the [Browse] button and select “ISO9660

(N)” for the CD-ROM drive.
6. Click the [Open] button.
7. Double click “EZ171” folder and select

“EZSetup.exe”.
8. Click the [Open] button.
4-10
4.3 Reinstallation
9. Make sure “N:\EZ171\EZSETUP.exe” is displayed

in the “Open” box.
• The “Procedure Selection (A-001)” dialog box

appears.
11. Select “Re-installation” and click the [Next >]

button.
• The “Starting Re-installation (A-100)” dialog box

appears.

• The reinstallation process starts.
• After approximately 16 minutes, the “FD

Confirmation (A-117)” dialog box appears.
• The “Inserting Backup FD (A-120)” dialog box

appears.
4-11
4.3 Reinstallation
• The “Information” dialog box appears.
15. Insert the scanner’s backup FD into the FD drive.
16. Click the [OK] button. CD1055
• The “Inserting Printer’s Backup FD (A-130)”

dialog box appears when completing data
backup of the scanner.
18. Insert the printer’s backup FD into the FD drive.
19. Click the [OK] button. CD1055
4-12
4.3 Reinstallation
• The “Reinstallation Completion (A-140)” dialog

box appears.
20. Click the [OK] button. 4

• The “Setup Completion (A-150)” dialog box
appears.

FRONTIER 330/340
System (A1) Disk
RD548-1
22. Remove the backup FD from the FD driver.
CD1056
4-13
4.3 Reinstallation
24. Select “Shut down” from the “START” menu and

click the [OK] button.
25. Press the START switch to restart up the system.

2305” appears.
NOTE: If the “DI Print and Data Writing Service (C4/

C5)” software is used, install the software by
referring to the Instruction Manual of the “DI
Print and Data Writing Service”.
4-14
4.4 New Installation
The new installation procedure is performed only

when the backup FD is not found when replacing the
main control unit. In this case, data should be input
manually because all data return to the default
values.

4
• The Windows desktop screen is displayed.
RD547-1

[Next >] button.
4-15
• The “Procedure Selection (A-001)” dialog box

appears.
4. Select “New Installation” and click the [Next >]

button.
• The “Starting New Installation (A-010)” dialog

box appears.

• The new installation process starts.
• After approximately 16 minutes, the “New

Installation Completion (A020)” dialog box
appears.
• The “Setup Completion (A-030)” dialog box

appears.

FRONTIER 330/340
System (A1) Disk
RD548-1
4-16
9. Select “Shut down” from the “START” menu and

click the [OK] button.
• After the system restarts, the error message

“E-2305” appears.
• The error message “E-2107” appears.
13. Open the Menu 0141 “Installation Information

Setup” screen.
14. Set up each item if necessary

15. Perform the post-operational checks to shut

down the system.

4-17
4.5 Reversion
This procedure reverts the system software to the

previous version.
1. Perform the “Data Backup” in Menu 0122 to

overwrite the Backup FD with the backup data.

operational checks.
RD547-1
5. Insert the backup FD into the FD drive

immediately after the Windows2000 startup
screen is displayed.
NOTE: The backup FD is either for the film scanner or

printer processor.
CD1055
• After Windows restarts, “(L-100) Simple

Upgrade” screen appears.
4-18
4.5 Reversion
CD1056

[Next >] button.

appears.
9. Select “SE maintenance” and click the [Next >]

button.
4-19
4.5 Reversion

appears.
10. Select “Reversion to previous version” and click

the [Next >] button.
• The “Starting Version Back (C-100)” dialog box

appears.

• The “Inserting Printer’s Backup FD” dialog box

appears.
13. Insert the printer’s backup FD into the FD drive.
CD1055
4-20
4.5 Reversion
• The “Version Back Completion (C-120)” dialog

box appears.
15. Click the [OK] button. 4
• The “Setup Completion (C-130)” dialog box

appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not

used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box
appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used,

the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears.
NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1)

17. Click the [Cancel] button.
• The “SETUP” completion dialog box appears.
4-21
4.5 Reversion

FRONTIER 330/340
System (A1) Disk
RD548-1
19. Remove the Backup FD from the FD drive.
CD1056

2305” appears.

4-22
5. MAINTENANCE MENU
5.1 Operational Procedure................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01) .................................................. 5-6

5.2.1 Connection to Imaging Controller (0100) .................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Image Export Settings (0101) ....................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Production Information (0120) ..................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.4 Timer Setup (0121) ........................................................................................................ 5-8
5.2.5 Data Backup (0122) ....................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.6 Error Information Check (0123).................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.7 DI Manager Administrative Setting (0124)................................................................. 5-11
5.2.8 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125) ............................................................................... 5-12 5
5.2.9 Installation Information Confirmation (0126) ............................................................ 5-13
5.2.10 Installation Information Setup (0140) ........................................................................ 5-14
5.2.11 Clear Error Log (0141)................................................................................................. 5-15
5.2.12 Shipping Information Reference (0142)..................................................................... 5-16
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02)..................................................... 5-17

5.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (0200) .................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.2 Print Size Setup (0220)................................................................................................ 5-19
5.3.3 Paper Magazine Registration (0221) .......................................................................... 5-21
5.3.4 Monitor Adjustment (0222) ......................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.5 Special Film CH Setting (0223)................................................................................... 5-24
5.3.6 Monotone Correction Setting (0224).......................................................................... 5-27
5.3.7 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)......................................................................... 5-28
5.3.8 Back Printing Format Setting (0226).......................................................................... 5-36
5.3.9 Index Conditions (0227) .............................................................................................. 5-38
5.3.10 Image Correction Setup (0240)................................................................................... 5-39
5.3.11 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (0241)...................................................... 5-40
5.3.12 Paper Condition Method Setup (0242)....................................................................... 5-40
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03) ................................................... 5-42

5.4.1 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (0300) ............................................................... 5-42
5.4.2 Brightness Correction (0301) ..................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.3 Input Check (0320)....................................................................................................... 5-44
5.4.4 Focus Position Adjustment (0321)............................................................................. 5-44
5.4.5 I/O Check (0340)........................................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.6 Carrier Inclination Display (0341)............................................................................... 5-47
5.4.7 CCD Data Display (0342)............................................................................................. 5-48
5.4.8 Operation Information Display (0343)........................................................................ 5-51
5.4.9 Lens Registration (0344)............................................................................................. 5-51
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345).................................................................................. 5-52
5.4.11 Optical Magnification Calibration (0346) ................................................................... 5-53
5.4.12 Focus Calibration (0347)............................................................................................. 5-55
5.4.13 Spectral Calibration (0348) ......................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.14 Darkness Correction (0349)........................................................................................ 5-59
5.4.15 DC Offset Cancel (0350).............................................................................................. 5-59
5.4.16 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0351)....................................................................... 5-60
5.4.17 Pixel Correction (0352)................................................................................................ 5-61
5.4.18 CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment (0353) ................................................................ 5-62
5.4.19 CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment (0354) .................................................................. 5-63
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)...................................................... 5-65

5.5.1 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (0400)....................................................................... 5-65
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420) .............................................................................. 5-65
5.5.3 NC100AC Input Check (0421) ..................................................................................... 5-67
5.5.4 M69D Input Check (0422) ............................................................................................ 5-68
5-1
5.5.5 NC100AC Working Information Display (0423)......................................................... 5-69

5.5.6 M69D Working Information Display (0424)................................................................ 5-70
5.5.7 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425) ............................................................................. 5-71
5.5.8 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (0440).......................................................................... 5-72
5.5.9 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441) ................................................................................ 5-72
5.5.10 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (0442) ..................................................... 5-73
5.5.11 NC100AC Installation Information Display (0443) .................................................... 5-75
5.5.12 NC100AC Installation Information Setup (0444) ....................................................... 5-75
5.5.13 NC100AC I/O Check (0445) ......................................................................................... 5-76
5.5.14 M69D I/O Check (0446) ................................................................................................ 5-77
5.5.15 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (0447)............................................................................ 5-78
5.5.16 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (0448)........................................................................ 5-79
5.5.17 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (0449) ...................................................... 5-81
5.5.18 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (0450) ............................................................................... 5-82
5.5.19 NC100AC Nest Section Operation (0451) .................................................................. 5-82
5.5.20 NC100AC Feeding Operation (0452) .......................................................................... 5-83
5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05)...................................................... 5-85

5.6.1 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (0520) ...................................................................... 5-85
5.6.2 Test Pattern Printing (0521)........................................................................................ 5-86
5.6.3 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522).............................................. 5-88
5.6.4 Paper Feed (0523)........................................................................................................ 5-89
5.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (0524) ........................................................................... 5-90
5.6.6 Printer Input Check (0525) .......................................................................................... 5-90
5.6.7 Precut Length Setting (0526)...................................................................................... 5-91
5.6.8 Image Position Fine Adjustment (0527) .................................................................... 5-91
5.6.9 Printer I/O Check (0540) .............................................................................................. 5-92
5.6.10 Filter Replacement History (0541).............................................................................. 5-93
5.6.11 Laser Exposure Check (0542) .................................................................................... 5-93
5.6.12 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543) ......................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.13 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544)...................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.14 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (0545) ...................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.15 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (0546)................... 5-95
5.6.16 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough
Adjustment (0547) ..................................................................................................... 5-95
5.6.17 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548)...................................................... 5-97
5.6.18 Laser History Display (0549) ...................................................................................... 5-98
5.6.19 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550)...................................................... 5-99
5.6.20 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551) ............................................................ 5-100
5.6.21 Back Printer Test (0552)............................................................................................ 5-101
5.6.22 Printer Operation Data Display (0553) ..................................................................... 5-101
5.6.23 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (0554).................................................... 5-102
5.6.24 Clearing All Operation Data (0555) .......................................................................... 5-102
5.6.25 Side Register Calibration (0556) .............................................................................. 5-103
5.6.26 Data Saving (0557)..................................................................................................... 5-104
5.6.27 Data Download (0558) ............................................................................................... 5-104
5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06).............................................. 5-106

5.7.1 Sorter Operating Condition Setup (0600) (F340 Only) ........................................... 5-106
5.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (0620).................................................................. 5-106
5.7.3 Replenisher Rate Setting (0621)............................................................................... 5-107
5.7.4 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622)..................................................................... 5-107
5.7.5 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623) ............................................................. 5-108
5.7.6 Processor Input Check (0624) .................................................................................. 5-110
5.7.7 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625)......................................................... 5-111
5.7.8 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0640) ....................................... 5-112
5.7.9 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0641)............................................... 5-113
5-2
5.7.10 Processor I/O Check (0642) ...................................................................................... 5-118

5.7.11 Processor Operation Data Display (0643) ............................................................... 5-119
5.7.12 Clearing Selected Operation Data (0644) ................................................................ 5-120
5.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (0645) ............................................................ 5-121
5.7.14 Installation (0646) ...................................................................................................... 5-121
5.7.15 PS Solution Concentration Management (0647) (F340 Only) ................................ 5-122
5.7.16 Sorter Fine Adjustment Value Setup (0648) (F340 Only) ....................................... 5-124
5.8 Self-Diagnostic/Trouble Help (09).......................................................... 5-125
5.9 Register/Delete ........................................................................................ 5-126

5.9.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020)............................................................................... 5-126
5.9.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021).................................................................................. 5-127
5.9.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022) ............................................................................. 5-127
5.9.4 Custom Button Registration/Saving (1023) ............................................................ 5-127
5.10 Special Operations (99) .......................................................................... 5-130

5.10.1 Paint (9940) ................................................................................................................ 5-130
5.10.2 Explorer (9941)........................................................................................................... 5-130
5.10.3 Command (9942)........................................................................................................ 5-131
5.10.4 Screen Keyboard (9943)............................................................................................ 5-131
5-3
5.1 Operational Procedure
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] button in the

main menu or printing menu screen.
• The password dialog box appears.
2. Enter “7777” in the “Password” box using the

operation, full or screen keyboard.
• The “Setup and Maintenance” menu screen

appears.
4. Click the desired group from the left-hand group

list.
5-4
5.1 Operational Procedure
• The item list appears in the right-hand half of the

menu screen.
5. Click the desired item.
• Each screen appears.
Reference: The screen number can be entered to

display each screen by following the
steps below. 5
1) Press the [F1] key.
• The “Screen No. Entry” dialog box appears.
2) Enter the screen number using the numeric

keys of the operation, full or screen keyboard.
3) Click the [OK] button.
• Each screen appears.
6. Upon completion of the setup and maintenance

operations, click the [Close], [Cancel] or [OK]
button to quit the screen.
• Operation returns to the menu screen.
7. Click the [Print] button.
• The printing menu screen appears.
5-5
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01)
5.2.1 Connection to Imaging Controller (0100)
Select this menu to connect the imaging controller to

the Frontier 330/340.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [01 System Operation

Setup and Check] → [0100 Connection to Imaging
Controller]
5.2.2 Image Export Settings (0101)
This procedure sets applicable scope of the center

cropping.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0101 Image Export Settings]
1. Select “Both” or “Print Only” for “Center Cropping

for Export/Print”.
5.2.3 Production Information (0120)
This procedure displays the production information.

The data can be cleared in this menu.
[Selection]

Setup and Check] → [0120 Production Information]
1. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Digital Image” or

“All” from the “Input Type” box.
• The information of the input type is displayed.
2. Record the production information.
5-6
3. To save the data to a floppy disk, follow the steps

below.
1) Click the [FD Save] button.
5
2) Insert the formatted floppy disk into the floppy
disk drive of the main control unit.
Floppy Disk
CD1055
• The data is saved into the floppy disk.
4) Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk

drive.
• The dialog box disappears.
4. To clear the data, follow the steps below.
1) Click the [Clear] button.
CD1056
• The “Clear production information?” dialog

box appears.
5-7
• The data are cleared and clearing date appears.
5.2.4 Timer Setup (0121)
This procedure sets the present date/time, timer ON

date/time and preheat setup times.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0121 Timer Setup]
1. To update “Present Date/Time”, change the date

and time, and click the [OK] button.
NOTE: To cancel the update, click the [Cancel] button.
2. To change the timer date and time, enter a “check”

in the day of the week boxes and enter the time in
the “Timer ON Date/Time Setting” box.
3. Set the preheat timer by following the steps below,

if necessary.
IMPORTANT:
The ON time for a nighttime preheating operation
must not overlap with the ON time of the weekly
timer since nighttime preheating takes priority and
shuts down all power when it is set OFF.
If, for instance, the calendar timer is set to 5:00AM
and nighttime preheating is turned ON at 3:30AM,
all the power will be shut down two hours later at
5:30AM.
NOTE: Nighttime preheating is usually conducted when

the room temperature drops below 10°C (50°F)
at night and the temprature is not controlled for
8 or more hours.
1) Select “YES” for “Preheat Setting”.
5-8
• The 1st and 2nd preheat setting boxes appears.
2) Move the cursor to “1st Preheat” and enter the

time.
3) Move the cursor to “2nd Preheat” and enter

the time.
NOTE: • For preheating once only, set the same time

for both the first and second times.
• Select “NO” when the preheat timer is not 5
used.
• The second preheating timer is ignored if the
first preheat time and second preheat time
overlap.
<Example> 1st. pre-heat time: 2:00AM

2nd. pre-heat time: 3:00AM
With the above settings, nighttime
preheating will occur from 2:00AM to
4:00AM (2 hours).
5.2.5 Data Backup (0122)
This procedure makes a backup of the data stored on

the hard disk of the main control unit when data,
indicated on the data sheet located inside the front
upper cover, is changed.
The backup floppy disks are used when reinstalling or
reverting to earlier system software.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0122 Data Backup]
1. Prepare a new floppy disk for data backup when

backing up data.
NOTE: A floppy disk is unnecessary for pricing unit data

backing up because data are backed up to the
hard disk of the main control unit.
2. Insert the floppy disk into the floppy drive of the

main control unit.
5-9
3. Move the cursor to the “Destination” box and

select “Film Scanner”, “Printer Processor” or
“Pricing Unit”.
NOTE: Perform the data backup for the pricing unit

when pricing unit data is changed. Data is
backed up from the pricing unit to the hard disk
of the main control unit. If the data backup is not
performed, changed pricing unit data is
canceled when next starting up the system.
• The “Making the backup of the data” message

appears.
5. Upon completion of the backup, click the [Cancel]

button.
5.2.6 Error Information Check (0123)
The system error log is listed up in order of date and

time.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0123 Error Information Check]
1. Click the [Log Info.] button.
• The “Log File Re-reading Check” dialog box

appears.
5-10
• The log file is read out and the latest information

is displayed on the screen.
3. Click the [Accum. Info.] button.
• Accumulated error information is displayed in

order of code and frequency.
5.2.7 DI Manager Administrative Setting (0124)
This menu is used when connecting the optional DI

controller.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0124 Manager Administrative Setting]
“Delete Waiting Time”: Sets up the time until the order

processed on the DI controller is deleted.
“Order Identifier”: Enter “a” for first SLP-800SC/SLP-

1000SE and “b” for the second one when two
machines are connected to one DI controller.
In this case, the “Device Name” for the second
SLP-800SC/SLP-1000SE should be changed.
5-11
<Example>
<F330>
Logical Device Name
1st SLP-800SC 2nd SLP-800SC
Scanner SLP800input SLP800input-b
Printer (sRGB) SLP800sRGB SLP800sRGB-b
Printer
SLP800PD SLP800PD-b
(F-COLOR/PD)
<F340>
Logical Device Name
1st SLP-1000SE 2nd SLP-1000SE
Scanner SLP1000input SLP1000input-b
Printer (sRGB) SLP1000sRGB SLP1000sRGB-b
Printer
SLP1000PD SLP1000PD-b
(F-COLOR/PD)
5.2.8 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125)
This procedure sets up “Sorter Information Display

Time”, “Waiting Time for Monitoring” and “Waiting
Time for the Position Adjust of the 1st Frame”.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0125 Timer Waiting Time Setup]
“Sorter Info. Display Time”: Time to display the

number of prints and sort number when
pressing the [Sort] key or during auto sorting.
“Waiting time for monitoring”: Waiting time for 1- or 6-

frame display during pre-scanning. This
function activates only when the “Auto” film
drive mode is used.
“Waiting time for the pos. adjust of the 1st frame”:

Display time for black/white image displayed
after inserting the film to adjust the position of
the leading end frame.
NOTE: The black/white image will disappear in 20 seconds

to protect the CCD.
1. Move the cursor to the “sec.” box.
2. Change the time by clicking the [▲] or [▼] button.
5-12
5.2.9 Installation Information Confirmation (0126)
This procedure displays the scanner and printer <F330>

installation information.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0126 Installation Information
Confirmation]
5
1. Check the installation information.
2. Click the [Option] button.
<F340>
• The “Optional Device Reference” dialog box

appears.
3. Check if PU800BA, External File I/O and F-DI

Lab-in Built-in are used.
5-13
5.2.10 Installation Information Setup (0140)
This procedure sets the installation information. <F330>

After setting up, restart the system to activate the new
settings.
[Selection]

Setup and Check] → [0140 Installation Information
Setup]
1. Set the delivery date, startup date and lab ID.
2. Click the [Option] button.
<F340>
3. Select “Not used” or “COM1” for “PU800BA”.
4. Select “Not used” or “COM3” to “COM6” for “Bar-

code Reader”.
5. Select “YES” or “NO” for “External File I/O”.
5-14
• The dialog box appears.
9. Perform the post-operational checks to stop the

system and then restart the system.
• The new settings are activated. 5
5.2.11 Clear Error Log (0141)
This procedure clears the system error and printer

error information.
[Selection]

Setup and Check] → [0141 Clear Error Log]
1. Select the item to be cleared and click the [Clear]

button.
• The selected information is cleared.
5-15
5.2.12 Shipping Information Reference (0142)
This procedure displays the shipping information. <F330>
[Selection]

Setup and Check] → [0142 Shipping Information
Reference]
1. The model, serial no. and shipping date are

displayed.
<F340>
5-16
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02)
5.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (0200)
When new paper is to be loaded, follow this

procedure to set up the new paper condition.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [02 Print Condition Setup

and Check] → [0200 Paper Condition Setup]
5
1. Install the paper magazine to be set up.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to initialize condition

setup data.
Condition Setup Print for Densitometer AD200

• After about 5 minutes for the F330 or 3 minutes
for the F340, a condition setup print is fed out.
Condition Setup Print for Densitometer AD100
5-17
3. Adjust the guide of the densitometer according to Densitometer Guide

the width of the condition setup print.
NOTE: If an error occurs, press the orange [RESET]

switch.
EZ634
4. Insert the condition setup print into the Densitometer

densitometer.
Upkeep Print
RD006
5. After the condition setup print has come out, click

the [Dens Measure] button.
• The measurement is automatically started and

the density measurement result is displayed.
5-18
• The density measurement result disappears.
NOTE: If the “Density Measurement Result” is not

acceptable, the message shown at the right
appears. Perform Steps 2 to 6 again until the
result becomes OK.
7. Click the [Close] button.

5
5.3.2 Print Size Setup (0220)
This procedure sets the print size to be used. <Group 1>
[Selection]

and Check] → [0220 Print Size Setup]
• Normally, sizes are registered as shown in the

screens.
NOTE: The feed length range for No.1 (89C) to No.6

(102H) is limited to 82.5 mm to 254.0 mm.
5-19
<Group 2>
1. Allocate “Button 1” to “Button 6” in the “Quick Set”

box for the frequently used six print sizes.
2. Select the print size to be modified or registered

from the list.
• ID [No.], Name, Width, Length, Border, four BD

values and [Display(ON/OFF)] are displayed.
3. Move the cursor to the print size to be used, select

“ON” or “OFF” shown in the “Display”.
• If you select “ON”, the description appears in the

list. If you select “OFF”, nothing appears in the
list.
5-20
5.3.3 Paper Magazine Registration (0221)
This procedure registers the paper magazine to be <F330>

used.
Change the dryer temperature if necessary.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0221 Paper Magazine Registration]
5
<F340>
1. Release the latches and open the paper

magazine.
Paper Magazine Latches (2)

EZ643
5-21
2. Loosen the two screws and adjust the width of the

paper guides. Tighten the two screws.
3. Loosen the four screws securing the paper

flanges to the paper shaft.
Screws (2) Paper Guides

EZ854
4. Align the holes in the paper flange bosses with the Paper Flanges
paper width marks visible from the hole and
tighten the four screws.
NOTE: • Be careful not to overtighten the screws.

• Do not try to loosen the screws marked red.
Paper Shaft
Screws (4) Hole/Paper Width Mark
EZ1920
5. Find the appropriate paper from the table in the Paper Magazine
screen and install its ID chip to the magazine
using the two screws.
NOTE: Do not use ID No. 13 and No. 14 because they

are for 25.4 cm wide paper.
ID Chip
Screws (2)
EZ1218
5-22
6. Check that the dryer temperature is set to the

recommended value listed below.
<F330>
Paper Width Recommended Temperature
(mm) Temperature Input Range
89 to 130 75.0 °C 60.0 °C to 85.0 °C
152 80.0 °C 60.0 °C to 85.0 °C
162 to 210 85.0 °C 60.0 °C to 85.0 °C
<F340> 5
Paper Width Recommended Temperature
(mm) Temperature Input Range
89 to 152 70.0 °C 60 °C to 85 °C
162 to 210 80.0 °C 60 °C to 85 °C
A higher temperature setting should be used when

the ambient humidity is high. A lower temperature
setting should be used when problems occur in paper
collection due to strong curling of the paper.
7. Click the [Set] button.
5.3.4 Monitor Adjustment (0222)
This procedure sets the color balance of the monitor

for each input type.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0222 Monitor Adjustment]
1. Make a print without color and density correction

from a normal film using the master channel for
“Custom Setting”.
2. On the printing screen, correct the pre-scanning

image so that it matches the print using the C, M
and Y keys.
3. Multiply each of the correction values by the “Key

Step Width Setup” value of Menu 0225 “Custom
Setting Regist/Delete”. Then enter the results in
the respective boxes on the screen.
5-23
<Example>
“Key Step Width Setup” values of the master
channel (0) in Menu 0225 “Custom Setting
Register/delete”:
C: 8
M: 8
Y: 8
Correction values in Step 2:

C: +2
M: –1
Y: 0
Correction values to be entered:

C: 8 × 2 = 16
M: 8 × –1 = –8
Y: 8 × 0 = 0
5.3.5 Special Film CH Setting (0223)
This procedure to register or delete channel for the

DX code of special monotone films (which use color
developer). Also to fine adjust the slope (for color)
and balance (for black & white).
[Selection]

and Check] → [0223 Special Film CH Setting]
<Film Name Registration>
1. On the printing screen, insert the film to be

registered to pre-scan it.
2. Double click the [i] button of the status icon lower

left in the screen.
5-24
• The “System Information and Operations Setup”

dialog box appears.
3. Click the [i] button of the “Status Display”.
• The “Status Display” dialog box appears.
• The registered channel is added to the “Special

Film CH Selection” dialog box in the printing
menu screen and used when the DX code
cannot be read.
4. Record the DX code.
5. Open the Menu 0223 screen.
6. Enter the DX code recorded into the “DX Code”

box.
7. Click the keyboard button at the right-hand side of

the title-bar.
• The screen keyboard appears.
8. Enter the film name in the “Film Name” box.
9. Click the [Register] button.
5-25
<Channel Setup>
NOTE: Before channel setting, register the DX code and
film name.
1. Enter the channel number to be registered in the

“CH No.” box. There are 128 film channels.
2. Enter the film name in the box next to the “CH No.”
box.
3. Select “Register”.
• The registered channel is added to the [Process

1] in the printing screen that appears when the
DX code cannot be read.
4. Select the graininess control level in the

“Graininess Control” box.
Graininess Control Level: Normal
High
Low
5. Select the tone in the “Tone” box.

Tone: Color
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
B/W
6. Set “Balance/Slope” for color and “Balance” for

black & white.
7. Enter the DX code registered in “Film Name

Registration” into the “DX Code” box.
• The DX code is listed in the “Registered DX

Code” box.
• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and

Maintenance” screen.
5-26
<Deleting>
1. Select the channel number to be deleted in the
“CH No.” box.
• The DX code and name are displayed in the

“Registered DX Code” box.
2. Click the [Delete] button.
• The DX code is deleted. 5

5.3.6 Monotone Correction Setting (0224)
Follow this procedure to fine adjust the balance

values for the correction type indicated in the
“Monotone Correction” dialog box in the printing
menu screen.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0224 Monotone Correction Setting]
1. Select the correction type to be adjusted in the

“Correction” box.
Correction: B/W
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
User B/W
User Sepia 1
2. Change the balance values.
5-27
5.3.7 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)
Printing is normally performed according to the

condition of the master “0” channel.
The 65 (0 + 64) custom conditions can be set up for
each input type. The custom conditions can be
selected on the printing screen.
The condition editing items differ depending on the
input type (Negative, Reversal or Black & White
Negative), or installation of optional “Tone Selection
Software (B9)”.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0225 Custom Setting Regist/Delete]
1. Select the input type to be set up.

Input Type: Negative
Reversal
Black & White Negative
2. Select number to be set up.

the title-bar.
4. Enter the name for the back printing of custom

setting in the “Name” box.
5. Click the [Cond. Edit] button.
• The “Initial Value Selection” dialog box appears.
6. Select the number to be used as the initial value.
5-28
● Input Type: Negative
• The “Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel appears.
1) Set up “Correct Level”, “Tone Adjust” and

“Hypertone”.
<Correct Level>
Tone Correction
Color/Density
Correction
Hypertone 5
Full Correction Yes Yes ON
Tone Fixing No Yes OFF
L-CORR (Low correction)
Condition Confirm No No OFF
<Tone Adjust>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
<Hypertone>
Hypertone Process: Yes No
Highlight Level: Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Shadow Level: Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Mode: Mode 1 (Normal Hypertone Mode)
Mode 2 (Acceptance rate priority mode;
improving back light and high
contrast)
2) Click the “Key Step Width/BL-SL” tab.
5-29
• The “Key Step Width/BL-SL” panel appears.
3) Set up the key step width and balance/slope.
<Key Step Width Setup>

C, M, Y: Normally enter “8”.
Dc, Dm, Dy: Normally enter “15”.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter “0”.
Change setting only when the whole slope condition
is offset.
4) Click the “Sharpness/Grain Control” tab.
• The “Sharpness/Grain Control” panel appears.
5) Select “Yes” for “Hyper-sharpness process” to set

up “Hyper-sharpness”.
<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low 3
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3
Under Level: –2
–1
0
(Sharpness can be set only individually for under
level.)
<Grain Control Process>

Modulation Roughness
Normal Up Reduced
Lower ↑ ↑
No Down Not reduced
<Sharpness Large-size Setup>

Sharpness can be set up individually for
magnification entered in the “Magnification” box or
higher.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2
5-30
<Minimizing Color Spreading>

Yes: Minimizing color spreading in white area when
printing black and white fine grids, stripes, etc.
6) Click the “High-def/Density Correct” tab.
• The “High-def/Density Correct” panel appears.
7) Set up the High-definition”, “Density Correction”

and “Saturation”. 5
<High-definition Process>
If this selection box is not displayed, select “YES” for
“RP Tone Print” or “Face Express” in Menu 0240.
RP Tone
RP Tone Print: Yes No
Level: Low
Normal
High
Face Express: Normal High
<Density Correction>
Level: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.)
High (Tungsten lighting correction is
increased. )
Type: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.)
Strobe Pref.
Back light Pref.
<Saturation>
–9 to +9 (Color vividness is set up. Normally enter
“0”.)
8) Click the “Gradation/Bright” tab.
• The “Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” panel can be used after

installing the optional “Tone Selection Software (B9).
<Gradation Adjustment>
The “Gradation Select” is a variation function of the
main gradation based on gray. A gradation level can
be selected from the six levels including the normal
one.
Hard 2
Hard 1
Normal
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
5-31
<Bright Mode>
Adjusts saturation of chromatic colors without
influence on flash tone.
Setting range of Color Intensity is –2 to 4.
1 to 4: Saturation emphasis
–1 to 2: Saturation restraint
● Input Type: Reversal
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” and “Reversal Special

Settings” panel can be used after installing the
optional “Tone Selection Software (B9)”.
1) Set up “Correct Level” and “Tone Adjustment”.
<Correct level>
Tone Correction Color/Density Correction Hypertone

Full Correction Yes Yes ON
Tone Fixing No Yes OFF
Condition Confirm No No OFF
<Tone Adjustment>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
NOTE: Click the [Default] button to return to the initial

values.

C, M, Y: Normally enter “4”.
<BL/SL Setup>
5-32

<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low3
Low 2 5
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3

Sharpness can be setup individually for magnification
entered in the “Magnification” box or higher.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2

Yes: Minimizing color spreading in white areas when
6) Click the “High-def/Density Correct” tab.
• The “High-def/Density Correct” panel appears.
7) Set up the saturation.
<Saturation>
Color vividness can be adjusted.
Range is –9 to +9 but normally enter “0”.
5-33
8) Click the “Reversal Special Settings” tab.
• The “Reversal Special Settings” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Reversal Special Settings” screen is available

to the early F330 only.
9) Set up “Basic Tone Balance” and “Correction of

underexposed original”.
<Basic Tone Balance>

0: STANDARD (for Fujifilm reversal)
1: CUSTOM 1 (for Kodak reversal)
<Correction of underexposed original>

Yes
No
NOTE: Selection of “Yes” may reduce productivity.
10) Click the “Gradation/Bright” tab.
• The “Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” panel can be used after

installing the optional “Tone Selection Software (B9).
5-34
● Input Type: Black & White Negative
1) Set up “Correct Level” and “Tone Adjustment”.
<Correct level>
Tone Correction Color/Density Correction
Full Correction Yes Yes
Tone Fixing No Yes 5
Condition Confirm No No
<Tone Adjustment>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
NOTE: Click [Default] to return to the initial values.

<BL/SL Setup>

<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low3
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3
Under Level: -2
-1
0
5-35
<Grain Control Process>

Modulation Roughness
Normal Up Reduced
Lower ↑ ↑
No Down Not reduced

Sharpness can be setup individually for magnification
entered in the “Magnification” box or higher.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2

Yes: Minimizing color spreading in white areas when
• The condition panel disappears and operation

returns to the “Custom Setting Regist/Delete”
screen.
• The “Status” changes to “Use”.
9. To delete the custom condition, select number to

be deleted and click [Delete].
5.3.8 Back Printing Format Setting (0226)
Select the back printing format for the 135/Others and

IX240.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [02 Print condition Setup

and Check] → [0226 Back Printing Format Setting]
5-36
<135/Others>
1. Select the desired printing item from No. “1” to “6”.

the title-bar.
3. Move the cursor to the “User ID” or “Private

Characters” box and enter the user ID or private
characters using the numeric keys of the 5
operation, full or screen keyboard.
NOTE: The maximum number of characters is 3 for the

user ID and 35 for private characters.
No. Printing Item Back Printing Format

User ID + Correction Data +
ABC IARRWSSKK CMYDDD SORT
1 Order No. + Digital Image Order No. +
<FFFFFF> ORDERN CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Frame No. + Custom Setting No.
Serial No. + Correction Data+
Sno IARRWSSKK CMYDDD SORT
2 Order No. + Digital Image Order No. +
<FFFFFF> ORDERN CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Order No. + Private+ SORT PP........PP <FFFFFF>
3
Frame No. + Custom Setting No. CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Order No. + Date + Private+ SORT YYYYMMDD PP.......PP <FFFFFF>
4
Frame No. + Custom Setting No. CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Mag. + Correction Data +Order No.+
MM.MM IARRWSSKK CMYDDD SORT AAA
5 Angle + Digital Image Order No. +
ORDERN <FFFFFF> CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
6 No Back Printing
AAA: Rotating Angle ORDERN: Digital Imaging Order No.
ABC: User ID PP.........PP: Private Characters
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC: Custom Setting No. Sno: Serial No.
<FFFFFF>: Frame No. SORT: Order No.
IARRWSSKK CMYDDD: Correction Data YYYYMMDD Date (Example: 20021001)
MM.MM: Magnification
5-37
<IX240>
1. Click the “IX240” tab.
2. Select “Printing Item” from “1” to “5”.
3. Select “1” or “2” for the separator.
No. Printing Item Back Printing Format

1 Correction Data + Digital Image Order No. CMYDDD ORDERN
2 Order No. + Digital Image Order No. SORT ORDERN
Order No. + Correction Data
3 SORT CMYDDD ORDERN
+ Digital Image Order No.
Mag. + Correction Data +
4 MM.MM CMYDDD SORT ORDERN
Order No. + Digital Image Order No.
5 No Back Printing
IARRWSSKK CMYDDD: Correction Data ORDERN: Digital Imaging Order No.

MM.MM: Magnification SORT: Order No.
5.3.9 Index Conditions (0227)
Select the condition of the index printing.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [02 Print condition Setup

and Check] → [0227 Index Conditions]
<135>
1. Click the [▼] button in the box to be changed and
select the format.
Logo: FUJICOLOR*INDEX PRINT

FUJICOLOR INDEX PRINT
INDEX PRINT
Index Custom Logo: Can be registered in Menu
1020.
5-38
<IX240>
1. Click the “IX240” tab.
2. Click the [▼] button in the box to be changed and

select the format.
Logo: Negative – FUJICOLOR*INDEX PRINT

FUJICOLOR INDEX PRINT
INDEX PRINT
Reversal – FUJICHROME*INDEX PRINT 5
FUJICHROME INDEX PRINT
INDEX PRINT
Index Custom Logo: Can be registered in Menu
1020.
3. Select “Crop” or “Border Line” for “Frame”.
4. Click the [▼] button in the “Border Line” box and

select the border line.
Frame: Cropping
Border Line Green/White
Black/White
5.3.10 Image Correction Setup (0240)
This menu is used to enable image correction

condition setting and custom setting condition editing
by selecting “Yes” for each item.
Set the image correction type for each input type.
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
B/W negative
[Selection]

and Check] → [0240 Image Correction Setup]
1. Set the ten items in the Hyper ACCS frame.
5-39
5.3.11 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (0241)
This menu is used to change the basic magnification

for each print size.
The magnification can be changed by Magnification ×
Rate / 100 by entering value (%) in the “Rate” box.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0241 Fine Adjustment of the Print
Mag.Setting]
1. Select the carrier, mask and film types.
2. Select the print size.
3. Select “Rate”
Range: 86 to 200 %
5.3.12 Paper Condition Method Setup (0242)
This procedure sets the paper condition setup <F330>

method.
[Selection]

and Check] → [0242 Paper Condition Method Setup]
1. Select “YES” or “NO” for the ambient variable

correction.
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the master magazine

registration.
5-40
3. If “YES” is selected in step “2”, set the ID, width, <F340>

paper and type for the master magazine.
NOTE: • Ambient variable correction: When there is a

sudden change in temperature during the day,
it influences the color development process of
color papers. To maintain constant printing
quality in that condition, select “YES”.
• Master magazine registration: Paper condition
setup must be performed for all papers if “NO”
is selected.
5
4. F330: Select “AD100” or “AD200” for
“Densitometer Type”.
5-41
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03)
5.4.1 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (0300)
This menu sets up the detecting level for unexposed

IX240 frame.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [03 Scanner Adjustment/

Maintenance] → [0300 Unexposed Frame Detect
Level Set]
1. Select “Unexposed Frame Detect Level”.

Unexposed Frame Detect Level:
1: Unexposed frames are not displayed.
2: All frames including unexposed frames are
displayed.
3: Unexposed frames between exposed frames
are also displayed.
5.4.2 Brightness Correction (0301)
The brightness correction is executed automatically

when the pre-operational checks or changing mask
on the first printing screen of the day.
Perform this menu when line appears in print due to
dust or dirt.
When reading the shading data again by performing
the scanner correction with the IX240 mask, check
mark “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read” and
execute the brightness correction.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0301 Bright Correction]
5-42
1. Clean the diffusion box.
2. For the auto film carrier NC100AC, set it in the

135 lane.
3. Check (✓) both “Pixel Speed Corr. Data Read”

and “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read”.
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC

CD763
• Operation returns to the menu screen after

correction.
5. Change the auto film carrier NC100AC to the

IX240 lane.
6. Proceed to Menu 0301 and check (✓) “Light

Source Shading Corr. Data Read”.

correction.
8. Install the manual film carrier with the calibration Calibration Mask
mask.
9. Proceed to Menu 0301 and check (✓) both “Pixel

Speed Corr. Data Read” and “Light Source
Shading Corr. Data Read”.

correction.
Manual Film Carrier M69D

CD844
5-43
5.4.3 Input Check (0320)
This procedure displays the current status of each

section.
NOTE: Refer to Section 18.1 for input parts location.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0320 Input Check]
1. Click the [Next Page] button.

↓ [Next Page] [Previous Page] ↑
5.4.4 Focus Position Adjustment (0321)
This menu is used to set up the center value for the

auto focusing of each film carrier mask.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0321 Focus Position Adjustment]
NOTE: • If the scanner correction in the pre-operational

checks is not executed after the system starts up,
perform the following items before “Focus Position
Adjustment”.
• Menu 0350 “DC Offset Cancel”
• Menu 0349 “Dark Correction”
1. Install the carrier and proceed to the “Focus

Position Adjustment” screen.
• Carrier ID, type and mask type (M69D only)are

displayed.
5-44
2. Click the [Run] button.
5
3. Insert a film into the carrier and click the [OK]
button.
• The position adjustment value is displayed when

the adjustment is completed.
5-45
5.4.5 I/O Check (0340)
This procedure displays the status of motors,

solenoids and sensors.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0340 I/O Check]
• The status of each part is displayed in real time.
NOTE: Refer to section 18.1 “I/O Parts Diagram” for

parts location.
1. Press any buttons to specify an operation. ↓ [Next Page] [Previous Page] ↑
• The selected operation is performed.
5-46
5.4.6 Carrier Inclination Display (0341)
This procedure checks the status of the carrier

inclination.
NOTE: If the value is more than 100, replace the film

carrier.
[Selection]
5
Maintenance] → [0341 Carrier Inclination Display]
1. Insert a film into the carrier.
2. Click the [135] or [120] button.
• The auto focusing is started and the position of

the focus pulses in vertical and horizontal of the
carrier are displayed.
5-47
5.4.7 CCD Data Display (0342)
Use this menu to confirm the CCD settings when

there is a CCD-related irregularity or when lines or
other abnormality appear in prints due to dust or dirt
on the CCD, or if malfunctioning of the light source
LED is suspected.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0342 CCD Data Display]
NOTE: If the scanner correction in the pre-operational

checks is not executed after the system starts up,
perform the following items before “CCD Data
Display”.
Menu 0350 “DC Offset Cancel”
Menu 0349 “Dark Correction”
NOTE: Do not try to change “Output Mode” and “Test

Pattern”.
Output mode box
Operating mode box

(Full-in, 1/4 or 1/8)
Lens magnification box (0.27 to 0.82)

Test pattern box (1 to 8)
Light color switches
Display update/stop buttons

Auto exposure result
Accumulated time switch and box
Auto focus button
Offset cancel button

Film pressure button
Auto exposure button Save button

Current value boxes and setting button
Display switching button
Density enable switch
Conjugate length moving box and button S/N value inspection button
Dark correction enable switch
Lens moving box and button and table create button Close button
Brightness correction enable switch
5-48
1. Click the [Switch display] button.
<Dust Checking>
1. Check mark the “R”, “G” and “B” switches in “Light

color”. 5
2. Enter “10.000” in “Accumulated time” and check
(✓) the switch.
3. Move the pointer to the dust position and click the

left-hand button of the mouse while pressing the
[Shift] key.
• The image of the dust area is centered and

magnified.
4. Click the [Switch display] button.
• The graph is deformed at the dust position as

shown.
5-49
<LED Inspection> IR Pattern
1. Change “Magnification” to “0.27”.
2. Check mark the LED switch in “Light color” to be

lighted.
3. Check (✓) the “Accum. time (ms)” switch, enter

the following value in the “Current value” box and
click the [Set] button.
IR: 20.0
R, G or B: 2.0
4. Remove the diffusion box and turn ON the R Pattern

diffusion box sensor.
• The light-emitted pattern is displayed on the

screen.
5. To focus the LED, enter the following value in the

“Conjugate length move” and “Lens move” boxes
and click the [Move] and [Create table] buttons.
“Conjugate length move”: 11000

“Lens move”: 650
G Pattern
B Pattern
5-50
5.4.8 Operation Information Display (0343)
The LED lighting time and piezoelectric actuator

operating time are displayed.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0343 Operation Information
Display]
5
1. Click the [Clear] button when the LED or CCD unit
has been replaced.
• The clear confirmation dialog box appears.
• The times are cleared.
5.4.9 Lens Registration (0344)
This procedure sets the lens ID to be used and its

focal length.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0344 Lens Registration]
• The current status is displayed.
5-51
1. Enter the lens ID number and the lens focal

distance indicated on the label affixed to the lens
unit.
3. Perform the following items.
1) 0345 “Optical Axis Adjustment”

2) 0346 “Optical Magnification Calibration”
3) 0347 “Focus Calibration” Label
4) 0321 “Focus Position Adjustment” for each CD694
carrier
5) 0420 “Mask Position Adjustment”
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345)
This procedure adjusts the optical axis of the image

by moving the film carrier base.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0345 Optical Axis Adjustment]
• The magnification setting is 0.60 when the screen is

opened.
1. Install the focusing chart jig to the carrier base.
2. Click the [AF] button.
• The calculated values of 0.60 magnification are

displayed in the “Axis Def.” and “Image rotation”
columns in real time.
Focusing Chart Jig

RD665
5-52
• OK is displayed if the data is within the specified

range.
3. If the data is out of range, loosen the four

hexagonal socket head bolts securing the carrier
base and adjust the optical axis by moving the
base together with the jig.
Range of OK
Out of optical axis Front (–)/Rear (+): ±10
Left (–)/Right (+): ±10
Image rotation Left (–)/Right (+): ±5
NOTE: Adjust image rotation first, then the optical axis.

Focusing Chart Jig
X-axis: Move the carrier base towards front and
rear.
Y-axis: Move the carrier base towards right and
left.
Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts (4)
RD666
4. Tighten the four hex. socket head bolts after “OK”
is displayed.
5.4.11 Optical Magnification Calibration (0346)
This procedure calibrates the optical magnification.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0346 Optical Magnification
Calibration]
• The current status is displayed.
5-53
1. Set the focusing chart jig to the carrier base.
Focusing Chart Jig

RD665
• The optical magnification calibration is

performed.
• The result is displayed.
• The “I-1223” message appears.
5. Perform the steps in the following menus.

- 0347 “Focus Calibration”
- 0321 “Focus Position Adjustment” for each
carrier
5-54
5.4.12 Focus Calibration (0347)
The center value for each printing magnification can

be set up in this menu.
The NC100AC with film in the 135-lane can be used
to execute this menu if the focusing chart jig is not
available.
[Selection]
5
Maintenance] → [0347 Focus Calibration]
1. Install the focusing chart jig instead of the carrier.
Focusing Chart Jig

RD665
2. Click the [Create table] button.
• The result is displayed on the screen.
5-55
5. Perform Menu 0321 “Focus Position Adjustment”.
5.4.13 Spectral Calibration (0348)
After replacing the LED circuit board assembly or light

source unit, perform Menu 0351 “LED Light Amount
Adjustment” for negative and reversal films and then
clear “LED Light Time” in Menu 0343 “Operation
Information Display”.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0348 Spectral Calibration]
Perform the spectral calibration using the following

tools.
Tools: Chart/floppy disk set

Manual film carrier M69D
Calibration mask
135M mask
1. Insert the floppy disk into the main control unit.
5-56
3. Install the manual film carrier with the calibration Calibration Mask
mask to the carrier base.
Manual Film Carrier M69D

CD844
• The brightness correction is performed.
5. Replace the calibration mask with the 135M

mask.
6. Insert the “No. 10010001” film into the 135M mask

and set it in the exposure position.
135M Mask
No.10010001 Film
CD805
5-57
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the

[Read again] button to read the image again.
8. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they are at

the center of each patch by using the arrow keys.
10. Repeat Steps 6 to 9 for Chart Film No. 10020001,

No. 10030001, No. 10040001, No.10050001, No.
10060001 and No. 10070001.
12. Remove the floppy disk from the main control unit.
5-58
5.4.14 Darkness Correction (0349)
Perform the darkness correction for the CCD.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0349 Dark Correction]

correction.
5.4.15 DC Offset Cancel (0350)
This function cancels DC offset of the CCD and

normally executed automatically during the pre-
operational checks.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0350 DC Offset Cancel]
5-59
5.4.16 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0351)
Adjust LED light amount when:

• the LED circuit board assembly is replaced.
• the gradation setting is changed.
• the light source unit or CTC22/24 circuit board is
replaced.
• light amount is reduced.
After executing this menu, perform Menu 0348
“Spectral Calibration” and then clear “LED Light Time”
in Menu 0343 “Operation Information Display”.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0351 LED Light Amount
Adjustment]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in its 135-

lane.
NOTE: Do not insert a film.
2. Click [Run].
5-60
5.4.17 Pixel Correction (0352)
Perform gray pixel detection in this menu after

replacing CCD.
Detected gray pixels are corrected automatically.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0352 Pixel Correction]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC, set it in the

135-lane and select the 135F mask.
NOTE: • Do not insert a film into the carrier.

• For manual film carrier M69D, set the
calibration mask.
2. Click [Run].
5-61
• Result of gray pixel detection is displayed.
5.4.18 CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment (0353)
Perform overflow voltage adjustment in this menu

after replacing CCD.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0353 CCD Overflow Voltage
Adjustment]
1. Remove the carrier and set the 135-diffusion box.
5-62
• Result of auto overflow voltage adjustment is

displayed.
• The result of auto adjustment is registered.
5.4.19 CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment (0354)
Perform CCD AD timing auto adjustment in this menu

after replacing CCD.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0354 CCD AD Auto Adjustment]
NOTE: AD timing 1: Feed through level timing (Black level

sampling time)
AD timing 2: Data level timing (Data sampling time)
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC, set it in the

135-lane and select the 135F mask.
NOTE: Do not insert a film into the carrier.
5-63
• Result of auto adjustment is displayed.
• The result of auto adjustment is registered.
5-64
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)
5.5.1 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (0400)
In this menu, the feeding amount for the fixed feeding

mode of the 135 films can be adjusted.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [04 Carrier Adjustment/

Maintenance] → [0400 NC100AC Fixed Feeding
Setup]
5
1. Set up fixed feed frame lengths for the 135 full and
half sizes by clicking the [▼] and [▲] buttons.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to return to the initial

values.
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420)
This menu is used to adjust mask position against the

monitor screen and prints.
This menu should be executed for all carriers and
masks to be used.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0420 Mask Position Adjustment]
1. Install the film carrier and mask to be adjusted.
• The carrier ID, carrier type and mask type are

displayed.
5-65
NOTE: • Set a mount frame without film when adjusting

the mount mask.
• Do not insert a film.
• Remove the upper mask before performing the
IX240-lane of the NC100AC.
IX240 Upper Mask
RD437
2. Click the [Image Disp] button.
• The mask and adjustment frames are displayed.
3. Click the [Auto Correct] button.
• The mask opening position is corrected

automatically and the horizontal and vertical
correction values are displayed in the “Position
Adjust” boxes.
4. If necessary, adjust position manually by clicking

the “Position Adjust” arrow buttons.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to return to the initial

position.
• The message disappears.
5-66
5.5.3 NC100AC Input Check (0421)
The status of the sensors of the auto film carrier

NC100AC can be checked.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0421 NC100AC Input Check]
5
5-67
5.5.4 M69D Input Check (0422)
The status of the sensors of the manual film carrier

M69D can be checked.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0422 M69D Input Check]
5-68
5.5.5 NC100AC Working Information Display (0423)
Working information of the auto film carrier NC100AC

can be checked.
When replacing the NC100AC, write data into the
EEPROM (memory in the carrier) and return the
carrier to Fujifilm for analysis.
[Selection]
5
Maintenance] → [0423 NC100AC Working
Information Display]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC.

<Data Writing into Floppy Disk>

The carrier can be returned with data in a floppy disk
instead of data written in the EEPROM.
1) Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive of the main

control unit.
2) Click the [FD writing] button.
• Working information is written from the main

control unit to the floppy disk.
<Data Writing into EEPROM>

This mode is used for overwriting data in the carrier.
1) Click the [EEPROM writing] button.

control unit to the EEPROM of the carrier.
• The message disappears.
4) Remove the NC100AC and reinstall it.
5-69
<Data Clear>
[Total Value Clear]: Clears all data.
[Current Value Clear]: Clears current data.
[Clear]: Clears appropriate item data.
5.5.6 M69D Working Information Display (0424)
Working information of the manual film carrier M69D

can be checked.
When replacing the M69D, write data into a floppy
disk and return it to Fujifilm together with the carrier.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0424 M69D Working Information
Display]
1. Install the manual film carrier M69D.
<Data Writing into Floppy Disk>

1) Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive of the main
control unit.
2) Click the [FD writing] button.

control unit to the floppy disk.
<Data Clear>
[Total Value Clear]: Clears all data.
[Current Value Clear]: Clears current data.
[Clear]: Clears appropriate item
data.
5-70
5.5.7 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425)
The image frame size displayed after pre-scanning

can be set up in this menu.
The default values are set to optimum condition.
Changing of this value may result a mask frame, etc.
appearing in the monitor screen.
[Selection]
5
Maintenance] → [0425 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup]”
1. Select the carrier type to be set up monitor frame

ratio.
2. Change the monitor frame ratio by clicking the [▼]

and [▲] buttons.
NOTE: The default values are 95% for the NC100AC

and 98% for the M69D.
3. Click the [Storage] button.
• The data is saved.
5-71
5.5.8 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (0440)
This procedure calibrates the optical sensors and

shows the result data.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0440 NC100AC Sensor Calibration]
1. Check that there is no film in the carrier.
• The calibration results are displayed.
NOTE: The calibration results are shown but not saved.
5.5.9 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441)
This procedure sets up offset value of focus position

for each carrier and mask.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0441 Focus Offset Adjustment]
5-72
1. Select the carrier type to be set up.
2. Change the offset value of the mask to be set up.
NOTE: Enter “0.00”mm normally.
3. Click the [Storage] button.
5.5.10 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (0442)
This procedure calibrates the optical sensors and

displays the LED current setup and sensor output
data. The data can be read out and written in.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0442 NC100AC Sensor Calibration
Information]
1. Make sure there is no film in the auto film carrier

NC100AC.
5-73
• The sensors are calibrated and the results are

displayed.
NOTE: [EEPROM reading]:

Data is read out from the EEPROM of the
carrier and written to the main control unit.
[EEPROM writing]:
Data in the main control unit is written to the
EEPROM in the carrier.
5-74
5.5.11 NC100AC Installation Information Display (0443)
This procedure is used to check the auto film carrier

ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0443 NC100AC Installation
Information Display]
5
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC.
2. Proceed to the “0443 NC100AC Installation

Information Display “ screen.
5.5.12 NC100AC Installation Information Setup (0444)
This procedure is used to register the auto film carrier

ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0444 NC100AC Installation
Information Setup]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC to be

registered.
2. Proceed to the “0444 NC100AC Installation

Information Setup” screen.
• The carrier ID and hard revision numbers are

displayed.
NOTE: The numbers can be rewritten if necessary.
5-75
5.5.13 NC100AC I/O Check (0445)
This procedure displays the status of the motors, Scanner Cover Steel Plate Bracket
solenoid and sensors. Carrier Extension
Harness
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0445 NC100AC I/O Check]
1. Connect the auto film carrier NC100AC to the

plug-in connector using the carrier extension
harness.
Carrier Extension Harness: P/N 136C967885

Lever for NC100AC
2. Insert the carrier lever stopper between the Carrier Lever Stopper
scanner cover and the lever for the NC100AC. CD1217
Carrier Lever Stopper: P/N 322C1024011
• The 24V circuit for the NC100AC turns ON.
5-76
3. Proceed to the “0445 NC100AC I/O Check”

screen.
4. Click the operation buttons and check if each part

is operating normally.

5
5.5.14 M69D I/O Check (0446)
This procedure displays the status of the solenoid

and sensors.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0446 M69D I/O Check]
1. Connect the manual film carrier M69D to the plug-

in connector using the carrier extension harness.
Carrier Extension Harness: P/N136C967885
2. Proceed to the “0446 M69D I/O Check” screen.
3. Click the operating buttons and check if each part

is operating normally.
5-77
5.5.15 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (0447)
This procedure saves data from the carrier into the

hard disk when replacing the carrier or installing the
machine. Data can be downloaded from the hard disk
into the carrier after replacing the carrier circuit board.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0447 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete]
<Backing Up>
1. Click the [HD Backup] button.
• Information of the present carrier is backed up to

the hard disk in the main control unit.
<Down Loading>
1. Click the [HD Download] button.
<Deleting>
1. Click the [HD Backup Del] button.
5-78
5.5.16 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (0448)
This procedure sets up the data for the auto film

carrier NC100AC.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0448 NC100AC Machine Data
Setup]
5
5-79
1. Click the [EEPROM reading] button.
• Data is read out from the EEPROM and

displayed.
NOTE: [EEPROM reading]:

Data is read out from the EEPROM of the
carrier and written to the main control unit.
[EEPROM writing]:
Data in the main control unit is written to the
EEPROM in the carrier.
2. If necessary, change the setting values and click

the [EEPROM writing] button.
• The dialog box disappears and data is written to

the EEPROM.
5. Remove the NC100AC and reinstall it.
5-80
5.5.17 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (0449)
This menu is used to check that the IX240 magnetic

information of the IX240 can be read out.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0449 NC100AC Magnetic
Information Reading]
5
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in IX240
lane.
2. Load the film cartridge or strip film.
• The magnetic information is read out and

displayed.
0: Reading out is OK.

?: Magnetic information presents but format is NG.
×: Reading out is NG.
–: No magnetic information.
5-81
5.5.18 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (0450)
This menu is used to check that the magnetic head is

operating correctly.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0450 NC100AC Magnetic Verify]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in IX240

lane.
2. Load the film cartridge or strip film.
• The magnetic information is read out and the

result is displayed.
NOTE: If the magnetic reading head is fouled, the “W-

5140” message appears.
5.5.19 NC100AC Nest Section Operation (0451)
This procedure is used when checking operation of

the IX240 nest section.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0451 Nest Section Operation]
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in the IX240-

lane.
2. Insert a film cartridge or strip film.
5-82
• The nest section operates and stops.
5. Click [Close] button.
5
5.5.20 NC100AC Feeding Operation (0452)
This procedure is used to check film feed operation

for the NC100AC.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0452 NC100AC Feeding
Operation]
<135-lane Feeding Operation>
1. Install the NC100AC in the 135-lane.
2. Select “Neg.” or “B/W” for “Original type setup”.
3. Select “Frame” or “Feed” for “Frame/Feed”.
5. Insert a selected film.
• The carrier feeds the film.
5-83
<IX240-lane Feeding Operation>
1. Install the NC100AC in the 240-lane.
2. Select “Neg.” or “B/W” for “Original type setup”.
3. Select “Lv1”, “Lv2” or “Lv3” for “Unexposed frame

detect level”.
NOTE: "Lv1", "Lv2" and "Lv3" in the "Unexposed frame

detect level" box indicate levels 1, 2 and 3 in
Menu 0300 "Unexposed Frame Detect Level
Set" (see Subsection 5.4.1).
5. Insert a film cartridge or strip film.
• The carrier feeds the film.
5-84
5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05)
5.6.1 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (0520)
This menu should be executed for all paper

magazines when installing the machine, or when a
new magazine is registered.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [05 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance] → [0520 Paper Feed Length
5
Adjustment]
1. Move the cursor to “ID” and select the magazine

to be adjusted.
2. Enter “89.0” in both “Small Size” boxes for “Feed

length setting value” and “Actual measured value”
and “297.0” in both “Large Size” boxes.
4. Make three grid pattern prints with feed length of

297.0 mm and three of 89.0 mm in Menu 0521
“Test Pattern Printing”.
Or feed three sheets of paper of feed length of
297.0 mm and three of 89.0 mm in Menu 0523
“Paper Feed”.
5. Measure and record the length of each third grid

pattern print.
NOTE: Always measure the third one since the feed

length may not stabilize immediately after
setting paper.
6. Proceed to “Paper Feed Length Adjustment”.
7. Enter each measured value in “Actual measured

value” boxes.
<Offset Adjustment>
On this menu, the paper feed length can be adjusted

by entering the offset value of the feed length.
1. Select magazine ID to be adjusted.
2. Enter the offset value in the “Input offset” box.
5-85
4. Make grid pattern prints in Menu 0521 “Test

Pattern Printing” and make sure of the feed length
of the prints.
5.6.2 Test Pattern Printing (0521)
This procedure creates test pattern prints.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0521 Test Pattern Printing]
1. Move the cursor to “Test pattern selection”, and

select “Grid”, “Borderless contact”, “Bordered
contact”, “Gradation” or “Step wedge”.
2. Move the cursor to “Length” and enter the feed

length (mm).
3. Move the cursor to “Q’ty” and enter number of

prints.
• After about five minutes for the F330 or three

minutes for the F340, the print is output to the
sorter.
■ Color Drift Inspection

1) Make a grid test print.
2) Use a magnifying lens (X25) to check that the
vertical line for the color drift is 1/8 pixel or less in
width, and the horizontal line is 1/4 pixel or less in
width.
Reference: 1 pixel width = 0.08mm
5-86
Grid: For color drift and feed Borderless contact: For exposure and
length inspection processing unevenness inspection
5
Bordered contact: For exposure and processing Gradation: Step wedge:
unevenness, or white border inspection For gradation inspection For color inspection
5-87
5.6.3 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522)
The G and B laser optimal temperature setting

message appears every three months. Set up the
optimal temperatures using this screen.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0522 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup]
NOTE: Wait about 1 hour after the temperature

adjustment is completed.
2. Click the [B-SHG] button.
5-88
• The result is displayed. 5

5.6.4 Paper Feed (0523)
This procedure feeds and processes unexposed

sheets of paper.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0523 Paper Feed]
1. Enter the number of sheets in “Q’ty” box and the

feed length in “Length” box.
Number of sheets: 1 to 999

Feed length: 82.5 to 305.0
• The sheets of paper are fed and processed.
5-89
5.6.5 Printer Temperature Display (0524)
This procedure displays the printer temperature and

printer status.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0524 Printer Temperature Display]
NOTE: • The temperatures are updated every 5 seconds.

• Always keep “ON” for “Working” of “Abnormal
temperature monitoring”.
5.6.6 Printer Input Check (0525)
This procedure displays the status of the sensors.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0525 Printer Input Check]
5-90
5.6.7 Precut Length Setting (0526)
This menu is used to set up the length of paper

leading end cutting. The leading end of paper is cut
after setting the paper magazine and before starting
printing after the system is started up.
[Selection]

5
Maintenance] → [0526 Precut Length Setting]
1. Enter the precut length in “Precut length.” box.
Range: 89.0 to 305.0mm
5.6.8 Image Position Fine Adjustment (0527)
This procedure adjusts white border and image

position in a template for each magazine and paper
feed length.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0527 Image Position Fine
Adjustment]
1. Select the magazine ID.
2. Enter adjustment values (mm) in the “Main scan

(X)” and “Sub scan (Y)” boxes of the paper length
range to be adjusted.
5-91
Sub Scanning
NOTE: Main scanning direction: +X (Y) Direction –Y
Opposite direction of main scanning: –X
Sub scanning direction: +Y Feed
Direction
Opposite direction of sub scanning: –Y
Adjustment Range: –3.0 to +3.0 mm

–X +X
• Fine adjustment is registered.
4. Click the [Close] button. +Y
Main Scanning
(X) Direction
5.6.9 Printer I/O Check (0540)
This procedure displays the status of the motors,

[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0540 Printer I/O Check]
1. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates if it is

normal.

5-92
5.6.10 Filter Replacement History (0541)
This procedure is used to check the laser unit filter

replacement history and the pressurizing time of the
filter fan for last five times
Click the [Replace] button to record when the filter is
replaced.
[Selection]
5
Maintenance] → [0541 Filter Replacement History]
1. Click the [Replace] button when the filter is

replaced.
• The replacement date is displayed.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize the replacement

history.
5.6.11 Laser Exposure Check (0542)
This procedure performs an RGB test exposure and

displays the results.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0542 Laser Exposure Check]
5-93
5.6.12 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543)
This procedure displays the R laser(R-LD) data in the

EEPROM.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0543 R Laser(R-LD) Data]
5.6.13 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544)
This procedure displays the G laser(G-SHG) data in

the EEPROM.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0544 G Laser(G-SHG) Data]
5.6.14 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (0545)
This procedure displays the B laser(B-SHG) data in

the EEPROM.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0545 B Laser(B-SHG) Data]
5-94
5.6.15 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (0546)
This procedure displays the parameters for exposure

positions.
Normally parameter changing is unnecessary.
When the result of Menu 0547 "Main Scanning
Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Synchronous
Rough Adjustment" should be varied purposely,
change the parameter.
5
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0546 Scanning Position/Scanning
Home Position Parameter Setup]
1. Enter the scanning position/scanning home

position parameters by clicking the [▼] and [▲]
buttons.
Unit
Main scanning: Pixel
Sub-scanning: Raster
2. Click the [OK] button to set the parameters.
5.6.16 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/

Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (0547)
This procedure performs the scanning adjustment

and laser beam synchronization rough adjustment.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0547 Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment]
NOTE: Perform this adjustment after processing three or

more sheets of paper because the feed length may
not stabilize immediately after setting paper.
1. Install the paper magazine for the narrowest

paper width being used.
5-95
← →
• The print is outputted in about five minutes for
C
the F330 or three minutes for the F340.
3. Measure the dimensions of A, B and C, then A→ ← → ←B

record them.
Sub-Scanning Line
NOTE: Error of measurement: Within 0.5mm
Rough Adjustment
4. Move the cursor to “A: Left measured value” and Block
enter the measured A value.
5. Move the cursor to “B: Right measured value” and

enter the measured B value.
6. Click the [Enter] button of “Width direction (main

scanning position)”.
8. Move the cursor to “C: Top measured value” and

enter the measured C value.
9. Click the [Enter] button of “Feeding direction (sub-

scanning position)”.
11. Find the X coordinate which has the minimum

color drift on the print for the vertical lines using
an inverted magnifier (x20-40), and record the
coordinate value and the drifted color (CMY) order
from the left side.
12. Check and record the drifted color (CMY) order of

the sub-scanning line from the top using an
inverted magnifier (x20-40).
13. Move the cursor to “X(Width)” and enter the

measured X value.
14. Move the cursor to “Y(Feed)” and enter the

measured Y value.
5-96
15. Click the [Enter] button of “Coordinate with least

amount of color drift”.
5
5.6.17 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548)
This procedure performs the fine adjustment of the

laser beam synchronization.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0548 Laser Beam Sync. Fine
Adjustment Print]
1. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for

main scanning” and enter the drifted color order
from the left recorded in “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(Menu 0547)”.
2. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for sub-

scanning” and enter the drifted color order from
the top recorded in “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(Menu 0547)”.
5-97
• The print is outputted in about five minutes for

the F330 or three minutes for the F340.
NOTE: The adjustment print has 20 or 25 vertical and

horizontal lines.
4. Find numbers that have the minimum color drift on

the output print for the vertical and horizontal lines
using the magnifier (x20-40).
5. Move the cursor to the “Best main scanning

position” and enter the number of the vertical lines
found.
6. Move the cursor to the “Best sub-scanning

position” and enter the number of the horizontal
lines found.
5.6.18 Laser History Display (0549)
Display the exposure time and current value of R-LD,

G-SHG and B-SHG.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintence] → [05 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance] → [0549 Laser History Display]
5-98
1. Click the [Switch display] button to switch between

the graph and numeric displays.
5.6.19 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550)
This procedure copies the LUT (Look-up Table) from

one magazine to another.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0550 Paper Condition Setup
Table(LUT) Copy]
1. Specify the ID of the source magazine.
2. Specify the ID of the destination magazine.
• Copying is performed.
5-99
5.6.20 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551)
This procedure adjusts the printer mechanism.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0551 Printer Mechanical Fine
Adjustment]
Adjust the printer paper feed system.
Adjust the sub-scanning motor speed to 60mm/sec.

for each paper magazine.

1. Make the following print in menu 0521.
Print feed length: 290mm

Print type: Grid
2. Measure the length of 15 squares in the feed

direction of the print.
Standard length of 15 squares: 254.0mm
3. Enter “254.0” in “Length” box of “Calculating”.
4. Enter the measured value in “Meas. Val.” box of 15 Squares (254.0mm)

“Calculating”.
5. Click the [Calculating] button.
• The calibrating value is calculated and

displayed.
6. Enter the calculated value in the appropriate box

of “Setting for each paper width”.
• The entered value is set up.
5-100
5.6.21 Back Printer Test (0552)
This procedure makes a test print using the back

printer.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0552 Back Printer Test]
5
1. Set “Q’ty” and “Feed length”.
2. Select the magazine to be used.
• The test print is output.
5.6.22 Printer Operation Data Display (0553)
This procedure displays the printer operation data.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0553 Printer Operation Data
Display]
5-101
5.6.23 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (0554)
This procedure clears specific items of printer

operation data.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0554 Clearing Selected Printer
Operation Data]
1. Select the item to be cleared.
• The selected data item is cleared.
5.6.24 Clearing All Operation Data (0555)
This procedure clears all items of printer and

processor operation data.
NOTE: Total sorts and total number of prints are not

cleared.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0555 Clearing All Operation Data]
• All operating data items are cleared.
5-102
5.6.25 Side Register Calibration (0556)
In this menu, perform the exposure start position

calibration when initial machine installation or after
replacing the register unit or register sensor.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0556 Side Register Calibration]
5
• The measured value is set up.
5-103
5.6.26 Data Saving (0557)
The parameter displayed can be written from the

memory on the CTP24 circuit board to the HDD in the
main control unit.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0557 Data Saving]
1. Select the item to be saved.
• The data is saved.
5.6.27 Data Download (0558)
The parameter displayed can be written from the

HDD in the main control unit to the memory on the
CTP24 circuit board.
[Selection]

Maintenance] → [0558 Data Download]
1. Select the item to be downloaded.
2. Click [OK].
5-104
• The data is downloaded.
4. Shut down and restart the system.
5-105
5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06)
5.7.1 Sorter Operating Condition Setup (0600) (F340 Only)
Select the sorter operating conditions for the F340.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [06 Processor

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0600 Sorter Operating
Condition Setup]
1. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Use sorter”.
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Overlap”.
5.7.2 Processing Temperature Setting (0620)
This procedure sets the processing temperatures. <F330>
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0620 Processing
Temperature Setting]
1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1”, “P2” and

“PS” processing temperatures.
<F330> <F340>
Range Initial Value
P1 30.0 to 40.0 38.5
P2 30.0 to 40.0 38.0
PS 30.0 to 40.0 38.0
<F340>
Range Initial Value
P1 30.0 to 47.0 45.0
P2 30.0 to 45.0 40.0
PS 30.0 to 45.0 40.0
5-106
5.7.3 Replenisher Rate Setting (0621)
This procedure sets the replenishment amounts. <F330>
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0621 Replenisher Rate
Setting]
5
1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1-R”, “P2-R”
and “PS-R” replenishment amount.
<F340>
<F330>
Range Initial Value
P1-R 40.0 to 250.0 45.0
P2-R 30.0 to 250.0 35.0
PS-R 100.0 to 300.0 175.0
<F340>
Range Initial Value
P1-R 30.0 to 250.0 45.0
P2-R 20.0 to 250.0 35.0
PS-R 100.0 to 250.0 215.0
5.7.4 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622)
This procedure sets up low volume processing.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0622 Low Volume
Processing Setup]
1. Select “YES” for “Low volume”.
2. Enter minimum processing amount in the box.
Range: 0.0 to 15.0
5-107
3. Enter minimum processing amount for last eight

days in the box.
Range: 0.0 to 99.9
NOTE: Click the [Clear] button to clear all data.
5.7.5 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623)
This procedure calibrates the processor section

temperatures.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0623 Processor
Temperature Calibration]
1. Check that the display values have reached the

“Setting” temperatures.
2. Remove the circulation filter section cover.

PSR Supply Port Cover
Circulation Filter Section Cover

RD032
5-108
3. Turn the P1 filter holder 90° counterclockwise, P1 Circulation Filter Rod

remove the P1 circulation filter and place it on a
tray.
NOTE: • Do not let the solution drip or run.

• F340: Remove the rubber cap instead of the
circulation filter for the PS2.
RD062
4. Measure the temperature of the processing Thermometer

solution and record it.
RD063
5. Reinstall the filter by aligning the fastening tab Tab

with the notch, and then turn it 90° clockwise.
6. If the “Setting” temperatures differ from the values

displayed, move the cursor to the “Measured
value” and enter the values recorded in Step 4.
Range: 0.0 to 99.9
7. Click the [Enter] button.

Notch
8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 for P2, PS2 and PS4.
9. Click the [Close] button. RD064
5-109
5.7.6 Processor Input Check (0624)
This procedure displays the status of the sensors.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0624 Processor Input
Check]
• This screen shows the replenisher tank levels.
The levels are indicated by the color shown below.

Upper limit: Blue
Middle level: Yellow
Lower limit: Red
1. Click the [Close] button. <F330>
<F340>
5-110
5.7.7 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625)
This procedure sets up the processor operating <F330>

condition.
[Selection]

Operating Condition Setup]
5
1. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Dryer section preheat
driving”.
NOTE: Select “No” normally.
2. F340: Select “YES” or “NO” for “PS Solution <F340>

concentration management”.
NOTE: Select “YES” normally.
3. F330: Select “YES” or “NO” for “Rack auto

cleaning”.
4. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Auto intermittent

driving”.
5. F340: Select “YES” or “NO” for “Rack auto

cleaning/P1 Solution evaporation replenishment”.
6. F330: Select “YES” or “NO” for “PS rack cleaning”.
7. Select “YES” or “NO” for “PS Solution evaporation

replenishment”.
8. Select “Standard”, “Low” or “High” for “Humidity”.
NOTE: Select “Standard” normally.
5-111
5.7.8 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0640)
This procedure measures and corrects the

replenisher pump output.
Normally measure only PSR.
When executing this menu to confirm pump operation
for the P1R, P2RA or P2RB, return the discharged
replenisher into the replenisher tank.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0640 Pump Output
Measurement/Setting]
1. Prepare a measuring cylinder.
2. Remove the circulation filter section cover. PSR Supply Port Cover
3. Click the [Start] button for the box to be measured.

RD032
• The alarm beeps intermittently for 10 seconds.
5-112
NOTE: Click the [Cancel] button to stop the operation. PSR Replenisher Nozzle
4. Before the pump starts discharging, disconnect

the replenisher nozzle and insert it into the
measuring cylinder.
• The replenisher pump starts discharging.
• The alarm beeps when discharging is

completed.
5
5. Insert the replenisher nozzle into the sub-tank.
6. Place the measuring cylinder on a level surface,

and then read and record the output.
Measuring Cylinder
RD061
7. Pour the replenisher solution from the measuring
cylinder into the waste recovery tank.
8. Select the “Measured value” box, and enter the

recorded output value using the numeric keys or
clicking the [▲] and [▼] buttons.
NOTE: The machine automatically measures and

adjusts the pump output for P1-R, P2-RA and
P2-RB.
10. Reinstall the circulation filter section cover.
11. Clean the measuring cylinder.
5.7.9 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0641)
This procedure measures and corrects auto cleaning <F330>

pump output.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0641 Auto Cleaning
Output Measurement/Setting
1. Prepare the measuring cup for auto-cleaning

output measurement.
5-113
2. Open the dryer unit. <F340>
3. Install the splash-prevention cover over the dryer Splash-prevention Cover

fan section.
RD060
4. Loosen the two screws and remove the No.1 Screws (2)
crossover rack.
NOTE: Do not remove crossover racks which are not to

be measured.
No.1 Crossover Rack

CD092
5-114
5. Release the tab and remove the auto-cleaning Locking Tab

nozzle from the No.1 crossover rack.
Washer Nozzle
CD093
6. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.
Auto-cleaning Nozzle
CD873
7. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the measuring Measuring Cup

cup.
CD094
5-115
8. Install the measuring cup by aligning the nozzle's

rubber joint with the hole.
NOTE: Make sure the rubber joint is properly inserted.

If not, the solution will splash.
9. Click the [Start] button for the P1.
Measuring Cup
Rubber Boots
Hole
CD095
• The 10 second countdown starts.
NOTE: To stop the pump, press the [Cancel] button.
• The alarm beeps once when the discharging is

completed.
10. When the output is completed, release the lock Measuring Cup
lever and remove the measuring cup.
Lock Release Lever

CD096
5-116
11. Place the measuring cup on a horizontal surface, Measuring Cup

read the liquid amount and record it.
12. Dispose of the water from the measuring cup.
13. Install the cleaning nozzle in the No.1 crossover

rack, and install the rack in the P1 processing
rack.
14. Move the cursor to the “Measured value” of the P1 5

and enter the value recorded in Step 11.
15. Release the lock and remove the No.2 crossover

rack.
CD097
16. Release the tab and remove the auto-cleaning No.2 Crossover Rack
nozzle from the No.2 crossover rack.
17. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.
Locking Tab
CD098
18. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the measuring Measuring Cup

cup.
19. Repeat Steps 8 to 14 for the P2.
20. F330: Repeat Steps 19 to 23 for PS1 and PS3.
21. F340: Click the [Start] button for the PS1.
NOTE: F340: Do not use the measuring cup for the

PS1.
22. F340: After the discharging is completed, remove

the No.3 crossover rack and make sure the Auto-cleaning Nozzle
rollers are wet by discharged water.
CD099
23. F340: Reinstall the No.3 crossover rack.
• Operation reterns to the menu screen.
25. Remove the splash-prevention cover and close

the dryer unit.
5-117
5.7.10 Processor I/O Check (0642)
This procedure displays the status of the motors,

[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0642 Processor I/O
Check]
1. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates, if it

is normal.
2. Click the [Close] button. ↓ [Next Page] [Previous Page] ↑
↓ [Next Page]
5-118
[Previous Page] ↑
<F330>
<F340>
5.7.11 Processor Operation Data Display (0643)
This procedure displays the processor operation <F330>

data. The data can be cleared using Menu 0644.
[Selection]

Operation Data Display]
5-119
<F340>
5.7.12 Clearing Selected Operation Data (0644)
This procedure clears specific items of processor <F330>

operation data (displayed in Menus 0643 and 0645).
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0644 Clearing Selected
Operation Data]
1. Select the item to be cleared.
• The selected data item is cleared.

<F340>
5-120
5.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (0645)
This procedure displays the processor operation

data. The data can be cleared using Menu 0644.
[Selection]

Operation Data Display 2]
5
5.7.14 Installation (0646)
This procedure is used for setting, replenisher system <F330>

air bleeding and cartridge opening during initial
installation.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0646 Installation]
1. F330: Select “CP-48S” for “Processing formula”.

F340: Select “CP-49E” for “Processing formula”.
2. Select “No use” for “External waste tank”.
3. Select “50Hz” or “60Hz” for “Frequency setting” in

accordance with the power supply frequency.
<F340>
5. Execute “Washing pump air extraction”, “Opening”

and “Replenisher pump air extraction” in this order
by clicking the [Run] buttons.
5-121
5.7.15 PS Solution Concentration Management (0647) (F340 Only)
This procedure sets up and checks PS solution

measurement level.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0647 PS Solution
Concentration Management]
Reference: Concentration: Low ⇔ High

Measurement Level: 1 ⇔ 15
<Measurement Level Setup>
Enter measurement level value (normally 5 to 7)

indicated on the connector of the DTL24 circuit board
into “Measurement level” in the “Setting” box when
the DTL24 circuit board has been replaced.
1. Record the measurement level indicated on the

connector of the DTL24 circuit board.
2. Change the measurement level to the value

recorded in Step 1 by clicking [▲] or [▼] button in
the “Measurement level” box.
DTL24 Circuit Board

• Operation returns the menu screen.
<Leak Sensor Inspection>
Measurement Level
Inspect the leak sensor (FS421) by following the
RD538
steps given on the next page, if the PS concentration
error is not displayed even though the PS4 solution
concentration is high.
5-122
1. Remove the circulation filter section cover. PSR Supply Port Cover

RD032
2. Remove the screw and then the leak sensor from Leak Sensor (FS421)
the sub-tank.
Tapping Screw
RD268
3. Change “Measurement level” in “Manual PS3 Rubber Cap

measurement” to “1” (most sensitive level).
4. Remove the rubber cap and immerse the leak

sensor into the PS3 processing solution.
5. Click the [Start] button.
Leak Sensor
PS3 Sub-tank
RD535
5-123
• If “NG” is displayed in the “Result” box, the leak

sensor is OK.
6. If the result is “OK”, perform the following steps.
1) Wipe dirt off the end surfaces of the leak Sensor Probes
sensor using a soft cloth.
2) Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
3) If the result is still “OK”, faulty sensor, DTL24

circuit board or harness may be considered.
RD269
5.7.16 Sorter Fine Adjustment Value Setup (0648) (F340 Only)
This procedure adjusts the sorter mechanism.

The values have been set up at the factory and
changing is unnecessary.
[Selection]

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0648 Sorter Fine
Adjustment Value Setup]
5-124
5.8 Self-Diagnostic/Trouble Help (09)
Refer to the separate Service Manual “Self-

Diagnostic/Trouble Help”.
5-125
5.9 Register/Delete
5.9.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020)
This procedure registers or deletes the shop logo that

appears on the index prints.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintenance] → [10 Register/Delete] →

[1020 Shop Logo Regist/ Delete]
<Registration>
1. Insert the floppy disk containing the shop logo to
be registered into the floppy disk drive of the main
control unit.
2. Click the [Add] button.
Floppy Disk
CD1055
• The “Media Selection” dialog box appears.
3. Select “FD” and click the [OK] button.
• The shop logo is displayed in the dialog box.
• The shop logo is registered.
<Deleting>
1. Select the shop logo to be deleted.
2. Click the [Delete] button.
• The shop logo is deleted from the list.
5-126
5.9 Register/Delete
5.9.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021)
See the “Installation Manual” of the optional Variety

Print Service software.
[Selection]

[1021 Template Regist/Delete]
5
5.9.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)
See the “Operating Instructions” of the optional

Variety Print Service software.
[Selection]

[1022 Holiday File Regist/Delete]
5.9.4 Custom Button Registration/Saving (1023)
This menu is used to register the custom button

setting into the main control unit using a floppy disk.
[Selection]

[1023 Custom Button Registration/Saving]
5-127
5.9 Register/Delete
[Procedure]
[Save] button: Customized setting registered in

the main control unit is saved into a
floppy disk.
[Regist] button: Customized setting data edited by
the PC is registered into the main
control unit from a floppy disk.
[Initialize] button: Customized setting is returned to
the initial setting.
<Registration>
1. Select “Function” or “Service” to be registered.
3. Insert the floppy disk for the custom button setting

edited by the Custom Button Setting Tool into the
floppy disk drive of the main control unit.
Custom Button Setting FD

CD1055
• The customized setting is registered into the

main control unit.
5-128
5.9 Register/Delete
<Saving>
1. Select “Function” or “Service” to be saved.
2. Click the [Save] button.
3. Insert the formatted floppy disk into the floppy disk

drive of the main control unit.
Formatted FD
CD1055
• Custom button setting data is saved from the

main control unit to the floppy disk.
<Initializing>
1. Select “Function” or “Service” to be initialized.
2. Click the [Initialize] button.
• Selected customized setting is returned to the

initial setting.
5-129
5.10 Special Operations (99)
5.10.1 Paint (9940)
Do this procedure to use “Paint”.
[Selection]
[Setup and Maintence] → [99 Special Operations] →

[9940 Paint]
NOTE: For information on “Paint” operations, see the

Windows 2000® manual.
1. Click the [X] button in the upper right-hand side of

the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not to click the emergency button.
5.10.2 Explorer (9941)
Do this procedure to use “Explorer”.
[Selection]

[9941 Explorer]
NOTE: For information on “Explorer” operations, see the

Windows 2000 manual.
1. Click the [X] button on the upper right-hand side of

the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not to click the emergency button.
5-130
5.10 Special Operations (99)
5.10.3 Command (9942)
Do this procedure to perform MS-DOS command

operations.
[Selection]

[9942 Command]
5
NOTE: For information on “Command” operations, see the
MS-DOS® manual.
1. Click the [X] button on the upper right-hand side of

the screen.
5.10.4 Screen Keyboard (9943)
Do not use this Menu 9943 normally.

To enter characters in the setup and maintenance
screen, display the screen keyboard by clicking the
keyboard button in the title-bar.
5-131
6. OPERATION SECTION
Parts Location ............................................................................................. 6-2
6.1 Monitor ......................................................................................................... 6-3

6.1.1 Monitor Replacement .................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard ......................................................................................... 6-4

6.2.1 Mouse Replacement...................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Tabletop Cover Removal/Reinstallation...................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Keyboard Replacement................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.4 Light Table (Optional) Replacement ............................................................................ 6-7
6-1
Parts Location
Monitor
Tabletop Cover
Keyboard
Light Table
RD005
6-2
6.1 Monitor
6.1.1 Monitor Replacement
Removal Screws (3)(Loosen)

Screw (Remove)

2. Loosen the three screws and remove one screw

securing the monitor supports.
Monitor Supports
RD361
3. Cut the two cord ties securing the monitor cable. Monitor Power Supply Cable
4. Disconnect the monitor cable connector. Monitor
5. Disconnect the monitor power cable from the

monitor.
6. Remove the monitor and monitor stand.
Monitor Cable
Cord Ties
Connector
Installation RD362
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: • Loop the monitor cables as shown and secure

them using the cord ties.
• After installation, perform the following
adjustments.
1) Adjust monitor color and density
(see monitor instruction manual).
2) Menu 0222 “Monitor Adjustment”
Cord Ties Monitor Cables

RD363
6-3
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard
6.2.1 Mouse Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the connector

on the bracket.
Mouse Cable
CD864
2. Pass the mouse cable through the hole in the

table mat.
Table Mat
Mouse Cable
CD1095
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Mouse

Groove/Cable
removal.
NOTE: Place the mouse on the right-hand end of the table

and insert its cable along the groove in the table as
shown.
CD838
6-4
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard
6.2.2 Tabletop Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove: Screws (4)
• Front upper cover (see Subsection 12.1.1).

• Monitor (see Subsection 6.1.1).
• Mouse (see Subsection 6.2.1).
• Printer Rear Cover (see Subsection 17.2.1).
2. Remove the four screws and then the monitor 6

stand.
Monitor Stand
CD1109
3. Remove the two screws and then the mouse Screws (2)
cable bracket.
Mouse Cable Bracket

RD364
4. Disconnect the JNDL1 and JKEY1 connectors. JNDL1
JKEY1
CD008
6-5
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard
5. Remove the screw and then the auto film carrier Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever
lock lever.
6. Remove the two screws and then the manual film Screw
carrier release lever.
Manual Film Screws (2)

Carrier Release Lever
RD365
7. Remove the table mat. Screws (5)
8. Remove the five screws and then the tabletop

cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of

removal.
Tabletop Cover Table Mat

RD366
6.2.3 Keyboard Replacement
Removal Tapping Screws (4)
1. Remove the tabletop cover

2. Disconnect the connector from the keyboard.
3. Remove the four tapping screws and then the

keyboard.
Installation

removal.
Keyboard Connector
CD464
6-6
6.2 Mouse/Keyboard
6.2.4 Light Table (Optional) Replacement
Removal
1. Shut down the system by performing the post- Light Table Cover
operational checks and turn the built-in circuit
breaker and the main power supply OFF. Screw
2. Remove the screw and then the light table cover.
CD841
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the light Light Table

table.
Connector
CD840-1
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Insert the harness into the opening in the tabletop

cover as shown.
Light Table Harness

CD840-2
6-7
7. FILM CARRIER SECTION
Parts Location ............................................................................................. 7-3

7.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)................................. 7-8
7.1.1 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation.............................................................. 7-8
7.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement ................................................. 7-8
7.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement............................. 7-9
7.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 7-9
7.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement........................ 7-10
7.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED
(LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................................................ 7-10
7.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement .................................... 7-11
7.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement ............................................ 7-11
7.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement................................ 7-12
7.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement .............................................. 7-12
7.1.11 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement..................................................................... 7-13
7.1.12 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement..................................................................... 7-13 7
7.1.13 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement........................................................... 7-14
7.1.14 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement ......................................................... 7-15
7.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation......................................... 7-15
(LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement........................................................................ 7-16
7.1.17 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement................................. 7-16
7.1.18 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement......................................... 7-17
7.1.19 Dummy Head Replacement ........................................................................................ 7-17
7.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation............................................................ 7-18
7.1.21 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement.................................................... 7-19
7.1.22 Film Mask Replacement.............................................................................................. 7-19
7.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) .................................. 7-20
7.2.1 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation...................................... 7-20
7.2.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 7-20
7.2.3 Bottom Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................................................... 7-21
7.2.4 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 7-21
7.2.5 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement.......................................................................... 7-22
7.2.6 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement .... 7-22
7.2.7 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement .......................................................... 7-23
7.2.8 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 7-23
7.2.9 Solenoid (S101) Replacement .................................................................................... 7-24
7.2.10 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ......... 7-24
7.2.11 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 7-25
7.2.12 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........ 7-25
7.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board)
Replacement .............................................................................................................. 7-26
7.2.14 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement............................................................................... 7-26
7.2.15 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 7-26
7.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement ....................................................... 7-27
7.2.17 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement.................................................................. 7-27
(DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................................................ 7-28
7.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement ...................................................... 7-28
7.2.20 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........ 7-29
7.2.21 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P)
(DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement........................................................................ 7-29
7.2.22 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement.................................................................. 7-30
7.2.23 Opposite Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 7-30
7.2.24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ............................................................ 7-31
7-1
7.2.25 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement ............................................................................... 7-32

7.2.26 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 7-32
7.2.27 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement ............................................................................... 7-33
7.2.28 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................... 7-35
7.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................................................................ 7-37
7.3 Nest Section............................................................................................... 7-39
7.3.1 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 7-39
7.3.2 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 7-39
7.3.3 Door Open/Close/Cartridge Sensor (D112/D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board)
Replacement .............................................................................................................. 7-40
7.3.4 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................................. 7-40
7.3.5 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................... 7-42
7.3.6 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation............................................................ 7-42
7.3.7 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 7-44
7.3.8 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation......................................................... 7-45
7.3.9 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement.................................................................. 7-46
7.3.10 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................... 7-47
7.3.11 Door Motor (M104) Replacement ............................................................................... 7-47
7.3.12 Door Drive Gear Replacement.................................................................................... 7-48
7.3.13 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement..................................... 7-49
7.3.14 Spool Rack Replacement............................................................................................ 7-49
7.3.15 Spool Replacement ..................................................................................................... 7-50
7.3.16 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ............................................................................. 7-51
7.3.17 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation.................................................................. 7-52
7.3.18 Cartridge Holder Replacement................................................................................... 7-53
7.3.19 Set Lever Stopper Replacement ................................................................................ 7-53
7.3.20 Cam Roller Replacement ............................................................................................ 7-54
7.4 Winding Section ........................................................................................ 7-55
7.4.1 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................ 7-55
7.4.2 Winding Gear Replacement........................................................................................ 7-55
7.4.3 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................................. 7-56
7.4.4 Film Guide Replacement............................................................................................. 7-57
7.5 Carrier Base Section ................................................................................. 7-58
7.5.1 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................... 7-58
7.5.2 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement ................................ 7-58
7.5.3 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................ 7-59
7.5.4 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement .......................................................................... 7-63
7.5.5 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................ 7-65
7.5.6 Gear Replacement ....................................................................................................... 7-65
7.5.7 Ball Catch Replacement.............................................................................................. 7-66
7.5.9 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly......................................... 7-69
7.5.10 Carrier Table Slider Guide Replacement................................................................... 7-70
7.5.11 Carrier Base Assembly Replacement........................................................................ 7-70
7.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional)............................................... 7-74
7.6.1 MNC Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................................... 7-74
7.6.2 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement ........................................................... 7-75
7.6.3 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement .............................................................. 7-76
7.6.4 Negative Mask Adjustment......................................................................................... 7-77
7-2
Parts Location
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC
IX240 Perforation Sensor LED

(D105L)
LEB22 Circuit Board
IX240Rear Unexposed Frame Sensor
LED (D108L)
IX240Front Unexposed Frame Sensor Magnetic Reading Head
LED (D109L) Circuit Board Magnetic Writing Head
Circuit Board
IX240 TAP and
Leading End
Sensor LED
7
(D104L)
135 Leading End

Sensor LED
(D101L)
135 Downstream Perforation

135 Frame Sensor LED
Sensor LED (D103L)
(D107L)
LEF22 Circuit Board

135 Upstream Perforation Sensor LED (D102L)
135 Check Tape Sensor LED (D106L)
135 Rear Fogging Sensor LED (D110L)
135 Front Fogging Sensor LED (D111L)
CD602
7-3
Parts Location
135 Upper Mask

Dust Removal Roller
135 Entrance Pressure Guide
Exit Pressure Guide
Magnetic Writing Head

IX240 Entrance
(MG101)
Pressure Guide
Dummy Head
Magnetic Reading Head IX240 Upper Mask

(D116) Dust Removal Roller
CD603
7-4
Parts Location
Plug-in Connector Solenoid (S101)
Spool Assembly Dust Removal Roller
Supply Motor Feed Motor

(M102) (M101)
Set Lever
Belt Tensioner 7
Assembly
Strip Film
Guide
Door Drive
Assembly
Winding Unit
Dust Removal Roller 135 Lower Mask 135 Downstream Perforation

Sensor (D103P)
CD604
7-5
Parts Location
IX240 Rear/Front
Dust Removal Unexposed Frame Sensors
IX240 Perforation (D108P/D109P)
Roller
Sensor (D105P)
Mask Motor Home Position
Sensor (D117)
IX240 TAP and

Leading End
Sensor (D104P)
Mask Motor
(M103) 135 Leading End
Sensor (D101P)
135 Frame Sensor

Variable Mask (D107P)
MSC22 Circuit Board

DTF22 Circuit Board
135 Upstream Perforation Sensor
(D102P)
Upper Cover Indicator Lamp
135 Lower Mask 135 Check Tape Sensor (D106P)
Open/Close (L101)
H/F Sensor 135 Rear Fogging Sensor (D110P)
Sensor (D120) 135 Front Fogging Sensor (D111P)
(D118/D119)
CD605
7-6
Parts Location
Carrier Base Section
Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever

Manual Film Carrier
Release Lever
Auto Film Carrier
Lock Arm
Plug-in Connectors 135 Carrier Position

Sensor (D122)
7
Ball Catch
Carrier Table
IX240 Carrier Position

Sensor (D121)
Slide Shaft Carrier Base
Carrier Table Lock Arm
Switching Shaft
135/IX240 Switching Button
RD528
7-7
7.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)
7.1.1 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the upper cover. Carrier Upper Cover
2. Remove the eight screws securing the upper Screws (8)
cover.
3. Remove the rear screw and then the upper cover.
Reinstallation
Screw
removal.
RD435
7.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Connector

2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED.
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing the sensor LED

against the stopper.
Screw
Sensor LED (D101L)
CD606
7-8
7.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement
Removal Sensor LED
1. Remove the carrier upper cover

Installation

removal.
7
Connector Screw
against the stopper. CD609
7.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Removal FSP LEF1

2. Disconnect the three connectors.
D101L
CD613
3. Remove the four special screws and then the Special Screws (4) Springs (4)
pressure guide and four springs.
Reinstallation

removal.
Entrance Pressure Guide

CD614
7-9
7.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED.
Installation

removal.
135 Frame Sensor (D107)

CD615
7.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front

Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Code Sensor LED

D102L Upstream Perforation
D106L Check Tape
D110L Rear Fogging
D111L Front Fogging
Removal
1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide

Installation

removal.
Sensor LED
(D102L/D106L/D110L
/D111L)
Screw
CD616
7-10
7.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide Screw

(see Subsection 7.1.4). Retainer Plate
Poly-sliders (4)
2. Loosen one screw, remove one screw and then Springs (2)
retainer plate, two springs, two rollers, four poly-
sliders and shaft recpectively.
Rollers (2)
Installation

removal.
7
Springs
(White/Strong)
NOTE: Entrance side roller springs: White (Strong)
Middle and exit side rollers: Black (Weak)
Springs
(Black/Weak)
CD617
7.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide Dust Removal Roller

(see Subsection 7.1.4). E-rings (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings, two springs and then the Springs (2)
dust removal roller.
Installation

removal.
CD622
7-11
7.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Connector Screw

3. Disconnect the connector from sensor LED.
Installation

removal.

Sensor LED (D104L)
CD607
7.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Connector Screw

Installation

removal.

Sensor LED (D105L)

CD608
7-12
7.1.11 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Print Harness

Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the circuit
board.
3. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit

board.
NOTE: Lift the print harness connector and disconnect

the harness. Connector 7
Installation
Connector
Write Head Circuit Board
CD610
removal.
7.1.12 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Screws (2)

Circuit Board Cover
2. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board

cover.
RD436
7-13
3. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit Read Head Circuit Board
board. Screws (3)
4. Remove the three screws and then the circuit

board.
Installation

removal.
Connectors
CD612
7.1.13 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement
Removal Circuit Board

Connector
1. Remove the read head circuit board cover
2. Disconnect the connector from the read head

circuit board.
3. Remove the screw and then the magnetic head

Screw
guide.
Magnetic Head Guide

CD624
4. Remove the two screws and then the magnetic Magnetic Head (D116)
head.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
CD625
7-14
7.1.14 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement
Removal Print Harness Writing Magnetic

Head (MG101) Screw
2. Disconnect the print harness from the write head

circuit board.
3. Remove the screw and then the magnetic head.
Installation Connector

7
removal.
CD629
7.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Connectors (4)
1. Remove the read head circuit board cover

2. Disconnect the four connectors.
CD618
3. Remove the three special screws, then the Springs (3)

pressure guide and three springs. Special Screws (3)
Reinstallation

removal.
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide

CD619
7-15

(LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED.
Installation

removal.
Sensor LED (D108L/D109L)

CD620
7.1.17 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide Screws (2)

(see Subsection 7.1.15). Rollers (2)
Retainer Plate
Poly-
sliders (4)
3. Remove the two screws and then the retainer

plate, two (black) springs, two rollers, four poly- Springs Screw
sliders and shaft. (Black) (2)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Sensor

removal. LED
CD621
7-16
7.1.18 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide Dust Removal Roller

E-rings (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings and then the two springs

and the dust removal roller. Springs (2)
Installation

removal.
7
CD623
7.1.19 Dummy Head Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide Dummy Head Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the dummy head.
Installation

removal.
CD626
7-17
7.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper cover Print Harness

2. Disconnect the print harness from the write head

circuit board.
3. Disconnect the D103L connector.
D103L Connector
CD627
4. Remove the four special screws and then the Special Screws (4)
pressure guide and four springs. Springs (4)
Reinstallation

removal.
Exit Pressure
Guide
CD628
7-18
7.1.21 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the exit pressure guide Screws (2)

Retainer Plate
Springs
(Yellow/Short) (2) Rollers (2)
2. Remove two screws each and then the retainer
Poly-sliders (4)
plate, two springs, two rollers, four poly-sliders
and shaft, respectinely.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Shaft

removal.
7
NOTE: IX240 side Springs: Long (White)
135 side Springs: Short (Yellow)
Springs
(White/Long) (2)
CD630
7.1.22 Film Mask Replacement
Removal
1. Open the carrier upper cover. 135 Mask
2. Remove the mask.
Installation

removal.
IX240 Mask
CD631
7-19
7.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section)
7.2.1 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the carrier upper cover. Screws (2) (Remove) Screw (Loosen)
2. Loosen one screw, remove the two other screws

and then the plug-in connector section cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Plug-in Connector Section Cover

CD632
7.2.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Place the carrier upside down. Screws (6)
2. Remove the six screws and then the bottom

cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Bottom Cover
CD634
7-20
7.2.3 Bottom Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Countersunk Flat

Head Screws (2)
1. Place the carrier upside down.
Bottom Left-hand Cover
2. Remove the two countersunk flat head screws

and then the bottom left-hand cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
CD650
7.2.4 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Left-hand Guide Rail
1. Remove:
Screws (2)
• Bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2).

• Bottom left-hand cover (see Subsection 7.2.3).
2. Remove the two screws and then the left-hand

guide rail.
RD438
3. Disconnect the DTF1, DTB1 and AR connectors. Screws (3)
4. Remove the three screws and then the bottom

inner cover.
AR
DTF1 DTB1
RD449
7-21
Reinstallation Left-hand Guide Rail

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pressing the left-hand

guide rail toward the left-hand side.
Screws (2)
RD439
7.2.5 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2).
2. Disconnect the connector from the indicator lamp.
3. Remove the screw and then the indicator lamp.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Indicator Lamp

removal. Connector (L101)
CD636
7.2.6 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal Sensor (D120)
2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Connector
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor.
Installation

Screw
removal.
NOTE: Align the hole in the sensor with the locating pin on Locating Pin
the carrier frame. RD440
7-22
7.2.7 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Connector Transparent

Screws (2)
Sheet
2. Remove the two screws, then the transparent
sheet, MSC22 circuit board and the four keys.
3. Disconnect the connector from the MSC22 circuit

board.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of MSC22

7
removal. Circuit Board
Keys (4)
NOTE: Note the installation direction of the keys.
CD639
7.2.8 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the plug-in connector section cover

Connectors
CD643
3. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Screws (2) Harness Guide
4. Remove the two screws and then the harness CYS22

guide. Circuit Board
Screws (6)
5. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board.
6. Remove the six screws and then the circuit board.
Reinstallation

removal.
RD441
7-23
7.2.9 Solenoid (S101) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Countersunk Flat Head Screw
2. Remove the two screws and then the harness

guide.
3. Disconnect the solenoid connector.
4. Remove the countersunk flat head screw and then

the solenoid from the upper side. Solenoid
(S101)
Installation
Screws (2)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Harness Guide

removal. S101 Connector
RD442
NOTE: Align the hole in the solenoid with the pin on the
carrier frame.
7.2.10 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119)

(MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Screws (2)
2. Disconnect the connector form the sensor.
3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor.
Installation

removal.
Sensors (D118P/D119P)
Connector
RD443
7-24
7.2.11 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2)

guide.
7
Harness Guide
RD444
3. Disconnect the M103 connector. D117 Connector Screws (4)
4. Remove the four screws and then the variable

mask.
5. Disconnect the D117 connector.
Reinstallation

removal.
Variable Mask
M103 Connector
RD445
7.2.12 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the variable mask

Installation

removal. Screws
Sensor (D117)
CD641
7-25
7.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal Connector

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
Installation

removal.
Screw
Sensor (D103P)
RD446
7.2.14 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement
Removal
Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the motor.
Installation

Motor (M103)
removal.
CD648
7.2.15 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Removal Screws (2) Dust Removal Roller

2. Remove the two screws and then the roller.
Installation

removal.
RD447
7-26
7.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom left-hand cover Screw Sensor (D101P)

2. Disconnect the D101P connector.
Installation

removal.
7
NOTE: Tighten the screw while press the sensor against
the stopper. D101P Connector
RD448
7.2.17 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom inner cover Screws (2) Sensor (D107P)

Installation

removal.
RD450
7-27
7.2.18 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front

Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Code Sensor
D102P Upstream Perforation
D106P Check Tape
D110P Rear Fogging
D111P Front Fogging
Removal
1. Remove the bottom inner cover Screws (2)

DTF2 Connector
2. Disconnect the DTF2 connector.
Installation

removal.
Sensors
(D102P/D106P/D110P/D111P)
RD451
7.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Connector Screw
Installation

removal.
Sensor (D105P)
RD454
7-28
7.2.20 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P)

(DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal

2. Disconnect the D104P connector.
Installation
7
removal.
Sensor (D104P) D104P Connector

RD452
7.2.21 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P)

(DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal

Installation

removal.
Sensor (D108P/D109P)
RD453
7-29
7.2.22 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the dust

removal roller.
Installation

removal.
Dust Removal Roller

RD455
7.2.23 Opposite Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2). Roller Retainer
Screws (2) Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the dust
removal roller.
3. Remove two screws each and then the roller

retainer.
Roller Retainer Dust Removal Roller Screws (2)
CD646
7-30
4. Remove the two springs, two ring collars, opposite Screw

Ring Collars (2)
roller and shaft, respectively. Screw
Ring Collars
Installation (2)
Springs (2)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Springs (2) Opposite
Roller
removal.
Shaft
Shaft
7
Opposite
Roller
CD647
7.2.24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom inner cover Cover

Screw
(see Subsection 7.2.4). Screw
2. Remove the screw and then the roller assembly.

Poly-sliders (2) Springs (2)
3. Remove the screw and then the cover, two Shaft
Roller
springs, roller, two poly-sliders and shaft from the Roller
roller bracket. Bracket
Installation

removal.
CD658
7-31
7.2.25 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement
Removal
• IX240 perforation sensor

• IX240 dust removal roller
• IX240 rear/front unexposed frame sensors
2. Remove the two screws and then the two rollers.
Installation

Rollers (2)
removal.
CD939
7.2.26 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the carrier upper cover. Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the motor cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Motor Cover
CD660
7-32
7.2.27 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the winding section Countersunk

(see Subsection 7.4.1). Flat Head
Countersunk
Screws (3)
Flat Head
Screws (2)
2. Remove the three countersunk flat head screws
and then the right-hand harness cover.

and then the rear harness cover.
Rear Harness Cover

Right-hand Harness Cover
CD1111
4. Disconnect the M101 connector.
M101 Connector
RD456
5. Remove the screw and spring and then the belt

tensioner.
Screw
Belt Tensioner/Spring
RD459
7-33
6. Disengage the belt from the pulley on the motor.
7. Remove the two screws and then the motor

bracket.
Motor Bracket
Screws (2)
Belt
CD1113
8. Remove the two screws and then the motor from

the motor bracket. Screws (2)
Bracket
Motor (M101)
CD1114
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Screw

removal.
NOTE: Adjust the belt tension by following the steps below.
<Belt Tension Adjustment>
1. Loosen the belt tensioner screw.
2. Turn the belt one turn and tighten the tensioner

screw.
Belt Tensioner
Belt
RD460
7-34
7.2.28 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement
Removal
• Bottom inner cover (see Subsection 7.2.4).

• Variable mask (see Subsection 7.2.11).
• Winding section (see Subsection 7.4.1).
• IX240 TPA & leading end sensor
2. Disconnect the CYS7 and CYS8 connectors from

the circuit board.
7
guide.
Harness Guide CYS7

CYS8
CD659
4. Loosen the belt tensioner screw, move the Screw

tensioner to the loosening side and retighten the
screw.
Belt Tensioner
RD461
CD664
7-35
5. Remove two screws each securing the roller Screws (2)

bearing holders.
Bearing Holders (2)

CD665
6. Remove the bearing holders, bearing and the Roller Assembly Bearing Holder
roller assembly. Bearing
7. Remove the IX240 drive belt.
NOTE: Do not try to remove the 135 drive belt.
IX240 Drive Belt

CD666
8. Remove the screw and then the guide roller. Screw

Guide Roller
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Adjust the belt tension (see Subsection 7.2.27).
CD667
7-36
7.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement
Removal
1. Remove: Nest Section

Harness Cover
• Plug-in connector section cover
• Bottom cover (see Subsection 7.2.2).
• Bottom left-hand cover (see Subsection 7.2.3).

and then the nest section harness cover.
Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (3)
CD895
3. Remove the five countersunk flat head screws Right-hand Harness Covers
and then the two right-hand harness covers. Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (5)
RD462

and then the rear harness cover.
Rear Harness
Cover Countersunk
Flat Head Screws (2)
CD937
7-37
5. Disconnect all connectors of the plug-in connector Screws (2)

harness.
6. Remove the two screws and then the plug-in

connector.
Installation

removal.
Plug-in Connector
CD938
7-38
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.1 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the plug-in connector section cover Nest Section Cover Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the nest section

cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
7
Toothed Washers (2)

RD463
7.3.2 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the carrier upper cover. Screws (2)

Countersunk Flat Screw
2. Remove the two screw, countersunk flat head
screw and then the strip film guide.
Reinstallation

removal.
Strip Film Guide
CD892
7-39
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.3 Door Open/Close/Cartridge Sensor (D112/D115)

(SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the strip film guide Sensor (D112/D115)

Installation

removal.
Connector
Screw
CD893
7.3.4 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove: Nest Section

Harness Cover
• Nest section cover (see Subsection 7.3.1).
• Strip film guide (see Subsection 7.3.2).

and then the nest section harness cover.
Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (3)
CD895
7-40
7.3 Nest Section
3. Disconnect the M102, M103, 121J, 122J and

J123 connectors.
Connectors (5)
CD896
7
4. Move the spool section to its setting position by
pushing down the cartridge set lever.
Cartridge
Set Lever
Spool Section
CD894
5. Remove the four screws and then the nest unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
Nest Unit
Screws (4)
CD897
7-41
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.5 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the nest unit (see Subsection 7.3.4).

Door Drive
Assembly
2. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw
and then the door open/close sensor.
3. Remove the two screws and then the door drive

assembly.
Reinstallation

removal.
Connector Screws (2)
Screw
CD898
7.3.6 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the door drive assembly E-ring

(see Subsection 7.3.5). Washer
Spring
2. Move the set lever assembly to the motor side.

Lever
3. Remove the E-ring and then the washer, spring
and the lever.
CD899
4. Remove the two coil springs.
Coil Springs
CD900
7-42
7.3 Nest Section
5. Remove the E-ring and poly-slider. E-ring
Poly-slider
CD901
7
6. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft and the set Set Lever Assembly
lever assembly.
Shaft
E-ring
Reinstallation CD902
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Spool

removal.
NOTE: Push the spool fully to the cartridge side and

engage the set lever assembly with the gear.
Set Lever
CD926
7-43
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.7 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the set lever assembly Spool Assembly

2. Remove the E-ring from the guide shaft.
3. Withdraw the guide shaft and remove the spool

assembly.
E-ring
Guide Shaft
CD903
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Install the spool assembly while pushing in the IPI

shaft. Spool Assembly
IPI Shaft
CD925
7-44
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.8 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the spool assembly Motor Bracket

2. Remove the three screws securing the motor

bracket.
Toothed
Washer Screws (3)
CD904
3. Remove the screw securing the gear to the motor

shaft.
Screws
CD905
4. Remove the D-washer, collar, spring, gear Gear

Motor Bracket Gear Bracket
bracket, gear and motor bracket.
Reinstallation Spring
Collar
removal.
Screw
D-washer
CD906
7-45
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.9 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the supply motor bracket

Screws (2)

the bracket.
Motor Bracket
Motor (M102)
CD907
3. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears E-rings
from the gear bracket.
Gears
Gear Bracket
CD908
4. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears Gears
E-ring
from the motor bracket.
Installation

removal.
E-ring
Motor Bracket
CD909
7-46
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.10 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the supply motor bracket Connector

Screw
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
CD910
4. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the Bracket
bracket.
Installation

removal.
Sensor (D113)
Screws
CD911
7.3.11 Door Motor (M104) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the door drive assembly Motor (M104)

(see Subsection 7.3.5). Screws (2)
2. Cut the two cord ties.
Installation

removal.
Cord Ties
CD912
7-47
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.12 Door Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the door drive assembly Rack E-rings (2)

Poly-slider
(see Subsection 7.3.5). Spring
2. Remove the spring.
3. Remove the two E-rings and then the poly-slider,

rack and guide.
Guide
CD913
4. Remove the four gears. Gears
5. Remove the E-ring and then the door drive shaft

and gear. E-ring
Gear
Door Drive Shaft
Installation CD914
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Long Tooth

removal.
Door Drive
NOTE: Align the gear timing by following the steps below. Shaft Gear
1) Align the long tooth on the door drive shaft gear
with the groove in the sector gear boss.
2) Rest the sector gear on the door drive shaft gear
as shown.
Rest on
Boss
CD915
7-48
7.3 Nest Section
3) While resting the sector gear on the door drive Rack

shaft as shown, engage the rack and gear so that
the rack is positioned at the sensor side.
Rack
CD916
7
7.3.13 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement
Removal Connector
1. Remove the spool assembly Sensor (D114)

Installation

removal.
Screw
CD917
7.3.14 Spool Rack Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the spool assembly Spring

3. Remove the two E-rings and then the rack.
Installation

removal. E-ring
Rack
CD918
7-49
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.15 Spool Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the spool assembly Screw

2. Remove the screw and clamp/cover.
Clamp/Cover
CD919
3. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
CD920
4. Withdraw the spool and remove the gear, spacer Spool

and home position sensor plate.
Installation

removal.
Gear
Spacer
Sensor Plate
CD921
7-50
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.16 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the supply motor bracket Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the IPI unit.
IPI Unit
7
CD922
3. Remove the E-ring and then the IPI shaft and E-ring
spring.
IPI Shaft
Spring
CD923
4. Remove the E-ring and then the IPI detecting arm E-ring
and spring.
IPI Detecting Arm
Reassembly Spring
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of

disassembly.
CD924
7-51
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.17 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the nest unit (see Subsection 7.3.4).
2. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
CD927
3. Loosen the two screws securing the guide Guide Assembly

bracket.
Screws (2)
CD928
4. Remove the guide assembly, cam plate, bearing Shaft Cam Plate
and shaft.
Bearing
Reinstallation

removal.
Guide Assembly
CD929
7-52
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.18 Cartridge Holder Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the guide assembly

Lever Spring
2. Remove the E-ring and then the cartridge holder
assembly and spring.
3. Remove the E-ring and then lever and spring from

the cartridge holder.
E-ring
Installation 7
removal. E-ring
Cartridge Holder
CD930
7.3.19 Set Lever Stopper Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the guide assembly Guide Braclet

(see Subsection 7.3.17). Screw (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the guide

bracket.
CD931
3. Remove the E-ring and then the set lever stopper Set Lever Stopper
and spring.
Installation

removal.
E-ring Spring
CD932
7-53
7.3 Nest Section
7.3.20 Cam Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the guide assembly Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the cam roller

assembly.
Cam Roller Assembly

CD933
3. Remove the spring, E-ring and then the roller Spring

bracket.
Roller Bracket
E-ring
CD934
4. Remove the E-ring and then the roller from the E-ring
bracket. Roller
Installation

removal.
CD935
7-54
7.4 Winding Section
7.4.1 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Knob Cover
1. Remove the feed motor cover

2. Remove the screw and then the knob cover.
7
Screw
RD457
3. Remove the four screws and then the winding Winding Unit
Screws (4)
unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
RD458
7.4.2 Winding Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the winding unit (see Subsection 7.4.1).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the poly-slider, knob, Collar

collar and gear. Knob
Gear
Poly-slider
E-ring
CD883
7-55
7.4 Winding Section
3. Remove the pin and gear.
4. Remove the two E-rings and two gears.
Installation

removal. Gear
Gears
Pin
E-rings
CD884
7.4.3 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Shaft Assembly
1. Remove the winding gears

Bearing
2. Remove the two E-rings and then the shaft

assembly by shifting the bearing.
CD885
3. Disassemble the shaft. Pin

Collar Shaft
Reassembly
135 Reel
disassembly. One-way Clutch
IX240 Reel
Spring
Joint
Collar
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
CD886
7-56
7.4 Winding Section
7.4.4 Film Guide Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the winding shaft assembly

Screw
2. Remove the screw and then the spring retainer

and two coil springs.
7
Coil Spring (2) Spring Retainer
CD887
3. Remove the film guide. Film Guide
Installation

removal.
CD888
7-57
7.5 Carrier Base Section
7.5.1 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the tabletop cover Countersunk Flat

(see Subsection 6.2.2). Head Screw Screws (2)
2. Remove the countersunk flat head screw and two

screws and then the cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Carrier Base Front Cover

RD367
7.5.2 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the tabletop cover

2. Remove the five screws and then the tabletop Screws (5)
small cover.
Tabletop Small Cover

CD672
7-58
3. Remove the two screws and then the connector Screws (2)
Connector Cover
cover.
RD368
7
4. Disconnect the sensor connector and open the 135 Carrier Position
harness clamp. Screws (2) Sensor (D122)
Installation Screws (2)

removal.
NOTE: After installation, slide the carrier table and check

that the sensors click at 135 and IX240 position.
Connectors
IX240 Carrier Position

Sensor (D121)
RD369
7.5.3 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
• Carrier base front cover (see Subsection 7.5.1).

• Scanner rear cover (see Subsection 8.2.2).
2. Remove the two screws and then the printer

exhaust fan bracket.
3. Disconnect the two fan connectors.
Printer Exhaust Fan Bracket Screws (2)
RD370
7-59
4. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire.

Screw Harness Cover Screw
5. Remove the screw and then the harness cover.
Grounding Wires
RD371
6. Remove the screw securing the grounding wires. Screw
Grounding Wires
CD746
7. Disconnect the nine JCA connectors.
JCA Connectors (9)

RD372
7-60
8. Remove the two screws and then the stop plate.
Screws (2)
Stop Plate
RD373
7
9. Remove the cover spacer.
Cover Spacer
CD1104
10. Remove the screw and then the slide shaft, two Collars (2) O-rings (2)
collars and O-rings.
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the O-rings.
Slide Shaft
Screw
RD374
7-61
11. Remove the carrier table.
Carrier Table
RD375
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: • Face the flat surface on the slide shaft up and

tighten the screw.
• Install the carrier table so that its bearing contacts
and rolls on the carrier base when the carrier table
is moved smoothly back and forth.
Bearing
Carrier Table
Base
RD558
• Install the harness cover so that the harnesses do Harness Cover

Screw Screw
not become slack when the carrier table is moved
to the IX240 lane.
After installation, perform the following adjustments.
1) Menu 0345 “Optical Axis Adjustment”

2) Menu 0321 “Focus Position Adjustment”

3) Menu 0421 “Mask Position Adjustment”

Grounding Wires
RD371
7-62
7.5.4 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the carrier table (see Subsection 7.5.3).
2. Remove the two screws and then the gear cover.
7
Gear Cover Screws (2)
CD1106
3. Loosen the four plug-in connector guide screws.

Plug-in Connector Bracket
4. Remove the four screws and then the plug-in
connector bracket.
Screws (3)
Guide Screws (4)

CD1107
5. Disconnect the JCA10 connector.
JCA10
Connector
CD1108
7-63
6. Loosen the one screw, remove the other screw Screw (Remove) Harness Guide
and then the harness guide.
Screw (Loosen)
RD376
7. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket. Sensor Bracket
Screw
RD377
8. Cut the cord tie.
Cord Tie
Installation Screw

removal.
Sensor (D123)
CD737
7-64
7.5.5 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the carrier sensor bracket

Screws (2)
2. Remove the spring from the gear.
3. Remove the release lever spring.
Spring
4. Remove the two screws and then the gear
bracket. Gear Bracket
7
Reinstallation
Spring
RD378
removal.
7.5.6 Gear Replacement
Removal Gears
1. Remove the gear bracket (see Subsection 7.5.5).
2. Remove the two E-ring and then the two gears.
3. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and

remove the gear.
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
E-ring
RD379
4. Remove the two bearings and lock arm/shaft. Gear

Bearings (2)
E-ring
5. Remove the E-ring, then the gear, lock lever shaft
and two bearings.
Lock Arm/Shaft
Lock Lever Shaft
Bearings (2)
RD380
7-65
Installation

removal.
Marks
NOTE: Engage the three gears so that their " " marks
are aligned.
Marks
CD742
7.5.7 Ball Catch Replacement
Removal E-ring
Ball Catch
1. Remove the gear bracket (see Subsection 7.5.5).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the manual film

carrier release arm and pin.
Manual Film Carrier
Release Arm
3. Remove the two screws and then the ball catch.
Pin
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
CD743
Removal Gear Cover
1. Remove:
• Open the image processing circuit board

bracket (see Subsection 17.3.1).
• Remove the scanner rear cover
2. Remove the two screws and the gear cover.
Screws (2)
CD1102
7-66
3. Loosen the four plug-in connector guide screws. Plug-in Connector Bracket
4. Remove the three screws and then the plug-in Guide Screws (4)
connector bracket.
Screws (3)
CD729 7
5. Remove the cover spacer. JCA10 Connector
6. Disconnect the JCA10 connector.
Cover Spacer
CD730

exhaust fan bracket. Disconnect the two fan
connectors.
RD370
7-67
Grounding Wires
CD746
9. Remove the screw and then the harness cover. Harness Cover Screw
Cord Tie
RD382
12. Remove the plug-in connectors.
JCA Connectors (9)

RD372
7-68
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Harness Cover Screw

removal.
NOTE: Install the harness cover so that the harnesses do

not become slack when the carrier table is moved to
the IX240 lane.
7
Cord Tie
RD382
7.5.9 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Spring E-ring
1. Remove the carrier base front cover

2. Remove the E-ring, two bearings, spring and arm.
Arm
Bearings (2)
RD383
3. Remove the E-ring and then the plain washer, Changing Shaft Bearing
spring, changing shaft and bearing.
Reassembly

disassembly.
Spring
E-ring Plain Washer

RD384
7-69
7.5.10 Carrier Table Slider Guide Replacement
Removal
1. Remove each two screws and then the slider

guide.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Do not confuse the right-hand and left-hand sliders.
Left-hand
Slider Screws (2) Right-hand Screws (2)
Slider
CD1157
7.5.11 Carrier Base Assembly Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Carrier base front cover (see Subsection 7.5.1).

• Scanner rear cover (see Subsection 8.2.2).

exhaust fan bracket. Disconnect the two fan
connectors.
RD370
3. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Screw Harness Cover Screw
4. Remove the screw and then the harness cover.
Grounding Wires
RD371
7-70
Grounding Wires
CD746
7
JCA Connectors (9)

RD372
7. Remove the two screws and then the stop plate.
Screws (2)
Stop Plate
RD373
7-71
8. Remove the cover spacer.
Cover Spacer
CD1104
Connector Cover
cover.
RD368
10. Disconnect the D121 and D122 sensor D122 Connector

connectors.
D121 Connector
RD559
7-72
11. Remove the four hex. socket head bolts and then Hex. Socket Head Bolts (4)
the carrier base assembly.
INPORTANT:
Take care not to lose the spacers which are located
under the carrier base and record their position so
that they are reinstalled to the original position when
installing the carrier base assembly.
Reinstallation

removal.
Carrier Base Spacers

IMPORTANT:
RD557
7
Reinstall the same thick spacers to their original
position under the carrier base.
NOTE: Install the harness cover so that the harnesses do Harness Cover
Screw Screw
not become slack when the carrier table is moved to
the IX240 lane.



Grounding Wires
RD371
7-73
7.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional)
7.6.1 MNC Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the four screws and then the bottom Bottom Cover
cover.
Screws (4)
9286
2. Remove the three screws and then the MNC MNC Circuit Board
circuit board.
Screws (3)
9287
3. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit board.
Installation

removal.
MNC Circuit Board
Connectors
1959
7-74
7.6.2 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the screw and then the connector cover. Connector Cover
7
Screw
9289
2. Remove the MNC circuit board Cord Ties

3. Cut the three cord ties.
4. Disconnect the connector (CN3) from the MNC

circuit board.
5. Remove the screw securing the solenoid and then

the solenoid.
Installation

removal. Connector Screw
MNC Circuit Board
9288
7-75
7.6.3 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the MNC circuit board Leaf Springs Holder Plates

2. Remove the four screws securing the holder plate

Screws (4)
and then the holder plates, leaf springs and pins.
Installation 9290
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Leaf Springs

removal, noting the following.
1. Make sure the midpoint of the holder plate does No Good
not buckle upwards as shown in the figure below.

If it buckles this way the leaf springs will be out of
place. Good
2. Make sure that the spring plates have play in the

Good
direction shown.
Holder Plate
9291
3. Make sure the pins move up and down smoothly.
Pins
2708
7-76
7.6.4 Negative Mask Adjustment
1. Depress the upper mask against the lower mask Upper Mask
and make sure its opening is larger than the
opening of the lower mask and that it is positioned
equally against the lower mask opening.
Lower Mask 7
9294
2. If necessary, loosen the two screws and adjust the Screws (2)
opening by moving the upper mask. Upper Mask
3. Tighten the two screws securely.
9295
7-77
Removal
1. Remove the screw and then the connector cover. Connector Cover
Screw
9289
2. Remove the MNC circuit board MNC Circuit Board

3. Cut the three cord ties.
4. Disconnect the connectors (CN1, CN2) from the

MNC circuit board.
Connectors
9293
5. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Grounding Wire/Screw

Plug-in Connector
6. Remove the two screws and plug-in connector.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
9292
7-78
8. SCANNER SECTION
Parts Location ............................................................................................. 8-2
8.1 Light Source Section .................................................................................. 8-4

8.1.1 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 8-4
8.1.2 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement...................................... 8-5
8.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 8-6
8.1.4 Light Source Filter Replacement (F330 Serial Number 8001 and after/F340) .......... 8-7
8.1.5 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement ........................................... 8-8
8.1.6 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement ................................................................ 8-9
8.1.7 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement ....................................................................... 8-12
8.1.8 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation............................................... 8-14
8.1.9 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 8-15
8.1.10 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement........................................................ 8-16
8.1.11 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................................ 8-16
8.1.12 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement ............................................................ 8-17
8.2 Scanner Section ........................................................................................ 8-19

8.2.1 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 8-19 8
8.2.2 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation............................................................ 8-20
8.2.3 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement................................................................ 8-21
8.2.4 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................................. 8-21
8.2.5 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement ............................................... 8-24
8.2.6 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement ................................................................. 8-24
8.2.7 Shutter/Gear Replacement ......................................................................................... 8-25
8.3 Lens Unit .................................................................................................... 8-26

8.3.1 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement ................................................... 8-26
8.3.2 Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation.............................................................................. 8-26
8.3.3 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ..................................................................... 8-28
8.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section ................... 8-29

Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement8-29
8.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement .......................................... 8-30
8.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement ........................................................ 8-30
8.4.4 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement............................................................................ 8-31
8.4.5 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement....................................... 8-33
8.4.6 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment ............................................................................ 8-34
8-1
Parts Location
CCD Unit
Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor (D211)/ Shutter Home Position Sensor
Upper and Lower Limit Sensors (D212 and D213) (D215)
Shutter Drive Motor (M203)
Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Shutter/Gears
Scanner
Rear Cover
Lens Unit
Lens Home Position
Sensor (D214)
Lens Drive Motor
(M202)
Light Source Cooling

Fan (F201)
Light Source Unit

135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensors
(D201/D202)
Light Source Assembly
Plug-in Connector
(on Light Source Unit)
LED Circuit Board Assembly
LTC22 Circuit Peltier Element (LH201)
Board Bracket Light Source Section Cover
LTC22 Circuit Board Plug-in Connector (on Frame)
CD812
8-2
Parts Location
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201)

Conjugate Length Variable Gears
PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply)

Circuit Board ADC22
Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment Circuit Board
CD825
8-3
8.1 Light Source Section
8.1.1 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the scanner front cover unit

2. Remove the diffusion box.
3. Remove the four screws and then the light source

unit.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Light Source Unit Screws (4)
removal. CD716
When the unit has been replaced, perform the

following adjustments after installation.
1) Menu 0351 “LED Light Amount Adjustment”

2) Menu 0348 “Spectral Calibration”

3) Clear the operation data in Menu 0343 “Operation

Information Display” (see Subsection 5.4.8).
4) Scanner Correction (Pre-operational Check)
8-4
8.1.2 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the light source unit

2. Disconnect the sensor connector.
Sensor Connector 8
RD385
3. Remove the two screws and then the diffusion box Screws (2)
sensor bracket. Diffusion Box Sensor Bracket
CD717
4. Cut the cord ties, remove the two screws and then Cord Ties
the sensors.
Installation

removal.
Sensor (D201)
Sensor (D202)
Screws (2)
CD719
8-5
8.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the light source unit

2. Disconnect the diffusion box sensor connector.
Sensor Connector
RD385
3. Remove the two screws securing the harness Special Screws (4)
Screws/Clamps
clamps.
4. Remove the four special screws securing the

plug-in connectors.
RD386
5. Remove the four screws and then the light source Light Source Assembly
assembly. Screws (4)
Reinstallation

removal.
After reinstallation, perform the following adjustments.


3) Scanner Correction (Pre-operational Check) RD387
8-6
8.1.4 Light Source Filter Replacement (F330 Serial Number 8001 and after/F340)
Removal
Screws (5)
1. Remove the light source assembly Transparent Cover

2. Remove the five screws and then the transparent

cover, filter and gasket.
Filter
NOTE: Take care not to let the filter fall when removing Gasket
it.
Installation
8
removal. RD388
NOTE: • Place the transparent cover upside down and Chamfered Corners
place the filter in the cover aligning its chamfered
corners with the ones in the cover.
Filter
Transparent Cover
RD468
• Fit the gasket to the light source assembly and Light Source Assembly/Gasket
install the assembly in the transparent cover
upside down.
Transparent Cover Filter

RD469
8-7
8.1.5 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement
●F330 Serial Number 8001 and after/F340
Removal
1. Remove the light source filter

2. Disconnect four connectors from the LED circuit

boards.
Connectors (4) LED Circuit Boards (4)

RD389
3. Disconnect the D203 and LH201 connectors. D203 Connector
4. Remove the JCP3 connector from the bracket.
5. Remove the harnesses from the four clamps and

then the plug-in connectors.
Installation
Plug-in
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Connector Plug-in
removal. LH201 JCP3 Clamps (4) Connector
Connector Connector
CD723
●F330 Up to Serial Number 8000
Removal
1. Remove the light source assembly Transparent Cover/Gasket


cover and gasket.
Screws (5)
CD721
8-8
3. Disconnect four connectors from the LED circuit

boards.
Connector LED Circuit Board

Cover (4)
CD722
8
4. Disconnect the D203 and LH201 connectors. D203 Connector
5. Remove the JCP3 connector from the bracket.
6. Remove the harnesses from the four clamps and

then the plug-in connectors.
Installation
Plug-in
Install the plug-in connectors in the reverse order of Connector Plug-in
removal. LH201 JCP3 Clamps (4) Connector
Connector Connector
CD723
8.1.6 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the light source filter

D203 Connector
RD390
8-9
3. Wear the grounding wristband on your wrist and LED Circuit Board Assembly
connect its wire end to the carrier base.
4. Disconnect the connector from the LED circuit

board.
5. Remove the four screws and then the LED circuit

board assembly.
Screws (4)
Connectors (4)
Grounding Wristband
RD391
6. Remove the four spacers and leaf spring(s) spring Spacers (4)
washers from the LED circuit board assembly. Spring Washers (4)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Take care not to pinch the wires.

• Do not touch the surface of the LED.
adjustments.
1) Menu 0351 “LED Light Amount Adjustment” RD392



8-10
Removal


cover and gasket.
Screws (5) 8
CD721
D203 Connector
CD1116
4. Wear the grounding wristband on your wrist and LED Circuit Board
connect its wire end to the carrier base. Assembly
Screws (4)
5. Disconnect the connector from the LED circuit

board.

board assembly.
Connectors (4)
Grounding Wristband
CD724
8-11
7. Remove the four spacers and spring washers

Spacers (4)
from the LED circuit board assembly. Spring Washers (4)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Take care not to pinch the wires.

• Do not touch the surface of the LED.
adjustments.
CD1115
1) Menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment”
2) Menu 43J “Spectral Calibration”


8.1.7 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the LED circuit board assembly Sponge Gasket

2. Remove the sponge gasket.
Peltier Element
3. Disconnect the LH201 connector.
(LH201)
4. Remove the LH201 connector from the bracket

and then the Peltier element.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the Peltier element with the heat conduction

sheet face up.
LH201 Connector
RD393
8-12
Removal


cover and gasket.
Screws (5) 8
CD721
3. Disconnect the LH201 connector.
LH201 Connector
CD725
4. Disconnect the LED1 and LED2 connectors. Screws (4)

Spacers (4)
5. Remove the four screws, spacers, spring
washers, LED bracket and sponge. Spring Washers (4)
LED2 Connector
LED Bracket
LED1 Connector
CD726
8-13
6. Remove the LH201 connector from the bracket Heat Conduction Sheet
and then the Peltier element. Peltier Element
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the peltier element with the heat conduction

sheet face up.
LH201 Connector
CD727
8.1.8 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Shut down the system by performing the post- Screws (2)

breaker and the main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the front upper cover

3. Remove the two screws and then the light source

section cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Light Source Section Cover

removal. CD710
8-14
8.1.9 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the light source section cover Bracket

2. Remove the two screws securing the bracket.
3. Disconnect the LTC3 and LTC4 connectors from

the LTC22 circuit board.
4. Open the clamp and pull out the bracket.
Screws (2)
8
Clamp LTC4 Connector LTC3 Connector
5. Open the two harness clamps. LTC2 Connector
6. Disconnect the LTC1, LTC2 and F201 connectors

and remove the bracket. Clamps (2)
Reinstallation

LTC1 Connector
removal.
Bracket
F201 Connector
RD395
8-15
8.1.10 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the LTC22 circuit board bracket Screws (2) Fan Guard
2. Remove the two screws, then the fan guard and

the fan.
Installation

removal.
Fan (F201)
CD713
8.1.11 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the LTC22 circuit board bracket Screws (4) Circuit Board Cover
2. Remove the four screws and then the circuit board

cover.
RD396
3. Remove the four screws and then the LTC22 Screws (4)
circuit board.
Installation

removal.
LTC22 Circuit Board

CD715
8-16
8.1.12 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement
Removal

Special Screws (4)
• Light source unit (see Subsection 8.1.1).

• LTC22 circuit board bracket
• Printer rear cover (see Subsection 17.2.1).
2. Remove the four special screws securing the

plug-in connectors.

connector bracket.
8
RD397
4. Open the seven harness clamps.
Clamps (7)
CD751
5. Remove the four screws and open the circuit Screws (4)
board bracket.
Circuit Bracket
RD343
8-17
6. Disconnect the plug-in connector harness

connectors (CTC6 to CTC10) from the CTC22/24
circuit board.
7. Open the clamps and remove the plug-in

connectors.
Installation

removal.
CTC22/24 Circuit Board

RD398
8-18
8.2 Scanner Section
8.2.1 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Shut down the system by performing the post- Auto Film Carrier
Manual Film Carrier Lock Lever
Release Lever
2. Remove the screw and then the auto film carrier

lock lever.
3. Remove the two screws and then the manual film

Screw
8
Screws (2)
CD671
4. Remove the two screws and then the scanner Screws (2)
upper cover.
Scanner Upper
Cover
CD014
5. Remove the five screws and then the tabletop Screws (5)
small cover.

CD672
8-19
8.2 Scanner Section
6. Remove the four screws securing the cover unit. Scanner Front Cover Unit
Screws (4)
CD673
7. Remove the two screws securing the side of the Screws (3)
cover unit.
8. Disconnect the scanner cooling fan (F216)

connector.
Screws (2)
9. Remove the three screws and then the cover unit. Fan Connector
(F216)
Reinstallation

removal.
Scanner Front Cover Unit

CD674
8.2.2 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Scanner Rear Cover

2. Remove the three screws and then the scanner F216 Connector
rear cover.
3. Remove the F216 connector from the cover

bracket.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (3)
CD697
8-20
8.2 Scanner Section
8.2.3 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement
Removal Clamp
Screws (2)
2. Remove the fan harness from the clamp.
3. Remove the two screws, then the louver and the

fan.
Louver/Fan (F216)
CD675 8
Installation Louver

removal.
NOTE: • Install the fan so that its arrow points up.

• Install the louver so that its installation direction is
as shown.
Fan (F216)
Arrow
CD676
8.2.4 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (Remove)

2. Loosen the one screw, remove the other two

screws and then the CCD cover.
Screw (Loosen)
CCD Cover
CD677
8-21
8.2 Scanner Section
3. Disconnect the JSA8, JSA9, PZ201 and PZ202 Coaxial Cable

PZ202
connectors.
4. Remove the two screws securing the harness

clamps.
5. Open the harness clamp.

PZ201
6. Disconnect the coaxial cable.
Screw
/Clamp
JSA9
JSA8 Screw/Clamp
CD678
M203 Connector
CD679
8. Disconnect the JSA7 connector.
JSA7 Connector
CD680
8-22
8.2 Scanner Section
9. Loosen the four screws and then remove the two Screws (4)
dustproof covers.
10. Remove the four screws and then the CCD unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
following adjustments after reinstallation.
1) Menu 0353 “CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment”

Dustproof Cover (2)
CD681
2) Menu 0354 “CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment” (see
Subsection 5.4.19).
8
3) Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment

5) Menu 0346 “Optical Magnification Calibration”

6) Menu 0347 “Focus Calibration”




10) Menu 0352 “Pixel Correction”

11) Clear “Piezoelectric actuator operating time” in

menu 0343 (see Subsection 5.4.8).
8-23
8.2 Scanner Section
8.2.5 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see Subsection 8.2.4).
2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor

bracket.
Screws (2)
Sensor Bracket
CD682
3. Remove the sensor from the bracket. Sensor (D215)
Installation Connector

removal.
Bracket
CD683
8.2.6 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see Subsection 8.2.4). Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the shutter drive

motor.
Installation

removal.
Shutter Drive Motor (M203)

CD684
8-24
8.2 Scanner Section
8.2.7 Shutter/Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see Subsection 8.2.4). Special Screw

Shutter
Special Screw
2. Remove the special screw, spring washer and
shutter.
Gear
3. Remove the special screw and gear.
Installation
Spring Washer
removal.
CD685
8-25
8.3 Lens Unit
8.3.1 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement
Removal JSA6 Connector

Screws (2)

2. Disconnect the JSA6 connector.

bracket.
Sensor Bracket
CD686
4. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the Connector
bracket.
Screw
Installation

removal.
After installation, perform the following adjustments. Sensor (D214) Bracket
CD687

8.3.2 Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Lens Cover
1. Remove the CCD unit (see Subsection 8.2.4).
2. Remove the three screws and then the lens cover.
Screws (3)
CD688
8-26
8.3 Lens Unit
3. Disconnect the JSA6 and M202 connectors. M202 Connector
JSA6 Connector
CD690
4. Remove the boot. Lens Unit
5. Remove the three screws and then the lens unit.

8
Reinstallation

removal.
following adjustments after installation.
1) *Menu 0344 “Lens Registration”

Screws (3) Boot
CD689
2) Menu 0341 “Carrier Inclination Display”






*: Perform when lens unit has been replaced.
8-27
8.3 Lens Unit
8.3.3 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the lens unit (see Subsection 8.3.2).
2. Cut the cord tie. Motor (M202)
3. Loosen the two motor mounting screws and

remove the two tension springs.
4. Remove the motor.

Screws (2)
Tension
Springs (2)
Cord Tie
CD691
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
NOTE: • Lightly tighten the two motor mounting screws.
Turn the motor shaft several turns to see if it move
smoothly and then firmly tighten the two screws.
adjustments.

Motor Shaft
CD693
8-28
8.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section

Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover Sensor Bracket

2. Move the conjugate length drive base and remove

the three screws securing the sensor bracket.
3. Disconnect the connector from each sensor.
8
Drive Base
Connectors (3)
Screws (3)
CD695
4. Remove the sensor from the bracket. Sensor (D213)

Sensor
(D211)
Installation Sensor
(D212)
removal.

Bracket
(see Subsection 5.4.12). CD696
8-29
8.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover Screws (3)

2. Lower the conjugate length drive base.

Motor
3. Disconnect the M201 connector and remove the (M201)
motor connector from the bracket.
4. Remove the three screws and then the motor.
Installation

removal.
Connector
Bracket
(see Subsection 5.4.11). M201 Connector
RD399

8.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the conjugate length variable motor Screws (5) Gear Bracket
2. Remove the five screws and then the gear

bracket.
CD699
8-30
3. Remove the two E-rings and then the gears. E-rings
Installation

removal.

Gears

CD700
8
8.4.4 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover Cable Connector

Clamp (5)
2. Disconnect the two cable connectors and coaxial
cable from the circuit board.
Coaxial Cable
3. Open the five clamps.
Cable Connector
CD701
8-31
4. Remove the screw and then the cord tie bracket. Cord Tie Bracket
5. Loosen the three screws and then remove the

circuit board box.
6. Disconnect the connector from the circuit board.
Screw
Screws (3)
Connector
Circuit Board
CD702
7. Remove the six screws and then the circuit box Circuit Board Box Cover
Screws (6)
cover.
CD703
8. Remove the six screws and then the ADC22 Screws (6)
circuit board.
Installation

removal.
ADC22 Circuit Board

CD704
8-32
8.4.5 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover Clamp

(see Subsection 8.2.2). Screws (2) (Loosen)
2. Remove the screw securing the clamp and open

the clamp.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the other

screw securing the circuit board bracket.
Screw/Clamp
8
Screw (Remove)
RD400
4. Loosen the two screws, remove the other two

screws and then the circuit board box cover.
Screws (2)
(Loosen)
Screws (2)
(Remove) Circuit Board Box Cover
RD401
8-33
5. Open the two clamps.
6. Disconnect the PZR1 to PZR3 connectors.

PZR3
7. Remove the four screws and then the PZR22 Screws (4)
circuit board.
Installation

removal.
After installation, perform the Piezo Electric Voltage
PZR1
Adjustment (see Subsection 8.4.6).
Clamps (2)
PZR2
CD707
8.4.6 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment
1. Remove the PZR22 circuit board box cover Monitor

2. Loosen the four screws securing the monitor

supports and turn the monitor screen toward the
rear as shown.
RD409
3. Record the voltage data shown in the label on the CCD Unit
CCD unit.

circuit breaker and press the START switch to
start up the system.
Voltage Data
CD1080
8-34
5. Proceed to the next page of Menu 0340 “I/O

Check” screen.
6. Click the [ON] buttons for “Piezoelectric actuator

1” and “Piezoelectric actuator 2”.
7. X Voltage (1) Adjustment PZR22 Circuit Board
TP4 Xout q
1) Measure the DC voltage between the test pin
“TP4 X out” and “TP3 out” on the PZR22
8
circuit board.
TP3 Out
CD1081
2) Adjust the voltage to the value (1) indicated on

the label attached to the CCD unit by turning
the “VR1 X-ADJ”.
VR1 (X-ADJ)
CD1084
8-35
8. Y Voltage (2) Adjustment PZR22 Circuit Board
1) Measure the DC voltage between the test pin

“TP5 Y out” and “TP3 out” on the PZR22 circuit
TP5Y Out w
board.
TP3 Out
CD1082
2) Adjust the voltage to the value (2) indicated on

the label attached to the CCD unit by turning
the “VR2 Y-ADJ”.

VR2 (Y-ADJ)
CD1085
8-36
9. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
Parts Location ............................................................................................. 9-2
9.1 Paper Magazine ........................................................................................... 9-4

9.1.1 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement......................................................................... 9-4
9.1.2 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement.............................................................................. 9-6
9.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement ................................................................................................ 9-7
9.1.4 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement .................................................................... 9-10
9.1.5 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................... 9-11
9.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to D310) Replacement ................................................... 9-11
9.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement............................ 9-13
9.2 Paper Magazine Table............................................................................... 9-14

9.2.1 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 9-14
9.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement .............................................................. 9-14
9.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement .............................................................. 9-17
9.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 9-19
9.3 Paper Supply Drive Section ..................................................................... 9-20

9.3.1 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... 9-20
9.3.2
9.3.3
Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement................................................................. 9-20
Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement ...................................................................... 9-21
9
9.4 Cutter Unit.................................................................................................. 9-22
9.4.1 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement ................................................................ 9-22
9.4.2 Cutter Unit Replacement............................................................................................. 9-23
9.4.3 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement.................................. 9-24
9.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement ................................................................... 9-24
9-1
Parts Location
Paper Supply Drive Unit
Paper Supply Motor

(M301)
Paper Supply
Drive Unit
Magazine ID Sensors
(D306 to D310)
Paper Magazine
Magazine End Sensor Plate

Magazine Drive Gear
Nip Roller
Slide Arm
Magazine Table Unit
Magazine Table
Front Cover Magazine Table Setting Gear
Magazine Set Lever
CD814
9-2
Parts Location
Paper End Sensor (D311)
Cutter Home
Position Sensor 1
(D312)
Cutter Drive Motor
(M307)
Paper Splice
Sensor (D301)
Cutter Unit Cutter Home Position
Sensor 2 (D313)
CD815-1
9-3
9.1 Paper Magazine
9.1.1 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the three screws securing the magazine

exit cover.
Screws (3)
Magazine Exit Cover

CD753
2. Remove the magazine exit cover by pulling it

toward the front side.
Magazine Exit Cover

CD754
3. Remove the end sensor plate.
End Sensor Plate

CD755-1
9-4
9.1 Paper Magazine
Installation
1. Align the holes in the end sensor plate with the

screw and the steel plate as shown.
Screw
Steel Plate End Sensor Plate

CD755
2. Insert the latch release pin into the hole in the End Sensor Plate
Latch Release Pin
magazine exit cover.
9
3. Align the end sensor plate with the slot in the
magazine exit cover and install the cover.
Magazine Exit Cover

EZ1843
4. Tighten the three screws while pressing the

magazine exit cover as shown.
Screws (3)
5. Make sure there is no space between the
magazine exit cover and the magazine.
NOTE: Paper fogging may result if there is any space.
Magazine Exit Cover
EZ1844
9-5
9.1 Paper Magazine
6. Make sure the end sensor plate moves smoothly

by pushing it by finger and freely returns to the
original position when it is released.
7. Place the magazine upright and make sure the

sensor plate protrudes 10.5mm or more from the
magazine. More than
10.5mm
End Sensor Plate

EZ1845
9.1.2 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the E-ring and then the gear.
2. Remove the drive pin from the shaft.

Gear
Installation

removal.
Pin
E-ring
CD756
9-6
9.1 Paper Magazine
9.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Place the paper magazine upside down and

remove the six screws securing the nip roller
assembly.
Screws (6)
EZ1902
2. Release the latches and open the magazine 9

gently while holding the lid cover.
Lid Cover
EZ1903
3. Remove the lid cover.
Lid Cover
EZ1904
9-7
9.1 Paper Magazine
4. Remove the nip roller assembly.
Nip Roller Assembly

EZ1905
5. Remove the four screws and then the stainless

steel guide plate.
NOTE: Be careful not to distort the stainless steel guide

plate.
Stainless Steel
Guide Plate
Screws (4)
EZ1906
6. Remove two nip springs each form both ends.
NOTE: Mark the coil springs since there are two types
of springs.
Inner roller springs: Strong
Outer roller springs: Weak
Spring (Weak)
Spring (Strong)
Spring (Strong)
Spring (Weak)
EZ1907
9-8
9.1 Paper Magazine
7. Remove the four bearings and then the two nip Nip Roller Shafts
roller shafts from the bracket.
Bearings (4)
Spectacle-shaped Guides
EZ1911
8. Remove the four outside E-rings, then the four Rollers (4)
rollers and two spectacle-shaped guides. E-rings (4)
EZ1910
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Nip Roller Shafts

removal.
NOTE: • Install the rollers and four bearings so that the

holes in the spectacle-shaped guides are
positioned as shown in the figure below.
Bearings (4)
EZ1911
9-9
9.1 Paper Magazine
• Position the flanges on the bearings between the Spring Arms

spring arms and the side plates.
• Install the nip springs in their correct positions.
Nip Spring
Nip Spring (Strong)
(Weak)
EZ1912
• Install the nip roller assembly on the magazine so

that its rollers align with the ones on the magazine.
Nip Roller Assembly

EZ1913
9.1.4 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement
Removal
1. Perform the post-operational checks to shutdown D311 Connector

the system and turn the built-in circuit breaker and
the main power supply OFF.
2. Disconnect the D311 connector from the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor by releasing its locking tabs.
Installation

removal.
Sensor (D311)
CD381
9-10
9.1 Paper Magazine
9.1.5 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (Loosen)
1. Remove the front upper cover.
2. Loosen the two screws, remove the two other

screws and then the magazine ID sensor section
cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the wire harness.

Magazine ID Sensor Screws (Remove)
Section Cover
CD382
9
9.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to D310) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the magazine ID sensor section cover

Connector
CD383
3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor Screws (2)
bracket.
Sensor Bracket
CD384
9-11
9.1 Paper Magazine
4. Remove the two screws and then the sensor Screws (2)
circuit board.
5. Disconnect the wire harness from the circuit

board.
Wire Harness
Sensor Circuit Board

CD385
6. Remove the three screws and then the sensor Screws (3)
circuit board bracket, four springs and sensor
shafts.
Sensor Shafts (4)
Springs (4)
Sensor Circuit Board Bracket

CD386
Installation

Screws (2)
removal.
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pressing the circuit

board toward the arrow direction.
Sensor Circuit
Board
CD1060
9-12
9.1 Paper Magazine
9.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the feed section front cover Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the switch

bracket.
Switch Bracket
CD395
9
3. Disconnect the D322 connector from the switch. D322 Connector
4. Remove the spring and E-ring and then the

switch.
Switch
Installation E-ring

removal.
CD394
9-13
9.2 Paper Magazine Table
9.2.1 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the screw and then the magazine setting

lever.
Magazine Setting Lever
Screw
CD368
2. Remove the three screws and then the magazine

table front cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (3)
Magazine Table Front Cover

CD369
9.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement
Removal Stainless Steel Plate
1. Remove the magazine table front cover

2. Remove the four screws and four tapping screws

and then the stainless steel plate.
Screws (4)
Tapping Screws (4)
CD370
9-14
3. Loosen the five screws securing the guide rollers

and remove the sliding plate.
Screws (5)
Guide Rollers (2)
CD371
4. Remove the four magazine rests and two Magazine Rests (4)
brackets. Screws (4)
5. Remove the four screws and then the guide plate.

9
Brackets
Guide Plate
CD372
6. Remove the three E-rings and then the two gears E-rings (3)
and the sliding arm/gear.
Sliding Arm/Gear
Gears
CD373
9-15
7. Remove the screw and then the shaft, bearing Screw

and rubber roller.
8. Remove the two screws and then the gear from

Gear
the sliding arm.
Screws (2) Rubber
Roller
Bearing
Shaft
EZ038
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Guide Pin

removal. Sliding Arm
NOTE: • Align the center of the sliding arm with the guide
pin as shown. Loosen the two screws and adjust
the clearance between the stop of the bevel gear
and the adjustment bracket to 0 mm by moving the Stop
bracket. Tighten the two screws securely. 0 mm
Screws (2)
Adjustment Bracket
CD374
• Align the roller on the sliding arm with the guide Sliding Plate
groove in the sliding plate and tighten the two Guide Groove
screws while lightly pushing the guide rollers as
shown.
• Then tighten the three plate screws.
After tightening the screws, make sure the
magazine table moves smoothly without any rattle. Screws (2)
Roller Screws (3)
Guide Rollers (2)

CD375
9-16
9.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement
Removal Screws (4)
1. Remove the magazine table front cover

2. Remove the four screws and then the bevel gear

bracket.
Bevel Gear Bracket

CD376
3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket and Screws (2) 9
the gear.
Bracket
Gear
CD377
4. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, shaft, Shaft

bevel gear, pin and bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
Bearing
Pin
Bevel Gear
CD378
9-17
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Shaft

removal.
<Magazine Table Position Adjustment>
1) Point the “▲” mark on the gear to the right-hand

side and engage the gears so that the flat surface
on the shaft is horizontal.
▲ Mark
CD1057
2) Move the magazine table to the right-hand side

fully and install the gear bracket.
3) Make sure the flat surface on the shaft is Shaft

horizontal.
Gear Bracket
CD1058
4) If the flat surface is not horizontal, remove the ▲ Mark

gear bracket, point the “▲” mark to the left-hand
side and engage the gears.
CD1059
9-18
5) Adjust the adjustment bracket position so that the Magazine Seting Lever
space between the stop on the bevel gear and the
adjustment bracket is 0 mm when the magazine
setting lever is turned to the magazine setting
position.
Stop
Screws (2)
Adjustment Bracket
0 mm
CD380
6) Turn the magazine setting lever clockwise fully

and make sure there is no space between the
lever and the magazine table front cover. 9
Magazine Setting Lever
CD379
9.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Magazine Table Unit
1. Remove the front lower cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the magazine

table unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (2)
CD387
9-19
9.3 Paper Supply Drive Section
9.3.1 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove: Paper Supply Drive Unit
• Magazine ID sensor section cover

• Magazine table unit (see Subsection 9.2.4).
2. Open the two harness clamps.
4. Remove the six screws and then the paper supply

drive unit.
Screws (6)
Clamps (2)
Reinstallation M301 Connector
RD418
removal.
9.3.2 Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the paper supply drive unit Motor (M301)

2. Remove the four screws and then the motor.
Installation

removal. Screws (4)
NOTE: Align the motor pulley with the drive belt when
installing the motor.
CD389
9-20
9.3 Paper Supply Drive Section
9.3.3 Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the paper supply motor

Screws (7)
2. Remove the seven screws and then the belt cover.
Belt Cover
CD390
9
3. Remove the spring, collars, belt tensioner and Pulleys
pulleys.
Collar
Spring
Belt Tensioner
CD391
4. Remove the screw, pulley, shaft and the drive belt. Drive Belt
Shaft
Installation Pulley

removal.
Screw
CD392
9-21
9.4 Cutter Unit
9.4.1 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the magazine table unit Cutter Paper Guide

2. Remove the four screws and then the cutter paper

guide.
Screws (4)
CD396
3. Disconnect the sensor connectors. Sensor LED

Screw
(D301L)
4. Remove the screws and then the sensor and the
sensor LED.
Connector
Installation

removal.
Sensor
Screw (D301P)
Connector
CD397
9-22
9.4 Cutter Unit
9.4.2 Cutter Unit Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the magazine ID sensor section cover JCU3 JCU1

2. Disconnect the four connectors.
JCU4 JCU2
CD399
9
4. Remove the two screws and then the cutter unit. Screws (2)
NOTE: Do not try to loosen the red-painted screws.
Cutter Unit
Clamp
CD400
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the two cutter mounting screws while

pressing the cutter unit against the left-hand side.
Cutter Unit
Screws (2)
CD1064
9-23
9.4 Cutter Unit
9.4.3 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement
Removal Cutter Home Position

Sensor Cover Sensor 2 (D313)
1. Remove the cutter unit (see Subsection 9.4.2).
2. Remove the screw and then the sensor cover and

the bracket.
Screw
Bracket
Cutter Home Position

Sensor 1 (D312)
CD1061
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor

from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Connector
Sensor (D312/D313)
CD1062
9.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement
Removal Connector
Motor (M307)
1. Remove the cutter unit (see Subsection 9.4.2).
2. Disconnect the motor connector.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
CD1063
9-24
10. PAPER FEED SECTION
Parts Location ........................................................................................... 10-2
10.1 Feed Section Cover................................................................................... 10-3

10.1.1 Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 10-3
10.1.2 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324A/B) Replacement .... 10-3
10.1.3 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement........ 10-4
10.1.4 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 10-5
10.1.5 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement ............. 10-6
10.1.6 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement ............................................................. 10-7
10.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement ................................................. 10-7
10.2 Feed Unit .................................................................................................... 10-9

10.2.1 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................................................................ 10-9
10.2.2 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement..................................................................... 10-10
10.2.3 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement......................................... 10-11
10.2.4 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement .............................................................. 10-11
10.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement .............................................................. 10-12
10.2.6 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement............................................................ 10-13
10.2.7 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement............................................................... 10-14
10.2.8 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement ........................................ 10-15
10.2.9 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ................................................... 10-16
10.2.10 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement..................................................................... 10-18
10.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 10-19 10
10.2.12 Feed Nip Camshaft Replacement........................................................................... 10-20
10.3 Back Printer Section ............................................................................... 10-21

10.3.1 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................................................. 10-21
10.3.2 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ..................................................................... 10-22
10.3.3 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement ...................................................... 10-25
10.3.4 Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement ............................................ 10-25
10.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 10-26
10.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment............................................................. 10-29
10.3.7 Platen Replacement ................................................................................................ 10-30
10-1
Parts Location
Feed Nip Camshaft

Exit Feed Rollers
Exit Guide Plate Rollers Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303)
Back Printer Unit

Paper Feed Unit
Back Printer Set Sensor (D320)
Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302)
Feed Nip Home Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board
Position Sensor Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
(D319) Platen
Ink Ribbon
Drive Gear
Feed Nip Motor

(M313)
Feed Drive
Motor 1 (M302)
Back Printer
Section Guide
Plate Rollers
Back Printer
Section
Feed Rollers
Entrance Guide
Plate Rollers
Cutter Unit
Entrance Side Feed Rollers
Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switches (D324A/B) Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310)
Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Printer Suction Fans 1/2 (F308/F309)
Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switches (D325A/B)
CD815
10-2
10.1 Feed Section Cover
10.1.1 Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (14)

breaker and the main power supply OFF. Tapes (3)
2. Secure the feed section upper and lower doors

using the three tapes.
3. Remove the fourteen screws and then the left-

hand cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Left-hand

removal. Cover
RD355
10.1.2 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324A/B) Replacement 10
Removal Feed Unit

Screws (2)
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1).

bracket.
Switch
Bracket
CD458
3. Disconnect the connectors from the switches. Connectors Spring
4. Remove the spring, E-ring and then the two

switches.
Installation

removal. Switches (2)
E-ring
CD459
10-3
10.1.3 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1). Switch Bracket

Screws (2)
bracket.
Feed Unit
CD1066
3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. Connector

Spring
4. Remove the spring and E-ring and then the

switch.
Installation

removal.
Switch
E-ring
CD1067
10-4
10.1.4 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Interlock Switch Cover

2. Remove the four screws and then the interlock

switch cover.
Screws (4)
CD1065
3. Remove the six screws and then the feed section Screws (6)
front cover.
10
Feed Section
Front Cover
CD363
4. Disconnect the F310 connector. F310 Connector
Reinstallation

removal.
CD364
10-5
10.1.5 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement
Removal Interlock Switch Cover
1. Remove the feed section front cover

2. Remove the four screws and then the interlock

switch cover.
Screws (4)
CD1065
3. Remove the two screws and then the switch Screws (2)
bracket. Switch Bracket
CD393
4. Disconnect the D325A and D325B connectors D325A and D325B Connectors
from the switches.
5. Remove the spring, E-ring and then the two

switches.
Switches
E-ring
Installation

removal.
CD394
10-6
10.1.6 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Connector
1. Remove the feed section front cover Fan (F310)
2. Remove the connector from the bracket and open

the clamp.
3. Remove the two screws and then the fan and

three louvers.
Bracket
Clamp
Louvers (3)
CD365
Installation Arrow
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of 10

removal.
NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the inside of the

printer.
• Install the louvers alternately as shown.
Louvers (3)
CD366
10.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the left-hand cover (see Subsection

10.1.1).
2. Remove the four screws and then the fan bracket.
Screws (4)
Fan Bracket
CD193
10-7
3. Disconnect the two fan connectors. Fan Connectors
CD194
4. Remove the two connectors from the bracket. Fan Guards (2)
Fan (F309)
5. Remove the four screws and then the clamp
bracket, fan guards, fans and six louvers.
6. Remove the fan harnesses from the three

Fan (F308)
clamps.
Louvers(6) Connector
Screws (4)
Clamp Bracket
Clamps (3)
CD195
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Arrow

removal.
NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the inside.

• Install each louver alternately as shown.
Louvers (6)
CD196
10-8
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.1 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the left-hand cover (see Subsection Connector Cover

10.1.1).
2. Remove the two screws and then the connector

cover.
Screws (2)
CD405
10
3. Disconnect the JHA5 and JHK1 connectors and
open the clamp.
Clamp JHK1 JHA5

CD406
4. Disconnect the JHA1 to JHA4 connectors. JHA1 JHA4

JHA2 JHA3
5. Remove the four screws and then the feed unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: • The white-marked holes are for unit installation

screws.
• The holes for the unit mounting screws are marked
with the white dot.
Feed Unit Screws (4)
CD407
10-9
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.2 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1). M313 Connector
Motor (M313)
2. Remove the E-ring and then the idler gear.
4. Remove the three screws and then the motor/

bracket.
Gear
Clamp
Screws (3)
E-ring
RD414
5. Remove the E-ring and then the drive gear. Motor Bracket

bracket from the motor.
Installation

removal.
Drive Gear
E-ring Screws (2)

RD415
10-10
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.3 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement
Removal Locking Tabs
1. Remove the feed section front cover

2. Disconnect the D319 connector from the sensor.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.
Installation

removal.
Sensor (319)
D319 Connector
RD416
10.2.4 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement

10
Removal
Back Printer
Section Cover
2. Remove the six screws and then the back printer

section cover.
Screws (6)
CD409
3. Open the two clamps. Clamps (2) Motor (M303) E-rings (2)
5. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears.
Installation

removal. M303
Connector
Screws (2)
CD410
10-11
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1). Screws (4)
2. Remove the four screws and then the entrance

bracket.
Entrance Bracket
CD433
3. Remove the screw and clamp. Motor Gear Clamp
5. Release the locking tab and remove the gear.
6. Remove the E-ring and then the motor gear. Screw
Motor
Connector
E-ring
Spacer
E-ring
CD434
7. Remove the two screws and then the motor Motor (M302)
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
CD435
10-12
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.6 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1). Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the guide plate.
CD436
3. Remove the four screws and then the entrance

guide plate.
10
4. Disconnect the back printer entrance sensor
connector.
Sensor
Connector
Entrance Guide Plate

Screws (4)
CD437
5. Remove the springs and E-rings and then the Springs

Rollers
rollers and bearings.
Installation

removal.
E-rings
Bearings
Rollers
Roller Shafts Springs
CD438
10-13
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.7 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the entrance guide plate Bracket

3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket.
Screws (2)
M302 Connectors
CD439
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the three

gears and collar.
Locking
Tab
Gears (3)
CD440
5. Remove the bearings and then the three roller E-rings

shafts toward the front. Roller Shafts (3)
6. Remove the E-rings and then the bearings from

Bearings (3)
the roller shaft.
Installation
Bearings
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of (3)
removal.
CD441
10-14
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.8 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement
Removal
2. Screw Mounting Type: Remove the four screws

and then the back printer section guide plate.
Back Printer Section Screws (4)

Guide Plate
CD425
Special Nut Mounting Type:Using the attached Back Printer Section Guide Plate
special driver, remove the four special nuts and
then the back printer section guide plate. 10
Special Nuts (4)
Special Driver
RD686
3. Remove the springs, bearings and two nip rollers. Springs (2)
4. Remove the E-rings and then the two roller shafts.

Roller Shafts (2)
Bearings (2)
CD442
10-15
10.2 Feed Unit
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Holes/Locating Half Punches (2)

removal.
NOTE: Align the holes in the guide plate with the two
locating half punches.
CD432
10.2.9 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back printer section guide plate

Screws (2)
2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes.

bracket.
Harness Bracket
CD444
10-16
10.2 Feed Unit
4. Remove the E-ring and then the one-way gear One-way Gear
from the upper roller shaft.
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the gear

from the lower roller shaft.
Gear E-ring
CD445
6. Remove the bearings and then the two roller

shafts toward the front.
Bearings (2)
7. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing from the

roller shaft.
10
Installation
E-rings (2)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Bearings (2)
removal. Roller Shafts (2)
CD446
10-17
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.10 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement
Removal E-ring
2. Remove the two guide plate return springs.
3. Remove the two nip springs.
4. Remove the E-ring and then the guide plate.

Nip
Springs (2)
Guide Plate Return Springs (2)

CD447
5. Remove the four screws and then the stainless Stainless Steel Guide Plate
steel guide plate.
Screws (4)
CD448
6. Remove the two bearings, E-ring, bearing and E-ring

roller shaft.
Bearing
7. Remove the two E-rings and bearing from the E-ring

roller shaft. Roller Shaft
8. Remove the E-ring and then the roller shaft. Bearing
Installation

E-ring
removal.
Roller Shaft
Bearings (2)
CD449
10-18
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the exit guide plate

2. Remove the return spring from the registration

unit drive gear bracket.
Return Spring
CD450
3. Remove the E-ring and then the roller shaft toward

the rear side.
Roller Shaft 10
Bearing E-ring
CD451
4. Remove the E-ring, then the bracket, two Gear Bearing Shaft
bearings, spacer, one-way gear, bearing and
Spacer Collar
collar.
Bearing
5. Remove the screw and then the gear shaft,
spacer and gear.
Installation
Screw
Bracket
removal.
E-ring One-way Gear
Spacer
Bearings (2)
CD452
10-19
10.2 Feed Unit
10.2.12 Feed Nip Camshaft Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the exit guide plate Screw Gear Gear

2. Remove the screws and then the sensor bracket.
3. Remove the E-ring and gear.
4. Remove the E-ring, sensor plate and gear.
E-ring
Sensor Sensor
Bracket Plate E-ring
CD453
5. Remove the E-ring and idler gear. E-ring Idler Gear
6. Remove the E-ring and then the one-way gear

from the roller shaft.
E-ring
One-way Gear
CD454
7. Remove the E-ring and bearing. Bearing
8. Remove the E-ring securing the cam and then the

camshaft and two cams. E-ring
Installation

removal.
E-ring
Camshaft
Cams (2)
CD455
10-20
10.3 Back Printer Section
10.3.1 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove feed drive motor 2 Screws (2)

3. Remove the two screws and plain washers and

then the back printer unit.
Back Printer
Unit
Plain Washers (2)
CD411
4. Remove the two screws and then the connector Connector Cover
cover.
10
Screws (2)
CD412
5. Disconnect the S301 and S302 connectors. S301 Connector
S302 Connector
CD413
10-21
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Fit the two poly-sliders to the pivots under the back
printer unit base as shown. Poly-slider
Poly-slider
CD424
10.3.2 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back printer unit Locking Tab

2. Remove the locking tab and then the gear.
Gear
CD414
3. Remove the spring, two E-rings, two bearings and

then the gear shaft.
Gear Shaft
Spring
Bearings (2) E-rings (2)
CD415
10-22
4. Withdraw the shaft and remove the gear and four Gear
bearings.
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the gear.
Shaft
Bearings (4)
Gear
CD416
6. Remove the E-ring, and then the one-way gear, Ink Ribbon Drive Shaft
ink ribbon drive shaft, two bearings and two
spacers. Bearings (2)
Spacer
Spacer
10
One-way
Gear
E-ring
CD417
7. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the E-ring
unit.
Gear
CD418
10-23
8. Remove the three screws and then the gear

bracket. Gear Bracket
9. Remove the gear shaft
Screws (3)
CD419
10. Remove the E-ring, then the bearing, spacer,

gear, bearing and two poly-sliders. Poly-slider
Bearing
Gear
Spacer
Bearing
E-ring
CD420
11. Remove the E-ring and then the idler gear. E-ring
Installation

removal.
Idler Gear
CD421
10-24
10.3.3 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back printer unit

2. Release the locking tab and remove the gear from

the roller shaft.
3. Move the roller shaft slightly toward the front.
Gear Roller Shaft

Locking Tab
CD1068
4. Remove the two screws and then the sensor. Screws (2)
5. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 10

Installation

removal.
Sensor (D320)
Connectors
CD422
10.3.4 Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back printer unit Locking Tabs

Installation

Sensor (D302)
removal. Connector
CD423
10-25
10.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back printer section guide plate

Clamps
RD417
cover.
Connector Cover
CD426
5. Remove the screw and then the front head. Front Head
Screw
EZ073
10-26
6. Remove the two screws and then the front head Front Head Bracket Screws (2)
bracket.
EZ074
7. Remove the screw and then the rear head. Rear Head
10
Screw
EZ075
8. Remove the screw and then the JNE20 circuit

board bracket.
Screw JNE20 Circuit Board Bracket

EZ076
10-27
9. Disconnect the S301 and S302 connectors from S301

the JNE20 circuit boards.
S302
EZ077
10. Disconnect the print harnesses from the circuit

Print Harnesses (2)
boards.
EZ078
11. Remove two screws each and then the JNE20 JNE20 Circuit Boards
circuit boards.
Screws (2)
Installation

removal.
• Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment

• Clear “Back Printing Quantity” on the Menu

0554 “Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data” EZ079
screen (see Subsection 5.6.23).
10-28
10.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
1. Remove the feed unit (see Subsection 10.2.1). Platen
3. Align the jig with the platen and screw in its screw
fully, and then loosen it one turn.
NOTE: The screw must be loosened one turn, or

correct clearance cannot be obtained.
Jig
1. Screw in fully.
2. Loosen one turn.

CD428
4. Loosen the three screws slightly. Screws (3)
5. Turn the cam clockwise to increase head

clearance. 10
Cam
CD429
6. Insert the feeler gauge between the rear head and Screws (3)
the platen and adjust the head clearance by
turning the cam.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm
Feeler Gauge
7. Tighten the three screws,
Cam
CD430
10-29
8. Loosen slightly the two screws securing the front Screws (2)
head.
9. Turn the cam clockwise to increase clearance.
10. Insert the feeler gauge between the front head

and the platen.
11. Adjust the clearance by turning the cam.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm

Cam
12. Tighten the two screws.

Feeler Gauge
13. Recheck the clearances.
CD431
14. Remove the jig and reinstall the removed parts.
10.3.7 Platen Replacement
Removal
1. Open the feed section upper door. Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the platen

bracket.
Platen Bracket
CD443
3. Remove the two E-rings and then the springs and E-rings (2)
platens.
Installation

removal. Platens (2)
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pressing the platen

bracket to the guide plate as shown the figure
above. Springs (2)
After installation, adjust the back printer head GD1078
clearance (see Subsection 10.3.6).
10-30
11. REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS
Parts Location ........................................................................................... 11-2
11.1 Cover and Electrical Parts........................................................................ 11-4

11.1.1 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 11-4
11.1.2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement .......................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement ................................................ 11-8
11.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement .......................................................................... 11-9
11.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement ....................................................................................... 11-10
11.2 Laser Unit................................................................................................. 11-11

11.2.1 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................ 11-11
11.2.2 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement ......................................... 11-14
11.3 Sub-scanning Unit................................................................................... 11-15

11.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................... 11-15
11.3.2 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement .................................................................. 11-17
11.3.3 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement .................................................. 11-19
11.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement ......................... 11-20
11.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................................... 11-20
11.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement......................................................... 11-20
11.3.7 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement................................................. 11-21
11.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement ................................ 11-21
11.3.9 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement .......................... 11-22
11.3.10 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement ..................................................... 11-22
11.3.11 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement ................................................................... 11-23
11.3.12 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................................................................... 11-23
11
11.3.13 Nip Belt Replacement.............................................................................................. 11-24
11.3.14 Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................................................... 11-24
11.4 Registration Unit ..................................................................................... 11-27

11.4.1 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 11-27
11.4.2 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement ............................ 11-27
11.4.3 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement ......................................................... 11-28
11.4.4 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement ................................................................. 11-28
11.4.5 Width Detecting Sensor (D314P) Replacement .................................................... 11-28
11.4.6 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 11-29
11.4.7 Width Detecting Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement ............................................ 11-30
11.4.8 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement........................................................... 11-30
11.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement ........................................................................ 11-31
11.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement................................... 11-31
11.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement............................................................... 11-31
11.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement ........................................................... 11-32
11.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement .............................................. 11-32
11.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement.......................................................................... 11-33
11.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement................................................................................... 11-33
11.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 11-34
11.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement ....................................................................... 11-35
11.4.18 Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 11-35
11.4.19 Roller Nip Camshaft Replacement......................................................................... 11-36
11.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement ......................................................................... 11-36
11-1
Parts Location
Sub-scanning Unit
Locating Jig
Sub-scanning Nip Motor
Cooling Fan (F301)
Sub-scanning Steel Belt
Rear Feed
Rubber Belt
Sub-scanning
Nip Motor (M311)
Sub-scanning Drive Motor
(M305)
Nip Belt
Exposure Section
Front Feed Rubber Belt Temperature Sensor Sub-scanning Nip
(THA1) Home Position Sensor (D317)
Nip Roller
Pre-exposure Sensor
(D304P)
Sensor LED (D304L)
CD817
11-2
Parts Location
Roller Nip Cam Shaft

Roller Nip Cam Arm
Register Nip Motor (M309)
Width Detecting Sensor (D314P)
Entrance Feed Roller Width Home Position Sensor

Register Nip Home (D315)
Position Sensor
(D316) Entrance Nip Roller
Guide Plate
11
Width Detecting Sensor LED

(D314L)
Width Detecting Guide Shaft
Width Detecting Belt

Register Drive Motor
(M304)
Exit Nip Roller
Register Unit Register Sensor (D303P)
Exit Feed Roller Width Detecting Register Sensor LED (D303L)
Drive Motor (M310)
CD816
11-3
11.1 Cover and Electrical Parts
11.1.1 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Top Inner Cover
1. Remove the table top cover

2. Loosen the seven screws, remove the other eight

screws and then the top inner cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (7) (Loosen) Screws (8) (Remove)

RD408
11.1.2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement
Removal Screws (Loosen)
1. Remove:
• Table top cover (see Subsection 6.2.2).

• Left cover (see Subsection 10.1.1).

screw and then the fan (F313) bracket.
Fan Bracket Screw (Remove)

RD346
3. Remove the four screws and open the circuit

board bracket.
Screws (4)
Circuit Board Bracket

RD343
11-4
4. Remove the eleven screws and then the fan Screws (11)
bracket.
Fan Bracket
CD465
5. Open the clamp.
6. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors from the Screws

motor driver. (Loosen)
7. Loosen the two screws, remove the other screw

and then the cover. Connectors
11
Screws
(Remove)
Clamp
CD190
8. Disconnect all connectors from the LDD22 and LDD22 LDA22

Circuit Board Clamp
LDA22 circuit boards. Circuit Board
9. Remove the four screws securing the circuit board

bracket and open the clamp.
10. Remove the circuit board bracket by shifting it to

the left.
Circuit Board Screws (4)

Bracket
RD411
11-5
11. Open the three harness clamps.
Clamps (3)
RD412
12. Remove the four screws and then the fan/start

switch bracket.
Fan/Start
Switch Bracket
Screws (4)
RD410
13. Remove the three screws and then the bracket by

shifting it to the left.
Screws (3) Bracket
CD470
11-6
14. Disconnect the F314 connector. Screws (4)
15. Remove the four screws and then the fan duct.
Fan Duct
F314 Connector
CD471
16. Remove the three screws and then the duct cover.
Screws (3)
11
Duct Cover
CD472
17. Remove the fan connector from the duct. Screws (3)
18. Remove the three screws and then the fan.
Installation

removal.
Connector
Fan (F314)
CD473
11-7
11.1.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement
Removal
• Left-hand cover (see Subsection 10.1.1).

• Tabletop cover (see Subsection 6.2.2).
2. Remove the eleven screws and then the fan

bracket.
Fan Bracket
CD465
3. Disconnect the F315 and F316 connectors.
F316 Connector F315 Connector

CD466
4. Open the clamp and remove the fan connector Screws (2)
from the bracket.
5. Remove the two screws, then the three louvers

Fan Connector
and the fan.
Bracket
Clamp
CD467
11-8
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Louvers (3)

removal.
NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the outside.

• Install the louvers alternately as shown.
Arrow
CD468
11.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Grounding Wristband

11
1. Remove the top inner cover
2. Wear the grounding wristband on the left wrist

and connect its wire end to the exposure section
frame.
Exposure Section Frame

CD483
3. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board. Screws (6) JMC22 Circuit Board
Installation

removal.
CD553
11-9
11.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the top inner cover AOM Connector

2. Disconnect the AOM connector and G and B

cables from the driver.
B Cable
G Cable
CD554
3. Remove the four screws and then the AOM driver. Screws (4)
Installation

removal.
AOM Driver
CD555
11-10
11.2 Laser Unit
11.2.1 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the top inner cover

2. Disconnect the R, G and B cables.
B Cable
R Cable G Cable
CD478
3. Wear the wristband on the wrist and connect its Grounding Wristband
wire end to the exposure section frame.
11
Exposure Section Frame

CD483
4. Disconnect the JML1, JML2 and JML4 to JML9 JML4 JML5

JML1 JML7
connectors from the JML22 circuit board. JML2 JML6
5. Open the clamp.
JML8
JML9
Clamp
CD479
11-11
11.2 Laser Unit
6. Remove the short connectors from the clamp. Clamp
Short Connectors
CD480
7. Connect the short connectors to the JML4 and

JML7 connectors of the harness.
JML7
JML4
Short Connectors
CD481
8. Disconnect the JROS connector. JROS Connector
CD482
11-12
11.2 Laser Unit
9. Loosen the one screw and remove the other three

screws securing the laser unit.
Screws
(Loosen)
Screws (3)
(Remove)
CD484
10. Grasp the handles and remove the laser unit.
11
Handles (2)
Laser Unit
CD485
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Laser Unit

removal.
NOTE: • Align the two holes in the laser unit base with the
locating pins on the frame.
• After reinstallation, perform the following
Pins (2)
adjustments.
1) Menu 0547 “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Synchronous Rough
Adjustment” (see Subsection 5.6.16).
2) Menu 0548 “Laser Beam Synchronous Fine
Adjustment Print” (see Subsection 5.6.17).
3) Menu 0522 “G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup” (see Subsection 5.6.2). Holes (2)
4) “Print Condition Upkeep” (Pre-operational
Checks)
CD050
11-13
11.2 Laser Unit
11.2.2 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the top inner cover Air Duct

2. Remove the four screws and then the air duct. Screws (4)
CD476
3. Disconnect the fan connectors and remove them Fan Connector (3)
Screws (2)
from the bracket.
NOTE: Take care not to apply excessive force to the

vibration-isolating rubbers. Excessive force may
shorten the rubber's service life.
4. Remove the two screws and then the fan.

Arrow
Installation

Fan
removal.
CD477
NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow pointing down.
11-14
11.3 Sub-scanning Unit
11.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the laser unit (see Subsection 11.2.1).
2. Remove the two screws and then the air duct.
Air Duct
CD486
3. Open the two harness clamps. Screws (8) Screws (2)

Clamps (2)
4. Disconnect the JHU1 to JHU4 connectors.
5. Remove the two screws securing the grounding

wires. JHU1
JHU2 11
6. Remove the eight screws and then the sub-
Grounding
scanning unit. Wires (2)
NOTE: • Always remove the sub-scanning unit along with

the damper mount rubbers.
• Remove the sub-scanning unit while moving it
toward the scanner section to prevent damage to
JHU3 Sub-scanning Unit
the two transparent resin plates on the register JHU4
unit.
RD402
Reinstallation Locating Jigs (2)

removal.
NOTE: • Insert the two locating jigs into the holes in the
frame. Position the frame so that the locating jigs
fall into the locating holes smoothly and tighten the
sub-scanning unit mounting screws. Make sure
the jigs can be removed easily.
• Note the route of the grounding wires.
• Reinstall the sub-scanning unit while moving it
toward the scanner section to prevent damage to
the two transparent resin plates on the register
unit.
• When the sub-scanning unit has been replaced,
enter new unit data by following the steps given on
Frame
the following page. Screws (8)
CD488
11-15
1) Record the data indicated on the label attached to

the right-hand side of the nip release knob.
Sub-scanning Nip Roller

1 Release: mm
1 Pressure: pulse
2 Pressure: mm
CD959
2) Proceed to Menu 0551 “Printer Mechanism Fine

Adjustment” screen.
3) Enter the data recorded in the data boxes as

shown below.
Enter the “1 Release” value in the “Sub-scanning

nip roller 1 release timing” box.
Enter the “1 Pressure” value in the “Sub-scanning
nip roller 1 pressure timing” box.
Enter the “2 Pressure” value in the “Sub-scanning
nip roller 2 pressure timing” box.
4) Click [OK].
5) Perform Menu 0547 “Main Scanning Position

6) Perform Menu 0548 “Laser Beam Synchronous

Fine Adjustment Print” (see Subsection 5.6.17).
11-16
11.3.2 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the belt cover.
Belt Cover
CD489
3. Loosen the screw securing the belt tensioner. Steel Belt
4. Move the belt tensioner toward the loosening

direction and secure it with the screw. 11
5. Wear gloves and remove the steel belt.
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when handling the belt and

pulley. Fingerprints on the belt and pulley may Belt
cause slippage or corrosion of the belt. Tensioner
Screw
CD490
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Take care not to bend or damage the belt as this

may shorten its service life.
• Perform the belt alignment adjustment by following
the steps below.
<Belt Alignment Adjustment>

1. Loosen the screw securing the belt tensioner. Screw
2. Rotate the pulley several turns and tighten the

screw.
Pulley
CD491
11-17
3. Rotate the pulley 30 turns or more and make sure

the belt is in the center of the pulley.
Pulley About 30 turns

CD492
4. If the belt is off the center of the pulley more than

0.5 mm, adjust it by following the steps below. Steel Belt
Screws (2)
Pulley
1) Loosen the two screws securing the pulley
bracket.
2) Adjust the belt position by turning the hex

socket-head adjusting screw.
When the belt moves outside:
Turn the screw clockwise.
When the belt moves inside:
Turn the screw counterclockwise.
3) Repeat Steps 1 to 3.
4) If necessary, repeat Steps 1 to 3.
NOTE: After installation, perform the following Adjustment Screw

adjustments.
CD493
1) Menu 0547 “Main Scanning Position
11-18
11.3.3 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt

2. Remove the two screws and then the motor cover.
Screws (2) Motor Cover

CD494

M305 Connector
4. Remove the two nuts (5.5 mm) and then the
motor. 11
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, perform the following adjustments.

1) Clear sub-scanning motor operation time in Menu
Motor (M305)
0554 “Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data”
Nuts (2)
Menu 0547 “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
Laser Beam Synchronous Rough Adjustment” CD495
11-19
11.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement
Removal
Sensor (D317)
1. Remove the laser unit (see Subsection 11.2.1).

Locking Tabs
Installation
Connector

removal.
CD496
11.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal


cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Sensor Cover Screws (2)
CD497
11.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement
Removal Sensor (D304P)

Screw
Cover
1. Remove the sensor cover
3. Remove the screw, then the cover, the sensor

and the spacer.
Installation

Connector Spacer
removal.
CD498
11-20
11.3.7 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement
Removal Cover

2. Place the sub-scanning unit upside down.
3. Remove the two screws and then the cover.
Screws (2)
RD403

Screw
Sensor LED (D304L)
5. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED and
the spacer.
Installation

11
removal.
Spacer
RD404
11.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement
Removal Fan (F301)
1. Remove the pre-exposure sensor

2. Disconnect the F301 connector.
Installation

removal.
F301 Connector
Screws (2)
CD499
11-21
11.3.9 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the sensor cover Temperature Sensor (THA20)

2. Disconnect the THA connector.
3. Remove the two screws and then the temperature

sensor.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
THA Connector
CD501
11.3.10 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement
Removal

2. Disconnect the motor connector. Screws (2)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Motor (M311)

removal.
Connector
CD502
11-22
11.3.11 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement
Removal Front Feel Rubber Belt

2. Rotate the knob and remove the front feed rubber

belt.
Installation

removal.
Knob
CD504
11.3.12 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement
Removal Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

11
1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt
2. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews

(2 mm) and remove the pulley.
Pulley
CD505
3. Remove the rear feed rubber belt.
Installation

removal.
Rear Feed Rubber Belt

CD506
11-23
11.3.13 Nip Belt Replacement
Removal

2. Rotate the knob and remove the nip belt.
Installation

removal.
Knob
Nip Belt
CD507
11.3.14 Nip Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Exposure section temperature sensor

• Front feed rubber belt (see Subsection 11.3.11).
• Rear feed rubber belt (see Subsection 11.3.12).
• Nip belt (see Subsection 11.3.13).
2. Remove the front E-ring, then the nip release

Bearing
knob, pulley, pin and bearing. Pin Pulley
Nip Release Knob E-ring

CD508
3. Remove the rear E-ring, then the bearing and the

cam shaft.
Cam Shaft
Bearing E-ring
CD509
11-24
4. Remove the four nip springs. Inlet Side Springs (Stronger)(Black-marked)
NOTE: The inlet side nip springs are shorter (stronger)

and have black marks. Springs (4)
CD510
5. Remove the front and rear screws.
11
Screws (2)
CD512
6. Remove the shaft, three collars, two arms and Screw

spring.
Collar
Spring
Arms Collars (2)
Shaft
CD511
11-25
7. Remove the four screws and then the two spring Screws (4)
brackets.
Spring Bracket (2)

CD513
8. Remove the two nip rollers. Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
9. Remove the two hex. socket head setscrews and
then the two pulleys.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Pulleys (2)

removal.
Nip Rollers
CD515
11-26
11.4 Registration Unit
11.4.1 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal JRE2

Clamps (2)
2. Open the two clamps and disconnect the JRE1
and JRE2 connectors.
JRE1
RD405
3. Remove the four screws and then the registration Screws (4)
unit.
Reinstallation

11
removal.
NOTE: After reinstallation, perform the following

adjustments.
1) Menu 0551 “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
Laser Beam Synchronous Rough Adjustment”
Adjustment Print” (see Subsection 5.6.17). CD524
11.4.2 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement
Removal Connector
1. Remove the registration unit

3. Remove the sensor by releasing the locking tabs.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Sensor (D315)

removal.
Locking Tabs
RD406
11-27
11.4.3 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement
Removal
Screw
2. Place the unit upside down.

spacer.
4. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED. Connector
Installation Sensor LED (D303L)

removal. Spacer
CD526
11.4.4 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement
Removal
Screw
(see Subsection 11.4.1). Cover
3. Remove the screw and then the cover, sensor

and spacer.
Installation Sensor (D303P)

Spacer
removal.
CD527
11.4.5 Width Detecting Sensor (D314P) Replacement
Removal Screws
1. Remove the registration unit Cover
(see Subsection 11.4.1). Sensor

(D314P)
2. Remove the screw, then the cover, sensor and
spacer.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Spacer
removal.
CD528
11-28
11.4.6 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the registration unit Screw

2. Remove the screw securing the belt holder.
Belt Holder
CD546
3. Disconnect the M304, M310 and D303L Width Detecting Bracket

D 303L
connectors. Clamps (7)
4. Open the seven clamps. M 304

11
5. Remove the four screws and then the width
detecting bracket.
M 310
Screws (4)
CD547
6. Disconnect the flat cable connector. Screws (2)
Connector
7. Remove the two screws securing the flat cable.
Reinstallation

removal.
Flat Cable
CD548
11-29
11.4.7 Width Detecting Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement
Removal Connector
1. Remove the width detecting bracket

Installation
Sencor LED
removal. Screw
CD549
11.4.8 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement
Removal Screws (3)
1. Remove:
• Width sensor (see Subsection 11.4.5).

• Width detecting bracket
2. Remove the three screws and then the motor

cover.
Motor Cover
CD532
3. Remove the screw and then the knob from the Guide Shaft
roller shaft.
5. Remove the four screws and then the guide

shafts.
Installation

Gear
removal.
E-ring
Screws (4)
Knob
Screw
CD550
11-30
11.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement
Removal Gear
1. Remove the width detecting bracket

Belt
3. Remove the belt.
Installation
E-ring
removal.
CD556
11.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement
Removal
Connector
2. Remove the sensor by releasing the locking tabs. 11

Installation Locking Tabs

removal.
Sensor (D316)
CD537
11.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement
Removal Motor Connector

Cord Tie
2. Disconnect the motor connector and cut the cord

tie.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Motor (M309)
removal.
Screws (2)
CD529
11-31
11.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement
Removal Screws (3)


cover.
Motor Cover
CD532
Installation

removal.
Connector
Motor (M304)
Screws (2)
CD533
11.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement
Removal Motor (M310) Screws (2)

Motor Connector
Installation

removal. RD407
11-32
11.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement
Removal Nip Roller

2. Remove the two nip springs.
3. Remove the two fulcrum screws and then the both

arms.
Nip Springs (2)
4. Remove the nip roller. Arm
Installation
Fulcrum Screws (2) Arm
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. CD538
11.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement
Removal Screws (3)
1. Remove the width sensor

11

cover.
Motor Cover
CD532
3. Remove the two nip springs. Nip Springs (2)
Arm (2)
4. Remove the two fulcrum screws and then the both
arms.
5. Remove the nip roller.
Installation

removal.
Fulcrum Screws (2)

CD539
11-33
11.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
• Entrance nip roller (see Subsection 11.4.14).

• Exit nip roller (see Subsection 11.4.15).
• Two front nip cam arms
E-ring
2. Remove the screw and then the knob.
Gear
Knob Screws (2)
4. Remove the two screws securing the upper guide Screws Nip Roller
plate fulcrum shafts. CD540
5. Remove the upper guide plate and two fulcrum

shafts. Screws (2)
Upper Guide Plate
Fulcrum Shafts (2)

CD541
6. Remove the two screws and then the two fulcrum Screws (2)
shafts, two springs and guide plate.
Reinstallation

removal.
Guide Plate
Springs (2)
Fulcrum Shafts (2)
CD542
11-34
11.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the registration unit Gear

E-ring
2. Remove the rear E-ring, spacer, gear, two

spacers and bearing.
3. Remove the front E-ring and bearing from the

shaft.
Bearing
4. Remove the roller shaft. Bearing
Spacer
E-ring
Installation Spacers Roller shaft
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of CD544
removal.
11.4.18 Exit Feed Roller Replacement

11
Removal
1. Remove the registration unit E-ring

2. Remove the rear E-ring and then the bearing.
3. Remove the front E-ring and then the bearing.
Bearing
4. Remove the roller shaft.
Installation Bearing
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Feed Roller Shaft E-ring

removal. CD545
11-35
11.4.19 Roller Nip Camshaft Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the nip motor bracket Roller Nip Camshaft

Bearings (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings and bearings and then
the camshaft.
Installation

removal.
E-rings (2)
CD551
11.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the roller nip camshaft Arms

Arms
2. Remove two E-rings each, then the arms and E-rings (2)
spring.
E-rings (2)
Installation

removal.
Spring
Spring
CD552
11-36
12. PRINTER EXIT SECTION
Parts Location ........................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1 Printer Exit Unit ......................................................................................... 12-3

12.1.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................. 12-3
12.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement............. 12-6
12.1.3 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement......................................... 12-7
12.1.4 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement ............................................................ 12-8
12.1.5 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ...................................... 12-9
12.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement...................................................... 12-9
12.1.7 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement............................................ 12-10
12.1.8 Anti-static Brush Replacement .............................................................................. 12-11
12.1.9 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 12-11
12.1.10 Up/Down Gear Replacement .................................................................................. 12-12
12.1.11 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 12-12
12.1.12 Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 12-13
12.1.13 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 12-16
12.1.14 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement...................................................................... 12-16
12.1.15 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement ................................................................... 12-18
12.1.16 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement...................................................................... 12-18
12.1.17 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment ................................................................... 12-20
12.1.18 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment against the Sub-scanning Unit
Exit Guide Plate ..................................................................................................... 12-23
12.1.19 Adjustment Confirmation ....................................................................................... 12-25
12
12-1
Parts Location
Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor

Up/Down Arm (D321)
Up/Down Belt
(Height Adjustment) Up/Down Gears
Up/Down Belt Motor (M314)
Exit Drive Motor (M306)
Lower Pulley Drive Belt
Lower Exit Belts/Pulleys Processor Entry Sensor

(Height Adjustment) (D305P)
Processor Entry Sensor LED

Upper Exit Belts/Pulleys (D305L)
Printer Exit Unit
RD519
12-2
12.1 Printer Exit Unit
12.1.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Proceed to the next screen of Menu 0540 “Printer

I/O Check”.
2. Click [Home] and [Descent] of “M314 Exit up/

down motor” twice to lower the up/down belt arm.

the system and turn OFF the built-in circuit
breaker and the main power supply.

upper cover.
5. Remove the screw and lower the upper exit belt

section by releasing the hook.
12
NOTE: When releasing the hook, hold the upper exit
belt section to prevent it from dropping suddenly.
Front Upper Cover

Magazine Door
CD006
6. Turn the lever counterclockwise to lower the lower Screw

exit belt section.
Lever
Upper Exit Belt Section

CD557
12-3
7. If the machine has been stopped and Steps 1 and

2 cannot be performed to lower the up/down belt
Gear
arm, turn the gear counterclockwise to lower the
arm. Up/Down Belt
CD1069
8. Remove the two screws and then the connector Connector Cover
cover.
Screws (2)
CD568
9. Disconnect the JSY1 and JSY2 connectors. Screw JSY1
10. Remove the screw, move the printer exit unit to

the left and pull it out slightly.
Printer Exit Unit
JSY2
CD559
12-4
11. Grasp the exit side upper frame and the bottom Upper Bracket Exit Side Upper Frame
frame and remove the unit as shown.
NOTE: Do not grasp the belt section or upper bracket

when removing the unit.
12. Place the unit on a flat table.
Belt Section Bottom Frame

CD1190
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: • If the exit up/down belt arm is at the raised

position, turn the cam gear counterclockwise to
lower it.
• If the unit has been overhauled, perform “Exit Up/
down Belt Height Adjustment” after reinstallation
• If the unit has been replaced with a new one,
perform “ Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment
against the Sub-scanning Unit Exit Guide Plate”
12
• When the printer exit unit has been replaced, enter
new unit data by following the steps given below CD1189
and on the following page.
1) Record the data on the label attached to the

front of the printer exit unit.
Exit Up/Down Belt

Downward fine adjustment value: pulse
Upward fine adjustment value: pulse
CD960
12-5
2) Proceed to Menu 0551 “Printer Mechanical Fine

Adjustment” screen.
3) Enter the data recorded as shown below.
Enter the “Downward fine adjustment value” in the
“Exit section up/down belt downward fine-adj.” box.
Enter the “Upward fine adjustment value” in the
“Exit section up/down belt upward fine-adj.” box.
4) Click [OK].
12.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer exit unit

Installation

Connector
removal.
After installation, perform the up/down belt height
adjustment (see Subsection 12.1.17).
Sensor (D321)
CD560
12-6
12.1.3 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer exit unit Screws

2. Disconnect the motor connector and open the

clamp.
3. Using a long shank screwdriver, remove the two

screws and then the motor.
Clamp
Connector Motor (M314)
CD561
4. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the Motor (M314)
motor.
Installation

12
removal.
E-ring
Gear
CD562
12-7
12.1.4 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer exit unit Motor Connector

Clamp
Motor Bracket
2. Disconnect the motor connector and open the
clamp.
3. Remove the four screws and then the motor

bracket.
Screws (4)
RD419
4. Open the two clamps and remove the connector E-ring

from the bracket.
Screws (2)
the bracket.
6. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the

motor.
Connector
Clamps (2)
Motor (M306)
RD420
7. Remove the E-ring and then the three gears.
Installation

removal.
Gears (3)
E-rings (2)
RD421
12-8
12.1.5 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Upper Exit Guide Plate

2. Remove the two screws and then the upper exit

guide plate.
3. Remove the two screws and then the lower exit

guide plate.
Reinstallation Screws (2)
Lower Exit Guide Plate Screws (2)

removal. CD566
12.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove the stainless exit guide plates

(see Subsection 12.1.5). 12
2. Disconnect the connector and open the clamp.
Sensor Bracket
Clamp
Connector
CD1070

the sensor.
Installation

removal.
Countersunk
Flat Head Screw
Sensor (D305P)
CD1071
12-9
12.1.7 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the lower stainless exit guide plate Sensor LED Bracket
2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED

bracket.
Screws (2)
RD422

the sensor LED.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Connector

removal.
Cord Tie
Sensor LED (D305L)
Countersunk Flat Head Screw
RD423
12-10
12.1.8 Anti-static Brush Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer exit unit Anti-static Brush Bracket

2. Remove the two screws and then the front anti-

static brush.
3. Remove the two screws and then the anti-static

brush bracket.
4. Remove the two screws and then the rear anti-

static brush.
Screws (2) Screws (2)
Installation
Screws (2)
Front Anti-static Brush
Rear Anti-static
Brush
removal.
RD424
12.1.9 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal 12
Up/Down Shaft
1. Remove the anti-static brush bracket
3. Remove the E-ring from the up/down shaft and Spring

then the bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
RD425
4. Open the two clamps. Screws (2) D321 Connector
5. Disconnect the M314 and D321 connectors.

bracket.
Reinstallation

removal.
M314 Connector Motor Bracket

RD426
12-11
12.1.10 Up/Down Gear Replacement
Removal Gear Bracket E-ring

Bearing
Screws (2)
1. Remove the up/down belt motor bracket
2. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing.
3. Remove the two screws and then the gear

bracket.
4. Remove the E-ring securing the gear.
E-ring Idler Gear

CD570
5. Remove the E-ring and then the sensor plate. E-ring
Sensor Plate
6. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, gear/
camshaft and idler gear.
Bearing
Installation

removal.
Gear/Camshaft
E-ring
CD571
12.1.11 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation
Removal E-rings (2)
Spring
3. Remove the screw securing the arm to the link.
4. Remove the two E-rings and then the up/down

arm.
Screw
Up/Down Arm
RD427
12-12
5. Remove the E-ring, shaft and pulley.
Reinstallation

removal.
E-ring Pulley
Shaft
CD573
12.1.12 Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the stainless guide plates Deltight Screws (2)

(see Subsection 12.1.5). Upper Bracket
2. Remove the two deltight and two double-sems

screws and then the upper bracket.
12
Double Sems Screws (2)

RD428
3. Remove the two springs. Cord Ties (2)
Clamp
4. Open the clamp and cut the two cord ties.
Springs (2)
RD429
12-13
5. Open the two clamps and disconnect the D305P Exit Side Upper D305P Connector
connector. Bracket
6. Remove the four screws and then the exit side

upper bracket.
Screws (4)
Clamps (2)
RD430
7. Remove the lower spring. Spring
CD587
8. Remove the E-ring and then the gear. Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

remove the boss.
10. Remove the two E-rings and bearings.
Boss
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
Gear
RD431
12-14
11. Open the six clamps and disconnect the two Motor
Clamps (6)
motor connectors and sensor connector. Connector
Motor Connector Sensor Connector

CD1074
12. Remove the two screws and then the two nip
release shafts.
13. Remove the exit belt bracket.
Screws (2)
Nip Release
Shafts (2)
12
Exit Belt Bracket
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
removal.
NOTE: • Insert a 150mm stainless steel ruler (T=0.5mm)

between the E-ring and the bearing and tighten
the two hex. socket head setscrews while pressing
the lower belt drive shaft and the boss to eliminate
bearing play. E-ring
• After reinstallation, adjust exit up/down belt height
Boss
Spacer (t=0.5mm) Bearing
RD434
12-15
12.1.13 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the exit belt bracket Bearings (2)

2. Remove the two E-rings. Shift the bearing and

remove the upper exit belt bracket.
Reinstallation

removal.
Upper Exit Belt Bracket E-rings (2)
RD432
12.1.14 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Anti-static brush bracket

• Up/down arm (see Subsection 12.1.11).
• Up/down belt motor bracket
Spring Bearing
• Upper exit belt bracket
2. Remove the three E-rings and then the three

gears. Gear Bracket
3. Remove the spring, gear bracket and bearing.
Gears (3)
E-rings (3)
CD575
12-16
4. Remove the E-ring from the opposite side, then

the bearing and the exit pulley shaft.
5. Remove the two small bearings from the pulley

shaft.
E-ring
Bearings (4)
Exit Pulley Shaft

Small Bearings (2)
CD576
6. Remove the four E-rings, four bearings and then

the two entrance pulley shafts.
12
E-rings (4) Bearings (4) Entrance Pulley Shafts (2)
CD577
7. Remove the four screws and then the entrance Entrance Side Bracket
side bracket.
Screws (4)
8. Remove the three belts.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the belts so that the surface with the

manufacturer’s mark faces the inside.
Belts
12-17
12.1.15 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the exit belt bracket

2. Remove the gear and pin.

Belt
3. Remove the belt, pulley and pin. Pin
Pulley
Pin
Gear
CD579
4. Remove the entrance side belt.
Installation

removal.
Entrance Side Belt

CD580
12.1.16 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement
Removal Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
Entry Belts (6) Pulley Shafts
1. Remove the lower pulley drive belts

remove the boss.
3. Remove the three E-rings, four bearings and two

spring brackets.
E-rings (3)
4. Remove the two pulley shafts and entry belts.
Spring Brackets (2)
Bearings (4)
CD581
12-18
5. Remove the E-rings, spacers, pulleys, poly-sliders

and pins from the shaft. E-rings (2) Poly-sliders (5)
Spacers (2)
Shaft
Short
Pulleys (4)
Long Pulleys (2)
Rubber Spacers (5) Pins (5)

CD582
6. Remove the E-ring, two bearings and then the exit Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
side lower pulley shaft.
7. Remove the belts.
8. Disassemble the pulley shaft.

Poly-sliders
(10)
Long
Pulleys (2) Short
Marking Pulleys (4) Bearings
Rollers with (12)
Surface One-way Clutch (5)
CD583 12
9. Remove the screw and then the knob from the Screw
pulley shaft.
Bearing
10. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
11. Remove the entrance side pulley shaft. Knob

Pulley E-ring
E-ring
Entrance Side Pulley Shaft

CD584
12-19
Installation
Print Paper
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of (T=Approx. 0.2mm)
removal.
E-ring
NOTE: • Install the pulleys (black) with one-way clutch to
the exit side lower pulley shaft so that their
marking surfaces face toward the front (short end)
side.
• Insert a sheet of print paper (approximately 0.2 Boss
mm) between the E-ring and the bearing as shown Hex. Socket Head
and tighten the two hex. socket head setscrews Setscrew
while pressing the shaft and boss to eliminate
bearing play.
Bearing
CD1076
12.1.17 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment

I/O Check”.
2. Click [Home] and [Descent] of “ M314 Exit up/

down motor” twice to lower the up/down belt arm.
3. Remove the printer exit unit Upper Exit Belt Section

NOTE: Do not move the up/down cam gear. If it has

been moved, reinstall the unit and repeat Steps
1 through 3.
4. Lift the upper exit belt section and secure it with

the hook as shown.
Hook
5. Turn the lever clockwise to raise the lower exit belt
section. Lever
Lower Exit Belt Section

CD1182
12-20
6. Remove the screw securing the up/down arm to Screw

the link.
Up/down Arm
CD1183
7. Apply thread-locking agent to the threads of the

screw.
Recommended thread-locking agent:

Screw
LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
LOCK
CD1184
12
8. Adjust the up/down arm position so that the Screw
clearance between the up/down belt and the lower
exit belt is 1.5mm and temporarily secure with the
screw applied with thread-locking agent.
Up/down
Belt
1.5mm
Lower Exit Belts

CD1185
12-21
9. Check that the clearance is within the specified

range using the adjusting plates.
Specified range: 1.5 ± 0.2mm
Adjusting Plate
CD1186
10. Adjust the clearance by loosening the screw and

moving the up/down arm within the play between
the screw and the hole for the screw, if necessary. Up/down Arm Assembly
NOTE: Do not apply excessive twisting force to the arm.
11. If the clearance does not fall within the specified

range, perform the following adjustment.
1) Remove the two E-rings, bearing, spring and

then the up/down arm assembly.
NOTE: Do not move the up/down cam gear.

Spring
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
CD1187
2) Loosen the screw and move the cam arm Cam Arm
position within the play between the screw and
the hole for the screw.
Move the cam arm doun to increase the
clearance.
Move the cam arm up to decrease the
clearance.
To decrease clearance
3) Reinstall the up/down arm assembly in the

reverse order of removal.
Screw To increase
4) Repeat Steps 3 through 7. clearance
12. Reinstall the printer exit unit. CD1188
12-22
12.1.18 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment against the

Sub-scanning Unit Exit Guide Plate
Adjust the exit up/down belt position to 1.5mm below

the upper surface of the sub-scanning unit exit guide Sub-scanning Unit
plate by measuring the clearance between the guide Exit Guide Plate
plate and the lower exit belt and changing the
mechanical fine adjustment value in the Menu 45M
screen.
0.5
1.5
1.5
Exit Up/down Belt
Lower Exit Belt

CD1192

I/O Check”.
2. Click [Home] of “M314 Exit up/down belt motor”.
• The exit up/down belt moves to its home 12

position.

upper cover.
Front Upper Cover

Magazine Door
CD006
12-23
4. Check the clearance between the sub-scanning Adjusting Plate

unit exit guide plate and the lower exit belt using
the adjusting plates.
Standard clearance range: 1.5 to 2.0mm
5. If the clearance exceeds the range, adjust the

height of the exit up/down belt by following the
steps below.
1) Reinstall the front upper cover and close the

magazine door.
Sub-scanning Unit Lower Exit Belt

Exit Guide Plate
CD1191
2) Proceed to Menu 0551 “Printer Mechanical

Fine Adjustment” screen.
3) Change the value in the “Exit section up/down

belt downward fine-adjustment” box.
Clearance (mm) Fine Adjustment Value

0.5 to 1.0 +40
1.0 to 1.5 +20
1.5 to 2.0 0
2.0 to 2.5 –10
2.5 to 3.9 –20
4) Click [OK].
12-24
12.1.19 Adjustment Confirmation

I/O Check”.

upper cover.
3. Place a sheet of paper on the exit guide plate of

the sub-scanning unit as shown.
4. Reinstall the front upper cover and close the

magazine door.
5. Click [Descent] of “M314 Exit up/down belt motor”.
• The exit up/down belt moves to its down Paper

position.

upper cover.
7. Check that the exit up/down belt holds the sheet

of paper.
8. If there is any space between the exit up/down

belt and the sheet of paper, or the sheet of paper
12
is deformed due to excessive pressure, change
the fine adjustment value in the “Exit section up/
down belt downward fine-adjustment” box of
Menu 0551 “Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment” Exit Up/down Belt
screen. Paper
CD1193
12-25
13. PROCESSOR SECTION (F330)
Parts Location (F330)................................................................................ 13-2
13.1 Crossover Racks (F330) ........................................................................... 13-3

13.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly .................................... 13-3
13.2 Processing Racks (F330).......................................................................... 13-5

13.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly .................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2 Roller Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 13-10
13.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement ........................................................................... 13-10
13.3 Processor Drive System (F330) ............................................................. 13-12

13.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 13-12
13.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ........................................................ 13-12
13.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement ......................................................... 13-12
13.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 13-12
13.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement......................................................................... 13-12
13.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement....................................................... 13-12
13.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement............................................................................... 13-12
13.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement..................................................................... 13-12
13
13-1
Parts Location (F330)
Dryer Drive Gears
Processor Drive Chain

No.1 Crossover Rack
No.6
Crossover Rack
Processor Drive
Idler Sprocket
No.2 to No.5
Crossover Racks
Processing Racks
Upper Guide Rollers Chain Tensioner
Rack Drive Shaft
Rack Center Guides
Motor Driver
Processor Drive Bracket
Drive Sprocket
Drive Gear
Processor Drive Motor (M401)
CD820
13-2
13.1 Crossover Racks (F330)
13.1.1 Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Bearings (4)
Coil
1. Remove crossover rack No.1 by loosening the two Springs (2)
screws.
2. Remove the auto washing nozzle.
3. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings, gears

and bearings.
Gears (4)
C-rings (4)
CD221
4. Remove the roller by pulling the roller shaft out.
5. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings and

bearings from the roller shafts.
Reassembly
Reassemble the rack in the reverse order of Roller Shafts (4)

disassembly.
Rollers (4)
NOTE: Remove any P1 solution or water from the two Bearings (4) 13
entrance side rollers on the No.1 crossover rack by
Coil Springs (2)
wiping them with a dry cloth. Moist rollers on the
No.1 crossover rack may cause uneven prints. C-rings (4)
CD222
13.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly C-rings (4) Coil Springs (2)
1. Remove the crossover rack.

bearings.
4. Remove the rollers by pulling the roller shaft out.
Reassembly
Reassemble the racks in the reverse order of

Bearings (4)
disassembly.
9751
13-3
13.1.3 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Coil Spring Bearings (2)
Gears (2)
1. Remove crossover rack No.6.
3. Remove the two C-rings, two gears, coil spring,

and two bearings for the exit roller.
4. Remove the C-ring and then the idler gear.

C-rings (2)
C-ring
Idler Gear
CD223
5. Remove the exit roller by pulling the roller shaft Roller Shafts (4)
out. Rollers (4)

bearings. Exit Roller
Shaft
7. Remove the four rollers by pulling the roller shafts Bearings

out. (8)
Reassembly
Reassemble the rack in the reverse order of

disassembly.
Exit Rollers
C-rings (8) Bearings (2)
C-rings Coil Spring
CD224
13-4
13.2 Processing Racks (F330)
13.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Sprocket
Screw
1. Remove the screw, two washers, bearing, gear,

pin, bearing washer and sprocket.
2. Remove the screw, then the gear, washer and

bearing.
Gear Washers (2) Screw

9755
3. Remove the drive bearing by taking out the two Drive Bearing
tapping screws.
13
Tapping Screws (2)

9756
4. Remove the E-ring, washer and bearing from the Bearing Washer
crossover rack drive shaft.
E-ring
9757
13-5
5. Take out the gear pin by pulling the shaft slightly, Pin Gear
and then remove the two gears, two bearings, and
washer by pulling the shaft out.
Bearing
9758
6. Remove the upper guide/handle by taking out the Upper Guide/Handle

four tapping screws.
Tapping Screws (4)

9759
7. P1 rack only: Entrance Roller (P1 rack only)

Remove the gear, pin, bearing and roller by
taking off the C-ring and pulling the shaft out. Gear
C-ring
9760
13-6
Reassembly Shaft

disassembly.
NOTE: Align the D-flats of the shaft and the washer.
Washer
999d
13.2.2 Roller Replacement
1. Release the locking tabs and remove the guides

from both sides.
13
Guide
9761
2. Remove the screw, D-washer and plain washer Screw

and then the spiral gear and plain washer.
D-washer
Gear Plain Washer
Plain Washer
CD1097
13-7
3. Remove the rack drive shaft Gear

Rack Drive Shaft
4. Remove the coil springs, C-rings, gears and

bearings.
Bearings C-rings Coil Springs

CD1098
5. Remove the rollers by pulling the shaft out from C-rings (4) Coil Springs (2)
the opposite side.

bearings from the lower turn roller shafts.
Bearings (4)
9763
7. Remove the rollers by pulling the shafts out from C-ring

Bearing
the opposite side.
8. Remove the roller by taking out the C-ring, gear

and bearing.
Gear
9764
13-8
Installation Coil Spring Marks

removal, noting the following.
1. Install the shorter coil springs on the entrance

side of the lower turn rollers and the longer ones
on the exit side. Wrong installation results in
paper jamming.
Entrance Side Exit Side

999e
<Roller Arrangement>
13
Black Soft Roller (ø20mm)

Gray Soft Roller (ø20mm)
Black Hard Roller (ø20mm)
Gray Soft Roller (ø20mm)
White Soft Roller (ø20mm)
Gray Hard Roller (ø20mm)
CD225
13-9
13.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Bearing
1. Remove the crossover rack drive shaft
(see steps 1 to 5 in Subsection 13.2.1).
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and washer from the

lower end of the shaft.
E-ring
9766
3. Shift the middle bearing to the lower side and Shaft

remove the shaft.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the shaft in the reverse order of removal.
Middle Bearing (P1, P2 only)

9767
13.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement
1. Release the locking tabs and remove the guides.
Guide
9761
13-10
2. Remove the guide by taking out the two screws. Screws (2)
Installation
Install the new guide in the reverse order of removal.
Guide
9765
13
13-11
13.3 Processor Drive System (F330)
13.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
(see Subsection 14.3.1)
13.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement
13.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement
13.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
13.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement
13.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement
13.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement
13.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement
13-12
14. PROCESSOR SECTION (F340)
Parts Location (F340)................................................................................ 14-2
14.1 Crossover Racks (F340) ........................................................................... 14-3

14.2 Processing Racks (F340)........................................................................ 14-10

14.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................................ 14-10
14.2.2 Roller Replacement (P1/P2).................................................................................... 14-13
14.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation (P1/P2) ................................................ 14-18
14.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement (P1/P2).............................................................. 14-19
14.2.5 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS1/PS4)............................................................. 14-20
14.2.6 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS2/PS3)............................................................. 14-22
14.2.7 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS1) ............................................................... 14-23
14.2.8 Roller/Gear/Center Guide Replacement (PS2/PS3) .............................................. 14-26
14.2.9 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS4) ............................................................... 14-29
14.3 Processor Drive System (F340) ............................................................. 14-33

14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 14-33
14.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ........................................................ 14-33
14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement ......................................................... 14-34
14.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 14-35
14.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement......................................................................... 14-35
14.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement....................................................... 14-38
14.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement............................................................................... 14-39
14.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement..................................................................... 14-40
14.4 PS Processing Tanks (F340) .................................................................. 14-41

14.4.1 PS Solution Replacement ....................................................................................... 14-41
14.4.2 PS Partition Board Replacement ........................................................................... 14-43
14.4.3 Partition Board Blade Assembly/Seal Replacement ............................................ 14-44 14
14-1
Dryer Drive Gears

Processor Drive Chain
No.2 Crossover Rack No.3 Crossover Rack
No.1 Crossover Rack No.6 Crossover Rack
Processor Drive
Idler Sprocket
Processing Racks
Chain Tensioner
Upper Guide Rollers
Rack Drive Shaft
Rack Center Guides
Processor Drive Bracket
Motor Driver
Drive Sprocket
Drive Gear
Processor Drive Motor (M401)
RD518
14-2
14.1.1 No.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Bearings (4)
1. Remove No.1 crossover rack by loosening the two

screws.

and bearings.
Coil Springs (2)
Gears (4)
C-rings (4)
CD221
4. Remove the rollers by pulling the roller shafts out.

14
RD504
14-3
Reassembly

disassembly.
NOTE: • Install the coil spring so that its hooks are at the
nozzle position as shown.
• Remove any P1 solution or water from the two
entrance side rollers on the No.1 crossover rack by
wiping them with a dry cloth. Moist rollers on the
No.1 crossover rack may cause uneven prints. Nozzle
Spring Hook
RD465
14-4
Disassembly Bearings (4) Coil Springs (2)

Gears (4)
1. Remove the No.2 crossover rack.

and bearings.
C-rings (4)
RD158

14
RD505
14-5
Reassembly

disassembly.
NOTE: • The roller shafts for the No.2 and No.3 crossover
racks are made of titanium and there are holes in
their ends to identify them.
• Install the coil springs so that their hooks are at the
nozzle position as shown.
Shaft End Hole Nozzle
Spring Hook
RD464
14-6
Disassembly Coil Spring

Bearings (2)
1. Remove the No.3 crossover rack.
3. Remove the two C-rings, gears and coil spring

and two bearings.
Gears (2) C-rings (2)

RD157
5. Remove the coil spring, two C-rings and bearings

from the roller shafts.
14
RD506
14-7
Reassembly

disassembly.
NOTE: • The roller shafts for the No.2 and No.3 crossover
racks are made of titanium and there are holes in
their ends to identify them.
• Install the coil spring so that its hooks are at the
nozzle position as shown. Nozzle
Shaft End Hole Spring Hook

RD466
14-8
Disassembly Gears (4) Coil Springs (2)
1. Remove crossover rack No.6.
2. Remove the C-ring and then the idler gear.
3. Remove the four C-rings, four gears, two coil

springs, and four bearings.
Idler Gear Bearings (4)
C-rings (5)
RD159
4. Remove the roller by pulling the roller shafts out.

bearings.
14
RD507
Reassembly

disassembly.
14-9
14.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Tapping Screws (2)
1. PS2/PS3 only:
Remove the two screws and then the upper cover.
Upper Cover
RD210
2. Remove the screw, D-washer, poly-slider, bearing, Pin Sprocket

gear, pin, bearing, pin, shaft and sprocket.
Pin Gear
Shaft
Bearings (2)
Poly-slider
D-washer Screw
RD160
3. Remove the screws, gear, poly-slider and bearing.

Gear
Screw
Poly-slider
Bearing
RD161
14-10
4. Remove the two tapping screws and drive shaft Tapping Screws (2)
bearing holder.
Drive Shaft Bearing Holder
RD162
5. Except PS2/PS3:
Remove the E-ring, poly-slider and bearing from
the crossover rack drive shaft.
Bearing Poly-slider E-ring
RD163
14
6. Except PS2/PS3: Shaft
Remove the gear pin by pulling the shaft slightly.
Pin
RD164
14-11
7. Except PS2/PS3: Gear

Remove the two gears, two bearings, and poly-
Poly-slider Bearing
slider by pulling the shaft out. Gear
Pin
Shaft
RD165
8. Except PS2/PS3: Upper Guide/Handle

Remove the four tapping screws and then the
upper guide/handle.
Tapping Screws (4)
RD166
9. P1 rack only: Entrance Roller

Remove the C-ring, gear, pin, bearing, entrance (P1 Only)
Pin
roller and shaft.
Bearings (2)
Shaft
Gear
C-ring
RD167
14-12
Reassembly Shaft

disassembly.
NOTE: Align the D-flats of the shaft and the washer.
Poly-slider D-Washer
999d
14.2.2 Roller Replacement (P1/P2)
1. Remove each two screws and then the front and

rear guides.
14
Guide
RD172
2. Remove the entrance and exit guide plates. Rear Guide

Entrance Side Guide
Exit Side Guide

Front Guide
RD173
14-13
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the front

and rear guides.
Guide
RD174
4. Remove the screws, gear, poly-slider, bearing and Gear/Washer/Bearing

then the upper guide assembly.
Upper Guide Assembly
Screw
RD177
5. Remove the E-ring, poly-slider, bearing and then Drive Shaft Bearing
the drive shaft.
Poly-slider
E-ring
RD178
14-14
6. Remove the two screws, D-washers, poly-sliders Screws (2)

and gears.
D-washers (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
Gears (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
RD175
7. Remove the coil springs, C-rings, gears and C-rings (8)

bearings.
Gears (8)
Coil Springs (4)
Bearings (8)
14
RD176
14-15
8. Remove the coil springs, C-rings, gears and C-rings (4)

bearings from the turn roller shafts.
Gears (4)
Coil Springs
(2)
Bearings (4)
RD179
9. Withdraw the ten roller shafts and remove the

rollers.
RD180
10. Remove the C-rings, gears and bearings from the Gears (5)
remaining roller shafts.
11. Withdraw the six roller shafts and remove the C-rings (7)
rollers.
Bearings (5)
RD181
14-16
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the shorter coil springs on the entrance side Coil Spring Marks
of the lower turn rollers and the longer ones on the
exit side. Wrong installation results in paper
jamming.
Entance Side Exit Side
RD182
14
φ20 Ivory soft

φ20 Black soft
φ20 Gray soft
φ20 Black hard
φ20 Brown hard
φ20 Gray soft
φ20 Ivory soft
φ20 Brown hard
φ20 White soft
φ20 Black hard
φ30 Black soft
φ20 Ivory soft
RD502
14-17
14.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation (P1/P2)
Removal Rack Guide

Tapping Screws (2)
1. Remove the crossover rack drive shaft

(see Steps 1 to 6 in Subsection 14.2.1).
2. Remove each two tapping screws and then the

two rack guides.
RD168
3. Remove the E-ring, bearing and poly-slider from

the lower end of the shaft.
Bearing
E-ring Poly-slider
RD169
4. Shift the middle bearing to the lower side and

remove the shaft. Middle Bearing (P1/P2)
Reinstallation

removal.
Rack Drive Shaft

RD170
14-18
14.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement (P1/P2)
Removal
1. Release the locking tabs and remove the guides. Guides
Locking Tabs
RD171
2. Remove the first and third guides as shown. Guides
14
RD183
3. Remove the C-ring and then the idler gear. C-ring
Idler Gear
RD184
14-19
4. Remove the four screws and then the lower turn

guide.
Turn Guide
Tapping Screws (4)

RD185
5. Remove the thirteen C-rings, five gears and coil Screws (2) Gears (5)
springs from the roller shafts.
6. Remove the two screws and the second and

fourth guide by opening the lower end of the rack
side plates.
Installation

removal.
C-rings (13)
Guides (2) Coil Springs (5)
RD186
14.2.5 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS1/PS4)
Removal Gear
1. Remove the screw, gear, poly-slider and bearing.

Screw
Poly-slider/Bearing
RD187
14-20
2. Remove the four tapping screws and then the Tapping Screws (4)
upper guide assembly.
Upper Guide Assembly
RD189
3. Remove the E-ring, poly-slider and bearing from

the lower end of the drive shaft.
Poly-slider Bearing
E-ring
RD188
4. Remove the drive shaft. 14

Installation

removal.
Drive Shaft
RD190
14-21
14.2.6 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS2/PS3)
1. Remove the two tapping screws and then the

upper cover.
Upper Cover
RD210
2. Remove the screw, gear, poly-slider and bearing

from the drive shaft. Gear
Screw
Poly-slider
Bearing
RD211
3. Remove the four tapping screws and then the Tapping Screws (4)
upper guide assembly.
Upper Guide
RD212
14-22
4. Remove the drive shaft.
Installation

removal.
Drive Shaft
RD213
14.2.7 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS1)
1. Remove the rack drive shaft

2. Remove the four tapping screws and then the

lower turn guide.
Turn Guide
RD191 14
3. Remove the entrance side guide.
Entrance Side Guide

RD192
14-23
4. Remove the C-rings, gears, coil springs and

C-rings (10)
Gears (10)
Coil Springs (4)
Bearings (8)
RD193
5. Remove the two screws, D-washers, poly-sliders

Screws (2)
and gears from the opposite side.
D-washers (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
Gears (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
RD195
6. Remove the coil springs, C-rings, bearings and C-rings (5)

then the rollers by withdrawing the roller shafts.
Coil Springs
(3)
Bearings (5) Roller Shafts (5)

RD196
14-24
7. Remove the coil spring, C-rings, gears, bearings

and then the soft roller with shaft and two rollers C-rings (3)
by pulling off the roller shafts. Gears (2)
Bearings (3)
Coil Springs
Roller/Shaft
Roller Shafts (2)
RD197
8. Remove the three tapping screws and then the Screws (3)
side plate.
Side Plate
14
RD198
9. Remove the two tapping screws and then the Center Guide
center guide.
Screws (2)
RD199
14-25
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Note the coil spring installation locations because

three kinds of springs are used. Green Mark
Black Mark
No Color Mark
RD194
14.2.8 Roller/Gear/Center Guide Replacement (PS2/PS3)
Removal Lower Guides

Screws (4)
1. Remove each two springs and then the entrance
and exit lower guides.
RD214
2. Remove the C-rings, gears, coil springs and

Gears (4)
bearings from the front end of the roller shafts.
C-rings (4)
Coil Springs (2) Bearings (4)

RD215
14-26
3. Remove the screw and then the D-washer, poly- Screw

sliders and gear from the rear side. D-washer
Poly-sliders (2)
4. Remove the C-rings and idler gears. Gear

C-rings (2)
Idler Gears
RD217
5. Remove the C-rings, gears, coil springs and Gears (2)

bearings.
Coil Springs (2)
6. Withdraw the roller shaft from the rear side and C-rings (3)
Bearings (3)
remove the rollers.
Roller Shaft
14
Roller
RD218
14-27
7. Withdraw the two roller shafts from the front side Roller Shafts (2)
and remove the two rollers.
Rollers (2)
RD219
8. Remove the two screws securing the weight. Screws (2)
9. Remove the four screws and then the center

guide. Center Guide
Screws (4) Weight
RD220
Installation
Black Mark
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of (Strong)
Entrance Side
removal.
Blue Mark
(Weak)
two kinds of springs are used.
Exit Side
RD216
14-28
14.2.9 Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS4)
Removal Exit Side Guide
1. Remove the exit side guide by releasing the

locking tabs.
RD200
2. Remove the two tapping screws and then the Exit Side Lower Guide
Tapping Screws (4)
entrance side lower guide.
3. Remove the four screws and then the exit side

lower guide.
Entrance Side
Lower Guide
14
Tapping Screws (2)
RD201
4. Remove the C-rings, gears, coil sprigs and C-rings (10)

bearings from the front ends of the roller shafts.
Gears (10) Coil Springs (4) Bearings (8)

RD202
14-29
5. Remove the two screws and then the D-washers, Screws (2)
poly-sliders and gears.
D-washers (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
Gears (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
RD204
6. Remove the C-rings, gears, coil springs and C-rings (8)

bearings form the rear ends of the roller shafts. Coil Springs (4)
Gears (2)
Bearings (8)
RD205
7. Withdraw the six roller shafts and remove the

rollers. Roller Shafts (6)
Rollers (6)
RD206
14-30
8. Withdraw the two roller shafts and remove the Roller Shafts (2)
rollers.
Rollers (2)
RD207
9. Remove the five screws and then the front side

plate.
Front Side Plate
Screws (5)
RD208
14
10. Remove the two screws and then the center Center Guide
guide.
Screws (2)
RD209
14-31
Installation

removal.

two kinds of springs are used.
Green Mark
Black Mark
(Strong)
RD203
14-32
14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4) Motor Bracket

3. Remove the four screws and then the motor

bracket.
Reinstallation

Motor Connector
removal.
CD265
14.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement
Removal Collar
Gear
1. Remove the processor drive motor bracket
Boss
2. Loosen the hex. socket head bolt (3 mm) and Hex. Socket
remove the collar and gear. Head Bolt (3mm)
3. Loosen the two hex socket head setscrews

(2 mm) and remove the boss and key. 14
Flat Key
CD266
4. Open the clamp. Hex. Socket Head

Bolts (3mm) (4)
5. Remove the four hex, socket head bolts (3 mm)

and then the motor from the bracket.
Clamp
Installation

removal.
Motor (M401)
RD549
14-33
14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement
Removal Screw (Remove)

Motor Driver Bracket
2. Disconnect the three connectors from the motor

driver.
3. Loosen the one screw and remove the other

screw and then the motor driver bracket.
Connectors (3) Screw (Loosen)

CD278
4. Remove the two screws and then the motor driver Scews (2) Motor Driver
from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
CD277
14-34
14.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
• Replenisher pump bracket

• Processor drive motor bracket
• Processor drive motor driver
2. Loosen the two screws and remove the two other Screws (2) (Loosen)
screws and then the drive bracket from the
replenisher pump bracket side.
Reinstallation

removal.
Drive Bracket Screws (2) (Remove)

CD268
14.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement

14
Removal Cover
Screws (2)
1. Remove the processor drive bracket

RD551
14-35
3. Loosen the hex. socket head bolt (3 mm) and Hex. Socket Head
remove the collar and gear. Setscrews (2mm) (2)
4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews

(2 mm) and remove the boss and key.
5. Remove the E-ring.

Boss
Flat Key
Gear
Hex. Socket Head Bolt (3mm)
Collar
CD271
6. Remove the two screws and lock washers and Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)
then the sprocket.

remove the boss.
8. Remove the E-ring. Screws (2)
Flat Key
Boss
Lock Washers (2)
Sprocket
CD272
9. Remove the two bearings and shaft. Shaft
Bearings (2)
CD273
14-36
10. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft, idler Bearings (2)
sprocket, two bearings and spacer. Idler Sprocket
Shaft
Spacer
E-ring
CD274
11. Remove the E-ring, spring and tensioner. Tensioner
E-ring Spring
CD275
14
12. Remove the E-ring and then the two bearings and
sprocket. E-ring
Installation Bearings (2)

removal.
Sprocket
NOTE: Note the position of the setscrews.
CD276
14-37
14.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement
Removal Screw (Loosen)
1. Remove:

• Processor rear cover
2. Loosen the one screw and remove the other

screw securing the sprocket bracket.
Screw (Remove)
CD279
3. Disengage the chain from the sprocket and Sprocket

remove the sprocket bracket.
Bracket
Chain
RD552
4. Remove the E-ring and then the two bearings,

E-ring
sprocket and poly-slider.
Bearings (2)
Installation
Sprocket
removal.
Poly-slider
RD553
14-38
14.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement
Removal


protection cover.
Circuit Board Protection Cover

Screws
CD262
3. Remove the screw and then the hose protector.
4. Remove the three screws and then the gear

bracket.
Screw
14
Gear Bracket
Screws (3)
Hose Protector
CD263
5. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, gear, Spacer

bearing and spacer.
Bearing
6. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, Gear
sprocket/gear, bearing and spacer. Bearing
E-ring
Installation

Spacer
removal.
Bearing
Sprocket/Gear
E-ring Bearing
CD264
14-39
14.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement

2. Remove all processing racks.

protection cover.
Circuit Board Protection Cover

Screws
CD262
4. Remove the clip and then the master link from the Old Chain
drive chain.
5. Connect new chain to the old chain using the

master link.
New Chain
Master Link Clip
CD282
6. Install the new chain by using the old chain as a

guide.
7. Remove the old chain from the new chain by

taking out the master link.
8. Connect the ends of the new chain using the Old Chain
master link and clip.
NOTE: Face the closed end of the clip in the rotating

direction.
New Chain
CD283
14-40
14.4 PS Processing Tanks (F340)
14.4.1 PS Solution Replacement
PS Solution Draining

2. Connect a hose (ordinary water hose with 13mm

I.D.) to the PS1 drain valve and drain the solution
in the PS1 processing tank into the waste solution
tank. PS1 Drain Valve
RD554
3. If the solution being drained off stops flowing,

replace the waste solution tank with a lower
container (such as tray) which can bring the hose
to a level lower than the valve, and continue
draining off the solution.
4. Close the PS1 drain valve after all solution has

been drained.
5. Remove the No.3 crossover rack, PS1, PS2 and

PS3 processing racks.
RD555
6. Remove the filter replacement jig from inside of Circulation Filter Section Cover
the circulation filter section cover.
14
Filter Replacement Jig

RD482
14-41
7. Remove the PS1 circulation filter using the filter Filter Replacement Jig
replacement jig.
8. Drain remaining solution in the bottom of the PS1

tank, close the drain valve and remove the hand
pump.
9. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 and 6 through 8 to drain

the PS2 and PS3 solutions.
10. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to drain PS4 solution

and remove the hand pump.
PS1 Circulation Filter
RD223
PS Solution Filling
1. Attach the circulation filter to the replacement jig “TOP” Mark

with its “TOP” mark facing up.
Replacement Jig

RD044
2. Install the circulation filter to the bottom of the PS1 Replacement Jig
tank.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the PS2 and PS3 tanks.
4. Store the filter replacement jig inside of the

5. Reinstall the PS1, PS2 and PS3 processing racks

and No.3 crossover rack.

RD046
14-42
6. Remove the rubber cap from the PS1 sub-tank. Rubber Cap
7. Pour 4 liters of deionized water (FRSS) in the PS1 Deionized Water

(4 liters)
tank.
NOTE: Do not use tablets of FSC100 in the PS

processing tanks. FSC100 in the PS tanks may
cause an improper detection of the leak sensor.
8. Reinstall the rubber cap.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 to pour 3 liters of

deionized water in each PS2 and PS3 tank.
10. Remove the circulation filter from the PS4 sub-tank. RD152
11. Pour 4 liters of deionized water slowly in the PS4

tank. Deionized Water (4 liters)
12. Reinstall the PS4 circulation filter.
RD153
14.4.2 PS Partition Board Replacement 14
Removal Screws (6) PS3/PS4

PS2/PS3 Partition Board
Partition Board
1. Drain PS1 to PS4 tanks (see Subsection 14.4.1).
2. Remove two screws each and then the partition

boards.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Before installing the partition boards, wipe any

water and dirt off the sealing surfaces in the
processing tanks.
• Install the partition board to the proper position as PS1/PS2
indicated on the label attached to the top of each Partition Board
board. RD221
• Tighten two screws each alternately in three or
four steps.
14-43
14.4.3 Partition Board Blade Assembly/Seal Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the partition boards

2. Remove the two screws and then the seal fixing

plates and seal.
Seal
Seal Fixing Plates (2)

Screws (2)
RD516
3. Remove the eight screws and then the blade Screws (8)
assembly and gasket.
Blade Assembly
RD511
Installation
1. Wipe any dirt and water off the sealing surfaces Slotted Hole
on the partition boards. Gasket
Round Hole
2. Make sure there is no foreign matter on the
gaskets for the partition boards and the blade
assembly.
3. Place a new gasket so that its holes align with the

pins and screw holes in the partition board with its
slotted-hole faces toward the rear as shown. Rear
NOTE: Make sure the slotted and round holes are

aligned with the two pins correctly.
Pins (2)
RD512
14-44
4. Place a new blade assembly over the gasket. Blade Assembly
NOTE: Take care not to shift the gasket while placing

the gasket.
Gasket
RD513
5. Turn over the partition board. Partition Board
NOTE: Be careful not to shift the gasket.
RD514 14
6. Make sure the holes in the gasket and the Screws (8)
partition board are aligned.
7. Temporarily tighten the eight screws evenly.
8. Tighten the eight screws in a crisscross pattern in

two to three steps.
RD515
14-45
9. Install a new seal along the groove in the partition Seal Fixing Plates (2)
board.
Screws (2)
Seal
RD517
NOTE: • Face the flat surface of the gasket toward the

inside.
• Be careful not to twist the gasket.
• Make sure the sealing round surface of the
gasket is even along the groove.
10. Install the seal fixing plates and tighten the two
screws.
11. Reinstall the partition boards Gasket

(see Subsection 14.4.2). RD556
12. Fill the PS1 to PS4 tanks (see Subsection 14.4.1).
14-46
15. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F330)
Parts Location (F330)................................................................................ 15-2
15.1 Sub-tanks (F330) ....................................................................................... 15-3

15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement ....................................................................... 15-4
15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section (F330) ................... 15-5

15.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 15-5
15.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 15-5
15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement.......................... 15-5
15.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement.............................................................................. 15-5
15.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement .................................................................... 15-6
15.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement ............................................................................... 15-7
15.3 Waste Solution System (F330) ................................................................. 15-8

15.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 15-8
15.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing.................................................................. 15-8
15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement.............................................. 15-8
15.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement.......................................................................... 15-8
15.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement ......................................................................... 15-8
15.4 Processing Solution Replacement (F330)............................................... 15-9

15.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions .......................................................... 15-9
15.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining........................... 15-10
15.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation........................ 15-11
15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit ....................................... 15-14
15.4.6 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit ...................................... 15-15
15
15-1
Processing Tank
Temperature Sensors
Circulation Filters (TS401 to TS404)
Sub-tanks
Solution Level Sensors

(FS401 to FS406)
P1
P2
Processing Tank PS1
Heater Cooling PS2 Waste Solution Tank
Fan (F401)
PS3
PS4
Waste Solution
Level Sensor
(FS415)
Safety Thermostat
(D401 to D404)
H Waste Hose
401
H
402
PU H
401 403
PU
402
PU
403
H
PU 404
404 PU
405
PU
Circulation Pumps 406
(PU401 to PU406)
Processing Tank Heater
Cooling Fan (F403)
Processing Tank Heaters (H401 to H404)
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F402)
CD284
15-2
15.1 Sub-tanks (F330)
15.1.1 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement
Sensor Tank
TS401 P1
TS402 P2
TS403 PS2
TS404 PS4
Removal
1. Remove the front upper connector cover


Sensor Connector
CD345
3. Remove the replenisher nozzle hose. Screw

Sensor
4. Remove the harness from the clamp.
Installation
Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Replenisher Nozzle Hose

Clamp
CD346
15
15-3
15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement
Sensor Tank
FS401 P1
FS402 P2
Sensor Connector
FS403 PS1
FS404 PS2
FS405 PS3
FS406 PS4
Removal

CD347
3. Remove the replenisher nozzle hose. Screw

Sensor
4. Remove the harness from the clamp.
Installation
Replenisher Nozzle Hose

Clamp
CD348
15-4
15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section (F330)
15.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
15.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
15.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement
15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement
15.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement
Safety Thermostat Tank

Safety Thermostat
D401 P1 (D401 to D404)
D402 P2
D403 PS1/2
D404 PS3/4
15
Removal
Wires (2)
2. Remove the rubber cover.
3. Disconnect the wires from the safety thermostat.

Rubber Cover Screws (2)
CD350
4. Remove the two screws and then the safety
thermostat.
Installation
Install the safety thermostat in the reverse order of

removal.
15-5
15.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement
Heater Tank
H401 P1
H402 P2
H403 PS1/2
H404 PS3/4
Removal
1. Remove the front lower connector cover

Cover Bracket Screw

2. H402/H403: Remove the screw and then the
CD351
cover bracket.
3. Disconnect the heater connector.
Heater
Connector
CD352
4. Remove the rubber cover, two screws and then Hoses (2)
Pinchcocks (2)
the safety thermostat from the heater.
5. Pinch the heater inlet and outlet hoses with the

two pinchcocks. Screws (2)
6. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the

hoses from the heater.
Screws (2)
7. Remove the two screws and then the heater.
Safety
Thermostat
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely

• After installation, clear “Heater on time” in the Clamps (2) Heater
menu 46D “Clearing Selected Processor CD353
Operation Data” screen (see Subsection 5.7.12).
15-6
15.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement
Circulation Pump Tank Screw (Loosen) Screw (Remove)

PU401 P1
PU402 P2
PU403 PS1
PU404 PS2
PU405 PS3
PU406 PS4
Connector Bracket
Removal

Pump Connector
2. Disconnect the pump connector.
CD354
3. Loosen the one screw, remove the other screw

and then the connector bracket.
4. Remove the two screws and then the pump from

the bracket.
Screws (2) Pump

15
CD355
5. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the two Hoses (2)
pinchcocks.
6. Loosen the hose clamps, disconnect the hoses

from the pump.
Installation
Pinchcocks (2)
removal.
Pump
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely
Hose Clamps (2)
CD356
15-7
15.3 Waste Solution System (F330)
15.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
15.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement
15.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement
15.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement
15-8
15.4 Processing Solution Replacement (F330)
15.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions
*Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of
the respective chemicals.
! CAUTION
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
• Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above indications. This is
recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater protection, the use of a protective mask
and apron is also recommended.
• Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.
• Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately.

• Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases.
• If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great amount of
water.
• If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show the physician
the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.
• In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and key. You are
responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling of poisonous substances
that apply in your country.
• Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children.
• Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of industrial
waste products in your locale. The P1R chemical in the CP-48S replenisher cartridge and the Component A of the
P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you have any questions concerning these 15
chemicals, consult your service representative.
* Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-48S chemicals.
! CAUTION
• The P1R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical
These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if improperly handled.
They may be injurious to the health if swallowed.
• The P2RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-
based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA).
• The P2RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an
alkaline (P1R or N1RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur dioxide gas if mixed with an acid.
• FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed with an acid. It
could be injurious to the health if swallowed.
15-9
15.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining
1. Remove the crossover racks, wash and leave

them to dry naturally.
Crossover Rack
CD032
2. Remove the processing racks, and run about one

liter of water over the entire rack. Collect the
waste in the waste recovery tank. Processing Rack
3. Run warm water (30° to 40°C/86° to 104°C) over

the rack, and thoroughly wash the roller bearing
section and parts that come in contact with the
solution in the tank. Allow them to air-dry.
CD031

5. Connect a hose (ordinary water hose) to each of

the drain valve of the processing tanks and drain
the solution in the tank into the waste recovery
tank.
Drain Valve
CD035
15-10

replace the waste recovery tank with a lower
container (such as tray) which can bring the end
of the hose to a level lower than the valve, and
continue draining off the solution. Collect the
solution in the waste recovery tank.
CD036
15.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation

fan section.
CD033
2. Check that all drain valves of the processing tanks

are closed.
15
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
Drain Valves PS4
CD357
15-11
3. Wash out the inside of each processing tank using

clean running water.
CD034

the drain valves of the processing tanks and drain
the water in the tank into a bucket or other
container.
Drain Valve
CD035
5. If the water being drained off stops flowing, and

there is still water remaining in the tank, replace
the bucket with a lower container (such as a tray)
which can bring the end of the hose to a level
lower than the valve, and continue draining off the
water.
6. After all the water has been drained off, close the
drain valve and remove the hose.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each tank.
CD036
8. Remove the splash-prevention cover.
9. Make sure all drain valves are closed.
11. Reinstall the processing and crossover racks.
Processing Tank Drain Valves (6)
CD357
15-12
15.4.4 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure
• Tools
• Measuring Cup (5L) • Measuring Cylinder • Level Gauge
PS1,2,3,4
P1, P2
• Preparation Procedure
1. Drain the processing tank (properly dispose of the drained solution).

2. Remove the processing rack.
3. Clean the processing tank and rack with running water (preferably warm water) and a sponge or soft cloth. Do
not use any abrasive material such as a scrub brush.
4. Install the processing rack into the tank.
5. Prepare the solution in accordance with the “5.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)”.
6. Thoroughly clean the solution preparation tools with water. Ensure that they are free of processing solution
incrustations so as to avoid problems with the ensuing solution preparation.
IMPORTANT
Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1 solution preparation. If the measuring cup has contained other solutions,
thoroughly clean it before P1 solution preparation.
• Chemicals (CP-48S)
Name Code Packing Units Components Quantity*

Color Developer ✕ 1 box
P1 To make 10 L (To make 4.2 L) A+B
Startup Chemicals (✕ 2 boxes)
Bleach-fix Startup Chemicals P2 To make 10 L (To make 4.2 L) A+B

✕ 1 box 15
(✕ 2 boxes)
Super Rinse
Replenisher FSC100 To make 5 L ✕ 100 Tablets 5 tablets
(Fuji Super Conditioner)
P1R
2 Cartridge
Replenisher Cartridge PC P2RA ✕ 1 cartridge
(PC ✕ 2)
P2RB
NOTE: Paper area processed by a replenisher cartridge : 111 sq.m (Approximately 10,000 sheets of 3R-size)
*Required quantity for initial installation.
15-13
15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit
* Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed,
abnormality of solutions may result.
P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.4 liters)

1. Water 1 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and one 3. Water 2 liters and one 4. Water (approximately 2.2 liters)
bottle of P1A bottle of P1B up to P1 line on gauge.
A B
P1 P1
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters Water 2 liters

P1 Line on
Gauge
Water
Water 1 liter Water + P1A Water + P1B (Approximately
Sub-tank 2.2 liters)

1. Water 1 liter (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and one 3. Water 2 liters and one 4. Water (approximately 1.2 liters)
A B
P2 P2
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters Water 2 liters
P2 Line on
Gauge
Water
Sub-tank 1.2 liters)
PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 19.6 liters)

1. PS4 Tank 2. PS3 Tank 3. PS2 Tank 4. PS1 Tank
1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100
2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters)
up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge
1) FSC100 Lift PS4 rack. FSC100 Lift PS3 rack. Lift PS2 rack. FSC100 Lift PS1 rack. FSC100
PS4 Tank PS3 Tank PS2 Tank PS1 Tank

2)
PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on

Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
Water Water Water Water

Sub-tank (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately
5 liters) 5 liters) 5 liters) 5 liters)
15-14
15.4.6 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit

1. Water 3 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles 3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liter)
and 100 mL of P1A and 130 mL of P1B up to P1 line on gauge.
P1A 100mL P1B 130mL
B
P1
P1
A B
P1 P1
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters Water 2 liters P1 Line on

Gauge
Water
Water 3 liters Water + Water + (Approximately
Sub-tank (P1A X 2 + 100mL) (P1B X 2 + 130mL) 0.2 liter)

1. Water 2 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles 3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liter)
and 170mL of P2A and 180 mL of P2B up to P2 line on gauge.
P2A 170mL P2B 180mL

A
B
P2
P2
A B
P2 P2
Circulation Filter

Gauge
Water
Water 2 liters
Sub-tank
Water +
(P2A X 2 + 170 mL)
Water +
(P2B X 2 + 180mL)
(Approximately
0.2 liter)
15

1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100
2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) 2) Water (approximately 5 liters)
up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge up to PS line on gauge
1) FSC100 Lift PS4 rack. FSC100 Lift PS3 rack. Lift PS2 rack. FSC100 Lift PS1 rack. FSC100
PS4 Tank PS3 Tank PS2 Tank PS1 Tank

2)
PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on

Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
Water Water Water Water

Sub-tank (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately
5 liters) 5 liters) 5 liters) 5 liters)
15-15
16. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F340)
Parts Location (F340)................................................................................ 16-2
16.1 Sub-tanks (F340) ....................................................................................... 16-3

16.1.2 P1/P2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement............................................................. 16-3
16.1.3 PS Solution Level Sensor Replacement.................................................................. 16-4
16.1.4 Leak Sensor (FS421) Replacement.......................................................................... 16-5
16.1.5 DTL24 Circuit Board Replacement .......................................................................... 16-6
16.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section (F340) ................... 16-7

16.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 16-7
16.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 16-8
16.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement.......................... 16-9
16.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement............................................................................ 16-10
16.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement .................................................................. 16-11
16.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement ............................................................................. 16-12
16.2.8 Hose Connection ..................................................................................................... 16-15
16.3 Waste Solution System (F340) ............................................................... 16-16

16.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 16-16
16.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing................................................................ 16-17
16.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement............................................ 16-17
16.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement........................................................................ 16-18
16.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement ....................................................................... 16-20
16.4 Processing Solution Replacement (F340)............................................. 16-21

16.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions ........................................................ 16-21
16.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining........................... 16-22
16.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation........................ 16-24
16.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-49E) ............................................................ 16-28
16
16-1
Circulation Filters
Processing Tank
Temperature Sensors
(TS401 to TS404)
P1
Sub-tanks
P2
PS1
Processing Tank PS2

Solution Level Sensors
Heater Cooling PS3 (FS401 to FS406)
Fan (F401)
PS4
Waste Solution Tank
Waste Solution
Level Sensor (FS415)
H
Waste
401 Solution Hose
H
402
H
PU 403
401
PU
402
PU
403
H
404
PU
404 PU
405
PU
406
Safety Thermostat
(D401 to D404)
Processing Tank Heater

Cooling Fan (F403)
Circulation Pumps Processing Tank Heaters (H401 to H404)

(PU401 to PU406)
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F402)
RD509
16-2
16.1.1 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement
Sensor Tank
TS401 P1
TS402 P2
TS403 PS1/2/3
TS404 PS4
Removal


Sensor Connector
RD247
3. Remove the replenisher nozzle. Tapping Screw P1 Solution Level Sensor
4. Remove the tapping screw and then the sensor.
Installation
Replenisher Nozzle
RD248
16.1.2 P1/P2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement 16
Sensor Tank
FS401 P1
FS402 P2
Removal

Sensor Connector
RD249
16-3
3. Remove the replenisher nozzle. Sensor
Tapping Screw
4. Remove the tapping screw and then the sensor.
Installation
Replenisher Nozzle
RD141
16.1.3 PS Solution Level Sensor Replacement
Sensor Tank
FS403 PS1
FS404 PS2
FS405 PS3
FS406 PS4
Removal

2. Disconnect the sensor connector. Sensor Connector

RD250
3. Remove the tapping screw and then the sensor. Tapping Screw PS1 Solution Level Sensor
NOTE: The PS2 and PS4 level sensors are tightened

together with each temperature sensor.
The PS1 and PS3 level sensors are tightened
together with each cover.
Installation
PS2/PS4: Temperature Sensor

PS1/PS3: Cover
RD251
16-4
16.1.4 Leak Sensor (FS421) Replacement
Removal DTL24 Circuit Board

Connector
1. Remove:
2. Disconnect the leak sensor connector from the

DTL24 circuit board.
Clamps (2)
RD267
4. Remove the tapping screw and then the leak Leak Sensor (FS421)
sensor.
Installation
Tapping Screw
RD268
removal.
16
NOTE: Take care not to break or score the sensor probes. Sensor Probes
RD269
16-5
16.1.5 DTL24 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal


cover.
Screws (2)
Circuit Board Cover
RD270
3. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit Spacers (4) DTL24 Circuit Board
board.
4. Remove the circuit board from the four board

spacers.
Installation

removal.
Connector
RD271
NOTE: After installation, enter the setting level value

indicted on the circuit board connector in Menu
0647 “PS Solution Concentration Management”
DTL24 Circuit Board
Setting Level Value

RD538
16-6
16.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal PSR Supply Port Cover

2. Open the PSR supply port cover and remove the


RD032
3. Remove the air filter holder from the cover.
Air Filter Holder

CD023
4. Loosen the five screws and then the circulation Circulation Pump Section Cover
pump section cover.
16
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal.
Screws (5)
CD867
16-7
16.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2) Front Upper Connector Cover

2. Loosen the two screws and remove the front

upper connector cover.
RD145
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the front lower Screws (2) Front Lower Connector Cover
connector cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the covers in the reverse order of removal.
RD143
16.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:

• Front lower connector cover
2. Disconnect the F403 connector.

F403 Connector
RD253
16-8
3. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard Fan (F403)
and the fan.
Installation
Fan Guard
removal.
NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan inward.
Screws (2)
Inside
Arrow
CD341
16.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement
Removal Connectors
1. Remove the front upper and lower connector

covers (see Subsection 16.2.2).
3. Disconnect the D401 to D404 connectors and

remove their harnesses from the bosses on the
fans.
Clamps (2)
16
RD254
4. Disconnect the F401 and F402 connectors.
Connector
RD255
16-9
5. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard Fan Fan Guard
and the fan.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Point the lower arrow on the fan inward.
Inward
Screws (2)
Arrow
RD256
16.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement
Safety Thermostat Tank Connector

D401 P1
D402 P2 Clamp
D403 PS1/2/3
D404 PS4
Removal Safety Thermostat


3. Disconnect the safety thermostat connector and

open the clamp. Screws Rubber Cover
RD257
4. Remove the rubber cover.
5. Remove the two screws and then the safety

thermostat.
Installation
Install the safety thermostat in the reverse order of

removal.
16-10
16.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement
Heater Tank Screw

H401 P1
H402 P2
H403 PS1/2/3
H404 PS4
Removal

2. H402/H403: Remove the screw and then the

cover bracket.
Cover Bracket
RD258
3. Disconnect the heater connector. Clamp
4. Open the clamp.
Heater Connector
RD259
16
16-11
5. Remove the rubber cover, the two screws and Safety

then the safety thermostat from the heater. Thermostat Pinchcocks (2)
6. Pinch the heater inlet and outlet hoses with the

Screws (2)
two pinchcocks.
Heater
7. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the
hoses from the heater.
8. Remove the two screws and then the heater.
Installation

removal.

• After installation, clear “Heater on time” in Menu
0644 “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Screws (2)
Data” (see Subsection 5.7.12). Hose Clamps (2)
RD260
16.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement
Circulation Pump Tank Front Lower

PU401 P1 Screw (Loosen) Connector Bracket
PU402 P2
PU403 PS1
PU404 PS2
PU405 PS3
PU406 PS4
Removal

2. Disconnect all connectors on the front lower

All Connectors Screw (Remove)
connector bracket.
(Disconnect)
RD261
3. Remove the one screw and loosen the other
screw and remove the connector bracket.
16-12
4. Remove the screw and then the cover bracket. Screw
Cover Bracket
RD258
5. Remove the eight screws securing the heaters.
Heater Screws (8)

RD262
6. Remove the six screws securing the drain valves.
16
Drain Valve Screws (6)

RD263
16-13
7. Remove the three screws and loosen the other Pump Bracket
one. Remove the pump bracket.
Screw (Loosen)
Screws (3)(Remove)
RD264
8. Remove the two screws and then the pump from Screws (2)
the bracket.
Pump
RD265
9. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the two Pinchcocks (2)
Hoses (2)
pinchcocks.
10. Loosen the hose clamps, disconnect the hoses

from the pump.
Installation

removal.

Hose Clamps (2) Pump

RD266
16-14
16.2.8 Hose Connection
1. Fit the hose securely over the end of the hose

connector by pushing it as far as it will go.
2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace them if the Docking Portion
docking portion is damaged.
Hose Clamp
0681
3. Check that the hose clamps are not twisted when

they are installed. Hold each end of the clamp
with a pair of pliers and tighten securely.
4. After operating the machine for 30 minutes, check

that there is no leakage of solution from the hose
connections.
0680
16
16-15
16.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Screws (6)
2. Remove the six screws and then the processor

rear top cover.
Processor Rear Top Cover

CD025
3. Remove the seven screws and then the processor

rear cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (7)
Processor Rear Cover

CD865
16-16
16.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
Bracket Opening
1. Remove the processor rear cover


board bracket.
Bracket Closing
Close the bracket in the reverse order of opening.
Screws (4) Circuit Board Bracket

CD261
16.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement
Removal Connector Cover

2. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector

cover.
16
Screws (2)
CD306
3. Disconnect the FS415 connector and open the FS415 Connector

clamp.
4. Remove the waste solution tank cap.

Waste Solution
Tank Cap
Clamp
CD330
16-17
5. Remove the two screws and then the sensor from

the cap.
Installation
Screws (2)
Sensor (FS415)
Cap
CD331
16.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement
Removal Chain Protection Cover
1. Collect the waste solution into the waste solution

recovery tank.
2. Move the P1R tank

(see Subsection 17.2.11 Steps 1 to 5).
3. Remove the two screws and then the chain

protection cover.
Screws (2)
RD470
4. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector Connector Cover
cover.
Screws (2)
CD306
16-18
5. Disconnect the FS415 connector and open the FS415 Connector

clamp.
Clamp
RD471
6. Loosen the five hose clamps and disconnect the Hose Clamps (5)
hoses from the tank. Hoses (5)
7. Remove the waste solution tank.
Installation

removal.

Waste Solution Tank

RD472
16
16-19
16.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement
Removal
1. Collect the waste solution. Screws (2)

3. Remove the two screws and then the hose box.
4. Remove the two screws and then the hose

bracket.
Screws (2) Hose Box Hose Bracket

CD358
5. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the drain Drain Hose
hose from the waste solution hose.
Installation

removal.

Clamp Waste Solution Hose

CD359
16-20
16.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions
*Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of
the respective chemicals.
! CAUTION
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
• Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above indications. This is
recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater protection, the use of a protective mask
and apron is also recommended.
• Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.
• Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately.

• Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases.
• If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great amount of
water.
• If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show the physician
the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.
• In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and key. You are
responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling of poisonous substances
that apply in your country.
• Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children.
• Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of industrial
waste products in your locale. The P1R chemical in the CP-49E replenisher cartridge and the Component A of the
P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you have any questions concerning these
chemicals, consult your service representative.
* Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-49E chemicals.
16
! CAUTION
• The P1R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical
These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if improperly handled.
They may be injurious to the health if swallowed.
• The P2RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-
based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA).
• The P2RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an
alkaline (P1R or N1RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur dioxide gas if mixed with an acid.
• FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed with an acid. It
could be injurious to the health if swallowed.
16-21
16.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining
1. Remove the crossover racks, wash and leave

them to dry naturally.
Crossover Rack
CD032
2. Remove the processing racks, and run about one

liter of water over the entire rack. Collect the
waste in the waste recovery tank.
Processing Rack
3. Run warm water (30° to 45°C/86° to 113°F) over
the rack, and thoroughly wash the roller bearing
section and parts that come in contact with the
solution in the tank. Allow them to air-dry.
RD039


the drain valve of the processing tanks and drain
the solution in the tank into the waste recovery
tank.
Drain Valves
RD043
16-22

replace the waste recovery tank with a lower
container (such as tray) which can bring the end
of the hose to a level lower than the valve, and
continue draining off the solution. Collect the
solution in the waste recovery tank.
RD042
7. PS Tanks: Remove the circulation filters using the Replacement Jig

replacement jig and drain the remaining solution.
Circulation Filter
RD045
16
16-23
16.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation

fan section.
RD040
2. Check that all drain valves of the processing tanks Drain Valves
are closed.
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
RD041
3. Wash out the inside of each processing tank using

clean running water.
CD034
16-24

the drain valves of the processing tanks and drain
the water in the tank into a bucket or other
container.
Drain Valves
RD043
5. If the water being drained off stops flowing, and

there is still water remaining in the tank, replace
the bucket with a lower container (such as a tray)
which can bring the end of the hose to a level
lower than the valve, and continue draining off the
water.
6. After all the water has been drained off, close the
drain valve and remove the hose.
7. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 for each tank.
RD042
8. Remove the splash-prevention cover.
9. Make sure all drain valves are closed. Drain Valves
16
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
RD041
16-25
11. Install new circulation filters in the PS1, PS2 and “TOP” Mark
PS3 tanks.
NOTE: Install the filters with their “TOP” mark up.
12. Reinstall the processing and crossover racks.
Replacement Jig

RD044
Replacement Jig

RD046
16-26
16.4.4 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure
Tools
• Measuring Cup (5L) • Measuring Cylinder • Level Gauge
PS1,2,3,4
P1, P2
• Preparation Procedure
1. Drain the processing tank (properly dispose of the drained solution).
2. Remove the processing rack.
3. Clean the processing tank and rack with running water (preferably warm water) and a sponge or soft cloth. Do
not use any abrasive material such as a scrub brush.
4. Install the processing rack into the tank.
5. Prepare the solution in accordance with the “16.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-49E)”.
6. Thoroughly clean the solution preparation tools with water. Ensure that they are free of processing solution
incrustations so as to avoid problems with the ensuing solution preparation.
IMPORTANT
Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1 solution preparation. If the measuring cup has contained other solutions,
thoroughly clean it before P1 solution preparation.
• Chemicals (CP-49E)
Name Code Packing Units Components Quantity*
Color Developer
P1 To make 7.4 L A+B ✕ 1 box
Startup Chemicals
Bleach-fix Startup
P2 To make 7.4 L A+B ✕ 1 box
Chemicals
Super Rinse
To make 5 L ✕
Replenisher FSC100 Tablets 5 tablets
100
(Fuji Super Conditioner)
16
16-27
16.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-49E)
* Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed,
abnormality of solutions may result.

1. Water 1 liter (15 to 40 °C) 2. Water 2 liters and one 3. Water 2 liters and one 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liter)
A B
P1 P1
Circulation Filter

Gauge
Water
Sub-tank 0.2 liter)

1. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P2A 2. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P2B 3. Water (approximately 0.9 liter)
up to P2 line on gauge.
A B
P2 P2
Circulation Filter

Gauge
Water
Water + P2A Water + P2B (Approximately
Sub-tank 0.9 liter)

FRSS 4 liters FRSS 3 liters FRSS 3 liters FRSS 4 liters
Pour FRSS slowly, and then
check that all tanks are full.
Circulation Filter
FRSS 4 liters
FRSS 4 liters FRSS 3 liters FRSS 3 liters
Sub-tank Sub-tank Sub-tank Sub-tank
16-28
17. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM
Parts Location ........................................................................................... 17-2
17.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section................................................................. 17-5

17.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 17-5
17.1.2 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ...................................................... 17-5
17.1.3 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement ..................... 17-6
17.1.4 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement............................ 17-6
17.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation............................................... 17-7
17.1.6 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement....................................................... 17-9
17.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement..................... 17-10
17.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement............................................. 17-11
17.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System ....................................... 17-12

17.2.1 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................. 17-12
17.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 17-12
17.2.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement............................................................................. 17-13
17.2.4 Replenisher Pump Replacement............................................................................ 17-13
17.2.5 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ................................................................. 17-15
17.2.6 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement ............................................................. 17-16
17.2.7 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 17-17
17.2.8 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 17-17
17.2.9 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement ............................ 17-17
17.2.10 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement......................................... 17-19
17.2.11 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement............................ 17-20
17.2.12 P1R Tank Replacement........................................................................................... 17-21
17.2.13 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement.............................................................................. 17-23
17.2.14 PSR Tank Replacement .......................................................................................... 17-24
17.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System....................................................... 17-26

17.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement.......................................................... 17-26
17.3.2 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement .......................................... 17-27
17.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement ............................................................... 17-29
17
17-1
Parts Location
• F330
PSR Tank
Rack Auto Washing Valves

P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor
(S401 to S404)
(FS407/FS411)
Replenisher
Replenisher
Cartridge
Nozzles
P1
P2
PS1
PSR Upper Level
PS2
PS3 Sensor (FS414)
PS4 P2RA Upper/Lower

Level Sensor
(FS408/FS412)
P1R P2RB Upper/Lower

Cartridge Washing Tank Level Sensor
P1R Stirring Valves (FS409/FS413)
(S407 to S410)
P2RB
PSR (PU411) Tank
P2RA
Tank
P2RB (PU410)
PSR Lower Level
P2RA (PU409)
Sensor (FS414)
P1R (PU408)
PSR
PSR P2RB
Replenisher Pumps P2RB P2RA
P1R Drain Valves
P2RA
Auto Washing Pump (PU407)
P1R
Replenisher Filters
CD285
17-2
Parts Location
•F340
Rack Auto Washing Valves

(S401 to S403) PSR Tank
P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor
(FS407/FS411)
Replenisher
Cartridge
Replenisher Nozzles
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PSR Upper
Level Sensor
(FS410)
P1R
Cartridge Washing Tank
P1R Stirring Valves
(S407 to S410) P2RB Upper/
Lower Level
PSR (PU411)
P2RB Sensor
Tank
P2RA
(FS409/FS413)
Tank
P2RB (PU410)
Replenisher Pumps
P2RA Upper/Lower
Level Sensor
PSR (FS408/FS412)
P1R (PU408) PSR
P2RB
P2RB P2RA
P2RA (PU409) P2RA P1R Drain Valves
P1R
Auto Washing Pump
(PU407)
PSR Lower Level
Replenisher Filters Sensor (FS414) 17
RD510
17-3
Parts Location
Replenisher Door Detecting Replenisher Box Door Lock

Interlock Switch (D410)
Replenisher Cartridge
Box
Cartridge Opening
Gear
Opening Drive Motor
(M402)
Cartridge Box Upper

Sensor (D408)
Cartridge Box Lower

Sensor (D409)
Cartridge Setting
Sensor (D407)
Opening/Washing
Nozzle
CD821
17-4
17.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section
17.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw (Remove)

2. Loosen the five screws and remove the other

screw and then the replenishing section cover.
Reinstallation
Replenishing
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Section
Cover
removal.
Screws (5) (Loosen)

RD047
17.1.2 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing
1. Remove the screw securing the right-hand front of Rod (3mm O.D. or less)
the dryer fan section cover as shown.
2. Insert a rod having a 3 mm outside diameter or

less through the screw hole to release the lock Screws (2)
and open the door.
3. Retighten the screw.
17
Replenisher Box Door
CD360
17-5
17.1.3 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement
Removal Switch Bracket
1. Remove:
• Dryer fan section cover (see Subsection 19.3.1).

• Replenishing section cover
2. Remove the screw and then the connector cover.

Screw
3. Loosen the one screw, remove the other screw Screw (Loosen)
(Remove)
and then the switch bracket.
Screw Connector Cover

CD302
4. Disconnect the connector from the switch. E-ring

Connector
Switch (D410)
5. Remove the spring and E-ring and then the switch
from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Spring
CD303
17.1.4 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement
Removal Sensor Bracket
1. Remove the replenishing section cover


bracket.
Screws (2)
CD304
17-6

Lower Sensor
(D409)
from the bracket. Upper Sensor
(D408)
Installation
Locking Tabs

removal.
Connector
CD305
17.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Clamp
1. Remove:
• Rear upper connector cover

• Rear lower connector cover
2. Disconnect the JH01 connector and open the

clamp.
JH01 Connector
RD134
3. Disconnect the M402 connector and open the

clamp.
17
Clamp M402 Connector

RD136
17-7
4. Remove the six screws securing the opening

nozzle section.
Screws (6) Opening Nozzle

Section
RD565
5. Loosen the two screws securing the lower of the Screw (Remove)
replenisher cartridge box and remove the other
screw at the top.
Screws (2) (Loosen)

CD310
6. Loosen the hose clamp, disconnect the overflow Overflow Hose

hose and remove the replenisher cartridge box.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Connect the hose securely (see Subsection 16.2.8).
Hose Clamp
Box
CD311
17-8
17.1.6 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge box

Sensor Bracket
Screw
CD312
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Sensor (D407)

from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Connector
Locking Tabs
CD313
17
17-9
17.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement
Removal

2. Loosen the two screws and then the motor

bracket.
Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
CD314
3. Remove the two screws and then the motor. Gear
4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and Screws (2)
remove the gear from the motor.
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
Motor (M402)
CD315

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pushing the motor

bracket in the arrow direction as shown.
Motor Bracket
RD566
17-10
17.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement
Removal Connector Sensor

2. Remove the two E-rings and then the cartridge

bracket.
E-rings (2)
Cartridge Bracket
CD316
4. Remove the E-ring and then the gear. Gear
Installation

removal.
E-ring
CD317
17
17-11
17.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System
17.2.1 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:

2. Remove the five screws and then the replenisher Screws (5)
pump section cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Replenisher Pump
Section Cover
RD148
17.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

2. Remove the two screws and pull out the bracket.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Take care not to bend or crush the replenisher

hoses when reinstalling the bracket.
Replenisher Pump Bracket Screws (2)

RD149
17-12
17.2.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket Hoses

2. Pinch the filter inlet and outlet hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
3. Loosen the two hose clamps and disconnect the

hoses from the filter.
Installation

removal.
Clamps
Pinchcocks (2) Filter
RD227
• After filter replacement, perform Menu 0640
“Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting”
17.2.4 Replenisher Pump Replacement
Pump System Connector Cover

PU408 P1R
PU409 P2RA
PU410 P2RB
PU411 PSR
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket

17
2. F340: Remove the two screws and then the
connector cover.
Screws (2)
RD228
17-13
3. Disconnect the pump connector.

Connectors
PU411
4. Open the harness clamp. PU409
PU410
PU408
Clamp
CD288
5. Pinch the pump inlet and outlet hoses with the two Pinchcocks (2) Outlet Hose
pinchcocks. Inlet Hose
6. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the inlet

hose from the pump.
7. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the outlet hose

from the pump.
Cord Tie
Clamp
RD229
8. Remove the screw and then pull the pump out. Pump
Installation

removal.

• After replacing the pump, clear “Pump on times” in
Menu 0644 (see Subsection 5.7.12).
• After pump replacement, perform Menu 0640
“Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting” Screw
RD230
17-14
17.2.5 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket Inlet Hose

Outlet Hose
2. Pinch the pump inlet and outlet hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
Joint Nuts Pinchcocks (2)

RD231
3. Loosen the two joint nuts.
4. Remove the valves.

Mark
Installation Mark

removal. Valve
NOTE: • Use new valves identified by the same color mark

as the label on the pump body.
Color Pump
Red P1R Valve
Yellow P2RA and P2RB RD232
White PSR
• Note the installation direction of the valves and

tighten the joint nuts securely.
17
• F340: Note the direction of the outlet hose joint for <F340>
the P1R pump as shown.
P2RA/P2RB/PSR P1R
• After pump replacement, perform Menu 0640
RD660
17-15
17.2.6 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement
Removal Replenisher Pump

2. Remove the screw and then the replenisher

pump.
Screw
CD1159
3. Pinch the pump inlet and outlet hoses with the two Screws (2)
pinchcocks.
4. Remove the two screws and then the joint from

the pump.
Joint
CD1160
5. Remove the bellows by turning it 90 degrees

counterclockwise.
NOTE: • Note the O-ring between the joint and the

pump.
• Be careful not to spill any replenisher
remaining in the bellows.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Bellows

removal.
NOTE: • Reinstall the O-ring between the joint and the

pump. O-ring
• Note the installation direction of the joint.
CD1161
• After bellows replacement, perform Menu 0640
17-16
17.2.7 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Connector Cover
1. Remove the dryer fan section cover


cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (2)
removal.
RD135
17.2.8 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation

2. Loosen the two screws and then the connector

cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (2)
RD133
17.2.9 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement

17
Removal
1. Remove:

• Open the circuit board bracket
2. Remove the two screws and then the connector Screws (2) Connector Bracket
bracket.
RD238
17-17
3. Open the harness clamp. FS407 Connector
4. Disconnect the FS407 and FS411 connectors.
FS411 Connector
Clamp
RD239
5. Remove the two screws and then the sensors. Screws (2)
Installation
Sensors (FS407/FS411)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of CD320
removal.
NOTE: • Install the gasket on the sensor flange correctly. Arrows

• Align the arrow on the sensor with that on the tank.
Gasket
CD321
17-18
17.2.10 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement
Code Sensor FS409 Connector

FS408 P2RA Upper FS408 Connector FS412 Connector
FS409 P2RB Upper
FS412 P2RA Lower
FS413 P2RB Lower
Removal
1. Remove:

(see Subsection 17.2.8). FS413 Connector
RD240
2. Disconnect the FS408/FS412 or FS409/FS413
connectors.
3. Remove the two screws and then the P1R tank

bracket. P1R Tank Bracket
4. Open the three clamps.
Screws (2) Clamps (3)

RD241
5. Open the two clamps. Screws (2)
6. Remove the two screws and then the tank 17

bracket.
Tank Bracket
Clamps
CD334
17-19
7. Tilt the tank towards the outside. Screws (2)

Sensors
(FS409/FS413)
8. Remove the two screws and then the sensors.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Install the gasket on the sensor flange correctly.

• Point the arrow on the sensor outward.
Sensors
(FS408/FS412)
Arrow
CD335
17.2.11 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:

2. Drain the PSR replenisher from the drain valve.

PSR
P1R
P2RA P2RB
Drain Valves
CD322
3. Disconnect the FS410 or FS414 connector. FS414 Connector FS410 Connector
RD242
17-20


RD241

Clamps (3)
Hose
7. Loosen the two hose clamps each, disconnect the
hoses and remove the sensors.
Clamps (2)
Installation
Sensor (FS410)
removal.

Hose
Clamps (2)
Sensor (FS414)
Hose
RD243
17.2.12 P1R Tank Replacement
Removal 17
1. Remove:

• Remove the rear lower connector cover
PSR
2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and P2RB replenishers
P1R
from the drain valve. P2RA P2RB
Drain Valves
NOTE: Collect the replenishers into the W1 waste recovery CD322
tank.
17-21
3. Disconnect the FS407 and FS411 connectors. FS407 Connector
FS411 Connector Clamp

RD244
5. Remove the two screws and then the tank

bracket.
Screws (2) P1R Tank Bracket

CD324
6. Pull out the tank. Inlet Hose
7. Disconnect the overflow hose from the boss on

the floor pan.
Outlet Stirring Hose
Hose
8. Loosen the four clamps and disconnect the four
hoses from the tank.
Installation

removal.

(see Subsection 16.2.8). P1R Tank
• After installation, perform cartridge opening in Drain Hose
Menu 0646 “Installation”.
Clamps (4) Overflow
Hose
CD325
17-22
17.2.13 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:

2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and P2RB replenishers

from the drain valve. PSR
P1R
NOTE: Collect the replenishers into the W1 waste P2RA P2RB
recovery tank. Drain Valves
CD322
3. Disconnect the FS408/FS412 or FS409/FS413 FS409 Connector

connectors. FS408 Connector FS412 Connector
FS413 Connector
RD240

17

RD241
17-23
6. Open the two clamps. Screws (2)
7. Remove the two screws and then the tank

bracket.
Tank Bracket
Clamps
CD334
8. Tilt the tank to the outside.

Clamps (4) P2RB Tank
Overflow Hose
9. Loosen the four hose clamps and disconnect the
hoses from the tank. Outlet Hose
Installation

removal.

• After installation, perform cartridge opening in
Menu 0646 “Installation”.
Drain Hose Inlet Hose

P2RA Tank
CD336
17.2.14 PSR Tank Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:

2. Drain the PSR replenisher from the drain valve.

PSR
P1R
P2RA P2RB
Drain Valves
CD322
17-24
3. Remove the two screws, then the P1R tank

bracket and pull out the tank.
Screws (2) P1R Tank Bracket

CD324
4. Remove the two screws and then the tank Tank Bracket
bracket.
Screws (2)
RD245
5. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses Breather Hose
To Level Sensors
from the tank.
6. Remove the tank. Inlet Hose
Installation Clamps (5)

17
removal.

• After replacement, perform PSR output
measurement and setting in Menu 0640
Drain Hose Outlet Hose PSR Tank
RD246
17-25
17.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System
17.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement


cover.
Screws (2)
RD228
3. Disconnect the PU407 connector. Clamp
PU407 Connector
4. Open the clamps.
RD562
5. Pinch the three hoses with the pinchcocks. Pinchcocks (3)
6. Loosen the two hose clamps and disconnect the

hoses from the pump.
Clamps (2)
RD233
17-26
7. Remove the two screws and then the pump

bracket.
Pump Bracket
Screws (2)
CD294
8. Remove the two screws and then the pump from Pump (PU407)
the bracket.
Installation

removal.

adjustments.
1) Clear “Pump on times” in the menu 0644
“Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data”
2) Menu 0641 “Auto Cleaning Output Screws (2)
Measurement/Setting” (see Subsection 5.7.9). CD295
17.3.2 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement
Code Valve
17
S407 P1R Washing
S408 P2RA Washing
S409 P2RB Washing
S410 P1R Stirring
Removal

2. Loosen the two screws and remove the valve

bracket. Valve Bracket
Screws (2)
CD296
17-27
3. Loosen the two screws and then the connector Connector Cover
cover.
Screws (2)
RD234
4. Disconnect the S407 to S410 connectors.
5. Open the clamp.
Clamp
S407 Connector S409 Connector
S408 Connector S410 Connector
CD297
6. Pinch the five hoses using the pinchcocks. Pinchcocks (5)
7. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses

from the valve unit.
8. Remove the two screws and then the valve unit

from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely Clamps (5) Screws (2)

Valve Unit
CD298
17-28
17.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement
Rack S404 Connector S401 Connector

Code
F330 F340
S401 P1 P1
S402 P2 P2
S403 PS1/2 PS1
S404 PS3/4 Not used
Removal
1. Remove:

(see Subsection 16.3.2). Clamp S402 Connector S402 Connector
• Remove the rear upper connector cover RD235
2. Disconnect the S401 to S404 connectors.
3. Open the clamp.
4. Loosen the two screws and remove the valve

bracket.
Screws (2)
Valve Bracket
RD236
17
17-29
5. Pinch the four (F330: five) hoses with the Pinchcocks (4)
Valve Unit
pinchcocks.
6. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses/

plug from the valve unit.
7. Remove the two screws and then the valve unit

from the bracket.
Installation
removal.
F330: Hoses
NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely Clamps (5) Screws (2) F340: Plug
RD237
• After installation, perform Menu 0641 “Auto
Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting”
17-30
18. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F330)
Parts Location (F330)................................................................................ 18-2
18.1 Dryer Unit (F330) ....................................................................................... 18-3

18.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ................................................................................. 18-3
18.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement ..................................................... 18-4
18.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement.................................................. 18-5
18.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement ....................................................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................... 18-8
18.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................... 18-10
18.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 18-11
18.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement.......................................................................... 18-13
18.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 18-14
18.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement............... 18-15
18.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417) Replacement........... 18-15
18.2 Sorter (F330) ............................................................................................ 18-18

18.2.1 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ............................................................... 18-18
18.2.2 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................................... 18-19
18.2.3 Sorter Belt Replacement......................................................................................... 18-20
18.2.4 Belt Tension Adjustment ........................................................................................ 18-23
18.2.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................................ 18-24
18.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement.................................................................... 18-25
18.2.7 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement ............................................................................ 18-26
18.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F330)............................................................ 18-28

18.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement............................................................................... 18-28
18.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement ............................. 18-30
18
18-1
Dryer Unit Open/Close

Detecting Interlock Switch
Dryer Rack Drive Gear
Dryer Section
Exit Sensor (D411)
Dryer Fan (F405)
Dryer Temperature
Sensor (TS406)
Dryer Rack
Dryer Heater (H406)/

Safety Thermostat
(D406)
Dryer Rack
Exit Rollers
Dryer Section
Cover Detecting
Entrance Interlock Switch
Side Rollers (D416)
Sorter Drive Motor

Dryer Unit (M404)
Sorter Belt
Feed Section Rollers

Feed Belt/Pulleys
Dryer Rack Drive Chain
CD822
18-2
18.1 Dryer Unit (F330)
18.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

2. Loosen the two screws securing the dryer section

cover.
Screws (2)
CD122
3. Remove the dryer section cover. Dryer Section Cover
Reinstallation
CD123
18.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement
Removal Pulley Entrance Guide
1. Remove the dryer section cover E-rings (2)
Screws (4)
2. Remove the four screws and then the entrance 18
guide.
3. Remove the two springs.
4. Remove the two E-rings, and bearings.

Shaft
Bearings (2)
Springs (2)
CD198
18-3
5. Remove the E-ring securing the pulley to the shaft E-ring

and then the pulley by pulling the shaft out.
Pulley Shaft
9689
6. Remove the drive side E-ring and then the gear Shaft
Belt E-ring
and bearing.
7. Remove the E-ring and then the pulley and belt by

pulling out the shaft.
Installation
Install the belt/pulleys in the reverse order of removal.
Pulley
Gear Bearing
E-ring
9690
18.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement
1. Open the dryer unit. Connector

Screw
Sensor Bracket
CD209
18-4
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor. Locking Tabs
Installation
Sensor (D411)
CD210
18.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement
Removal

3. Loosen the two screws and remove the duct.
Duct
Screws (2)
CD230
18
Dryer Temperature
Sensor Connector
CD228
18-5
5. Cut the two cord ties, remove the two screws and Heat-resistant Cord Ties (2)
then the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Screws (2)
CD212
6. Cut the other three cord ties.

Heat-resistant Cord Ties (3)
Installation Screw
Sensor (TS406)
E520
18.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement
Removal Screws (2)(Loosen)

and then the drive gear bracket.
Screw (Remove)
Drive Gear Bracket
CD229
18-6
3. Remove the two E-rings, spacer, gear bracket and E-ring

Bracket E-ring
gear.
Spacer
Gear
CD242
4. Remove the clip and then the gear and shaft.
Shaft
Gear
Clip
CD243
5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear (green). E-ring E-ring
Bracket
6. Remove the E-ring and two screws and then the
bracket and the gear (white).
Screws (2)
Gear (Green)
18
Gear (White)
CD244
18-7
7. Remove the two bearings, gear (black) and shaft. Bearing
Installation
removal.
Thrust Washer
NOTE: Apply the recommended resin grease to the gear

and shafts as shown in the figures.
Bearing
Shaft
Thrust Washer
Gear (Black)
CD245
18.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
Screw
• Dryer section cover (see Subsection 18.1.1).
• Dryer rack drive gear bracket (see Subsection 18.1.5).
Grounding Wire
CD227
18-8
Duct
Screws (2)
CD230
5. Disconnect the dryer temperature sensor

connector.
Dryer Temperature
Sensor Connector
CD228
6. Remove the four screws and then the cover. Cover

Screws (4)
18
CD232
18-9
7. Loosen the six screws securing the dryer rack.
Screws (6)
CD231
8. Pull the lock release lever and remove the dryer Lock Release Lever Sensor Arm
rack.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the dryer section exit

sensor arm.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the rack in the reverse order of removal.
Dryer Rack
CD233
18.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack (see Subsection 18.1.6).
2. Remove the three screws and then the chain

slider.
Screws (3)
Chain Slider
CD234
18-10
3. Release the chain tensioner spring hook. Chain
4. Remove the chain.
Installation
Install the chain in the reverse order of removal.
Spring
CD1099
18.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement
Removal Exit Side Spring

Black Mark
Bearings (6)
2. Remove the six E-rings and three springs and

then the gear, sprockets and bearings from the
front side.
NOTE: The exit side spring has a black mark and the
entrance side spring has a red mark.
Spring
Sprockets (2)
E-rings (6)
Entrance Red Mark

Side Spring
CD235
18
18-11
3. Remove the six E-rings and then the six gears, Black Mark Exit Side Spring
three springs, six bearings and four rollers. Rollers (4)
Spring
NOTE: The exit side spring has a black mark and the
entrance side spring has a red mark.
Entrance Side Bearings (6)

Spring
Red Mark
Gears (6)
E-rings (6)
CD236
4. Remove the four screws and two springs and Long White Roller Shafts (2)
collars and then the lower guide plate.
Screws (4)
5. Remove the four screws and then the upper guide
plate.
6. Remove the two long white roller shafts.
Installation

removal. Screws (4)
Springs (2)
NOTE: Exit side coil spring has a black mark and the Collars (2)
entrance side spring has a red mark. CD237
Spring (No Mark)

Spring (Black Mark)
Spring (Red Mark)
ø32 Black soft

ø20 Black hard
ø20 Black soft
ø20 White hard
ø20 White hard
ø20 White hard
ø20 White hard
ø20 Brown hard
ø20 White soft
ø22 Black hard
ø20 Black hard
ø16 Black hard CD226
18-12
18.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement
Removal Roller Bearing
1. Remove the dryer rack drive chain

2. Remove the E-ring and then the gear and

bearing.
3. Withdraw the shaft from the front side and remove

the roller (ø20 black/hard).
E-ring
Gear
Shaft
9731
4. Remove the three screws. Screws (3)
CD238
5. Remove the six screws and then the stainless Screws (6)
steel guide plate.
18
Stainless Steel Guide Plate

CD239
18-13
6. Remove the E-ring and then the sprocket and Roller Bearing
bearing from the front side.
7. Remove the E-ring and bearing and then the roller

from the rear side.
Installation
Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal.
Sprocket E-ring
9733
18.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement
Removal Spring Plain Bearings (3)

2. Remove the four E-rings and then the gears from

the rear side.
3. Remove the spring ends from the grooves in the

bearings. Ball Bearing
4. Remove the three plain bearings and ball bearing.

Gears (4)
E-rings (4)
CD240
5. Remove the front four E-rings, two sprockets and

four bearings.
6. Withdraw the shafts from the front side and

remove the roller.
Installation
Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal.

Shafts (4)
Rollers (4)
CD241
18-14
18.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement
1. Remove:

(see Subsection 16.2.1). Bracket
3. Remove the three tapping screws and then the

bracket.
Clamp
CD247
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the switch

from the bracket.
Installation
Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
Locking Tabs
Switch (D416)
CD248
18.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417) Replacement
Removal Switch Cover

operational checks and turn OFF the built-in 18

cover.
Screws (2)
CD1023
18-15
4. Insert the flat blade screwdriver through the slots Switch

to release the locking tabs and remove the switch.
Flat Blade Screwdriver

CD1024
5. Disconnect the two connectors from the switch. Switch
Connectors (2)
CD1025
Installation Cover
Screws (4)
Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, adjust the switch cover position.
<Switch Cover Position Adjustment>
1. Remove the four screws and then the cover.
CD232
18-16
2. Loosen the two screws securing the switch cover. Switch Lever
Screws (2)
3. Adjust the switch cover position so that the switch
lever on the dryer unit aligns with the center of the
hole in the switch cover.
Switch Cover
CD1100
18
18-17
18.2 Sorter (F330)
18.2.1 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Lower Cover
2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.
CD199
3. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover Lower Cover Bracket
bracket.
Screws
(2)
CD200
4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and Motor Gear
remove the gear from the motor.
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

E505
18-18
18.2 Sorter (F330)
5. Disconnect the motor connector. Screws (2)

Motor (M404)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Apply locking agent to the threads of the two hex.

socket head setscrews.
Thread Locking Agent: LOCTITE 425 or equivalent.

Motor Connector
E506
18.2.2 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)

2. Remove the four screws and then the sorter.
Sorter
CD201
3. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Screw
Reinstallation
Reinstall the sorter in the reverse order of removal.
18
Grounding
Wire
CD202
18-19
18.2 Sorter (F330)
18.2.3 Sorter Belt Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Lower Cover
1. Remove the sorter (see Subsection 18.2.2).
CD203
3. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover Connectors (3) Lower Cover Bracket
bracket.
Screws (2)
E516
5. Remove the four screws and then the plug-in Motor Connector
Screw Screws (4)
connector bracket.
Grounding Wire Plug-in Connector Bracket

CD204
18-20
18.2 Sorter (F330)
7. Disconnect the connectors from the sorter full

sensor and LED.
Connectors
CD205
8. Remove the three screws securing the motor Motor Bracket

bracket.
Screws (3)
E512
9. Remove the two screws and then the pulley Pulley Bracket
bracket.
18
Screws (2)
E511
18-21
18.2 Sorter (F330)
10. Remove the four screws and motor protection Motor Protection Cover
cover.
Screws (4)
CD206
11. Remove the flat countersunk head screws. Flat Countersunk Head Scews (2)
12. Remove the two screws securing the pulley shaft.
Pulley Shaft Screws (2)

9685
13. Remove the spring from the one side and then the Spring
belt.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust the belt tension

Belt
9686
18-22
18.2 Sorter (F330)
18.2.4 Belt Tension Adjustment
1. Remove the sorter (see Subsection 18.2.2). Screws (2)

Lower Cover
CD203
3. Loosen the three screws securing the motor Screws (2)

Pulley Bracket (Remove)
bracket.
4. Remove the two screws and then the pulley

bracket.
Screws (3)
(Loosen) Motor Bracket
999u
5. Move the motor bracket as far as it will go to Motor Bracket

tighten tension and secure with the three screws.
18
Screws (3)
E515
18-23
18.2 Sorter (F330)
6. Measure the belt tension near the rib on the sorter

Spring
as shown using the spring.
Belt Tension: 250g±20g/20mm
7. Adjust the belt tension by loosening the three

screws and moving the motor bracket.
20mm
Rib
Belt
999v
18.2.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Lower Cover
CD199
bracket.
Screws
(2)
CD200
18-24
18.2 Sorter (F330)
4. Disconnect the three connectors from the CTS04 CTS04 Circuit Board
circuit board.
Connectors (3)
E507
5. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board CTS04 Circuit Board
Screws (2)
from the spacer.
Installation
Install the circuit board in the reverse order of

removal.
Spacer
E508
18.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement
Removal Upper Cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the upper cover.

18
Screws (2)
E502
18-25
18.2 Sorter (F330)
3. Disconnect the connectors from the LED. Screws (2)

Sensor LEDs (2)
4. Remove the two screws and then the LED.
Installation
Install the LED in the reverse order of removal.
Connectors (2)
CD208
18.2.7 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Lower Cover
CD199
bracket.
Screws
(2)
CD200
18-26
18.2 Sorter (F330)
4. Disconnect the motor connector. Connector

Motor Connector
board and cut the cord tie. Screws (4)

connector bracket.
Cord Tie Plug-in Connector Bracket

CD207
7. Disconnect the connectors from the sensors. Sensors (2)
Connectors (2)
E518
8. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the Sensor
Screw Sensor
front side.
9. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket

from the rear side.
10. Remove the screw and then the rear-side sensor

from the bracket.
Installation 18
Screw Bracket Screw

E519
18-27
18.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F330)
18.3.1 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Densitometer

2. Open the Dryer unit.
3. Disconnect the cable and remove the

densitometer.
Cable
CD213
4. Remove the six screws and then the dryer fan Dryer Fan Section Cover
section cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (6)
CD214
18.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement
Removal

2. Remove the three flat countersunk head screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the screws.
Flat Countersunk Head Screws (3)

CD215
18-28
3. Remove the four screws and the fan duct. Screws (4)
Fan Duct
CD216
4. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Fan Connector

Grounding Wire
Capacitor
Screw
6. Remove the screw securing the capacitor.
7. Disconnect the fan connector.
Screw
Clamps
CD217
8. Remove the two screws and then the fan. Fan (F405)
18
Screws (2)
CD218
18-29
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installing the fan and duct, tighten the screws
in the following order.
(1) Install the two fan screws loosely.
(2) Tighten the three fan duct screws.
(3) Tighten the three countersunk flat head screws.
(4) Tighten the two fan screws firmly.

CD1101
18.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement
Removal

2. Disconnect the heater and safety thermostat

connectors.
Safety Thermostat
Connector
Heater Connectors
CD219
3. Remove the five screws and then the heater/

safety thermostat.
Installation
Install the heater in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, clear “Heater on time” on the Menu
46D “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data”
Heater (H406)/Safety Screws (5)

Thermostat (D406)
CD220
18-30
19. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F340)
Parts Location (F340)................................................................................ 19-2
19.1 Dryer Unit (F340) ....................................................................................... 19-3

19.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ................................................................................. 19-3
19.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement ..................................................... 19-5
19.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement.................................................. 19-6
19.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement ....................................................................... 19-7
19.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................... 19-9
19.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement ................................................................... 19-11
19.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement ..................................................................... 19-12
19.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement.......................................................................... 19-15
19.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 19-16
19.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement............... 19-17
19.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417) Replacement........... 19-18
19.2 Belt Sorter (F340) .................................................................................... 19-20

19.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................................... 19-20
19.2.2 Sorter Flapper Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ................................................. 19-20
19.2.3 Sorter Flapper Position Sensor (D414) Replacement .......................................... 19-21
19.2.4 Sorter Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation......................................................... 19-22
19.2.5 “Sorter Full” Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................... 19-22
19.2.6 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................................ 19-23
19.2.7 “Sorter Full” Sensor Replacement ........................................................................ 19-24
19.2.8 “Sorter Full” Sensor LED Replacement ................................................................ 19-24
19.2.9 Belt Drive Motor (M403) Replacement ................................................................... 19-25
19.2.10 Belt Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................................. 19-26
19.2.11 Belt/Pulley/Flapper Up-Down Cam Replacement ................................................. 19-27
19.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F340)............................................................ 19-33

19.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement............................................................................... 19-33
19.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement ............................. 19-35
19
19-1
Dryer Unit Open/Close

Detecting Interlock Switch (D417)
Sorter Flapper
Dryer Rack Drive Gear Drive Motor (M304)
Dryer Section Dryer Fan (F405)

Exit Sensor (D411)
Dryer Temperature
Dryer Rack Sensor (TS406)
Dryer Rack
Exit Rollers Dryer Heater (H406)/
Safety Thermostat (D406)
Dryer Unit
Dryer Section
Feed Section Rollers Cover Detecting
Interlock Switch (D416)
Sorter Belt Drive Motor

Dryer Rack Drive Chain (M403)
Sorter Belt
Feed Belt/Rollers
Entrance
Side Rollers
RD475
19-2
19.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

2. Loosen the two screws securing the dryer section

cover.
RD086
3. Remove the dryer section cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Belt Sorter
RD087
19.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement
Removal
Screw (5)
2. Remove the five screws and then the feed belt

section.
19
Feed Belt Section

RD540
19-3
3. Remove the four screws and then the entrance Screws (4)
guide.
Entrance Guide
RD278
4. Remove the two coil springs. Coil Springs (2)
5. Remove the two E-rings, and bearings.
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
RD279
6. Remove the E-ring securing the roller to the shaft E-ring

and then the roller by pulling the shaft out.
Roller
Shaft
RD280
19-4
7. Remove the drive side E-ring and then the gear Belt
and bearing. E-ring
8. Remove the E-ring, then the rubber roller and belt

by pulling out the shaft.
Installation

removal.
Rubber Roller
Bearing
E-ring Shaft
Gear
RD281
19.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement
Screw
RD282
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Locking Tabs
Installation

removal. 19
Connector Sensor (D411)

RD283
19-5
19.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement
Removal

Connector
RD284
Duct
Screws (2)
RD285
5. Cut the cord tie, remove the two screws and then Screws (2)
the sensor bracket. Heat-resistant
Cord Tie
Sensor Bracket
RD286
19-6
6. Cut the two cord ties. Heat-resistant Cord Ties (2)
Installation Screw
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Sensor (TS406)

removal.
RD287
19.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
Screws (2)(Loosen)

and then the drive gear bracket.
Drive Gear
Screw (Remove)
Bracket
RD288
3. Remove the two E-rings, spacer, gear bracket and E-ring

Bracket E-ring
gear.
Spacer
Gear
CD242
19
19-7
4. Remove the clip and then the gear and shaft.
Shaft
Gear
Clip
CD243
5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear (green). E-ring E-ring
Bracket
6. Remove the E-ring and two screws and then the
bracket and the gear (white).
Screws (2)
Gear (Green)
Gear (White)
CD244
7. Remove the two bearings, gear (black) and shaft. Bearing
Installation

removal. Thrust Washer
NOTE: Apply the recommended resin grease to the gear

and shafts as shown in the figures.
Bearing
Shaft
Thrust Washer
Gear (Black)
CD245
19-8
19.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw
1. Remove:

• Dryer rack drive gear bracket
Grounding Wire
RD289
4. Disconnect the dryer temperature sensor

connector.
Connector
RD284
Duct
19
Screws (2)
RD285
19-9
6. Remove the two screws and then the cover. Screws (2)
Cover
RD290
7. Loosen the six screws securing the dryer rack.
Screws (6)
CD231
8. Remove the dryer rack while pulling the lock Lock Release Lever
release lever.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the dryer section exit

sensor arm.
Reinstallation Sensor Arm

removal.
Dryer Rack
RD291
19-10
19.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
2. Loosen the two screws and remove the dryer

squeegee rack unit.
Dryer Squeegee Rack Unit

RD304
3. Remove the three screws and then the chain

slider.
4. Remove the guide roller.
Guide
Roller
Screws (3)
Chain Slider
RD292
5. Release the chain tensioner spring hook. Chain
6. Remove the chain.
19
Spring
RD293
19-11
Installation Tangs

removal.
NOTE: Install the dryer squeegee unit so that its tangs are
positioned below the plates on the rack as shown,
push it to the printer side and tighten the two
screws.
Dryer Sqeegee Unit

RD308
19.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement
Removal
2. Loosen the two screws and remove the exit guide.
Screws (2) Exit Guide

RD294
3. Remove the four E-rings, three sprockets and Sprockets (3) Gear
gear from the front side.
E-rings (4)
RD295
19-12
4. Remove the four coil springs, four E-rings and E-rings (4)
Bearings (8) Coil Springs (4)
eight bearings.
Black Mark

 Red

 Mark

RD296
5. Remove the eight E-rings, gears, bearings and Gears (8)

E-rings (8) Coil Springs (4)
four coil springs from the rear side.
6. Remove the four rollers with the shorter shaft.
7. Withdraw the roller shaft and remove the black

hard roller.
RD297
8. Remove the six screws and fixing pins from the Exit Turn Guide
front and rear sides and then the exit turn guide.
9. Remove the two rollers with the longer shaft.
19
Screws (6) Fixing Pins (6)
RD298
19-13
10. Remove the ten screws securing the lock lever Screws (10)
unit and then the remaining roller with the longer
shaft.
Installation

removal.
Lock Lever Unit
RD299
NOTE: The coil springs for the exit rollers have a black mark E-rings (4)
and ones for the remaining six rollers have a red Bearings (8) Coil Springs (4)
mark.
Black Mark

 Red

 Mark

RD296
φ20 Black Hard Roller

φ20 Gray Soft Roller
φ20 Black Soft Roller
φ20 Ivory Soft Roller
φ20 Black Hard Roller
φ20 Black Soft Roller
φ20 White Hard Roller
RD503
19-14
19.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement
Removal Roller Shaft

2. Remove the E-ring and then the gear, coil spring

and bearing.
3. Remove the coil spring from the front side.

Withdraw the shaft and remove the roller (ø20
Black Hard). Coil Spring
Bearing
Gear
E-ring
RD300
4. Remove the six screws and then the guide plate. Screws (6)
Guide Plate
RD301
5. Remove the E-ring and then the sprocket and Sprockets (10)
Bearings (10)
bearing form the front side.
6. Remove the E-ring and bearing and then the roller

from the rear side.
Installation
19
removal. E-rings (10)
E-rings (10) Bearings (10)

RD302
19-15
19.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement
Removal Rollers Spring

Bearing
2. Remove the two E-rings and gears from the rear Gears (2)
side.
3. Release the spring from the bearing.
4. Remove the collar and bearings. Roller Shafts
5. Withdraw the roller shafts from the front side and Ball Bearing
Collar
remove the two rollers.
E-rings (2)
RD305
6. Remove the two E-rings, gears, coil spring and Bearings (2)
bearings from the dryer squeegee rack unit.
Coil Spring
Gears (2)
Red Mark
E-rings (2)
RD306
7. Remove the coil spring, E-ring from the sprocket E-Ring

side, withdraw the roller shaft, and then take out
the gray soft roller and pin.
Roller Shaft Pin
8. Remove the black soft roller, then the E-ring, Bearing

sprocket and bearing form the roller shaft.
Installation

Coil Spring
removal. (Red Mark)
Gray Soft Roller

Sprocket
Bearing
Black Soft Roller
RD307
19-16
19.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416) Replacement
1. Remove:

Bracket
3. Remove the three tapping screws and then the

bracket.
Clamp
CD247
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the switch

from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Locking Tabs
Switch (D416)
CD248
19
19-17
19.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D417)

Replacement
Removal Switch Cover


cover.
Screws (2)
CD1023
4. Insert a flat blade screwdriver through the slots to Switch

release the locking tabs and remove the switch.
Flat Blade Screwdriver

CD1024
5. Disconnect the two connectors from the switch. Switch
Connectors (2)
CD1025
19-18

Cover

removal.
After installation, adjust the switch cover position.
<Switch Cover Position Adjustment>
RD290
2. Loosen the two screws securing the switch cover. Switch Lever
Screws (2)
3. Adjust the switch cover position so that the switch
lever on the dryer unit aligns with the center of the
hole in the switch cover.
Switch Cover
CD1100
19
19-19
19.2 Belt Sorter (F340)
19.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)

the system and turn OFF the built-in circuit
breaker and the main power supply.
2. Remove the four screws securing the sorter to the

dryer rack.
RD486
3. Remove the sorter by lifting its “Sorter Full” sensor

side and pulling it as shown.
NOTE: Place the sorter on the table taking care not to

damage the winding protection guides.
Reinstallation

removal.
Sorter
RD487
19.2.2 Sorter Flapper Drive Motor (M404) Replacement
Removal Screw
2. Place the sorter upside down on the table taking

care not to damage the winding protection guides.
3. Remove the screw and then the motor bracket.
Motor Bracket
RD330
19-20
4. Remove the harness from the two clamps.
Clamps (2)
M404 Connector
RD323
6. Remove the two screws and then the bracket from Motor (M404)
the motor.
7. Using a 1.5mm hex. wrench, loosen the hex.

socket head setscrew and remove the gear from
the motor shaft.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the screws for the bracket after making sure
the gears are engaged properly.
Motor Bracket Screws (2)
Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
(1.5mm)
RD324
19.2.3 Sorter Flapper Position Sensor (D414) Replacement


19
Screw
RD321
19-21
4. Release the locking tabs to remove the sensor Connector

from the bracket. Sensor (D141)
Installation
removal.
RD322
19.2.4 Sorter Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2) Sorter Lower Cover

3. Remove the two screws and then the sorter lower

cover.
Reinstallation
removal.
RD309
19.2.5 “Sorter Full” Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the sorter lower cover Connector
2. Disconnect the connector from the circuit board.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the sensors.
4. Remove the two screws and then the bracket. Connectors
Reinstallation
removal. “Sorter Full”
Screws (2) Sensor Bracket
RD311
19-22
19.2.6 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Connectors
Screws (3)
1. Remove the “Sorter Full” sensor bracket


board.
4. Remove the three screws and then the circuit

board bracket.
Circuit Board
Bracket
Toothed Washer Grounding

Screw Wire
RD315
5. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board Screws (2)
cover.
Circuit Board Cover
RD316
6. Release the locking tabs of the spacer and CTS04 Circuit Board
remove the circuit board.
Installation

removal.
19
Spacer
RD317
19-23
19.2.7 “Sorter Full” Sensor Replacement
Removal Screw

Screw
Sensor Bracket
Sensor Bracket
RD318
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor and Screw

spacer.
Installation

removal.
Sensor
Spacer
RD319
19.2.8 “Sorter Full” Sensor LED Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Cover
RD338
19-24
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Connectors

spacers.
Installation

removal.
Spacers
LED Sensor
Screw
RD339
19.2.9 Belt Drive Motor (M403) Replacement
Removal Clamps

2. Open the two clamps and disconnect the M403

connector.
M403 Connector
RD312
3. Remove the two screws and then the motor/

bracket.
19
Screws (2)
Motor/Bracket
RD313
19-25
4. Remove the two screws and then the bracket from Screws (2)
the motor. Motor (M403)
Harness
5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the

Locating Bosses
motor shaft.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Face the locating bosses on the bracket toward the

outside.
• Install the bracket so that its notch is in the same Notch
position as the motor harness.
Gear
Motor Bracket
E-ring
RD314
19.2.10 Belt Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Belt drive motor (M403)

• Circuit board bracket (see Subsection 19.2.6).
2. Remove the four screws securing the bracket.
Screws (4)
RD331
3. Remove the three E-rings and then the gears.
Installation

removal. Adjust belt tension after installation
E-rings (3)
Gears (3)
RD332
19-26
19.2.11 Belt/Pulley/Flapper Up-Down Cam Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Belt drive motor (M403)

• Circuit board bracket (see Subsection 19.2.6).
2. Remove the four screws securing the bracket.
Screws (4)
RD331
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket. Screws

Sensor Bracket Plug-in
Connector
4. Disconnect the M404 connector and remove the Bracket
Clamps
harness from the clamps.
Screw

connector bracket.
M404 Connector Clamps
RD333
6. Pull the belts up and remove the pulley bracket.
19
Pulley Bracket
RD334
19-27
7. Remove the four screws and then the belt guard. Screws (4)
Belt Guard
RD335
8. Remove the two springs and then the pulley shaft Springs
Pulley Shaft
RD336
9. Remove the three belts. Belts (3)
RD337
19-28
10. Flapper Up-Down Camshaft Disassembly
1) Remove the screw and then the motor Screws (4) Screw
bracket.
2) Remove the four screws and then the flapper

up-down camshaft bracket.
Flapper Up-Down Camshaft Bracket

Motor Bracket
RD488
3) Remove the three E-rings and disassemble E-rings (3)

the flapper up-down camshaft. Sensor Plate
Bearings (2)
Camshaft
Gear
RD489
11. Pulley Shaft Disassembly
1) Remove the two collars and pulleys from the Winding Protection
pulley shaft. E-rings (2) Guides (2)
Flappers (2)
2) Remove the two E-rings, collars, then the
flappers, winding protection guides and pulley
Pulleys (2)
from the shaft.
19
Pulley
Ball Bearings (6)
Pulley Shaft Collars (4)
RD490
19-29
12. Belt Press Roller Disassembly
1) Remove the harness from the five clamps.

Screws (2)
2) Remove the two screws and then the roller
bracket.
Clamps (5)
Roller Bracket
RD491
3) Remove the E-ring and then the three rollers, Spacers (2)
two spacers and roller shaft. Rollers (3)
E-ring
Roller Shaft
RD492
13. Drive Pulley Disassembly
1) Remove the two E-rings and then the two

gears.
E-rings (2)
Gears (2)
RD493
19-30
2) Remove the two E-rings and then the two

bearings and drive pulley. Ball Bearings (2)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Install the belts with their model mark surface

inside and glossy surface outside.
• Adjust belt position by following the steps below. E-rings (2) Drive Pulley
RD494
<Belt Position Adjustment>
1. Temporarily tighten the two pulley bracket screws.
2. Make sure all belt to pulley end distances are

more than 1mm as shown.
3. Tighten the two remaining screws securely.
Screws (2)
RD496
Removal Connector
Screw
1. Remove the sorter full sensor bracket

Clamps (11)
3. Remove the screw securing the clamp and

disconnect the connector from the sensor.
Clamp
4. Disconnect the M404 connector and remove the

harnesses from the eleven clamps.
19
M404 Connector
RD500
19-31
5. Disconnect the connector from the circuit board. Drive Motor Connector
Connector
7. Open the two clamps and disconnect the drive

motor connector.
Screw/
Grounding Wire Clamps
RD497
8. Open the clamp. Screws (2)

connector bracket. Clamp

RD498
10. Open the five clamps and remove the harness Plug-in Connector
from them. Screws (2)

connector from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Clamps (5)
RD499
19-32
19.3.1 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Densitometer

3. Disconnect the cable and remove the

densitometer.
Cable
CD213
4. Remove the six screws and then the dryer fan Dryer Fan Section Cover
section cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (6)
CD214
19.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement
Removal

2. Remove the three flat countersunk head screws. 19

NOTE: Be careful not to drop the screws.
Flat countersunk head screws (3)

RD272
19-33
3. Remove the four screws and the fan duct. Fan Duct
Screws (4)
RD273
4. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Grounding Wire Fan Connector
Screw Capacitor
6. Remove the screw securing the capacitor.
7. Disconnect the fan connector.
Clamps
Screw
CD217
8. Remove the two screws and then the fan. Fan (F405)
Screws (2)
RD274
19-34
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installing the fan and duct, tighten the screws
in the following order.
(1) Install the two fan screws lightly.

(2) Tighten the four fan duct screws.
(3) Tighten the three countersunk flat head screws.
(4) Tighten the two fan firmly.
RD275
19.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406) Replacement
Removal

2. Disconnect the heater and safety thermostat

connectors.
Heater Connectors
Safety Thermostat
Connector
3. Remove the five screws and then the heater/ Screws (5)
Safety Thermostat.
Installation

removal.
After installation, clear “Heater on time” on the Menu
0644 “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data”
19
Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406)

RD277
19-35
20. ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location ........................................................................................................ 20-2
20.1 Power Supply Input Section..................................................................... 20-5

20.1.1 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 20-5
20.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ......................................................... 20-5
20.1.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test.................................................................... 20-6
20.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement..................................................... 20-7
20.1.5 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement ........................................................ 20-7
20.1.6 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 20-8
20.1.7 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement.................................................................................. 20-9
20.1.8 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement .......................................................................... 20-9
20.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement .................................................... 20-10
20.1.10 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement.............................. 20-10
20.1.11 Step Down Transformer Replacement .................................................................. 20-12
20.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement........................................................................ 20-13
20.2 DC Power Supply Section ...................................................................... 20-14

20.2.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......................................................... 20-14
20.2.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation.............................................. 20-14
20.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................................ 20-15
20.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement ....................................................................... 20-16
20.2.5 DC Power Supply Replacement ............................................................................. 20-16
20.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment........................................................................................... 20-17
20.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section.............................................. 20-19

20.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing ................................ 20-19
20.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement .............................................. 20-19
20.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement........................................................... 20-21
20.3.4 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement.............. 20-22
20.3.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22/24 Circuit Board Replacement........................................... 20-23
20.3.6 GMB22/24 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................. 20-25
20.3.7 CTC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 20-26
20.3.8 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement ........................................................................... 20-26
20.3.9 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................................ 20-27
20.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................................ 20-28
20.3.11 Start Switch Replacement ...................................................................................... 20-28
20.4 Main Control Unit Section ...................................................................... 20-29

20.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement ............................................................................. 20-29
20.4.2 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement .................................................................... 20-31
20.5 Control Circuit Board Section................................................................ 20-33

20.5.1 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement................................................................... 20-33
20.5.2 CTP22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 20-33
20.5.3 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22/24 Circuit Board Discharged....... 20-34
20.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement ............................................ 20-36
20.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement .............................................. 20-37
20.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement ....................... 20-39
20
20-1
Parts Location
Power Supply Input Section
Terminal Block (TB4) Step Down

Transformer
Capacitors (C1 to C3)
Noise Filters 1 5 3 1
(NF1 to NF3) 1 6 4 2
Relays
2
2 (K1 to K6)
3
3
Built-in Circuit Breaker
(NFB1) SSR3 SSR2SSR1
Circuit Protectors
(CP1 to CP10)
1 2 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
2 3 4
11
Power Supply 12
14
13
Terminal
Block (TB1)
Terminal Block
Connection (TB2) Circuit Protectors
Leakage Breakers PAC22 Circuit Board
Label (CP11 to CP14)
(NFB2 to NFB4)
CD823-B
20-2
Parts Location
Printer Rear Section
Printer Exhaust Fans

GIA22 1/2 (F311/F312)
Circuit Board
Image Processing
Section Cooling
Fans 1/2 GHT22 LDD22 Circuit
(F217/F218) Circuit Board
Board
Printer Exhaust
Fan 2 (F313)
Start Switch
LDA22 Circuit
GPA22/24 Board
Circuit
Boards Printer Suction
Fans 1/2
CTC22 (F308/F309)
Circuit
GMB22/24 Board
Circuit Pulse Motor Driver
(F330)
Board
CTC24
Circuit Image Processing Circuit Board Section
Board
(F340)
Main
Control
Unit
Section
DC Power
Main Control Unit
Supply Section
DC
Power
Supply
PWR22 Circuit Board
LED Circuit Board

RD473
<Image Processing Circuit Board> 20

F330 Serial Number F340 Serial Number
GMB22+GPA22×4 Up to 8000 GMB24+GPA22×6 Up to 5000
GMB24+GPA24×2 8001 and after GMB24+GPA24×3 5001 and after
20-3
Parts Location
Processor Rear Section
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan Printer Control Section

(F406) Exhaust Fan (F317)
DTL24
Circuit Board
(F340 only)
PDC22 Circuit Board (F330)
Control Circuit
Board Section
CTP22 Circuit Board (F330)

Power Supply Section

Exhaust Fans 1
(F306/F307)
CD824
20-4
20.1 Power Supply Input Section
20.1.1 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Front Lower Cover

2. Remove the front upper cover.
3. Remove the nine screws and then the front lower

cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (9)
CD047
removal.
20.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement
Screws (2)
When servicing the electrical section parts, make
sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power
supply on the power distribution board are both set to
the OFF position. If the main power is left ON,
electricity will flow as far as the power supply section,
and this can cause electric shocks and/or short-
circuiting.
Removal
1. Remove the left-hand cover

2. Remove the four screws securing the breaker to Screws (4)

Bracket
the bracket.
CD149
3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket.
20
20-5
4. Remove the eight terminal screws to disconnect Screws (8)

Wires (8)
the wires from the built-in circuit breaker.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.
Bi1-4 Bi1-3 Bi1-2 Bi1-1
Bo1-4 Bo1-3 Bo1-2 Bo1-1 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1)

CD150
20.1.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test
NOTE: Perform the leakage breaker test once a month.
1. Remove the front lower cover Leakage Breaker (NFB2) NFB3

(see Subsection 20.1.1). NFB4

circuit breaker.
3. Confirm the leakage breaker turns OFF by

pressing the red button.
4. Reinstall the front lower and upper covers.
Red Button
CD143
20-6
20.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement

circuiting.
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove the front lower cover NFB2 NFB3 B4IL B4IN
2. Remove the terminal covers.
3. Loosen the four screws and disconnect the wires

from the breaker.
4. Remove the two screws and then the leakage

breaker.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Terminal

NFB4 B40L B40N Covers (2)
removal.
RD359
20.1.5 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement
Screws (2) (Remove)

circuiting.
Removal
20
2. Loosen the two screws, remove the other two Screws (2) (Loosen) Circuit Protector Bracket
screws and remove the circuit protector bracket. CD145
20-7
3. Disconnect the two wires from the circuit Wires

protector.
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the circuit

protector.
Installation

removal.
Locking Tabs
Circuit Protector
CD146
20.1.6 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

circuiting.
Removal Input Terminal

Block (TB1)
1. Remove: Wires Screws
• Left-hand cover (see Subsection 10.1.1).

• Front lower cover (see Subsection 20.1.1).
2. Remove the screw and the grounding wire.
3. Remove the screws and disconnect the power

supply wires from the input terminal block (TB1).
Bracket
4. Remove the four screws and pull out the power
supply section bracket.
Screw/Grounding Wire

removal.
20-8
20.1.7 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Connectors (6)
K3 K1
1. Remove the power supply section bracket
2. Disconnect the six connectors from the relay.
3. Remove the two screws and then the relay.

K2
Installation

removal.
K4
K5
K6
CD152
20.1.8 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement
Removal SSR3 SSR2

2. Remove the four screws and disconnect the four

wires from the SSR.
3. Remove the two screws and then the SSR.

SSR3
Installation
Screws (4)

removal.
Screws (2)
CD153
20
20-9
20.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement
Removal Screws (3) (Loosen)

2. Open the six clamps and remove the harnesses

from them.
3. Loosen the three screws, remove the other screw

and move the relay bracket.
Screw
(Remove)
Clamps (6)
CD154
4. Disconnect the wires from the circuit protector. Circuit Protector (CP11)
Locking Tabs
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the circuit
protector.
Installation

removal.
CP12
CP13
CP14
Wires
CD155
20.1.10 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement
Removal Bracket

3. Loosen the three screws and move the bracket.
Clamps
Screws (3)
CD156
20-10
4. Open the five clamps.
Clamps (5)
CD157
5. Remove the three terminal covers, loosen the six Screws (6)
screws and disconnect the six OUT wires from the
NFB2 to NFB4.
Terminal Covers (3) OUT Wires (6)

CD158
<Noise Filter>
6. Remove the four nuts and disconnect the wires

from the noise filter. Screws (2)
Noise Filter (NF1)
7. Remove the two screws and then the noise filter.
20
Nuts (4)
NF2
NF3
CD159
20-11
<Capacitor>
Screws
8. Remove the two nuts and disconnect the Capacitor
capacitor wires from the noise filter. Nuts (2)
9. Remove the screw and then the capacitor.
Installation

removal.
CD160
20.1.11 Step Down Transformer Replacement
Removal Screws (2) (Remove)

Screws (10)

2. Remove the ten terminal screws on the step down

transformer terminal block and disconnect the
wires.
3. Loosen the two screws, remove the other two

screws and then the transformer.
Screws (2)
(Loosen)
Wires
Installation CD161
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of 200N

removal.
200L 200V
210L 210V
220L 220V
230L 230V
240L 240V
100N1D
100N1U
100L1D 100V
100L1U
100N2-D
100N2-U
100L2-D 100V
100L2-U
200N2
200L2
20-12
20.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement

circuiting.
Removal Circuit Board Spacers (6)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the PAC22 circuit

board.
3. Release the locking tabs of the six circuit board

spacers and remove the circuit board.
Installation

PAC22 Circuit Board
removal.
CD147
20
20-13
20.2 DC Power Supply Section
20.2.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

2. Remove the eleven screws and then the printer

rear cover.
Reinstallation Screws (11)

removal.
Printer Rear Cover

RD340
20.2.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

circuiting.
Removal
1. Remove the printer rear cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the main control

unit section harness cover.
Main Control Unit Section Harness Cover Screws (2)

RD341
20-14
3. Remove the three screws and pull out the DC

power supply bracket.
NOTE: Open the harness clamps if necessary.
DC Power Supply Section Bracket

Screws (3)
CD164
NOTE: Place the bracket on a suitable block to keep it

to the installed height.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the wire harness between

the harness cover and the frame.
Block
CD875
20.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the DC power supply bracket Screws (4) LED Circuit Board
2. Disconnect the two connectors from the LED

circuit board.

board.
Installation 20
removal.
Connectors
CD165
20-15
20.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal PWR22 Circuit Board
1. Remove the DC power supply bracket

3. Remove the thirteen screws and then the circuit

board.
Installation

removal.
Screws (13)
CD166
20.2.5 DC Power Supply Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the DC power supply bracket

2. Disconnect all connectors from the PWR22 circuit

board and DC power supplies.
Connectors
RD342
3. Remove the seven screws and then the DC power

supply bracket.
DC Power Supply Bracket

Screws (7)
CD168
20-16
4. Remove the four screws and then the DC power M4×8 Screws (2) M4×6 Screws (6)
supply from the bracket. Toothed Washers (2)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Use the toothed washers for the M4×8 screws.

• Replace the wire harnesses from the old unit to
the new unit one by one.
• After installation, adjust DC voltages
CD169
20.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment
• DC power supply bracket

• Processor rear cover (see Subsection 16.3.1).
2. Remove the seven screws securing the DC power

supply bracket.
CD874
3. Place a 2 cm spacer under the DC power supply Spacer

bracket to raise the bracket. (Approximately 2cm)
20
CD876
20-17

circuit breaker to start up the system.
5. Measure the voltage at the points shown in the

“DC Voltage Check List” (see Subsection 21.7.1).
A+12V
A+24V A+20V P+5V +24V3
NOTE: Make sure all LED’s on the PWR22 circuit board A+13V +24V0
A+5V
light up before voltage measurement.
6. Adjust the voltage by turning the VR on the DC

power supply.
7. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main

D+3.3V A–13V A–12V P+8V +24V2
power supply. A+8V D+5V A–5V +24V1 +24V4
VR Location
8. Reinstall the removed parts. CD170
20-18
20.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section
20.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
Opening
1. Remove the printer rear cover Screws (4)


board bracket.
Closing
Close the bracket in the reverse order of opening.
Circuit Bracket
RD343
20.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement

circuiting.
Removal Manual Film Carrier

Auto Film Carrier
Lock Lever
Release Lever
2. Remove the two screws and then the manual film

3. Remove the screw and then the auto film carrier

lock lever.
4. Move the densitometer. Screw 20

Screws (2)
CD671
20-19
5. Remove the five screws and then the small Screws (5)
tabletop cover.

RD344
6. Remove the five screws and then the fan bracket.
Fan Bracket Screws (5)

RD345
7. Disconnect the F311 and F312 connectors. Connectors
8. Open the clamp and remove the fan connectors

Screws (2)
from the bracket.
9. Remove two screws each and then the fan guard

and the fan.
Clamp
Fan Guard
Fan
Fan Guard Screws (2)
Fan
CD175
20-20
Installation Arrow

removal.
NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan to the outside.
CD176
20.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement
Screws (Loosen)
circuiting.
Removal

2. Loosen the two screws, remove the other one

Fan Bracket Screw (Remove)
screw and then the fan bracket.
RD346
3. Disconnect the fan connector. Screws (2) Connector
4. Open the clamp and remove the fan connector

from the bracket. Fan Connector
5. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard.
Fan Guard
20
Clamp
CD178
20-21
6. Remove the two screws, then the fan and fan

guard from the bracket.
Fan
(F313)
Fan Guard
Screws (2)
CD179
Installation

removal. Arrow
NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to the outside.
Outside
CD180
20.3.4 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement
Screws (2)
When servicing the electrical section parts, make Fan Cover
circuiting.
Removal
1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket Connectors

RD347
2. Disconnect the two connectors.
3. Remove the two screws and then the fan cover.
20-22
4. Remove the fan connectors from the fan cover. Fan Cover Connectors

Fan (F217)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow pointing up.
Screws (2)
Fan (F218) Screws (2)

RD348
20.3.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22/24 Circuit Board Replacement
Fan Connectors
When servicing the electrical section parts, make Clamp
circuiting.
Removal
1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket Connectors (5)

2. Disconnect the five connectors from the circuit

CD1089
board box.
3. Disconnect the two fan connectors and open the

clamp.
4. Loosen the four screws and remove the circuit Circuit Board Box
board box from the bracket.
20
Screws (4)
RD349
20-23
5. Remove the thirteen screws and then the circuit Circuit Board Box Cover
board box cover.
Screws (13)
CD1090
6. Loosen the two screws and then the circuit board Screws (2)
holder.
Circuit Board Holder
RD350
7. Release the locks and remove the circuit boards. Locks Connector
8. Disconnect the connector from the GHT22 circuit

board.
GPA22/24 GHT22
GIA22 Circuit Board
Circuit Boards
Circuit Board
CD185
20-24
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Connect the harness connector to the GHT22

circuit board securely.
• Insert each circuit board into the connector on the
GMB22/24 circuit board securely.
GHT22
Circuit
Board
Locks Connector
CD1091
• Align the GPA22/24, GIA22 and GHT22 circuit Circuit Board

boards with the grooves in the circuit board holder Holder
and install the holder while depressing it lightly.
• Install the system software when the GHT22

circuit board has been replaced (see Section 4.3).
GPA22/24 GIA22 GHT22

Circuit Boards Circuit Board Circuit Board
RD351
20.3.6 GMB22/24 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (12)
1. Remove the GHT22, GIA22 and GPA22/24 circuit

boards (see Subsection 20.3.5).
2. Remove the twelve screws and then the GMB22/

24 circuit board.
Installation

20
removal.
GMB22/24 Circuit Board

CD187
20-25
20.3.7 CTC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement

circuiting.
Removal
1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket Screws (9)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the CTC22/24

circuit board.
3. Remove the nine screws and then the circuit board.
Installation

removal.
After installation, perform followings.
1) System software reinstallation (see Section 4.3). CTC22/24 Circuit Board
2) Menu 0351 “LED Light Amount Adjustment” CD188
20.3.8 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement
Connector Motor Driver

circuiting.
Removal
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see Subsection 20.2.1).
2. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors.
3. Remove the two screws and then the motor driver.
Screws (2)
Installation RD352
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.
20-26
20.3.9 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (2) (Loosen)

Screw (Remove)
1. Remove the F313 fan bracket

2. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors from the

motor driver and open the four clamps.

screw and then the cover.
Cover
Connector Clamps (4)

RD353
4. Disconnect the R, G and B cables and all B Cable R Cable

G Cable Screws (2)
connectors from the circuit board.
Installation

removal.
LDA22 Circuit Board

CD191
20
20-27
20.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (7)
1. Remove the LDA22 circuit board Spacers (6)

3. Remove the seven screws and six spacers, then

the circuit board. LDD22
Circuit
Board
Installation

removal.
CD192
20.3.11 Start Switch Replacement
Removal POSW Connector Locking Tabs
1. Remove the F313 fan bracket

2. Disconnect the POSW connector.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the start

switch.
Installation

removal.
Start Switch
RD354
20-28
20.4 Main Control Unit Section
20.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement

circuiting.
Removal Main Control Unit
1. Remove:
• Left cover (see Subsection 10.1.1).

2. Pull the main control unit slightly toward the left-

Cables
hand side.
3. Disconnect all cables from the main control unit.
4. Remove the main control unit.
RD356
Installation
1. Insert the main control unit from the left-hand side

halfway.
Main Control Unit

RD357
20
20-29
2. Connect the cables to the main control unit in the <F340 and F330 Serial Number 8001 and after>
order listed below. (1) Keyboard Cable (2) Mouse Cable
(1) Keyboard cable (5) UPS Serial Cable

(optional) (COM2)
(2) Mouse cable
(10) Power
(3) USB-A cables Supply
(4) PC Ethernet cable Cable
(5) COM2-UPS serial cable (4) PC
(6) COM1 cable Ethernet
(7) PC2 cable Cable
(8) CRT cable (9) Power

(9) PCON cable Control
Serial
(10) Power supply cable (3) USB-A Cables Cable
(PCON)
(8) To Monitor
NOTE: Always connect the COM2 - UPS cable (optional) to (CRT Cable)
the COM2 (upper) connector. If it is connected to the (7) SCSI Cable
COM1 (lower) connector, the system will shut down (6) To Outside to Image
after starting up the OS. (COM1 Cable) Processing
Section (PC2)
RD017
<F330 Serial Number up to 8000>
(2) Mouse Cable
(5) UPS Serial Cable
(1) Keyboard (optional) (COM2)
Cable
(10) Power Supply
Cable
(4) PC Ethernet
Cable
(9) Power Control

Serial Cable
(PCON)
(3) USB-A
Cable
(6) To Outside (7) SCSI Cable to

(COM1 Cable) (8) To Monitor Image Processing
(CRT Cable) Section (PC2)
CD969
3. Make sure the power switch on the main control

unit is ON.
4. Push the main control unit all the way in.
5. Install the system software (see Section 4.4).
Main Control Unit

RD358
20-30
20.4.2 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Loosen the two screws and then the battery cover.
Battery Cover
CD060
2. Remove the UPS battery from the battery cover. UPS Battery
Installation
1. Install a new UPS battery to the battery cover.
Battery Cover
CD061
2. Install the UPS battery/cover to the main control UPS Battery/Cover

unit and tighten the two screws.
3. When an UPS battery has been newly installed,

proceed to the following “UPS Setup”.
Screws (2)
CD062
20
20-31
<UPS Setup>
1) Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “10 Special

Operations” → “B Explorer”.
2) Double-click “Control Panel”.
3) Double-click “RICHO UPS Service”.
4) Click [start] when optional UPS battery is used.

Click [stop] when no optional UPS battery is used.
5) Click [exit].
6) Close “Explorer”.
20-32
20.5 Control Circuit Board Section
20.5.1 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement

circuiting.
Removal Screws (12)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the PDC22/24

circuit board.
3. Remove the twelve screws and then the circuit

board.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of PDC22/24 Circuit Board

removal. CD249
20.5.2 CTP22/24 Circuit Board Replacement
Screws (12) Lithium Battery

circuiting.
Removal

CTP22/24 Circuit Board 20
2. Disconnect all connectors from the CTP22/24 CD250
circuit board.
3. Remove the twelve screws and then the circuit

board.
20-33
• When the CTP22/24 circuit board needs replacing,

always replace its assembly entirely.
• Do not try to replace the lithium battery for data
backup. Incorrect battery replacement may cause
an explosion.
• Return the old CTP22/24 circuit board to
FUJIFILM’s factory.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Change the jumper plug (J2) from 1-2 (OFF) to 2-3
(Backup).
After installation, reinstall the system software

(see Section 4.3).
NOTE: If the system does not start up, proceed to “Start Up

Procedure When Battery on CTP22/24 Circuit Jumper Plug J2 CTP22/24 Circuit Board
Board Discharged” (see Subsection 20.5.3).
CD064
20.5.3 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22/24 Circuit Board Discharged.
NOTE: If the machine does not start up due to discharged

backup battery, follow the steps below to start up.
1. Remove the processor rear cover Battery

2. Measure the voltage between the TP17 (GND)

and the battery positive (+) terminal on the
CTP22/24 circuit board.
CTP22/24 Circuit Board

CD970
20-34
3. If the voltage is less than 2.5V, remove the front PAC22 Circuit Board Jumper Connector
lower cover (see Subsection 21.1.1).
4. Disconnect the jumper connector from the PAC18

connector on the PAC22 circuit board and connect
it to the PAC19 connector.
PAC18
PAC19
CD077
5. Press the start switch to start up the machine. PAC18 PAC19
6. After starting up the machine, return the jumper

connector to the PAC18 connector.
8. In the menu 0558 “Data Download” screen, select

“All” and click [OK].
Jumper Connector
CD078
20
20-35
20.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement
Connector Cover
circuiting.
Removal
1. Remove:

• Dryer fan section cover (see Subsection 19.3.1). Screws (2)
RD135
cover.
3. Disconnect the F406 connector and open the F406 Connector

clamp.
Clamp
CD252
4. Remove the two screws, then the fan guard and Fan (F406) Fan Guard
the fan.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan to the outside.
Screws (2)
Arrow
CD253
20-36
20.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement
Connector Cover
circuiting.
Removal
1. Remove:

• Dryer fan section cover (see Subsection 19.3.1). Screws (2)
RD135
cover.
3. Disconnect the F317 connector and open the

clamp.
F317 Connector Clamp

CD254
4. Remove the three screws and then the fan Fan Bracket Screws (3)
bracket.
20
CD255
20-37
5. Remove the two screws, then the fan guard and Fan Guard
fan.
Screws (2)
Installation CD256
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Screws (2)

removal.
NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan outward.

Fan Guard
Fan (F317)
Arrow
CD257
20-38
20.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement
Fan Bracket
circuiting.
Removal

Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and then the fan bracket.
CD258
3. Disconnect the F306 and F307 connectors. F307 F306
CD259
4. Open the clamp. Arrow

Fan Guard
5. Remove the four screws, then the fan guard and Fan (F307)
the fan.
Installation

Clamp
removal.
NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to the outside.

Fan (F306) 20
Screws (4)
CD260
20-39
21. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
21.1 I/O Parts Diagram ...................................................................................... 21-2

21.1.1 Scanner Section ........................................................................................................ 21-2
21.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC...................................................................................... 21-4
21.1.3 Printer Section ........................................................................................................... 21-6
21.1.4 Processor Section ..................................................................................................... 21-9
21.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams ........................... 21-12
21.2.1 Input Power Supply Section ................................................................................... 21-12
21.2.2 Printer Rear Section ................................................................................................ 21-13
21.2.3 Processor Rear Section .......................................................................................... 21-14
21.2.4 Scanner Section ...................................................................................................... 21-15
21.3 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 21-16
21.4 Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................... 21-17

21.4.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ......................................................................... 21-17
21.4.2 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................................................................... 21-18
21.4.3 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram....................................................... 21-20
21.4.4 CTC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram............................................................... 21-21
21.4.5 CTP22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ............................................................... 21-24
21.4.6 LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.................................................................... 21-27
21.4.7 LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 21-28
21.4.8 PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................................................................... 21-29
21.4.9 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram ......................................................................... 21-30
21.4.10 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram............................................................... 21-31
21.4.11 PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................... 21-33
21.4.12 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit).................................................... 21-34
21.4.13 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System) ............. 21-35
21.4.14 Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................................................ 21-36
21.4.15 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram ........................................................ 21-37
21.5 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams.............................................................. 21-38

21.5.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 21-38
21.5.2 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 21-42
21.6 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit......... 21-57
21.6.1 DC Power System.................................................................................................... 21-57
21.6.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board ......................... 21-60
21.6.3 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22/24 Circuit Board .................... 21-60
21.6.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22/24 Circuit Board..................... 21-61
21.6.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22/24 Circuit Board..................... 21-62
21.6.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board.......................... 21-63
21.7 DC Voltage Adjustment .......................................................................... 21-65

21.7.1 DC Voltage Check List ............................................................................................ 21-65
21.7.2 Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages......................... 21-67
21
21-1
21.1 I/O Parts Diagram
21.1.1 Scanner Section
PZ201,
PZ202
Microswitch
Photo Interrupter
Motor
Fan
Temperature Sensor
21-2
Symbol Name Remark Diagram Addresse

D121 IX240 carrier position sensor Microswitch See 21.4.4(2/3)-2G
D122 135 carrier position sensor Microswitch See 21.4.4(2/3)-3G
D123 Carrier sensor Microswitch See 21.4.4(2/3)-2B
D201 135 diffusion box sensor Microswitch See 21.4.4(3/3)-6B
D202 120 diffusion box sensor Microswitch See 21.4.4(3/3)-6B
D203 Light source temperature sensor Thermistor See 21.4.4(3/3)-1C
D211 Conjugate length variable home position sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.4(1/3)-1G
D212 Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.4(1/3)-1G
D213 Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.4(1/3)-2G
D214 Lens home position sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.4(1/3)-2H
D215 Shutter home position sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.4(1/3)-2H
F201 Light source cooling fan Scirocco fan (with signal D204) See 21.4.4(1/3)-3F
F216 Scanner cooling fan (With signal D216) See 21.4.4(1/3)-4F
LH201 Peltier element For temperature control (40°C) See 21.4.4(3/3)-2C
M201 Conjugate length variable motor Pulse motor See 21.4.4(1/3)-5F
M202 Lens drive motor Pulse motor See 21.4.4(1/3)-5G
M203 Shutter drive motor Pulse motor See 21.4.4(1/3)-6G
PZ201 Piezoelectric actuator 1 (Pixel shifting) See 21.4.11-8C
PZ202 Piezoelectric actuator 2 (Pixel shifting) See 21.4.11-9C
21
21-3
21.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC
Microswitch
Photo Interrupter
Switch
Motor
Solenoid
Magnetic Head
LED Indicator
Phototransistor
21-4
Symbol Name Remark Diagram Address

D101 135 leading end sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-5B/10G
D102 135 upstream perforation sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-4B/9G
D103 135 downstream perforation sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-8B/8G
D104 IX240 TAP and leading end sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-7B/10G
D105 IX240 perforation sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-6B/8G
D106 135 check tape sensor LED/Phototransistor See 21.4.15-4B/9G
D107 135 frame sensor LED array/Photodiode See 21.4.15-11G/5B
D108 IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor LED/Photodiode See 21.4.15-7B/9G
D109 IX240 front unexposed frame sensor LED/Photodiode See 21.4.15-7B/9G
D110 135 rear fogging sensor LED/Photodiode See 21.4.15-4B/9G
D111 135 front fogging sensor LED/Photodiode See 21.4.15-4B/9G
D112 Door open/close sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.15-2A
D113 IPI sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.15-3A
D114 Supply motor home position sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.15-2A
D115 Cartridge sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.15-2A
D116 Magnetic reading head Magnetic head See 21.4.15-7G
D117 Mask motor home position sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.15-8B
D118 135 lower mask H sensor Microswitch See 21.4.15-9B
D119 135 lower mask F sensor Microswitch See 21.4.15-9B
D120 Upper cover open/close sensor Microswitch See 21.4.15-9B
D124 Input key 1 (<) Key switch See 21.4.15-9B
D125 Input key 2 (<<) Key switch See 21.4.15-9B
D126 Input key 3 '>>) Key switch See 21.4.15-9B
D127 Input key 4 (>) Key switch See 21.4.15-9B
L101 Indicator lamp Red/Green LED See 21.4.15-10B
M101 Feed motor Pulse motor See 21.4.15-3F
M102 Supply motor Pulse motor See 21.4.15-5F
M103 Mask motor Pulse motor See 21.4.15-4F
M104 Door motor Pulse motor See 21.4.15-6F
MG101 Magnetic writing head Magnetic head See 21.4.15-8G
S101 Pressure solenoid Solenoid See 21.4.15-5F
21
21-5
21.1.3 Printer Section
THA20
Microswitch Solenoid
Photo Interrupter Phototransistor
Switch Fan
Motor Temperature Sensor
CD829
21-6

D301 Paper splice sensor LED/Phototransistor (Supply section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-1B
D302 Back printer entrance sensor LED/Phototransistor (Feed section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-3B
D303 Register sensor LED/Phototransistor (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-5C
D304 Pre-exposure sensor LED/Phototransistor (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-8B
D305 Processor entry sensor LED/Phototransistor (Exit section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-10B
D306 Magazine ID sensor 0 Photo interrupter (Supply section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-2B
D311 Paper end sensor Photo interrupter (Supply section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-2B
D312 Cutter home position sensor 1 Photo interrupter (Supply section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-8G
D313 Cutter home position sensor 2 Photo interrupter (Supply section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-8G
D314 Width detecting sensor LED/Phototransistor (Registration section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-6A
D315 Width detecting home position sensor Photo interrupter (Registration section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-7C
D316 Register nip home position sensor Photo interrupter (Registration section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-7C
D317 Sub-scanning nip home position sensor Photo interrupter (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-9B
D319 Feed nip home position sensor Photo interrupter (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-4B
D320 Back printer set sensor Microswitch (Feed section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-4B
D321 Exit section up/down belt home position sensor Photo interrupter (Exit section) See 21.4.5(2/3)-11B
D322 Magazine door detecting interlock switch Microswitch (Feed section) See 21.4.2(2/2)-1C
D323 Feed section lower door sensor Microswitch (Feed section) See 21.4.2(2/2)-2C
D324 Feed section upper door sensor Microswitch (Feed section) See 21.4.2(2/2)-2C
D325 Front upper cover sensor Microswitch (Feed section) See 21.4.2(2/2)-1C
F217 Image processing section cooling fan 1 With signal D217 (Image processing section) See 21.4.4(1/3)-7F
F218 Image processing section cooling fan 2 With signal D218 (Image processing section) See 21.4.4(1/3)-7F
F301 Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-5B
F306 Power supply section exhaust fan 1 (Processor rear lower) See 21.4.8-9F
F307 Power supply section exhaust fan 2 (Processor rear lower) See 21.4.8-9F
F308 Printer suction fan 1 (Printer left-hand side rear) See 21.4.10(2/2)-9B
F309 Printer suction fan 2 (Printer left-hand side rear) See 21.4.10(2/2)-9B
F310 Printer suction fan 3 (Printer front lower) See 21.4.10(2/2)-10B
F311 Printer exhaust fan 1 (Printer rear upper) See 21.4.10(2/2)-11B
F313 Printer exhaust fan 2 (Printer rear left-hand side) See 21.4.10(2/2)-11B
F314 Laser unit cooling fan Scirocco fan(Printer left-hand side middle) See 21.4.6-3B
F315 Printer exhaust fan 3 (Printer left-hand side upper) See 21.4.10(2/2)-9B
FAN1 Anti-dust fan 1 (On laser unit) See 21.4.13-9E
M301 Paper supply motor Pulse motor (Supply section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-1B 21
M302 Feed drive motor 1 Pulse motor (Feed section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-2B
M303 Feed drive motor 2 Pulse motor (Feed section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-8B
M304 Register drive motor Pulse motor (Registration section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-2B
21-7

M305 Sub-scanning drive motor Pulse motor (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-6H
M306 Exit drive motor Pulse motor (Exit section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-10G
M307 Cutter drive motor Pulse motor (On cutter) See 21.4.10(2/2)-9F
M309 Register nip motor Pulse motor (Registration section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-3B
M310 Width detecting drive motor Pulse motor (Registration section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-4B
M311 Sub-scanning nip motor Pulse motor (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-5B
M313 Feed nip motor Pulse motor (Feed section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-8B
M314 Exit section up/down belt motor Pulse motor (Exit section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-11G
S301 Back printer drive solenoid 1 (Feed section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-6B
S302 Back printer drive solenoid 2 (Feed section) See 21.4.10(2/2)-7B
START Start switch (Printer left-hand side) See 21.4.5(2/3)-9C
THA20 Exposure section temperature sensor (Sub-scanning section) See 21.4.6-4G
21-8
21.1.4 Processor Section
D416
Microswitch Pump
Photo Interrupter
Solution Level Sensor
Motor
Safety Thermostat
Solenoid
Heater
Fan
Buzzer
Temperature Sensor Leak Sensor

21
RD521
21-9

BZ401 Sorter full buzzer (Sorter) See 21.4.10(1/2)-6H
D401 P1 safety thermostat (P1 heater) See 21.4.8-2C
D402 P2 safety thermostat (P2 heater) See 21.4.8-2C
D403 PS1/2/3 safety thermostat (PS1/2/3 heater) See 21.4.8-2C
D404 PS4 safety thermostat (PS4 heater) See 21.4.8-3C
D406 Dryer section safety thermostat (Dryer heater) See 21.4.8-1B
D407 Cartridge setting sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.5(1/3)-1F
D408 Cartridge box upper sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.5(1/3)-1F
D409 Cartridge box lower sensor Photo interrupter See 21.4.5(1/3)-2F
D410 Replenisher door detecting interlock switch Microswitch See 21.4.2(2/2)-3C
D411 Dryer section exit sensor Photo interrupter See 21.3.2(1/3)-3G
D414 Sorter flapper position sensor (F340) Photo interrupter See 21.4.10(1/2)-7H
D416 Belt feed section detecting interlock switch Microswitch See 21.4.2(2/2)-3C
D417 Dryer unit open/close detecting interlock switch Microswitch See 21.4.2(2/2)-3D
F317 Control section cooling fan (Processor rear-upper side) See 21.4.10(1/2)-1F
F401 P1/2 processing tank heater cooling fan (Processor front left-hand side) See 21.4.10(1/2)-6B
F402 PS processing tank heater cooling fan (Processor front right-hand side) See 21.4.10(1/2)-6B
F403 Processing tank heater cooling fan (Processor right-hand front) See 21.4.10(1/2)-7B
F405 Dryer fan Cross flow fan See 21.4.1-11G
F406 Processing tank exhaust fan (Processor rear upper) Scirocco fan See 21.4.1-7B
FS401 P1 solution level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-3B
FS402 P2 solution level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-3B
F340: Float switch
FS403 PS1 solution level sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-4B
F330: Fluorine resin sensor
F340: Float switch
F340: Float switch
F340: Float switch
FS407 P1R upper level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-5B
FS408 P2RA upper level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-6B
FS409 P2RB upper level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-7B
FS410 PSR upper level sensor Float switch See 21.4.5(1/3)-8B
FS411 P1R lower level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-6B
FS412 P2RA lower level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-6B
FS413 P2RB lower level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-7B
FS414 PSR lower level sensor Float switch See 21.4.5(1/3)-8B
FS415 Waste solution level sensor Fluorine resin sensor See 21.4.5(1/3)-8B
FS421 Leak sensor (F340) See 21.4.5(1/3)-9G
H401 P1 solution heater Casting heater See 21.4.8-4C
H402 P2 solution heater Casting heater See 21.4.8-4C
PS1/2/3 solution heater (F340)
H403 Casting heater See 21.4.8-3C
PS1/2 solution heater (F330)
PS4 solution heater (F340)
H404 Casting heater See 21.4.8-3C
PS3/4 solution heater (F330)
H406 Dryer section heater See 21.4.1-11C/11D
21-10

M401 Processor drive motor DC motor See 21.4.10(1/2)-2G
M402 Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor DC motor See 21.4.10(1/2)-5F
Sorter belt drive motor (F340) See 21.4.10(1/2)-7H
M403 Pulse motor
Sorter belt drive motor (F330) See 21.4.10(1/2)-4G
M404 Sorter flapper drive motor DC motor See 21.4.10(1/2)-6H
PU401 P1 circulation pump AC Pump See 21.4.8-7B
PU402 P2 circulation pump AC Pump See 21.4.8-8B
PU403 PS1 circulation pump AC Pump See 21.4.8-8B
PU407 Auto washing pump DC Pump See 21.4.10(1/2)-5F
PU408 P1R replenisher pump AC bellows Pump See 21.4.8-6B
PU409 P2RA replenisher pump AC bellows Pump See 21.4.8-6B
PU410 P2RB replenisher pump AC bellows Pump See 21.4.8-6B
PU411 PSR replenisher pump AC bellows Pump See 21.4.8-7B
S401 P1 rack auto-washing valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-8F
S402 P2 rack auto-washing valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-8F
PS1/2/3 rack auto-washing valve (F340)
S403 Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-8F
PS1/2 rack auto-washing valve (F330)
(Not used) (F340)
S404 Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-9F
PS3/4 rack auto-washing valve (F330)
S407 P1R cartridge washing valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-9F
S408 P2RA cartridge washing valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-9F
S409 P2RB cartridge washing valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-10F
S410 P1R stirring valve Solenoid valve See 21.4.10(1/2)-10F
TS401 P1 processing tank temperature sensor Thermistor See 21.4.5(1/3)-1B
TS402 P2 processing tank temperature sensor Thermistor See 21.4.5(1/3)-1B
PS1/2/3 processing tank temperature sensor (F340)
TS403 Thermistor See 21.4.5(1/3)-2B
PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor (F330)
PS4 processing tank temperature sensor (F340)
TS404 Thermistor See 21.4.5(1/3)-2B
PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor (F330)
TS406 Dryer temperature sensor Thermistor See 21.4.5(1/3)-3B
21
21-11
21.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
21.2.1 Input Power Supply Section
Terminal Block (TB4) Step Down

Transformer
Capacitors (C1 to C3)
Noise Filters 1 5 3 1
(NF1 to NF3) 1 6 4 2
Relays
2
2 (K1 to K6)
3
3
Built-in Circuit Breaker
Top View SSR3 SSR2SSR1
(NFB1)
Circuit Protectors
(CP1 to CP10)
1 2 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
2 3 4
11
Power Supply 12
14
13
Terminal
Block (TB1)
Terminal Block
Connection (TB2) Circuit Protectors
Leakage Breakers PAC22 Circuit Board
Label (CP11 to CP14)
(NFB2 to NFB4)
CD823B
21-12
21.2.2 Printer Rear Section
Printer Exhaust Fans

GIA22 1/2 (F311/F312)
Circuit Board
Image Processing
Section Cooling
Fans 1/2 GHT22 LDD22 Circuit
(F217/F218) Circuit Board
Board
Printer Exhaust
Fan 2 (F313)
Start Switch
GPA22/24 LDA22 Circuit

Circuit Board
Boards
(F330: 4 to 6/2) Printer Suction
(F340: 6/3) Fans 1/2
(F308/F309)
Pulse Motor Driver

GMB22/24 for M305
Circuit CTC22
Image Processing Circuit Board Section
Board Circuit
Board (F330)
CTC24
Circuit
Board (F340) Main
Control
Unit
Section
Top View
DC Power
Supply Section Main Control Unit
DC
Power
Supply
PWR22 Circuit Board
LED Circuit Board
21
RD473
21-13
21.2.3 Processor Rear Section
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan Printer Control Section

(F406) Exhaust Fan (F317)
DTL24
Circuit Board
(F340 only)

Control Circuit
Board Section


Exhaust Fans 1/2
(F306/F307)
CD824
21-14
<Scanner Section Rear View>
ADC22 Circuit Board
PZR22 Circuit Board
LTC22 Circuit Board
21
CD825
21-15
PWR22
Circuit Board Image Processing Section
(See 18.4.2)
Scanner Section
AOM-G
LDA22 Laser Unit
CCD22 Circuit Board (See 18.4.12)
AOM-B (See 18.4.13)
Circuit Board (See 18.4.12)
(See 18.4.3)
GIA22 Circuit Board

GPA22/24 Circuit Board
GPA22 Circuit Board
GPA22 Circuit Board
GPA22 Circuit Board
LED24 ADC22
Circuit Board Circuit Board LDD22
Circuit Board JML22
(See 18.4.6) Circuit Board
GMB22/24 Circuit Board (See 18.4.12)
(See 18.4.14) (See 18.4.12)
LTC22 Lens
21.3 Block Diagram
Circuit Board PZR22

(See 18.4.7) Circuit Board
(See 18.4.11) GHT22 Circuit Board
DTL24 Circuit Board

PWR22 Circuit Board (F340 only)
(See 18.4.2) (See 18.4.5)
21-16
CTC22/24 Circuit Board CTP22/24 Circuit Board
(Carrier and Scanner Control) (Printer and Processor Control)
(See 18.4.4) (See 18.4.5)
Main Control Unit Interlock

(See 18.4.9) Information
Monitor Printer and

PDC22/24 PAC22
Processor Sensors Power
Circuit Board Circuit Board
Supply
(DC Driver) (AC Driver) Interlock Section
(See 18.4.10) (See 18.4.8) Information
CYS22 (See 18.4.1)

Circuit Board Manual Film
(Auto Film Carrier Carrier M69D Mouse PWR22
NC100AC) Keyboard Circuit Board
(See 18.4.15) (See 18.4.2)
Motors Heaters
Densitometer Solenoids Pumps
Fans Dryer Fan
21.4 Wiring Diagrams
21.4.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ORG
A Electrical Wiring Diagram BLK
BLK BLK
WHT WHT
Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram

ORG
(for a Three-phase Four-wire System)
BLK BLK
BLK BLK
WHT
WHT WHT
B RED RED YEL BLK
ORG ORG WHT BLK
BRN BRN YEL BLK WHT
BLU BLK To the DC power
BLU WHT BLK RED
supply unit
WHT WHT BLK
BLK
WHT To the dryer heater A
GRN/YEL (H405)
C
RED
BLK
Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram To the dryer heater B

(for a Single-phase System) (H405)
D BLK BLK
WHT WHT
RED RED BLK BLK
YEL
BLK
ORG ORG WHT WHT
YEL
WHT
BRN BRN BLK BLK
YEL
BLU BLU WHT WHT BLK BLK Panel
BLK
WHT WHT
E ORG
WHT
BLK
GRN/YEL To the PC (100 VAC)
GRN/YEL
BLK BLK BLK
ORG
WHT WHT WHT Solution heater A
( ) BLK
ORG BLK
WHT
Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram BLK
F (for a Three-phase Three-wire System)
BLK BLK
BLK BLK Solution heater B
WHT WHT WHT ( )
WHT
RED RED YEL BLK
BLK RED
ORG YEL WHT
ORG WHT
YEL Panel BLK
BRN BRN BLK
BLK BLK
BLU BLU WHT
WHT WHT Dryer fan
G Transformer
(F405)
BLK
WHT To the 100 VAC-related loads in
the PAC circuit board
GRN/YEL
Panel
H
21-17
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-18
21.4.2
3.3V D+3.3V1 Vcc(D+5V1) VCC(FU1)
(RED) GND-3.3D (RED)
GND Vcc(D+5V1) VCC(FU1)
(BLK) D+3.3V2 (RED) D322
3.3V D322
1
(RED) GND-3.3D (GRY) D323
GND D323
(BLK) D+3.3V3 D324A/D324B (GRY) D324
3.3V (RED) (GRY)
GND GND-3.3D D325A/D325B D325
BOX2
BOX2
(BLK) D+3.3V4 (GRY) D416
3.3V D416A/D416B
PWR6
PWR6
(RED) (GRY)
GND GND-3.3D D410 D410
(BLK) (GRY)
PWR1
PWR1
Image Processing BOX

3.3V D+3.3V5 +24V2_on/off N.C PINSP1
CTP10
CTP10
GND (RED) GND-3.3D +24V3_on/off (GRY) N.C PINSP2
(GRY)
1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10
(BLK) N.C N.C 24VON
+24V4_on/off
N.C GND-3.3D N.C
(GRY) N,C PONSP1
(GRY)
1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12
GND(DGND) PONSP2
GND(DGND) (BLK) N.C PONSP3
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
GND
GND
CTP22/24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516
A+20V A+20V
(RED) (RED) (RED) GND-20A 21.4 Wiring Diagrams
2
GND-20A D+5V1 D+5V
2 1
1 2
1 2
1 8
1 8
(BLK) (BLK) (RED)
N.C (BLK)N.C A+12V1 GND-D5 DGND
1 3
N.C N.C A+12V2 (BLK)
D+5V2 N,C
GND-12A GND-12A D+5V2 N,C
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) A-12V1
A-12V1
JSA8
D+5V3 N,C
3 4
3 4
2 9
JSA8
2 9
CCD2
(BLU)
CCD2
CCD2
(BLU)
CTP11
CTP11
(BLU) N.C A-12V2
N.C N.C D+5V3 N,C
PWR7
PWR7
A+5V A+5V D+5V1 D+5V
(RED) (RED) (RED) GND-5A (RED)
GND-5A (BLK) (BLK) GND-5D DGND
(BLK)
2 4
A-5V A-5V GND-5D N,C (BLK)
3 4 5 6 7 8
5 6 7
5 6 7
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU) N.C A+20V
JSA5
GND-5D
JSA5
N,C
PWR9
PWR9
1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10
N.C N.C N.C GND-20A
A+12V1
3 4 10 11 5
3 4 10 11 5
(RED)N.C A+12V2
GND-12A
N.C N.C (BLK) N.C A-12V1
6 12
6 12
N.C A-12V2
A+5V
(RED) GND-5A Vcc(D+5V2) Vcc
3
(BLK) A-5V (RED)
Vcc(D+5V2) Vcc
(BLU) (RED)
7 13 14
7 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A12V +24V1_on/off +24V1_on/off
(RED) (GRY)
GND P+9V_on/off P+9V_on/off
PWR2
PWR2
CTC5
CTC5
(BLK) P+5V2_on/off (GRY) P+5V2_on/off
N.C N.C
A5V GND(DGND) (GRY) GND(DGND)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
ADC2
ADC2
(RED) (BLK)
ADC2
GND
A-5V (BLK)
6 3 2 4 1 5
(BLU)
D+5V2
D+5V1 N,C GND_5D
N.C A+20V N.C
CTC2
CTC2
D+5V1 N,C D+5V2
N.C GND-20A D+5V2 N.C GND_5D
1 2 3 4
(RED)
N.C A+12V1 D+5V2 N,C
A+12V2 D+5V3
(RED) (RED)
GND-12A D+5V3
1 2
(BLK)
PWR8
PWR8
N.C A-12V1 (RED)
(BLU) GND-5D (BLK)
4
A-12V2 GND-5D
To CTC_2/3_JCA6
(BLK)
PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2)
N.C A+5V GND-5D N,C

N.C GND-5A
To CTC_2/3_JCA7
GND-5D (BLK)
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 5 9 10
N.C A-5V
N.C A+20A
CTC22/24
PWR10
PWR10
N.C GND-20A
1 2
N.C A+12V1
A+12V2
To CTC_2/3_JCA3
(RED) GND-12A
(BLK)
N.C A-12V1
(BLU) A-12V2 +24V01 +24V01
(ORG)
N.C A+5V +24V02 N,C (BLK) GND_24V0
N.C GND-5A GND-24V0 +24V11
To CTC_2/3_JCA8
(ORG)
N.C A-5V +24V11 GND_24V1
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+24V12 N,C N.C +24V01
CTC4
CTC4
GND-24V1 N.C GND_24V0

+24V21 N,C N.C +24V11
5
+24V22 N,C N.C GND_24V1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24V23 N,C
GND-24V2 N,C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P+5V1
GND_5P
l+24I A+24V1 P+9V1
1
(ORG)N.C A+24V2 GND_9P
24GI GND-24A N.C N.C
(BLK) A+8V1 N.C P+5V1
B+8I
CTC3
CTC3
2 3
(RED) N.C A+8V2 N.C GND_5P
B8GI GND-8A N.C P+9V1
4
(BLK) +24V12 N.C GND_9P
N.C A+13V1 (ORG)
PWR15
PWR15
+13I A+13V2 GND-24V1 N.C N.C
LDD2
LDD2
(BLK)
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(RED) N.C A+13V3 +24V21 N,C

13GI GND-13A +24V22 N,C
13GI (BLK) GND-13A +24V23 N,C
(BLK) A-13V GND-24V2 N,C
-13I
GND-24V2 N,C
6
(BLU) N.C A+24V1

G+8I
16171819202122
PWR11
PWR11
JCA9
JCA9
G8GI A+24V2
LDD22
8 10 9 5 6
(ORG) GND-24A
To CTC22_2/3_CY2
(BLK) N.C A+8V1

A+8V2
(RED) GND-8A
(BLK) N.C A+13V1
IL24I GND-24V2 N,C
I24GI N.C A+13V2 +24V01 (ORG)
A+13V3 (ORG)
JPS1
JPS1
IL+13I +24V02 N,C

1 2
1 2
(RED) (BLK) (BLK)

I13GI GND-13A GND-24V0
(BLK)
LDD1
LDD1
N.C N.C N.C GND-13A +24V11 N,C
To PAC22_PAC16
1112 131415
N.C N.C N.C A-13V

N.C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324

N.C
5 7 1 3 2 4 6
PWR22 Circuit Board (1/2)
P+5V1 (RED)
GND-5P
7
(BLK)
P+9V1 (RED)
P+9V2 N.C
(BLK)
N.C A+24V1 GND-9P
1 2 3 4 5
N.C A+24V1
N.C A+24V2
N.C A+24V2 +24V13 24V
N.C GND-24A (ORG) (ORG)
GND-24V1 GND
NDL
NDL
(BLK)
JNDL2
JNDL2
6 7
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
Light table
N.C GND-24A
JNDL1
JNDL1
N.C N.C
1 2 3
1 2 3
N.C A+8V1
N.C A+8V1
PWR13
PWR13
N.C A+8V2
N.C A+8V2
N.C GND-8A
1 2
N.C GND-8A P+5V1 (RED)

+13V A+13V1 GND-5P
(RED)
PWR12
PWR12
GND N.C A+13V1 P+9V1 N.C (BLK)

1 2
(BLK) P+9V2
N.C A+13V2 (RED)
8
N.C A+13V2 GND-9P (BLK)

N.C A+13V3 N.C N.C
N.C N.C
LTC1
LTC1
N.C A+13V3
LTC22
8 9 10 11121314
GND-13A
-13V N.C GND-13A
(BLU)
GND GND-13A
3 4
(BLK) (RED)
N.C GND-13A
A-13V N.C (BLK)
JPS2
JPS2
+24v30 N.C
N.C A-13V N.C N.C
+24v31
1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 10 22 11 23 12 24
N,C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
To PAC22_PAC16
+23v32 N,C
GND-24V3
+24v41 N,C
+24v42 N,C
+24v43 N,C
GND-24V4 N,C
GND-24V4 N,C +9V
+24v30 N,C
9
GND
PZR1
PZR1
PZR22
PWR17
PWR17
1 2
+24v31 N,C
+24v32 N,C
GND-24V3 N,C
+24v41 N,C
+24v42 N,C
+24v43 N,C
GND-24V4 N,C (ORG)
GND-24V4 N,C (BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 17 18
To PAC22_PAC16
D416A/D416B- (ORG)
D416x_RTN (BLK)
1 2
PAC15
To PAC22
N.C N,C
PWR5
PWR5
N.C N,C
1 3 2 4
10
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
D322+
(RED) Magazine door detecting interlock switch
D322-
1 5
(BLK)
D322
(V-152-1C26)
D322
N.C
D325A/D325B+ (RED)
D325A/D325B- Front upper cover sensor
2 6
(BLK) N.C (V-152-1C26)
D325A
D325A
(BLK) Front upper cover sensor
N.C (V-152-1C26)
D325B
D325B
PWR3
PWR3
D324A/D324B+
(RED) (YEL) Feed section lower door sensor
D324A/D324B-
3 7
3 6
3 6
(BLK) (YEL) (V-152-1C26)
N.C
D324A
D324A
2
N.C N.C
(YEL) Feed section lower door sensor
N.C
JHA5
JHA5
N.C
2 5
2 5
N.C (V-152-1C26)
D324B
D324B
D323+
(RED) (YEL) Feed section upper door sensor
D323-
4 8
1 4
1 4
(BLK)
D323
(V-152-1C26)
D323
(YEL) N.C
D410+
D410- (RED) (YEL) Replenisher door detecting interlock switch
D410A
D410A
1 4
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (YEL)
D410
(V-152-1C26)
D410
D416A/D416B+ Dryer unit detecting interlock switch
3
PWR4
PWR4
(RED) (GRY) (YEL) (V-152-1C26)
D416
D416A/D416B-
J416A
J416A
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
D416A
D416A
(BLK) (YEL)
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
2 5 3 6
Dryer unit detecting interlock switch
(BLK) (V-152-1C26)
D417
(BLK)
PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2)
+24V01 P+24V01
9
+24V02 N.C
GND-24VO GND
(BLK)
10
+24V11 N.C
+24V12 N.C
4
GND-24V1 N.C
+24V21 P+24V21
+24V22 (ORG)
GND
1 2
(ORG)
+24V23 N.C
GND-24V2 P+24V22
GND-24V2 (BLK) GND
3 4
+24V01 (BLK)
N.C
PDC22
PDC22
PWR16
PWR16
+24V02 P+24V02
(ORG)
GND-24V0 GND
7 8
(BLK)
+24V11 N.C
+24V12 N.C
GND-24V1 N.C
+24V21 N.C
+24V22 N.C
+24V23 P+24V23
(ORG)
GND-24V2 GND
5 6
(BLK)
GND-24V2 N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
5
PDC22/24
+24V30 N.C
+24V30 N.C
+24V31 P+24V31
1
(ORG)
+24V31 N.C
+24V32 (BLK)
N.C
+24V32 P+24V32
GND-24V3 (ORG)
(BLK) GND
PDC24
PDC24
GND-24V3 GND
+24V41 N.C N.C
6
+24V41 N.C N.C N.C

3 2 4 5 6
PWR18
PWR18
+24V42
+24V42 N.C
+24V43 N.C P+24V41
+24V43 (ORG)
GND
GND-24V4 (BLK) P+24V42
GND-24V4 (ORG)
GND
1 2 3 4
GND-24V4 (BLK)
PDC23
PDC23
GND-24V4 N.C P+24V43

(ORG)
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
GND
(BLK)
N.C N.C
5 6 7
PWR22 Circuit Board (2/2)

7
P+5V1 (RED) P+5V

P+5V1 N.C GND
PDC25
PDC25
1 2
(BLK)
GND-5P
GND-5P N.C
P+9V1 N.C
P+9V1 N.C
P+9V2 N.C
P+9V2 N.C
PWR14
PWR14
GND-9P N.C
GND-9P N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
8
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
9
10
11
21-19
21.4.3 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 1030 11 3112 3213 3314 34 1535 1636 1737 1838 19 3920 40
1 212 223 234 245 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910 3011 3112 3213 33 1434 1535 1636 17 3718 3819 3920 40
GND GND
GND GND
B SCK(+)
SCK(-)
SCK(+)
SCK(-)
SDTW(-) SDTW(-)
SDTW(+) SDTW(+)
SDTR(+) SDTR(+)
SDTR(-) SDTR(-)
/HD(-) /HD(-)
/HD(+) /HD(+)
CLK(+) CLK(+)
ADC22 Circuit Board

ADC1
CCD1
CLK(-) CLK(-)
CCD1
ADC1
CCDOS SIG
DIN12(-) DIN12(-)
DIN12(+) DIN12(+)
Image Processing BOX

C DIN11(+)
DIN11(-)
DIN11(+)
DIN11(-)
DIN10(-) DIN10(-)
DIN10(+) DIN10(+)
DIN9(+) DIN9(+)
ADC4
BOX1
BOX1
ADC4
DIN9(-) DIN9(-)
DIN8(-) DIN8(-)
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8
N.C DIN8(+) DIN8(+)

N.C DIN7(+) DIN7(+)
N.C DIN7(-) DIN7(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
(BLK) DIN6(-) DIN6(-)

SDTW- (GRY) SDTW-
SDTW+ SDTW+ DIN6(+) DIN6(+)
D SCK-
(BLK)
(GRY) SCK- DIN5(+)
DIN5(-)
DIN5(+)
DIN5(-)
ADC3
ADC3
SCK+ SCK+
SDTR- SDTR-
CCD3
CCD3
JSA9
JSA9
SDTR+ (GRY) SDTR+ DIN4(+) DIN4(+)

CCD22 Circuit Board
(BLK) DIN3(+) DIN3(+)

HD- SYNC-
HD+ (GRY) SYNC+ DIN3(-) DIN3(-)
IDCK- IDCK-
(GRY) DIN2(+) DIN2(+)
IDCK+ (BLK) IDCK+
ADCK- ADCK- DIN1(+) DIN1(+)
(GRY) DIN1(-) DIN1(-)
ADCK+ ADCK+
DIN0(-) DIN0(-)
DIN0(+) DIN0(+)
E GND
GND
GND
GND
7 1314
7 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 1516 1718 1920

(BLU) (BLU)
4 1 5
A-5V (BLK) (BLK) A-5V

GND GND-5A
(RED) (RED)
A5V A+5V
ADC2
ADC2
F N.C A-12V2
PWR22 Circuit Board

3 2
GND N.C N.C A-12V1

6
GND (BLK) (BLK) GND-12A

A+12V2
3 4 10 1112 5
3 4 10 11 12 5
(RED) (RED)
6
A12V A+12V1
UL1007 18AWG N.C N.C N.C GND-20A
PWR9
PWR9
N.C N.C N.C A+20V
JSA5
JSA5
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU)

3 4 5 6 7 8
5 6 7
5 6 7
A-5V A-5V
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK)
GND (RED) (RED) (RED) GND-5A
A+5V A+5V
CCD2
CCD2
N.C N.C (BLK) (BLK) N.C

(BLU) A-12V2
JSA8
3 4
3 4
2 9
2 9
JSA8
G A-12V
GND
(RED) (RED) (BLK)
A-12V1
GND-12A
N.C A+12V2
N.C A+12V1
1 2
1 2
1 8
1 8
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

2 1
GND GND-20A
(RED) (RED) (RED)
A+20V A+20V
21-20
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
21.4.4
GND(DGND) (BLK) GND
VCC2 TxD (BLK) CTC_RXD
Conjugate length variable home position sensor (RED) (RED) (GRY) (GRY)
1
D211 RxD CTC_TXD
(GRY)
D211
D211
(GP1A73A) (GRY) (GRY) GND(DGND) int out (GRY) /CTC_IRQ
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) (GRY) (GRY)
int in (BLK) /CTC_INT
(BLK) GND
GND(DGND)
BOX5
BOX5
BOX
CTC1
CTC1
(BLK) (BLK)
JGM1
JGM1
GMB_out1 (GRY) IN PORT1
(GRY) OUT PORT1
Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor (RED) VCC2 GMB_in1 (BLK)
(RED) D212 (BLK) IN PORT2
(GRY) (GRY) GMB_out2 (GRY) (GRY)
(GP1A73A)
D212
D212
GND(DGND) GMB_in2 OUT PORT2
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
4 5 6
5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8
(BLK)
Image Processing
(BLK)
JSA1
JSA1
(BLK) (BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VCC2
Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor (RED) (RED)
(GRY) D213
D213
D213
(GP1A73A) (GRY) GND(DGND)
1 2 3
7 8 9
(BLK) N.C (BLK)
N.C
7 8 9 10
7 8 9 10
CTC12
CTC12
D+5V2 D+5V2
(RED)
GND_5D GND-5D
2
D+5V2 (BLK)
N.C N.C D+5V1
CTC2
CTC2
(RED) GND_5D N.C N.C D+5V1
UL1007 26AWG
1 2 3 4
Lens home VCC
(RED) (RED) N.C D+5V2
position sensor D214
(GRY) N.C GND-5D
D214
D214
(GRY) (GRY)
JSA6
JSA6
PWR8
PWR8
GND(DGND)
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(GP1A75E) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) D+5V3
101112
(RED)
(BLK) GND-5D
(RED) D+5V3
JSA2
JSA2
Shutter home (RED) (BLK) GND-5D
2 4 1 6 7 9 3 5 8 10
To CY1 To CY2
(RED) (RED) VCC2
position sensor D215
(GRY) (GRY) (GRY)
D215
D215
JSA7
JSA7
(GP1A73A) GND(DGND)
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK)
N.C GND(DGND)
13 1415 16
P+5V1 P+5V1
GND_5P (RED)
(BLK) GND-5P
P+9V1 P+9V1
GND_9P (RED) N.C
(BLK) P+9V2
N.C N.C GND-9P
table
P+5V1 N.C +24v13
3
(ORG)
CTC3
CTC3
GND_5P N.C GND-24v1
To the light
P+9V1 (BLK)
N.C (RED) P+5V1
PWR13
PWR13
GND_9P N.C GND-5P
To PAC
(BLK) N.C
N.C N.C P+9V1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Light source cooling fan sensor M24V0 P+9V2
(ORG) (RED)
PGND GND-9P
F201
(BLK)
F201
F201
To PZR
(109BF24HD2-2)
D204/
D204
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) N.C
N.C
1 2 3
(GRY)
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CTC14
CTC14
UL1007 24AWG
Scanner cooling fan sensor (ORG) (ORG) M24VO
(BLK) PGND
(BLK)
F216
F216
F216
JSA3
JSA3
(109P0824H4D01)
D216/
D216
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
(GRY) (GRY)
+24V01 +24V01
(ORG) N.C
GND_24V0 +24V012
+24V11 (BLK)
(ORG) GND-24V0
GND_24V1 +24V11
4
+24V01 (BLK) N.C

N.C +24V12
CTC4
CTC4
GND_24V0 N.C GND-24V1
+24V11 N.C N.C +24V21
GND_24V1 N.C N.C +24V22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PWR22 Circuit Board
CTC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3)
N.C +24V23
N.C GND-24V2
N.C GND-24V2
(ORG) +24V01
N.C +24V02
PWR15
PWR15
(BLK)
M201-A GND-24V0
(RED) N.C +24V11
M201-/A
(BLU) +24V12
N.C (YEL) M201-B (ORG)
Conjugate length variable motor N.C M201-/B GND-24V1
1 7 2 8
(ORG) (BLK)
M201
M201
M201
N.C +24V21
N.C +24V22
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
To CY1 To CTC22_CY2
N.C +24V23
N.C GND-24V2
N.C GND-24V2
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
M202-A
(RED) (RED)
(YEL) (YEL) M202-/A
M202-B
CTC16
CTC16
Lens drive motor (BLU) (BLU)
M202-/B
1 5 2 6
1 5 2 6
M202
M202
M202
(ORG) (ORG)
3 9 4 10
N.C
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
Vcc Vcc(D+5V2)
Vcc (RED) Vcc(D+5V2)
(RED)
JSA4
JSA4
+24V1_on/off +24V1_on/off
(GRY) P+9V_on/off
P+9V_on/off
CTC5
CTC5
PWR2
PWR2
(GRY) P+5V2_on/off
M203-A P+5V2_on/off
(RED) (RED) (GRY) GND(DGND)
M203-/A DGND
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
(YEL) (YEL) (BLK)

M203-B
Shutter drive motor (BLU) (BLU)
M203-/B
3 7 4 8
3 7 4 8
M203
M203
M203
(ORG)
5 11 6 12
N.C (ORG)
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
6
Image processing section cooling fan 1 M24V0

(ORG) PGND
(BLK)
F217
D217/
(109P0824H2D01)
F217
F217
D217
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(GRY) LH201+ LH201(+)

(GRY) LH201(-)
LH201- (BLK)
D203A D203A(+)
(GRY)
CTC22/24 Circuit Board (1/3)
GND(DGND)
CTC15
CTC15
(BLK) D203A(-)
Image processing section cooling fan 2 M24V0 D203B
(ORG) (GRY) D203B(+)
PGND GND(DGND)
F218
D218/
(BLK) D203B(-)
LTC4
LTC4
F218
F218
(109P0824H2D01) (BLK)
CTC11
CTC11
7
D218
1 2 3
1 2 3
(GRY) D203C D203C(+)
N.C N.C (GRY)
GND(DGND)
4 5 6 7
(BLK) D203C(-)
D203D (GRY) D203D(+)
GND(DGND)
9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LTC22 Circuit Board
(BLK) D203D(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PZ201+ X-axis on+

(GRY)
PZ201- (BLK) X-axis on-
OAUX0-(VCC) PZ202+ Y-axis on+
(GRY)
GND(DGND) PZ202- (BLK) Y-axis on-
OAUX0 PZON+ PWONon+
(GRY)
GND(DGND) PZON- PWONon-
8
(BLK)
OAUX1-(VCC) ERR201 X-axis SNG
PZR2
PZR2
(GRY)
GND(DGND) DGND GND
(BLK)
CTC13
CTC13
OAUX1 ERR202 (GRY) Y-axis SNG

Spare output circuitry for the Light GND(DGND) DGND GND
(BLK)
Source and Scanner sections OAUX2-(VCC) ERRPZR (GRY) Power NG
CTC17
CTC17
GND(DGND) DGND GND

PZR22 Circuit Board
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
OAUX2 DGND N.C

GND(DGND) DGND N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14
OAUX3-(VCC)
GND(DGND)
OAUX3
GND(DGND)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 141516
9
VCC2
IAUX0
GND(DGND)
Spare output circuitry for the Light GND(DGND)
Source and Scanner sections VCC2
CTC18
CTC18
IAUX1
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11
21-21
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-22
DIO+ (GRY) SIO+
DIO- (GRY) SIO-
(BLK) (BLK)
key1 CLK+ SCLK+
key2 CLK- (GRY) (GRY) CLK-
1
Key switch I/F (conventionally used as the (BLK) (BLK)
key3 CRES+ RST+
J Carrier circuit board) key COM CRES- (GRY) (GRY)
RST-
CTC25
CTC25
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
(BLK) (BLK)
6 26 7 27 8 28
N.C GND(DGND) N.C
N.C
CTC21
CTC21
SW1 SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6
(GRY) (GRY)
GND(DGND) SW1-RTN
(BLK) (BLK)
D123A D123A
D123A_RTN (GRY) (GRY) D123A_RTN
(BLK) (BLK)
4 24 5 25
D123B
D123B_RTN (GRY) (GRY) UL1007 26AWG
JCA2
JCA2
(BLK) (BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
D123
1 2
1 2
JCA10
JCA10
D121
IX 240 carrier position sensor (GRY)
DGND DIO+ SIO2+
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (GRY) (GRY)
D121
D121
D121
DIO- (BLK) SIO2-
CLK+ (BLK) SCLK2+
(GRY) (GRY) 21.4 Wiring Diagrams
CLK- SCLK2-
2
(BLK) (BLK)
CRES+ RST2+
CTC27
CTC27
CRES- (GRY) (GRY)
RST2-
(BLK) (BLK)
13 14 15 16 17 18
13 14 15 16 17 18
18 38 19 39 20 40
GND(DGND) N.C
D122
(GRY) SW1 N.C
CTC22
CTC22
135 carrier position sensor DGND
3 4
D122
1 2
1 2
(BLK) GND(DGND)
D122
D122
N.C
D123A N.C
D123A_RTN N.C
D123B N.C
D123_RTN N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213
GND(DGND)
Serial communication I/F for debugging the TxD
RxD
CTC22/24 and GMB22 (GHT22) Int_out
CTC30
CTC30
Int_in M101-A (RED) M101-A
(BRN)
1 2 3 4 5
M101-/A M101-/A
CY1
CY1
(YEL) (RED)
3
M101-B (BLU) M101B
M101-/B (ORG) M101-/B
(ORG) (YEL)
M102-A M102-A
M102-/A (RED) (BRN) M102-/A
(YEL) (RED)
M102-B M102-B
M102-/B (BLU) (ORG) M102-/B
(ORG) (YEL)
M103-A M103-A
(RED) (BRN)
M103-/A M103-/A
JCA6
JCA6
CTC26
CTC26
(YEL) (RED)
GND(DGND) M103-B M103-B
(BLU) (ORG)
Serial communication I/F for TxD M103-/B (ORG) M103-/B
RxD M104-A (YEL) M104-A
debugging the Carrier CPU (RED) (BRN)
RTS M104/A M104-/A
CTC31
CTC31
CTS M104-B (YEL) (RED) M104-B
Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier
1 2 3 4 5
(BLU) (ORG)
M104-/B M104-/B
S101+ (ORG) (YEL) S101+
(ORG) (ORG)
S101- S101-
(BLK) (BLK)
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
13 33 14 34 9 29 10 30 15 35 16 3611 31 12 321737
4
D+5V3
(RED) GND-5D
JCA6
JCA6
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
1 21
To PWR8
(RED) A+12V2
(BLK) GND-12A
JCA7
JCA7
A-12V2
2 22 3
(BLU)
To PWR10
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5
M4 round ground terminal GND(FGND)

(BLK)
23
TxD+ (GRY) RxD+

TxD- (GRY) RxD-
(BLK) (BLK)
RTS+ (GRY) CTS+
RTS- (GRY) CTS-
(BLK) (BLK)
RxD+ TxD+
RxD- (GRY) (GRY) Txd-
JCA1
JCA1
(BLK) (BLK)
RTS+

CTS+
(GRY) (GRY)
CTC23
CTC23
6
CTS- (BLK) RTS-

/PRQ (BLK) /RPQ
(GRY) (GRY)
RQ-RTN (BLK) /RPQ-RTN
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 9 25
GND(DGND) N.C
GND(DGND) N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
NCC0 NCC0
(GRY) (GRY)
GND(DGND) (BLK) GND(DGND)

NCC1 (BLK) NCC1
(GRY) (GRY)
GND(DGND) GND(DGND)
NCC2 (BLK) (BLK) NCC2
(GRY) (GRY)
GND(DGND) GND(DGND)
(BLK) (BLK)
NCC3 (GRY) NCC3
GND(DGND) (GRY) GND(DGND)
JCA4
JCA4
7
(BLK) (BLK)
NCC4 (GRY) NCC4
GND(DGND) (GRY) GND(DGND)
(BLK) (BLK)
CTC24
CTC24
key1 key1
key2 (GRY) (GRY) key2
(BLK) (BLK)
key3 BRS+(key3)
key COM (GRY) (GRY)
(BLK) (BLK) BRS-(key_com)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
1026112712 2813291430 8 24 1531
N.C
CY2
CY2
N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 15161718
D+5V3
(RED) GND(DGND)
JCA3
JCA3
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
1 17
To PWR8
8
A+12V2
(RED) GND-12A
(BLK)
A-12V2
JCA8
JCA8
2 18 3
(BLU)
To PWR10
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
+24V12
(RED) GND-24V1
(BLK)
1632
N.C
To PWR15
N.C
N.C N.C
JCA9
JCA9
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
1 4 2 3 5 6
1 4 2 3 5 6
Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier
9
M4 round ground terminal GND(FGND)

(BLK)
19
10
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
Wiring group B for the LTC22

Wiring group A for the LTC22
(RED) (GRY) Thermistor (PB7-42H-F3)
D203
D203
1 2
(WHT) (BRK)
1 21
1 21
(RED) (GRY) Peltier element (TEC1-12703)
LH201
LH201
LH201
1 2
(BLK) (BRK)
2 22
2 22
2
LED_1-/CHK
LED_1-/CHK_RTN (BLK)
L9V (ORG)
L9V (ORG)
(ORG) (ORG)
LED_IR22 (GLY)
LED_IR21 (BLK)
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_B9 (GLY)
LED_G7 (BLK)
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_R7
(BLK)
LED_IR18 (GLY)
LED_B10 (BLK)
(BLK) (GLY)
CTC6
CTC6
LED_G8
LED1
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_R8
LED1
LED_IR17 (BLK)
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_B13
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_G11
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_R11
3
LED_IR14 (BLK)
(BLK) (GLY)
LED_B14 (GLY)
LED_IR13 (BLK)
1232 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040

12 32 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12131415161718
LGND N.C (BLK)
N.C N.C
JCP1
JCP1
1 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14151617181920 21 2
LED_2-/CHK
LED_2-/CHKRTN (BLK)
LED_IR10 (RED)
LED_B8 (BRN)
1
(BRN) (RED)
LED_IR9 (RED)
LED_R6 (BRN)
(BRN) (RED)
LED_G6 (RED)
(BRN)
4
LED_B11
2
(BRN) (RED)
LED_IR6 (RED)
LED_R9 (BRN)
(BRN) (RED)
LED_G9 (RED)
(BRN)
LED_B12
3
(BRN) (RED)
LED_IR5
CTC7
CTC7
(RED)
LED2
LED_R10 (BRN)
LED2
(BRN) (RED)
LED_G10
(BRN) (RED)
LED_B15
4
LED_IR2 (BRN) (RED)
(BRN) (RED)
LED_IR1 (RED)
(BRN)
L9V (ORG)
L9V (ORG)
5 6
3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131
3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131
(ORG)
L9V N.C (ORG)
L9V N.C
LGND N.C
N.C N.C
1 24 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1415 16171819202122 23 2

5
6
D201 135 diffusion box sensor

(GRY) (GRY) (VX-014-1A3)
GND(DGND)
D201
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (BLK)
JCP3
JCP3
CTC10
CTC10
D202 120 diffusion box sensor
(GRY) (GRY) (VX-014-1A3)
GND(DGND)
D202

3 4
3 4
3 4
(BLK) (BLK)
21 22
21 22
LED_3-/CHK
L9V
(ORG) (ORG)
7
L9V
(ORG) (ORG)
LED_IR15 (BLK) (BLK)
LED_IR12
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_B1 (BLK)
LED_G1 (BLK)
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_R1
LED_IR7 (BLK)
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_B2
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_G2
LED3
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_R2
LED3
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_IR4
CTC8
CTC8
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_B5
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_G5 (BLK)
LED_R5 (BLK)
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_IR3
LED_B6 (BLK) (BLK)
(BLK) (BLK)
LED_IR0
31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3
31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 131415 1617 18
(BLK) (BLK)
N.C N.C
8
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
LGND N.C
JCP2
JCP2
N.C N.C
1 26 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16171819202122 2324 25 2
LED_4-/CHK
LED_IR23
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_B0
1
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_IR20 (BRN)
LED_R0 (BRN)
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_G0 (BRN)
(BRN)
9
LED_B3
2
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_IR19 (BRN)
LED_R3 (BRN)
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_G3
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_B4
3
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_IR16
LED4
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_R4
LED4
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_G4
CTC9
CTC9
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_B7
4
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_IR11
(BRN) (BRN)
LED_IR8
L9V (BRN) (BRN)
(ORG) (ORG)
L9V
5 6
40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212
(ORG) (ORG)
40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212
L9V N.C
L9V N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
10
LGND N.C
N.C N.C
1 28 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16171819202122 2324 252627 2
11
21-23
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-24
21.4.5
(RED) (RED) VCC(FU1) TS401
Cartridge setting sensor (RED) P1 processing tank temperature sensor
(GRY) D407 (0)AGND
(GRY) (WHT)
D407
D407
(GP1A73A) (PNX-24)
TS401
TS401
TS401
GND FGND N.C N.C
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK)
1 3 5
1 2 3
1 2 3
1
Cartridge box upper sensor (RED) (RED) VCC(FU1)
(GRY) D408 TS402 P2 processing tank temperature sensor
(GRY) (RED)
D408
D408
(GP1A73A) GND (0)AGND
JHO1
JHO1
4 5 6
4 5 6
4 5 6
(BLK)
1 2 3
CTP17
CTP17
(BLK) (WHT) (PNX-24)
TS402
TS402
TS402
FGND N.C N.C
1 2 3
1 2 3
2 4 6
Cartridge box lower sensor (RED) (RED) VCC(FU1)
D409
CTP12
CTP12
(GP1A73A) (GRY) (GRY)
D409
D409
GND TS403
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) (RED) PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor
N.C N.C N.C GND (0)AGND
7 8 9 10
7 8 9 10
7 8 9 10
(WHT) (PNX-24)
TS403
TS403
TS403
FGND N.C N.C
1 2 3
1 2 3
7 9 11
TS404 (RED) PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor
(0)AGND
(WHT) (PNX-24)
TS404
TS404
TS404
FGND N.C N.C 21.4 Wiring Diagrams
1 2 3
1 2 3
8 10 12
2
Dryer section exit sensor (RED) (5)VCC
(GRY) D411
D411
D411
(GP1AQ36L) GND
JFS3
JFS3
TS406 Dryer temperature sensor
1 2 3
(BLK)
CTP19
CTP19
N.C N.C (RED)
(0)AGND
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
1 2
1 2
(WHT) (GP1AQ36L)
TS406
TS406
TS406
CTP13
CTP13
FGND
1 2 3
FS401 P1 solution level sensor
(RED)
GND
FS401
FS401
(FLS-1005)
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
3
CTP21IN CTP21 IN
(5)VCC VCC (FU1) FS402 P2 solution level sensor
(RED)
PU408 PU408 GND (FLS-1005)
FS402
FS402
3 4
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
PU409 PU409
(0)GND GND
PU410 PU410
PU411 PU411
PU401 PU401 FS403 PS1 solution level sensor
(RED)
F405 F405 GND
FS403
FS403
(FLS-1005)
5 6
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
(5)VCC VCC (FU1)
H401 H401
H402 H402
CTP15
CTP15
(0)GND GND
H403 H403 FS404 PS2 solution level sensor
(RED)
H404 GND
FS404
FS404
H404 (FLS-1005)
7 8
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
H406A H406A
H406B H406B
4
(5)VCC VCC (FU1)

Output spare Output spare 1
H407 H407 FS405 PS3 solution level sensor
GND (RED)
(0)GND GND (FLS-1005)
CTP21
PAC17
CTP21
PAC17
FS405
FS405
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
9 10
CTP22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3)
REON REON
H408 H408
D401 D401
D402 D402
(5)VCC VCC (FU1) FS406 PS4 solution level sensor
(RED)
PAC22 Circuit Board

D403 D403 GND
FS406
FS406 (FLS-1005)
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
1112
D404 D404
(0)GND GND
D406 D406
Not used D418
+5V ON signal +5V ON signal
(0)GND GND
(5)VCC VCC (FU1)
CTP P+5V notice PACP +5V CTP16 IN
(BLK)
5
CTP P+24V notice PACP +24V GND
1 30
(0)GND GND
PACSELO PACSEL0
PACSEL1 PACSEL1 FS407 P1R upper level sensor
(RED)
CTP21OUT GND
FS407
FS407
GND (FLS-1005)
3 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40
P1R lower level sensor
FS411 (RED)
FS411
FS411
GND (FLS-1005)
1 2
1 2
5 4
(BLK)
FS408 P1R upper level sensor

(RED)
GND
FS408
FS408
(FLS-1005)
7 6
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
6
P2RA lower level sensor

FS412 (RED)
GND (FLS-1005)
9 8
FS412
FS412
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
CTP22/24 Circuit Board (1/3)
P2RB upper level sensor

FS409
(RED) (FLS-1005)
GND
FS409
FS409
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
11 10
VCC(FU1)
D414 FS413 P2RB lower level sensor
(RED)
GND GND (FLS-1005)
FS413
FS413
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
13 12
7
CTP18
CTP18
(RED) (RED)
F340 Only
D415
(BLK) (BLK)
JD414
JD414
GND FS410 PSR upper level sensor
7 2 8
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(GLY) (GLY) (RED)

GND GND N.C
(BLK)
15 14
(FS-08193F)
FS410
FS410
1 2 3
1 2 3
CTP16
CTP16
JS01
JS01
FS414 PSR lower level sensor
(RED) N.C
GND (BLK)
17 16
FS414
FS414
(FLS-1005)
1 2 3
1 2 3
See Subsection 18.4.10 “PDC24

Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2)”
FS415 Waste solution level sensor
(RED)
GND
1 2
(FLS-1005)
1 2
(BLK)
19 18
FS415
FS415
8
FS416 External P1R level sensor

(RED)
GND
FS416
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (FS-08193F)
21 20
FS417 (RED) External P2R level sensor

GND
FS417
3 4
3 4
(BLK) (FS-08193F)
23 22
JFS1
JFS1
(RED) +5V
(GLY) DA_IN0
DA_IN1 FS418 External PSR level sensor
(GLY) (RED)
9
GND
FS418
5 6
5 6
DA_IN2 (BLK) (FS-08193F)

25 24
(BLK)
DA_IN3
(GLY)
COMP_OUT
(BLK)
CTP20
CTP20
DTL 02
DTL 02
CN_CHK
(GLY)
N. C FS419 External washing solution level sensor
(BLK)
DTL01
DTL01
1 2 3
1 2 3
(RED)
(FS 421)
N. C GND
(GLY)
FS419
Leak Sensor
7 8
7 8
(FS-08193F)
DTL24Circuit Board
(BLK)
27 26
GND
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FS420 (RED) External waste solution level sensor

GND N.C
(BLK)
29 28
FS420
FS420
(FLS-1005)
1 2 3
1 2 3
10
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
CTPIN CTP1 IN
(5 ) VCC (RD301) (RED) (RED) Paper splice sensor LED
GND GND
D301L
D301L
D301L
1 2
D301L
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
M301CLK M301CLK (GRY) (GRY)
M302CLK M302CLK
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
JCU2
JCU2
M303CLK M303CLK
M304CLK M304CLK VCC (FU1)
M306CLK M306CLK (RED) (RED)
D301P Paper splice sensor
M309CLK M309CLK (GRY) (GRY)
D301P
D301P
D301P
GND
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 2 1
3 2 1
GND GND (BLK) (BLK)
M310CLK M310CLK
Spare 1 CLK Spare 1 CLK
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
M311CLK M311CLK
M313CLK M313CLK VCC (FU1) (RED) (RED) Paper end sensor
M403CLK M403CLK D311 (GRY) (GRY) (GP1A73A)
D311
JCU3
JCU3
M314CLK
6 7 8
1 2 3
M314CLK
1 2 3
1 2 3
GND (BLK) (BLK)
CTP2
CTP2
GND GND
M315CLK M315CLK
2
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
M305CLK M305CLK
M305PD M305PD
S301 DOTSTB (301)
PIO data PIOD0 VCC (FU1)
(RED) (RED)
GND GND D306
(GRY) (GRY) Magazine ID sensor 0 (GP1A53HR)
PI1 data PIOD1 D307
(GRY) (GRY)
PI2 data PIOD2 D308 Magazine ID sensor 1,2,3 (GP1A53HR)
DTM
DTM
(GRY) (GRY)
JDTM
JDTM
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1) D309 Magazine ID sensor 4 (GP1A53HR)
(GRY) (GRY)
PI3 data PIOD3 D310
(GRY) (GRY)
GND
DTM00 Circuit Board

PI4 data PIOD4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(BLK) (BLK)
N.C
CTP1
CTP1
PDC1
PDC1
PI5 data PIOD5 N.C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PI6 data PIOD6
GND GND
PI7 data PIOD7
PIOSEL0 PIOA0
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
3
PDC22/24 Circuit Board

PIOSEL1 PIOA1
PIOSEL2 PIOA2
PIOSEL3 PIOA3
PIOWR PIOWR
GND GND
PDCP+5V PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V PDCP+24V
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
PDCP10 PDCPIO VCC (FU1) (RED) (RED) Back printer entrance sensor
D312 D302 (GRY) (OS-573533-710)
D302
D312 Cutter home position sensor 1 (GRY)
JHA3
JHA3
GND
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
D313 Cutter home position sensor 2 D313 (BLK) (BLK)
YOBBI _ OUT1 INSP1
GND GND
N.C N.C
YOBI _ IN1 ASC POF5
CTP3
CTP3
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1) VCC (FU1)
(RED) (RED) Feed nip home position sensor
GND GND D319 (GRY) (GRY) (GP1A73A)
D319
GND GND
4 5 6
1 2 3
1 2 3
GND
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK)
4
JHA4
JHA4
GND GND
Rxd1 Rxd1 D320
(GRY) (GRY)
Txd1 Txd1 GND
7 8
4 5
4 5
(BLK) (BLK)
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1) 70328-1Faston/172076-1 Cover
CTP1OUT GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Back printer set sensor
N.C
D320
D320
(VX-016-1A3)
D320
1 2 3
1 2 3
Vcc (D+5V1) VCC (FU1)
(RED)
Vcc (D+5V1) VCC (FU1)
(RED) ***
D322 D322 (BLK)
(GRY) CTP14 IN
D323 D323
(GRY) (5 ) VCC (RD303) Register sensor LED
D324A / D324B D324
5
(GRY) (RED) (RED) (GL514A)

D303L
D303L
D303L
D324A / D324B D325
28 1 2 3
1 2
1 2
1 2
(GRY) (BLK) (BLK)
D416A / D416B D416
(GRY)
D410 D410
PWR1
PWR1
+24V2 _ on / off N.C PINSP1
CTP10
CTP10
+24V3 _ on / off N.C PINSP2
+24V4 _ on / off 24VON D303P
(GRY) (RED) (RED) Register sensor
PONSP1 GND
1 2
N.C N.C (WHT) (WHT) (PT501B)

(GRY)
D303P
D303P
GND (DGND) PONSP2 FGND
4 5 6
3 4 5
3 4 5
(GRY)
GND (DGND) N.C PONSP3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GND
(BLK)
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(BLK) Flex.
(5 ) VCC (RD314) Width detecting sensor LED

(RED) (RED) (RED) (GL514A)
Flex.1

Flex.1
1 2
D314L
D314L
1 2
D314L
1 2
6 7
1 2
6 7
1 2
12 13
UL1007 24AWG (BLK) (BLK) (GRY)
D+5V1 D+5V
(RED)
GND-5D DGND
(BLK)
PWR22 Circuit Board

6
D+5V2 N.C D+5V

Flex. 3
Flex. 3
(RED)
CTP11
CTP11
D+5V2 N.C
1 3 2 4
(BLK) DGND
D+5V3 N.C D314P (RED) (RED) (RED) Width detecting sensor
(PT501B)
JRE2
JRE2
D+5V3 N.C GND

1 2
(WHT) (WHT) (WHT)

Flex.2
Flex.2
PWR7
D314P
D314P
PWR7
D+5V1 FGND
3 4 5
3 4 5
1 2 3
1 2 3
14 15 16
8 9 10
8 9 10
GND-5D
GND-5D N.C
GND-5D N.C
1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10
VCC (FU1) (RED) (RED) Width detecting home position sensor
D315 (GRY) (GRY)

D315
(GP1A73A)
GND
1 2 3
17 18 19
11 12 13
11 12 13
(BLK) (BLK)
CTP _ RXD _ PCAGND (5 ) VCC (RD304LD)
(RED)
/ CTP _ RXD _ PC (GRY) D304 signal output
LDA7
LDA7
N.C N.C GND
CTP7
CTP7
N.C
1 2 3
Board
Circuit
LDA22
CTP4
CTP4
N.C GND
1 2 3 4
UL1007 26AWG
7
UL1007 26AWG
VCC (FU1) (RED) (RED) Register nip home position sensor
D316 (GRY) (GP1A73A)
D316
(GRY)
1 2 3
14 15 16
GND (BLK)
20 21 22
14 15 16
(BLK)
GND
TXD0
RXD0 (5 ) VCC (RD304) Pre-exposure sensor LED
CTP23
(RED) (RED)
CTP23
NC D304L (GL514A)
1 2
D304L
D304L
7 8
1 2
1 2
NC (BLK) (BLK)
For SH3 debug

1 2 3 4 5
8
D304P
(RED) (RED) Pre-exposure sensor
GND
1 2
(WHT) (WHT) (PT501B)

D304P
D304P
FGND
3 4 5
3 4 5
9 10 11
JHU3
JHU3
VCC (FU1)
GND (RED) (RED) Sub-scanning nip home position sensor
D317
H8Txd0 (GRY) (GRY) (GP1A73A)
D317
GND
H8Rxd0
6 7 8
6 7 8
1 2 3
23 24 25
(BLK) (BLK)
CTP24
CTP24
NC
NC
For H8S debug
1 2 3 4 5
UL1007 26AWG
POONSW (D326) Power ON switch
9
(GRY)
SW
POONSWG (D326) (LB-15SKS 1 / AT-484-M)

1 2
1 2
1 2
POSW
POSW
26 27
(BLK)
/ 5VRES
GND
NC
GND
H8MD0
GND
H8MD1
GND
H8P40
GND
H8P41 (5 ) VCC (RD305)
(RED) (RED) Processor entry sensor LED
CTP25
CTP25
GND D305L
D305L
D305L
D305L
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(GRY) (GRY)
H8P42
GND
For program download
10
H8Txd0
CTP5
CTP5
GND VCC (FU1)

(RED) (RED)
H8Rxd0 D305P Processor entry sensor
(GRY) (GRY)
D305P
D305P
D305P
VCC (FU1) GND

3 2 1
3 2 1
3 4 5
3 4 5
(BLK) (BLK)
NC GND
3 4 5 6
N.C
JSY2
JSY2
VCC (FU1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(5 ) VCC (FU1) Exit section up/down belt home position sensor

(RED) (RED)
D321
(GRY)
D321
(GRY) (GP1A73A)
GND
CTP6
CTP6
1 2 3
6 7 8
6 7 8
(BLK) (BLK)
GND
1 2 3 4
N.C
11
21-25
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-26
1
GND (BLK)
Txd2
(GRY)
Rxd2
JGM2
Box 5
JGM2
CTP9
CTP9
To Image
NC N.C (GRY) N.C N.C
Processing
1 2 3 4
NC N.C
1 3 2 4 5
2
PC ON signal (Collector)
(GRY)
PC ON signal (Emitter)
PC OFF signal (BLK) N.C
(GRY)
CTP8
CTP8
GND (BLK) N.C
GND N.C N.C N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5
PC1
PC1
JPC1
JPC1
N.C N.C N.C
N.C N.C N.C
Main Control Unit

N.C N.C
N.C N.C
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
GND
CLK
RESET
RD
WE1
VCC(FU1)
WE3
PCMWAIT
CE2B
CSO
GND
4
GI DENB
NC
A25
A23
VCC(FU1)
A21
A19
A17
A15
GND
A13
A11
A9
3.3V(FU2)
A7
A5
5
A3
A1
GND
D15
D13
D11
D9
3.3V(FU2)
D7
D5
D3
D1
GND
GND
CTP22
CTP22
/G EN
BS
6
WE0
(Used for debugging only)

WE2
VCC(FU1)
GIB22 Circuit Board

PCMINT
PCMIOIS16
CS6
RW
GND
GI DDIR

N.C.
A24
A22
VCC(FU1)
A20
A18
7
A16
A14
GND
A12
A10
A8
3.3V(FU2)
A6
A4
A2
A0
GND
D14
D12
D10
D8
8
3.3V(FU2)
D6
D4
D2
D0
GND
9
10
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
21.4.6
IL+13I A+13V3
(RED)
N.C N.C N.C A+24V2
GND I13GI GND-13A
(BLK)
GND N.C N.C N.C A+8V2
LDD1
LDD1
IL+24I A+24V2
1
D0+ (ORG)
D0- N.C N.C N.C A+13V1
SCK SCK I24GI GND-24A
D1-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RXD RXD (BLK) N.C A+13V3
D1+
DEN DEN N.C A+24V1
D2+
PCS[0] PCS[0] N.C A+8V1
D2- PCS[1] PCS[1]
D3- +24I A+24V1
PCS[2] PCS[2] 24GI (ORG) GND-24A
D3+ PCS[3] PCS[3] (BLK)
D4+ B+8I A+8V1
PWR11
PWR11
PCS[4] PCS[4] B8GI (RED) GND-8A
D4- N.C N.C (BLK)
G+81 A+8V2
PWR22
D5- (RED)
A+13V A+13V G8GI GND-8A
LDD2
LDD2
D5+ (BLK)
D6+ A+13V A+13V +13I A+13V2
AGND AGND (RED)
D6- 13GI GND-13A
AGND AGND -13I (BLK) A-13V
D7- A-13V A-13V (BLU)
D7+ 13GI GND-13A
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A-13V A-13V N.C A+13V1
FENR+ nRESET
nRESET
LDA1
LDA1
LDD15
N.C A+13V2
LDD15
FENR-
BOX4 (ROS)
BOX4 (ROS)
TXD TXD
2
FENG- N.C GND-13A
LDA22
AGND AGND N.C A-13V
21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 10121119202324

FENG+
21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 10121119 202324

AGND AGND
FENB+
N.C N.C
FENB- AGND AGND
DVAL-
AGND AGND
Image Processing Box

DVAL+ nSOS nSOS
TXCLK+
LDDERR LDDERR
TXCLK- A+13V A+13V
LREQR- +24I
A+13V A+13V (ORG)
LREQR+ AGND 24GI
LREQG+ AGND (BLK)
AGND AGND +13I
LREQG- 13GI (RED)
A-13V
LDD3
LDD3
A-13V
AOM1
AOM1
LREQB- -13I (BLK)
A-13V A-13V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213141516 1718 19202122232425 26 27 282930

AOM Driver
LREQB+ (BLU)
AOM_ST
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND (GRY)
GND
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
3
F314
AGNDP (ORG)
(BLK) Laser unit cooling fan
F314
LDD4
LDD4
F314
F314
F314_ST
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(GRY)
A+5VP
(RED)
AGND2
nSOS (BLK)
N.C (GRY) N.C
N.C
(WHT) (WHT) +24VP
LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
THA THA AGNDP (ORG)

AGND (BLK)
AGND nPM_ON
(RED) A+5VP A+5VP PM_ST (GRY)
(RED)
THA
THA
A-13VP (GRY)
JHU4
JHU4
LDD16
LDD16
(RED) (RED) A-13VP S801
(BLU) A+13VP A+13VP AGNDP (ORG)
(BLU)
THA20
AGND (BLK)
1 2 4 3 5 6
1 2 4 3 5 6
1 2 4 3 5 6
1 2 4 3 5 6
(BLK) (BLK) AGND A+5VP
4
AGND2 (RED)
S801_S (BLK)
N.C (GRY)
N.C
LDD5
LDD5
JROS
JROS
N.C
F801_2_3
Laser unit
AGNDP (RED)
F801_S (BLK)
(GRY)
N.C N.C N.C
F801_2_3
AGNDP (RED)
(BLK)
F802_S
N.C (GRY) N.C
N.C
F801_2_3
AGNDP (RED)
(BLK)
F803_S
N.C (GRY) N.C
25 2623 2421221920 1718 151613141112 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526 N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526
5
A+5VP A+5VP BP+

AGND2 BP+
AGND2 N.C N.C N.C
The part is not necessary
LDD6
RRSCK
LDD6
BP-
***
***
RRSCK
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(directly soldered to the circuit board). RRTXD B3P
LDD14
LDD14
RRTXD
***
***
RRRXD RRRXD
RRCS
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
RRCS
BTH+
BTH+
AGND
1 2
ABND
BLD+
BLD+
AGND AGND
BPD+ BPD+
AGND
LDD7
LDD7
AGND
3 4***
***
A+13VP A+13VP
AGND
LDD22 Circuit Board
5 6 7 8
AGND
A-13VP A-13VP
BHFM
6
BHFM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
N.C N.C
1
N.C
A+5VP A+5VP
AGND2
AGND2
BRSCK BRSCK
BRTXD
LDD8
LDD8
BRTXD
2 3***
***
BRRXD
4 5 6
BRRXD
BRCS BRCS
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N.C
7
GP+ GP+
GP-
LDD9
LDD9
1 2
1 2
1 2
GP-
***
***
GTH+
1
GTH+
AGND AGND
GLD+ GLD+
AGND AGND
GPD+
GPD+
LDD10
LDD10
AGND
2 3 ***
***
4 5 6
AGND
8
A+13VP
A+13VP
AGND AGND
A-13VP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A-13VP
A+5VP
1
A+5VP
AGND2 AGND2
GRSCK GRSCK
GRTXD GRTXD
LDD11
LDD11
GRRXD
2 ***
***
GRRXD
GRCS
3 4 5 6
GRCS
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
N.C
9
RPD+ RPD+
RPD- RPD-
RMODE RMODE
R-5V R-5V
AGND
1 2 3 4 5
AGND
R+5V R+5V
RLDON
RLDON
RHFM RHFM
AGND AGND
6 ***
***
LDD12
LDD12
RL+5V RL+5V
AGND AGND
MPX_TH MPX_TH
X_TrE
10
X_TrE
R-5V
R-5V
X_TrB X_TrB
A+13VP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16
7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16
A+13VP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16
AGND AGND
RTH+ RTH+
R_TrB R_TrB
R_TrC
LDD13
LDD13
R_TrC
***
***
AGND AGND
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
11
21-27
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-28
21.4.7
1
2
A+24V1
A+24V1
A+24V2
A+24V2
GND-24A
GND-24A
A+8V1
A+8V1
A+8V2
A+8V2
GND-8A
3
GND-8A
+13V A-13V1
(RED)
PWR12
PWR12
GND A+13V1
1 2
(BLK)
A+13V2
A+13V2
A+13V3
LTC1
LTC1
A+13V3
LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
GND-13A
PWR22 Circuit Board

-13V GND-13A
(BLU)
GND GND-13A
3 4
(BLK)
GND-13A
4
A-13V
A-13V
1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 1022 1123 1224

5
Thermistor 1 (RED)
Thermistor 2
LTC2
LTC2
GND (Shield) (WHT)
1 2 3
board wiring (3/3)
Part A of the CTC22/24 circuit
6
LTC22 Circuit Board

Thermo module +
(RED)
Thermo module -
LTC3
LTC3
1 2
(BLK)
7
board wiring (3/3)

Part B of the CTC22/24 circuit
8
D203A(+) D203A
(GRY)
D203A(-) GND(DGND)
D203B(+) (BLK)
(GRY) D203B
D203B(-) GND(DGND)
(BLK)
D203C(+) (GRY) D203C
D203C(-) GND(DGND)
LTC4
LTC4
CTC11
CTC11
(BLK)
D203D(+) D203D
D203D(-) (GRY) GND(DGND)
CTC22/24
(BLK)
LH201(+) LH201-(VCC)
Circuit Board
(GRY)
9
LH201(-) LH201
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
21.4.8
D406 (+) Dryer section safety thermostat
(ORG) (RED)
D406 (-)
D406
D406
D406
JD406
JD406
(03EP-15A06B-090)
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
1 10
CTP21IN PAC21 IN (BLK)
VCC (FU1) (5 ) VCC
PU408 PU408
1
PU409 PU409
D418 (+) N.C
GND (0 ) GND D418 (-)
2 9
PU410 PU410 N.C
PU411 PU411
PU401 PU401
F405 F405
D419 (+) N.C
VCC (FU1) (5 ) VCC
D419 (-)
38
H401 H401 N.C
H402 H402
GND (0 ) GND
H403 H403
H404 H404 D401 (+) P1 safety thermostat
H406A H406A D401 (-) (ORG)
PAC14
PAC14
D401
D401
D401
(03EP-15A06B-090)
1 2
1 2
4 11
H406B H406B (BLK)
VCC (FU1) (5 ) VCC
Spare output 1 Spare output
H407 H407 D402 (+) P2 safety thermostat
GND (ORG)
2
(0 ) GND D402 (-)
D402
D402
D402
(03EP-15A06B-090)
PAC17
PAC17
CTP21
CTP21
1 2
1 2
5 12
REON REON (BLK)
H408 H408
D401 D401
D402 D402 D403 (+) PS1/2/3 safety thermostat
VCC (FU1) (5 ) VCC (ORG)
D403 (-)
D403
D403
D403
(03EP-15A06B-090)
1 2
1 2
6 13
D403 D403 (BLK)

D404 D404
GND (0 ) GND
D406 D406 D404 (+) PS4 safety thermostat
D418 Not used D404 (-) (ORG)
D404
D404
D404
(03EP-15A06B-090)
1 2
1 2
7 14
+5VON signal +5V ON signal (BLK)
GND GND
VCC (FU1) (5 ) VCC
PACP+5V P+5 V notification
PACP+24V P+24 V notification
GND (0 ) GND
PACSEL0 PACSEL0 H403 (L)
(BLK) PS1/2/3 processing tank heater
3
PACSEL1 PACSEL1 H403 (N) N.C
1 2
H403
H403
H403
GND CTP21 OUT (WHT) (240 V / 360W)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
1 2 3
1 2 3
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
PAC5
PAC5
3 4
H404 (L) PS4 processing tank heater
(BLK)
H404 (N) N.C
5 6
(WHT)
H404
H404
H404
(240 V / 360W)
1 2 3
1 2 3
PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
IL24 V (+ ) IN
(ORG)
PWR5
1 2
IL24 V (- ) IN
1 3
(BLK)
PAC15
PAC15
H401 (L)
To PWR22
(BLK) P1 processing tank heater
H401 (N) N.C
1 2
H401
H401
H401
(WHT) (240 V / 360W)
1 2 3
1 2 3
4
N.C N.C
PAC6
PAC6
H402 (L) P2 processing tank heater
(BLK)
P+21V H402 (N) N.C
4 5
H402
H402
H402
(ORG) (ORG) (WHT) (240 V / 360W)
1 2 3
PGND
1 2 3
JPS1
JPS1
1 2
1 2
3 6
PWR15
12 14
(BLK) (BLK)
To PWR22
P+5V
(RED) (RED) PGND 200V (L ) IN
Solution heater (1) 200 V input from (K1)
PWR13
8 9
1 4
(BLK) (BLK) 200V (N) IN
PAC16
PAC16
To PWR22
1 2
N.C N.C
PAC7
PAC7
JPS2
JPS2
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5
+24V30 200V (L ) IN
(ORG)
PGND Solution heater (2) 200 V input from (K3)
1 4
2 5
(BLK) N.C N.C
PWR17
To PWR22
PAC8
PAC8
200V (N) IN
1 2 3
PU408 (L) P1R replenisher pump
PU408 (N) (BLK)
(KBR-3XAU1M)
PU408
PU408
PU408
1 5
1 2
1 2
(WHT)
PAC22 Circuit Board

SSR3 (-) PU409 (L) P2RA replenisher pump
Dryer fan SSR (BLK)
SSR3 (+) PU409 (N)
1 5
(KBR-3XAU1M)
PU409
PU409
PU409
2 6
1 2
1 2
(WHT)
6
SSR2 (-)
PAC3
PAC3
Dryer SSR A
SSR2 (+)
2 6
PU410 (L) P2RB replenisher pump
PU410 (N) (BLK)
(KBR-3XAU1M)
PU410
PU410
PU410
1 2
1 2
PAC12
PAC12
3 7
(WHT)
Dryer SSR B SSR1 (-)
SSR1 (+)
3 7
Spare output (-)
Spare output Spare output (+) PU411 (L) PSR replenisher pump
(BLK)
PU411 (N)
4 8
(KBR-3XAU1M)
PU411
PU411
PU411
1 2
4 8
1 2
(WHT)
PU401 (L) P1 circulation pump

PU401 (N) (BLK)
1 7
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU401
PU401
PU401
K6 (+ ) CRT Relay PU401G (YE L / GRN) N.C

N.C
1 2 3 4
CRT relay (K6)

1 2 3 4
K6 (- ) CRT Relay
1 6
K2 (+)
Dryer heater 1 (K2) PU402 (L)
K2 (-) P2 circulation pump
2 7
PU402 (N) (BLK)

2 8
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU402
PU402
PU402
PU402G (YE L / GRN) N.C

N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
K4 (+)
Dryer heater (K2)
K4 (-)
PAC13
PAC13
3 8
K1 (+) PU403 (L) PS1 circulation pump

Solution heater 1 (K1) (BLK)
K1 (-) PU403 (N)
8
3 9
4 9
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU403
PU403
PU403

N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
K3 (+)
Solution heater 2 (K3)
K3 (-)
5 10
PAC4
PAC4
PU404 (L) PS2 circulation pump

(BLK)
PU404 (N)
4 10
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU404
PU404
PU404

N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
PU405 (L) PS3 circulation pump

(BLK)
PU405 (N)
5 11
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU405
PU405
PU405

N.C
1 2 3 4
9
1 2 3 4
Power supply section exhaust fan 1 (ORG)

F306
F306
F306
1 2
1 2
1 3
1 3
1 3
(BLK)
JF306
JF306
PAC11
PAC11
Power supply section exhaust fan 2 (ORG)

PU406 (L)
F307
F307
F307
1 2
2 4
2 4
2 4
1 2
(BLK) (BLK) PS4 circulation pump

PU406 (N)
6 12
(WHT) (MD-10-NL)
PU406
PU406
PU406

N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
100V (L) DC power supply relay ON (K5)

100V (N) AC100V
1 2
PAC2
PAC2
10
100V (L)
100 VAC input from the transformer output panel mount
100V (N)
PAC1
PAC1
1 2
100V (L)
100V (N) Dummy jumper connector for OFF
PAC18
PAC18
1 2
Change the connection.

11
100V (L) Dummy jumper connector for ON

100V (N)
PAC19
21-29
21.4.9 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
Power supply
section CRT
200V 100V or
200V
FG
L
N
FG
FG
N
CRT CRT
L
N
CRT CRT
1 2 3 4 5 6 CTP22/24 circuit
B 1 2 3 4 5 6
board
PCOFF signal
(YEL/GRN)
(LBL)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(YEL/GRN)
(LBL)
PC signal
Mouse Keyboard
GND
GND
CTP8 P1
CTP8 P1
1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 1
N.C (RED) N.C

JCRT
N.C
JCRT
(WHT)
1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15
(YEL)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
C
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 USB-B USB-B
JPC1 MOUSE-B JKEY1
JPC1 MOUSE-B JKEY1 USB USB
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Coaxial cable (GRN)
Coaxial cable (RED)
Coaxial cable (BLU)
(WHT)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRN)
N.C (RED)
N.C (RED)
(WHT)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C (YEL)
D
(WHT)
(WHT)
(GRN)
(RED)
(GRN)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(WHT)
(GRN)
N.C
N.C
(YEL)
(RED)
(BLU)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CRT Dsub 9P MOUSE-A KEY USB USB
CRT Dsub 9P MOUSE-A KEY USB USB
N
FG
GND
L
-DaTa
-DaTa
+DaTa
VCC
+DaTa
VCC
GND
PC0 +
PC0 -
PC -
PC +
Main Control Unit

E
PC 2 ETH SIO
PC 2 ETH SIO
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68 4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
N.C
cut
F N.C
N.C
WHT ( • ) RED
WHT ( • ) BLK
GRY ( • ) BLK
GRY ( • ) RED
LBN ( • ) RED
LGN ( • ) RED
LBN ( • ) BLK
LGN ( • ) BLK
YEL ( • ) BLK
YEL ( • ) RED
WHT(ORG)
WHT(GRN)
WHT(BLU)
WHT(BRN)
cut
N.C
GRN
BRN
ORG
BLU
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68 4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

BOX3 JETH JSIO
BOX3 JETH JSIO
G
GND
GND
GND
GND
SD6
SD7
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND
ATN
GND
GND
REQ
GND
GND
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
SDP1
SD10
SD11
GND
GND
GND
SD3
SD4
SD5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RST
MSG
SEL
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SD0
SD1
SD2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
BSY
ACY
GND
GND
GND
SD8
SD9
SDP0
NC
NC
C/D
I/O
Image Processing Box Panel
21-30
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
CTP1 IN CTP IN
(0 ) GND GND
21.4.10
N.C P+24V11
N.C F404 M301CLK M301CLK
N.C P+24V11 M302CLK M302CLK
F407 (5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
1
N.C
P+24V11 M303CLK M303CLK
GND M304CLK M304CLK
(ORG)
PDC8
PDC8
Processor control section cooling fan P+24V11 M306CLK M306CLK
(BLK) GND M309CLK M309CLK
F317
F317
F317
(109R1224H1071)
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(0 ) GND GND
M310CLK M310CLK
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
M311CLK M311CLK
M313CLK M313CLK
M403CLK M403CLK
M314CLK M314CLK
(0 ) GND GND
M315CLK M315CLK
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
M305CLK M305CLK
M305PD M305PD
2
24V P+24V42
(ORG) (RED) S301 DOTSTB (301)
M401A
GND
M401A
GND
1 2
(BLK) (BLK) PIOD0 PIOD0
GND
(BLK) (BLK) (0 ) GND GND
M401 DIR
M401
M401
171822-2
PDC11
PDC11
(ORG) (ORG) PIOD1 PIOD1
171825-2 M401 ON / OFF
(ORG) (ORG) PIOD2 PIOD2
GND
1 4 2 5 6 3
1 4 2 5 6 3
1 4 6 3 2 5
N.C (BLK) (BLK) (5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
Processor drive motor N.C PIOD3 PIOD3
N.C PIOD4 PIOD4
M401
CTP1
CTP1
PDC1
(TL1117)
PDC1
M401C
M401C
N.C PIOD5 PIOD5
N.C
M401DRIVER
PIOD6 PIOD6
N.C (0 ) GND GND
N.C PIOD7 PIOD7
M401B
M401B
PIOSELO PIOA0
DIR (5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
PIOSEL1 PIOA1
ON / OFF PIOSEL2 PIOA2
N.C PIOSEL3 PIOA3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 12
PIOWR
3
PIOWR
(0 ) GND GND
PDCP+5V PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V PDCP+24V
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
PDCPIOON PDCPIO
PU407 D312 D312
Auto washing pump (ORG) GND
(BLK) D313 D313
(PDH-05) P+24V33 YOBI OUT1
PU407
PU407
INSP1
PU407
(ORG) GND (0) GND GND
2 7 3 8
1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4
(BLK)
N.C N.C
F330
YOBI IN1 ASC POF5
Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)
M402 OUT1 GND GND
(TG-06E-BG-500C365,24V) (RED)
M402
M402
PDC9
M402
PDC9
M402 OUT2 GND GND
1 6
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
(0 ) GND GND
Rxd1 Rxd1
Txd1 Txd1
N.C
4
(5 ) VCC VCC (FU1)

Sorter drive motor M404 OUT1 CTP1OUT GND
(ORG) (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
N.C N.C M404 OUT2
M404
M404
M404
(TG-26A-AM-60-A732)
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
N.C
5 4 9 10
(BLK)
N.C N.C
JS01
JS01
N.C N.C
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2)
(BLK)
Sorter full buzzer P+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(RED) (RED)
(HMB-06) GND
BZ401
(BLK)
BZ
BZ
PDC6
PDC6
N.C N.C N.C N,C
1 2 3
8
8
(BLK)
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
P+24V11
(ORG)
Auto washing pump GND
5
(BLK)
(PDH-05) TXD
(ORG)
PDC5
PDC5
RXD
(ORG)
GND
1 2 3 4 5
(BLK)
PDM
PDM
N.C
Densitometer
N.C
F340
Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor N.C
N.C
1 5 3 4 9 7 8 2 6
(TG-06E-BG-500C365, 24V)
Sorter flapper drive motor

6
Sorter fill buzzer P+24V11 P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan
F401 (ORG)
F401
F401
F401
(109R1224H1071)
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
P+24V11 PS processing tank heater cooling fan

(ORG)
F402
F402
F402
F402 (109R1224H1071)
1 2
1 2
3 4
(BLK)
Sorter belt drive motor
PDC7
PDC7
Processing tank heater cooling fan

PDC22/24 Circuit Board (1/2)
P+24V11
(ORG)
F403
F403
F403
F403 (109R1224H1071)
1 2
1 2
5 6
(BLK)
P+24V11 Processing tank exhaust tank

7
(ORG)
F406
F406
F406
F406 (109R1224H1071)
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
N.C N.C
7 8 9
Sorter flapper position sensor
P1 rack auto washing valve P+24V31

(ORG)
S401
S401
S401
S401
1 2
(B423-804A)
1 10
(BLK)
8
P2 rack auto washing valve P+24V31

(ORG) S402
S402
S402
S402
1 2
(B423-804A)
2 11
(BLK)
PS1 rack auto washing valve P+24V31

(ORG) S403
S403
S403
S403
1 2
(B423-804A)
3 12
(BLK)
(Not used) P+24V31

(ORG) S404
S404
S404
S404
1 2
(B423-804A)
4 13
(BLK)
PDC12
PDC12
P1R cartridge washing valve P+24V32

PDC12
PDC12
9
(ORG)
S407
S407
S407
S407
1 2
(B423-804A)
5 14
(BLK)
P2RA cartridge washing valve P+24V32

(ORG) S408
S408
S408
S408
1 2
(B423-804A)
6 15
(BLK)
P2RB cartridge washing valve P+24V32

(ORG) S409
S409
S409
S409
1 2
(B423-804A)
7 16
(BLK)
P1R stirring valve P+24V32

(ORG) S410
S4010
S4010
1 2
S4010
(B423-804A)
8 17
(BLK)
10
9 18
11
21-31
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
21-32
M301A
(RED)
+24V01 P+24V01 M301 / B Paper supply motor
9
(ORG) (YEL)
M301A
M301
M301
M301
+24V02 N.C (BLU) (XSH7126-347)
1
M301 / B
1 2 3 4
GND
1 7 2 8
GND-24VO
1 2 3 4
(ORG)
10
(BLK)
+24V11 N.C
+24V12 N.C
GND-24V1 N.C
+24V21 P+24V21
PDC16
(ORG)
PDC16
+24V22 GND
5 11 6 12
1 2
(ORG)
+24V23 N.C
GND-24V2 P+24V22 M302 A
(BLK) (RED) (RED)
GND-24V2 GND Feed drive motor 1
3 4
(BLK) M30 2 / A
(YEL) (YEL)
PDC22
PDC22
+24V01 N.C M302 B (103G770-2264)
M302
PWR16
PWR16
JHK1
(BLU) (BLU)
JHK1
+24V02 P+24V02 M30 2 / B
(ORG)
1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4
M302
M302
3 9 4 10
GND-24V0 GND (ORG) (ORG)
7 8
(BLK) N.C N.C
+24V11 N.C N.C N.C
1 3 4 6 2 5
1 3 4 6 2 5
+24V12 N.C
GND-24V1 N.C
+24V21 N.C
+24V22 N.C
+24V23 P+24V23 21.4 Wiring Diagrams
2
(ORG)
GND-24V2 GND
5 6
(BLK)
GND-24V2 N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
M304 A
(RED) (RED)
M304 / A Register drive motor
(YEL) (YEL) (103-564-5245)
M304
M304 B
(BLU) (BLU)
M304 / B
M304
M304
1 7 2 8
1 7 2 8
1 9 2 10
(ORG) (ORG)
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
+24V30 N.C
M309 A (RED) (RED)
+24V30 N.C Register nip motor
M309 / A (YEL) (YEL)
+24V31 P+24V31 (103-564-5245)
1
M309
(ORG) M309 B (BLU) (BLU)
JRE1
JRE1
+24V31 N.C
M309
M309
(BLK) M309 / B
3 11 4 12
3 9 4 10
3 9 4 10
+24V32 N.C (ORG) (ORG)
N.C N.C
+24V32 P+24V32 N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
(ORG)
1 5 2 6 3 4
GND-24V3 GND
(BLK)
PDC24
PDC24
3
GND-24V3 GND
PDC16
PDC16
+24V41 N.C N.C
+24V41 N.C N.C N.C M310 A
PWR18
PWR18
3 2 4 5 6
+24V42 (RED) (RED)
M310 / A Width detecting drive motor
+24V42 N.C (YEL) (YEL)
M310
M310 B (103-564-5245)
+24V43 N.C P+24V41 (BLU) (BLU)
M310 / B
M310
M310
(ORG)
5 13 6 14
5 11 6 12
5 11 6 12
+24V43 GND (ORG) (ORG)
(BLK) N.C N.C
GND-24V4 P+24V42 N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
(ORG)
GND-24V4 GND
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
GND-24V4
PDC23
PDC23
GND-24V4 N.C P+24V43
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
(ORG)
GND M315 A N.C
(BLK)
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2)
N.C N.C M315 / A
5 6 7
N.C
M315 B N.C
M315 / B N.C
PWR22 Circuit Board

7 15 8 16
4
M311 A (RED) (RED)

M311 / A Sub-scanning nip motor
P+5V1 P+5V (YEL) (YEL)
(RED)
M311
GND M311 B (BLU) (BLU) (103-564-5245)

N.C
1 2
PDC15
PDC15
PDC25
PDC25
(BLK)
M311
M311
M311 / B
1 3 2 4
(ORG) (ORG)
N.C N.C N.C N.C
N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
JHU2
GND-5P N.C
JHU2
N.C N.C
N.C N.C N.C
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9
N.C
N.C
PWR14
PWR14
N.C
P+24V02 Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan
N.C (ORG) (ORG)
F301
F301
F301
TCK (F301 ) GND (119C889854A)

1 2
1 2
5 10
5 10
N.C (BLK) (BLK)
GND P+24V02 N.C
N.C (F302 ) GND
TDO N.C
PDC22/24 Circuit Board (2/2)

N.C
VCC P+24V02 N.C
PDC19
PDC19
N.C
5
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
PLD IPS connector TMS (Spare) GND N.C
P+24V02 N.C
PDC25
PDC25
(Spare) GND N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TDI
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S301 1
(BLK) (BLK)
S301 2
(BLK) (BLK)
S301 3
(BLK) (BLK)
S301 4
(BLK) (BLK) Back printer drive solenoid 1
S301 5
(BLK) (BLK)
S301
S301 6 (125A8413422)
(BLK) (BLK)
S301 7
S301
S301
24V P+24V23 (BLK) (BLK)

(ORG) S301 8
JHA1
JHA1
GND GND (BLK) (BLK)

(BLK) P+24V21
5V P+5V (ORG) (ORG)
4/4.5 switch (ORG) P+24V21
1 11 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15
GND (ORG) (ORG)

6
(BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C

(BLK) (BLK) CLK M305 CLK
PDC3
PDC3
(ORG) N.C N.C N.C N.C
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
(RED) (RED) PD M305 PD

Sub-scanning drive motor (BLK)
DR2
DR2
(ORG) (ORG)
M305
DR1
DR1
N.C
JHU1
JHU1
M305
M305
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
(YEL) (YEL) N.C
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
PDC4
PDC4
1 2 3 4 5
(BLU) (BLU) N.C
N.C N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
N.C N.C
S302 1
M305 Driver
N.C (BLK) (BLK)
N.C S302 2
(BLK) (BLK)
1 3 5 10 8 9 2 4 6 7 11 12
S302 3 (BLK) (BLK)
S302 4 (BLK) (BLK)
S302 5 (BLK) (BLK) Back printer drive solenoid 2
S302
S302 6 (BLK) (BLK) (125A8413422)

S302 7
S302
S302
(BLK) (BLK)
S302 8 (BLK) (BLK)
P+24V21 (ORG) (ORG)
P+24V21
6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19 10 20
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
(ORG) (ORG)
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
7
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
P+5V
JHA2
JHA2
Cutter home position sensor 1 (RED) (RED)

D312 sensor signal M303 A (RED) (RED)
(GP1A71A) (GRY) (GRY)
D312
D312
M303 / A Feed drive motor 2
GND (YEL) (YEL)
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK)
M303
M303 B (BLU) (BLU) (103G770-2264)

1 6 2 7
M303
M303
5 13 6 14
5 13 6 14
M303 / B (ORG) (ORG)

N.C N.C
PDC2
JCU4
JCU4
PDC2
N.C N.C
1 3 4 6 2 5
1 3 4 6 2 5
Cutter home position sensor 2 P+5V

(RED) (RED)
(GP1A71A) D313 sensor signal
5 10
(GRY) (GRY)
D313
D313
PDC18
PDC18
GND
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
4 5 6
(BLK) (BLK)
M313 A (RED) (RED)
M313 / A Feed nip motor
(YEL) (YEL)
M313
M313 B (BLU) (BLU) (103-564-5245)

M313
M313
3 8 4 9
7 15 8 16
7 15 8 16
M313 / B (ORG) (ORG)

N.C N.C
8
N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
P+24V02 Printer suction fan 1

(ORG)
F308
F308
F308
F308 GND (109R0824H202)

1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
(ORG) (ORG) M307OUT1

Cutter drive motor
1 2
M307
M307
M307
JCU1
JCU1
M307OUT2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
PDC13
PDC13
(BLK) (BLK)
P+24V02 Printer suction fan 2
(ORG)
F309
F309
F309
F309 GND (109R0824H202)

3 4
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
9
PDC20
PDC20
P+24V02 Printer exhaust fan 3

(ORG)
F315
F315
F315
(109R0824H202)
1 2
1 2
5 6
(F315 ) GND (BLK)
Printer exhaust fan 4

P+24V02 (109R0824H202)
(ORG)
F316
F316
F316
(F316 ) GND
1 2
1 2
7 8
(BLK)
M306 A
Exit drive motor (RED) (RED)
M306 / A
(YEL) (YEL)
M306
(103G770-2264) M306 B Printer suction fan 3

(BLU) (BLU) P+24V02
10
M306 / B (ORG)
F310
F310
F310
M306
M306
(109R0824H202)
1 5 2 6
1 5 2 6
1 5 2 6
(ORG) (ORG)
1 2
1 2
1 2
N.C N.C F310 GND (BLK)

N.C N.C
1 3 4 6 2 5
1 3 4 6 2 5
JSY1
JSY1
PDC17
PDC17

(ORG)
F311
F311
F311
F311 GND (109R0824H202)

3 4
1 2
1 2
UL1007 24AWG (BLK)

(RED) (RED) M314 A
Exit section up/down belt motor M314 / A
(YEL) (YEL)
PDC21
PDC21
M314
(103-564-5245) (BLU) (BLU) M314 B

Printer exhaust fan 2
M314
M314
M314 / B
3 7 4 8
3 7 4 8
3 7 4 8
(ORG) (ORG) P+24V02 (ORG)

F312
F312
F312
N.C N.C (F312 ) GND (109R0824H202)

5 6
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
N.C N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4

(ORG)
F313
F313
F313
(F313 ) GND (109R0824H202)

1 2
1 2
7 8
(BLK)
11
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
21.4.11
1
2
P+5V1
(RED)
GND-5P
(BLK) P+9V1
To CTC3
(RED) N.C P+9V2
GND-9P
(BLK) N.C
(ORG)
table
(BLK) N.C
JNDL1
To the light
N.C P+5V1
1 2 3
(RED)
PWR13
PWR13
GND-5P
(BLK) N.C P+9V1
To PAC16
3
+9V P+9V2
(RED) GND-9P
PZR1
PZR1
GND
1 2
(BLK) N.C N.C
N.C N.C
PWR22 Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314
PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
X-axis on + PZ201+
(GRY) PZ201-
X-axis on -
(BLK) PZ202+
Y-axis on + (GRY)
Y-axis on - PZ202-
(BLK) PZON+
PWONon + (GRY) PZON-
PWONon - (BLK) ERR201
PZR2
PZR2
5
X-axis SNG (GRY) DGND
CTC13
CTC13
GND (BLK)
ERR202
Y-axis SNG (GRY) DGND
GND (BLK) ERRPZR
Power supply NG (GRY) DGND
PZR22 Circuit Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
GND (BLK) DGND
N.C
N.C DGND
CTC22/24 Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
6
X-axis output (RED) Piezoelectric actuator 1

NC N.C N.C N.C
PZ201
(BLK) (AE203D16)
GND N.C N.C
PZ201
PZ201
NC N.C
1 2 3 4
8
N.C N.C
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
PZR3
PZR3
X-axis output (RED) Piezoelectric actuator 2

NC N.C N.C N.C
PZ202
(BLK) N.C N.C (AE203D16)

GND
5 6 7
PZ202
PZ202
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
9
10
11
21-33
21.4.12 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(GRY)
B image data output
A (GRY)
G image data output
(GRY)
R image data output
LDA22 Circuit Board
B (ORG)
(BLK)
Power supply output voltages (RED)
(BLK)
for the AOM driver (BLU)
(GRY)
(GRY) (GRY)
(GRY) (RED)
C (BLU)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED) (RED)
(GRY) (RED)
(RED) (RED)
(BLK) (BLK)
R-LD drive system (RED) (RED)
(GRY) (GRY)
(GRY) (RED)
(BLU) (RED)
(GRY) (RED) APC22 Circuit
(GRY) (RED)
(RED) (RED) Board
D (RED) (RED)
(BLK) (BLK)
(GRY) (RED)
R-LD EEPROM I/F (GRY) (RED)
(GRY) (RED)
(GRY) (RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(RED) JMR22 Circuit
(GRY) (RED)
R-LD temperature control system (GRY) (RED) Board
(GRY)
E (GRY) (GRY)
(GRY) (GRN)
(BLK) (GRN)
(GRY) (GRY)
G-SHG drive system
(RED) (GRN)
(BLK) (GRN)
(BLU) (GRN)
(RED)
(RED) (RED)
G-SHG temperature control system (BLK) (BLK)
F (RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY) (GRN) JMG22 Circuit

G-SHG EEPROM I/F (GRY) (GRN)
(GRY) (GRN) Board
(GRY) (GRN)
(GRY) (GRY)
(GRY) (BLU)
(BLK) (BLU)
(GRY) (GRY)
B-SHG drive system
G (RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(RED)
(RED) (RED)
B-SHG temperature control system (BLK) (BLK)
(RED) (RED)
(BLK) (BLK)
JMB22 Circuit
G-SHG EEPROM I/F (GRY) (BLU)
Board
H (GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
Laser Unit
LDD22 Circuit Board JML22 Circuit Board
21-34
21.4.13 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
SOS Detecting Circuit Board
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
JND20 Circuit Board DTA22 Circuit Board

B
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(ORG)
C (RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
Polygon Motor Circuit Board
(GRY) (GRY)
(ORG) (ORG) JND20 Circuit Board

(BLK) (BLK)
(GRY) (GRY)
(BLK) (GRY)
(ORG) (ORG) (RED)
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) Shutter solenoid
(RED) (RED) (SDC-1040)
D (BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
Laser unit internal mechanical
system (I/O) (RED) (ORG) Shutter sensor
(BLK) (BLK) (GP1A21)
(GRY) (GRY)
(RED) (ORG) (RED)

(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) Dustproof fan 1
(GRY) (GRY) (YEL)
E (RED)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK) (RED)
(GRY) (GRY) (BLK) Dustproof fan 2
(YEL)
(RED)
(BLK) Dustproof fan 3
(YEL)
F Laser Unit
(ORG) (RED)
(BLK) (BLK) Laser unit cooling fan
Laser unit cooling fan (GRY) (YEL)
Frame (Printer Section)

G
Exposure section temperature
sensor circuit board
Exposure section temperature (RED) (RED)

(BLK) (BLK)
sensor (BLU) (BLU)
(BLK) (BLK)
H
THA20 Circuit Board
Sub-scanning Unit
LDD22 Circuit Board
21-35
21.4.14 Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PWR22 Circuit Board

ADC22 Circuit Board Main Control Unit
B
GND-3.3V
GND-3.3V
GND-3.3V
GND-3.3V
GND-3.3V
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
D+3.3V1
D+3.3V1
D+3.3V1
D+3.3V1
D+3.3V1
ADC4 PWR6 PC2

ADC4 PWR6 PC2
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12 1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68
N.C
N.C
C
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40 1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10 1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68

BOX1 (S CANN ER) BOX2 BOX3 (S CSI)
BOX1 (S CANN ER) BOX2 BOX3 (S CSI)
GND
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SD0
SD1
GND
GND
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND
BSY
GND
GND
SD8
SD14
SD15
SDP1
SDP0
DIN12(+)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SD5
SD6
SD7
GND
GND
ATN
GND
GND
GND
SEL
REQ
GND
GND
GND
DIN0(+)
DIN1(-)
DIN2(+)
DIN3(+)
DIN4(-)
DIN5(+)
DIN7(-)
DIN8(+)
DIN9(-)
SDTR(-)
SDTW(+)
DIN10(+)
DIN11(-)
DIN12(-)
CLK(+)
SCK(-)
SCK(+)
DIN1(+)
DIN2(-)
DIN6(+)
DIN9(+)
SD12
SD13
SD10
SD11
DIN10(-)
DIN11(+)
DIN0(-)
DIN3(-)
DIN4(+)
DIN5(-)
DIN6(-)
DIN7(+)
DIN8(-)
CLK(-)
/HD(-)
SDTR(+)
SDTW(-)
GND
GND
SD2
SD3
SD4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
ACY
RST
MSG
GND
GND
GND
SD9
/HD(+)
NC
NC
C/D
I/O
D
Image Processing Box Circuit Board
Enable-R(+)
OUT PORT1
OUT PORT2
Datavalid(+)
Enable-G(-)
Enable-G(+)
CPL_VCCO
Enable-B(+)
Enable-B(-)
Enable-R(-)
Datavalid(-)
CPL_VCCI
/CTC_INT
DOUT2(+)
DOUT7(+)
IN PORT2
/CTC_IRQ
DOUT4(+)
LDA_RXD
CTP_TXD
DBG_RXD
DOUT3(-)
DOUT6(-)
CLOCK(-)
B-REQ(+)
IN PORT1
DBG_TXD
DOUT5(+)
LDA_TXD
DOUT0(+)
DOUT1(+)
DOUT3(+)
DOUT6(+)
CTC_TXD
CTC_RXD
CTP_RXD
DOUT0(-)
CLOCK(+)
G-REQ(-)
R-REQ(+)
DOUT1(-)
DOUT2(-)
DOUT4(-)
DOUT5(-)
DOUT7(-)
G-REQ(+)
R-REQ(-)
B-REQ(-)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
BOX4 (ROS) BOX5

BOX4 (ROS) BOX5
E 1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36 5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8 1112 13 1415 16 10 18192021 22 2324 25
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5
JGM1 JGM2 JGM3 JGM4
JGM1 JGM2 JGM3 JGM4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
To DBG
F
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
N.C
(GRY)
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
N.C
(BLK)
LDA1
LDA1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 3 2 4 5 1 2 3 4
CTC1 CTP9 LDA6
CTC1 CTP9 LDA6
N.C
TxD
TXD2
GND
RXD2
int out
N.C
int in
GND(DGND)
RxD
GND(DGND)
GMB_out1
GMB_out2
GHT_RxD_PAC
GHT_TxD_PAC
GMB_in1
GMB_in2
GHT_RxD_PC
GHT_TxD_PC
LDA22 Circuit Board
G CTC22/24 Circuit
CTP22/24 LDA22 Circuit
Circuit Board Board
Board
21-36
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
(M3_scr
21.4.15
FGND
1
ew) (M3_scr
ew)
CYS1
EHR-5
D+5V
(M3_scre
1 1
CYS1
DGND 2
2
A+12V
w)
3 3
FGND
AGND 4
4
A-12V 5
5
B5B-EH
1 D+5V
1
21 DGND 1 VCC Supply motor home
21 1 1
D114
2 A+12V 2 D114
2 2 2 position sensor
B3B-ZR
AGND GND SSD22
ZHR-3
PHDR-14VS
CYS12
22 22 3 3 3
3 3 A-12V (D114)
CYS121J 51005-0300
CYS121J 51006-0300
23 23 1 1
CYS2
SW1
PHR-6
4 4 2 2
CYS12
24 24 3 3
5 D123B SIO+ 1 4
5 1 4
CYS2
25 SIO- 2 5 1 VCC Door open/close sensor
25 2 5 1 1
SSB1
6 SIO+ SCLK+ 3 6 2 D112
6 3 6 2 2
S5B-ZR
SIO- SCLK- D115 (D112)
26 26 4 4 7 7 3 3 3
7 SCLK+ RST+ 5 8 4 GND
7 5 8 4 4
SSB22
SCLK- RST-
Cartridge sensor
ZHR-5
27 27 6 6 9 9 5 5 5
RST+ (D115)
B6B-PH-K-S
8 8 10 10 6 6
RST-
CYS122J 51005-0600
CYS122J 51006-0600
28 28 11 11
9 CY1-9 12
9 12
29 CY1-29 13
29 13
B14B-PHDSS
10 CY1-10 14
10 14
30 CY1-30
30
11 CY1-11 1 VCC
11 1 1
D113
31 CY1-31 2 D113
31 2 2
S4B-ZR
12 CY1-12 3 GND IPI sensor (D113)
12 3 3
SSA22
CY1-32
ZHR-4
32 32 4 4 4
13 M101-A 5
13 1 5
M101
M101-/A
CYS123J 51005-0500
CYS123J 51006-0500
33 33 2
14 M101-B M101 Feed motor (M101)
14 3
3
M101-/B
51005-0400
51006-0400
34 34 4
15 CY1-15
15
35 CY1-35
35
16 CY1-16
16
36 CY1-36
36
17 CY1-17
17
37 CY1-37
37
18 SIO2+ SIO2+ 1
18 1
CYS3
38 SIO2- SIO2- 2
38 2
19 SCLK2+ SCLK2+ 3
19 3
39 SCLK2- SCLK2- 4
39 4
20 RST2+ RST2+ 5
20 5
40 RST2- RST2- 6
40 6
B6B-PH-K-S
CY1
CY1
CYS3
D110P
PHR-6
1
DTF2
D111P 135 rear fogging sensor (D110P)
PHDR-12VS
CYS11
2
S6B-ZR
+12V
3
1 GND
1 4
-12V 135 front fogging sensor (D111P)
QR/P4-40S-C(01)
QR/P4-40P-C(01)
ZHR-6
2
4
2 5
3 3 6
CYS11
4 4
CY1-15 1 M103-A 5
1 1 5
DTF22
JMS1
JMS1
M103
CY1-35 2 M103-/A 6
2 2 6
CY1-16 3 M103-B M103 Mask motor (M103) 7 VCC
3 3 7 1
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram
DTF1
CY1-36 M103-/B D102P 135 upstream perforation sensor (D102P)
51005-0400
51006-0400
4 4 4 8 8 2
CY1-17 5 9 VCC
5 9 3
CY1-37 6 10 D106P
6 10 4
B12B-PHDSS
135 check tape sensor (D106P)
ZHR-5
51005-0600
51006-0600
11 11 5
B5B-ZR
12 12
S101+
S101-
VCC
1 1
S101
S101 Solenoid (S101)
D101P
2 2
B4B-ZR
D101P DTE22 135 leading end sensor (D101P)
51006-0200
3
ZHR-4
51005-0200
4
M102
CY1-9
5
1
CY1-29
2
CY1-10 M102 Supply motor (M102)
PHR-3
CYS10
3
CY1-30
51006-0400
CYS10
4
AR
1 E_D107L
1 1
R_D107L-MY
51005-0400
2 2 2 135 frame sensor (D107L)
S3B-ZR
R_D107L-MR LED-Ar
3 3 3
ZHR-3
B3B-PH-K-S
M104
CY1-11
1
CY1-31
2
CY1-12 M104 Door motor (M104)
3
CY1-32
51006-0400
4
51005-0400
6
VCC
1
D105P
2
B4B-ZR
D105P DTE22 IX240 perforation sensor (D105P)

3
CYS9
ZHR-4
PHDR-10VS
4
CYS22 Circuit Board
1 1
2 2
CYS9
3 D108P
3 1
DTB1
4 D109P IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor (D108P)

4 2
B5B-ZR
5 +12V
5 3
GND
DTB22
6 6 4
-12V IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)
ZHR-5
7 7 5
8 8
9 9
B10B-PHDSS
10 10
CYS4
VCC
PHDR-18VS
1
D104P
2 IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)

S3B-ZR
D104P DT G22
ZHR-3
7
1 1 3
2 2
1 M-12V 3
3
240MAG_read2 (D116_2) MGND
MRH1
2 4 4
S6B-ZR
CYS4
3 M+12V 5
5
4 MGND 6
6
5 CMRD2(D116_2) 7
MRH90
7
R-head C
240MAG_read1(D116_1) CMRD1(D116_1)
ZHR-6
6 8 8
9 9
10 10
240MAG_write1 (MG101_1) 1 VCC 11
11
2 CMWR1(MG101_1) 12
12
240MAG_W/Enable1 (MG101_2) 3 CMEN1(MG101_2) 13
13
4 CMWR2(MG101_3) 14
14
240MAG_write2 (MG101_3) 5 CMEN2(MG101_4) 15
15
B18B-PHDSS
MWH20
W-head C
GND
IL-Y-6P-S15L2-EF
6 16 16
240MAG_W/Enable2 (MG101_4) 17 VCC
17 1
MWH1 IL-Y-6S-S15C3
D103P
18 18 2
B4B-ZR
D103P DTE22 135 downstream perforation sensor (D103P)

3
ZHR-4
4
CYS8
8
PHDR-16VS
1 VCC
1 1
D117
2 D117
2 2 Mask motor home position sensor (D117)
S3B-ZR
135 downstream perforation sensor E_D103L GND SSE22

ZHR-3
1 3 3 3
R_D103L
ZHR-2
D103L
(D103L) LEE22 2 4 4
B2B-ZR
5 5
CYS8
6 6 Key1_< (D124)
7 D124
7 1
IX240 perforation sensor 1 E_D105L 8 D125 Key2_<< (D125)
8 2
B5B-ZR
LEE22 R_D105L D126

D105L
(D105L) 2 1 1 9 9 3
B2B-ZR
CYS5
D127 Key3_>> (D126)

ZHR-2
PHDR-20VS
2 2 10 10 4
MSC22
CYS51J
CYS51J
GND
MSC1 ZHR-5
3 3 11 11 5
IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor 4 4 1 1 12 12 Key4_> (D127)
B16B-PHDSS
1 E_D108L 5 2 13
5 2 13
LEB1
(D108L) 2 R_D108L 6 3 14
6 3 14
B4B-ZR
3 E_D109L 7 4 15 D120
IX240 front unexposed frame sensor 7 4 15 1
LEB22
D120
R_D109L GND Upper cover open/close sensor (D120)

ZHR-2
51006-0800
51005-0800
4 8 8 5 5 16 16 2 MSA22
S2B-ZR
CYS5
(D109L)
ZHR-4
6 6
7 7
8 8
9
1 E_D102L 1 9 D118
1 9 1 135 lower mask H sensor (D118)
R_D102L D119
MSB1
135 upstream perforation sensor (D102L) 2 2 2 10 10 2

B9B-ZR
LEF1
B3B-ZR
MSB22
CYS52J
CYS52J
E_D111L GND
ZHR-3
3 3 3 11 11 3 135 lower mask F sensor (D119)

135 front fogging sensor (D111L) 4 R_D111L 4 12
4 12
5 E_D110L 5 13
5 13
R_D110L
LEF22
135 rear fogging sensor (D110L) 6 6 6 14 14

7 E_D106L 7 15
7 15
B20B-PHDSS
135 check tape sensor (D106L) R_D106L

ZHR-9
8 8 8 16 16
51006-0900
51005-0900
9 9 9 17 17
18 18
19 19
CYS7
PHR-4
20 20
CYS7
1 E_D104L 1
1
CYS53J
CYS53J
IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104L) LEE22 R_D104L

D104L
2 2 2 1 1 1
B2B-ZR
LED1
LED101_G Status indicator LED_R (LED101_R)

ZHR-2
3 3 2 2 2
S4B-ZR
4 3 GND LED22
4 3 3
LED101_R
ZHR-4
4 4 4 Status indicator LED_G (LED101_G)

1 E_D101L
135 leading end sensor (D101L) R_D101L
ZHR-2
LEE22
D101L
51006-0400
51005-0400
B4B-PH-K-S
2
B2B-ZR
10
CYS6
PHR-7
1
135 frame sensor1 (D107P-1) D107P_1
FSP
D107P
D107P
2 1 1 1 1
B8B-ZR
CYS6
3 D107P_2 2 2
2 2
135 frame sensor2 (D107P-2) 4 D107P_3 3 3
3 3
FS-P
5 D107P_4 4 4
4 4
135 frame sensor3 (D107P-3) +12V
PHR-8
CYS13
6 5 5 5 5
GND
ZHR-8
7 6 6 6 6
135 frame sensor4 (D107P-4) -12V
51006-0700
51005-0700
8 7 7 7 7 1 1
B7B-PH-K-S
CYS13
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
for debug
7 7
8 8
11
B8B-PH-K-S
21-37
21.5 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams
21.5.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (1/4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
PAC01 F1 K1
1 1 2 6 A 1
5V power-up signal (+) 4
100 VAC input
2 HM20 5
2A 250V
2
TNR5V271K VD1 4 2
5V power-up signal (-) 4
K
AQV253H
1
B PAC19
2
Jumper connector for
1 1 the dummy switch
(ON)
DC power supply relay
3
ON 100 VAC
2
4 PAC18
PAC02
1 Jumper connector for

D+5V
D1 EC10DS1 the dummy switch
C 1
D2 EC10DS1
2 P+24V
1
K A
2 G3VM-V
K2 R1
2
(OFF)
P+24V K A 6 A 1
K3 K4 5 270
1/4W 5%
1 8 1 5 4 2 Processing tank circulation pump 4
K
3 4 PAC04
F2 4 1
6 5 1 2 3 P1 circulation pump
7
G2R-1A-E-DC24V HM50 G2R-1A-DC24V
D 1
TN1
2
5A 250V
TN2
2
P2 circulation pump
1 2 8
XE1201
2
XE1201 3
F3 PS1 circulation pump
HM20 9
2A
250V D+5V ERZV07D471 VD2 4
1
2 1 PS2 circulation pump

10
U1
1 2 5
~ ~ PS3 circulation pump
E 3
+ -
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
4 P1 replenisher PU408 4 11
6
PS4 circulation pump
ERZV07D471 VD3 12
2 1
U2
1 2
~ ~
3 4
+ - P2RA replenisher PU409 4
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
F ERZV07D471
2
VD4
1 PAC03
1
U3 P1 replenisher pump
1 2 5
~ ~
3 4 2
+ - P2RB replenisher PU410 4 P2RA replenisher pump
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V 6
ERZV07D471 VD5 3
2 1 P2RB replenisher pump
7
U4
G 1
~ ~
2 4
PSR replenisher pump
3 4 8
+ - PSR replenisher PU411 4
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
21-38
PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
R2 P+24V P+5V
3.9K
1/4W
5%
R3 R4
1
3.9K 330
A
D3 1/4W 1/4W
SML-310DT 5% 5% PC1
K
1 16
P+5V input check 4
2 15
B 3 14
2
PAC15 R5 3.9K 1/4W 5% P+24V input check 4

4 13
1 5 12
<24 V from PWR22> 2 R6 3.9K 1/4W 5% 6 11 Dryer safety thermostat 4
7 10
8 9 Not used
TLP281-4(GB)
C
G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V
2
1
P+24V
D4
D
K
EC10DS1
A
K5
2
1
4
3
D5
K
EC10DS1 P+24V
A
PAC13 K6
2
1 G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V
CRT relay 6 1 D6 2 EC10DS1 4 2
2 K A 3 1
Dryer heater relay (1) 7
3 1 D7 2 EC10DS1
E Dryer heater relay (2) 8
4
K A 5 6
Solution heater relay (1) 9 1 D8 2 EC10DS1
5 K A D10
Solution heater relay (2) 10 1 D9 2 EC10DS1 2 1 D+5V
K A A K
EC10DS1
K7 R7270
6 A 1
F 5 1/4W 5%
4 2
REON 4
K
G3VM-V
PAC14
1
Dryer heater thermostat 8
2 P+24V
Slit plate thermostat (1) 9
3 PC2
G Slit plate thermostat (2) 10
4 3.9K
R8
1/4W 5%
1
2
16
15
P1 safety thermostat 4
P1 heater thermostat 11 R9 3 14
5 3.9K 1/4W 5% P2 safety thermostat 4
4 13
P2 heater thermostat 12 R10 5 12
6 3.9K 1/4W 5% PSA safety thermostat 4
6 11
PSA heater thermostat 13 R11 7 10
7 3.9K 1/4W 5% SBP safety thermostat 4
8 9
PSB heater thermostat 14
TLP281-4(GB)
21-39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
D+5V
VD6 ERZV07D471
B 2 1
PAC08 F4 U5 PAC06
1 1 2 1 2 1
~ ~ P1 solution heater H401
2 HM32 3 4 2
Solution heater 200 Vin 3.2A 250V + - P1 solution heater H401 4
3 G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V 3
C
VD7 ERZV07D471 4
2 1 P2 solution heater H402
5
F5 U6
1 2 1 2
~ ~
HM32 3 4
3.2A 250V + - P2 solution heater H402 4
D G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
D+5V
VD8 ERZV07D471
E 2 1
PAC07 F6 U7 PAC05
1 1 2 1 2 1
Solution heater 200 Vin ~ ~ PSA solution heater H403
2 HM32 3 4 2
3.2A 250V + - PSA solution heater H403 4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V 3
F
VD9 ERZV07D471 4
2 1
5
F7 U8 PSA solution heater H404
1 2 1 2 6
~ ~
HM32 3 4
G 3.2A 250V + - PSB solution heater H404 4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
21-40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
P+5V
P+5V
C1
B 0.1u
20
R12 R13 R14 R15 U11-1
D+5V 1 P+5V
VCC
D+5V 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k G EN
1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W
PAC12 <Electrical component section SSR>
R16 330 1/4W 5% PC3 5% 5% 5% 5%
1 16 2 18 1 Dryer fan SSR
R17 330 1/4W 5% A1 Y1
2 15 5
TP1 D+5V 3 14 4 16 2
A2 Y2 Dryer SSR A
R18 330 1/4W 5% 4 13 6
5 12 6 14 3 Dryer SSR B
R19 R20 330 1/4W 5% A3 Y3
6 11 7
680 7 10 8 Y4 12 4 Output reserved for future use
1/4W A4
8 9 8
5% SN74LS244N
C
10
1
D11
A
SML-310VT
K
1
2
CTP22/24 2
communication 3
P1 replenisher PU408 1
connector 4
P2RA replenisher PU409 1
5
6 P2RB replenisher PU410 1
7 PSR replenisher PU411 1
8 Processing tank circulation pump 1
D 9
10
11
P1 solution heater H401 3 TP2 P+5V TP3 P+24V
12
P2 solution heater H402 3
13
14 P+5V P+24V
PSA solution heater H403 3
15
PSB solution heater H404 3
16
17
18 PAC16
19 1
P+5V input
20 Slit plate heater (1) H407 3 4
21 2
P+24V input
22 REON 2 5
E 23
24
25
Slit plate heater (2) H408 3
+24V 30
3
6 R21 R22
26 3.9k 680
27 1/4W 1/4W
PSA thermostat 2
1
28 + C2 + C3 5% 5% TP4 PGND
PSB thermostat 2
29 47u 47u
1
30 16V 50V
Dryer safety thermostat 2
A
31 D12 D13
Slit plate safety thermostat 2
32 5V power-up signal (+) 1 SML-310DT SML-310VT
K
33
5V power-up signal (-) 1
34
35
P+5V input check 2
2
36
P+24V input check 2
37
F 38
39
40
PAC17
TP5 DGND
PAC11
G Processor exhaust fan

1
3
2
4
21-41
21.5.2 PDC22/24 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (1/14)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC
CTP Connector
U1-1 74LS244
A 1
G EN
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA1 RA2 RA3 RA4 RA5 RA6 RA7 RA8 RA9
330 330 330 330 330 1K 1K 1K 1K
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 2 18
5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% A1 Y1
D+5V 4 16
A2 Y2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
6 14
A3 Y3
8 12
VCC A4 Y4
PC1
R1 1
680 7 C1
1/10W 2 0.1u
5% 3
6
4 U1-2 74LS244
1
19
B G EN
A
D1 TLP2630
SML-310LT
K
11 9 /STB 5
A1 Y1
2
13 7 BD0 3
A2 Y2
PC2 15 5
A3 Y3 BD1 3
1
7 17 3 BD2 3
A4 Y4
2
3
6
TP1 RCU00000C 4
TLP2630
C 1 CTP18IN
2
3
DGND
1
PC3
M301CLK 2
4 M302CLK 2 7
5 D+5V 2
6 3 U2-1 74LS244
M303CLK 2
7 M304CLK 2 6 1
G EN
8 M306CLK 2 4
9 M309CLK 2
10 TLP2630
11 M310CLK 2 2 18 BD3 3
A1 Y1
12 YOBI1CLK 2
13 4 16 BD4 3
A2 Y2
14 M311CLK 2
15 M313CLK 2 6 14 BD5 3
A3 Y3
16 M403CLK 2
17 PC4 8 12
M314CLK 2 A4 Y4 BD6 3
18 1
19 M315CLK 2 7
D 20
21
22
23
YOBI2CLK 2
M305CLK 2
M305PD 2
2
3
4
6
24
25 PIO0 TLP2630
26
27 PIO1
28 PIO2 VCC
29
30 PIO3
31 PIO4 C2
32 PIO5 0.1u
33 PIO6 PC5
34 1
35 PIO7 7 U2-2 74LS244
36 PIOSEL0 2 19
G EN
37 3
38 6
39 4
40 11 9
E 41
42
43 P+5V 2
TLP2630
13
A1
A2
Y1
Y2
7
BD7 3
IA0 3
44 P+24V 2 15 5 IA1 3
A3 Y3
45
46 PIOON 2 17 3 IA2 3
A4 Y4
47 D312 2
48 PC6
D313 2
49 YOBIOUT1 2 1
50 7
51 PIOSEL1 2 U3-1 74LS244
52 YOBIIN1 2 PIOSEL2 3 1
G EN
53 6
54 4
55
56 TLP2630 2 18
A1 Y1 IA3 3
57
58 4 16 PIOWR 3
A2 Y2
59
60 6 14
PDC1
F PC7
8
A3
A4
Y3
Y4
12
1
7
PIOSEL3 2
1
+ C3 C4 3 VCC
47u 0.1u 6
50V 4 C5 1u
2
C6
TLP2630 VCC 0.1u
U3-2 74LS244 C7 U4
19 0.1u 1 2
G EN C8 1u C1+ VS+
3 6
PC8 C1- VS- P+24V43
4
C2+ C10
1 5
C2- C9 1u
7 11 9 11 14
A1 Y1 T1IN T1OUT
TXD1 2 10 7 1u
T2IN T2OUT
G TP2 RCU00000C 3
4
6
13
15
A2
A3
Y2
Y3
7
5
12
9
R1OUT
R2OUT
MAX232NS
R1IN
R2IN
13
8
1
D+5V TLP2630 VCC 17 3 + C11
A4 Y4 TXD_232c 47u
50V
2
PDC5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1
RA10 RA11 2
2.2k 330 3
1/16W 1/16W RXD_232c 4
5% 5% 5
TP3 TP4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
PC9
1
RXD1 7
2
3
6
H VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC

D+5V
4
5
TLP2630
C20
C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C21 0.1u
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
21-42
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/14)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC
The PDC22/24 circuit board is used to communicate

with the CTP22/24 pulse motor clocks.
D+5V
A
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA12 RA13 RA14 RA15 RA16 RA17 RA18 RA19 RA20 RA21 VCC VCC
330 330 330 330 330 2.2k 2.2k 2.2k 2.2k 1K
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% C22 C23
0.1u 0.1u
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
U5-1 74LS244
1
G EN
PC10
1 16 2 18 M301_CLK 4
A1 Y1
2 15
1 M301CLK
3 14 4 16 M302_CLK 4
A2 Y2
4 13
1 M302CLK
5 12 6 14 M303_CLK 4
A3 Y3
6 11
1 M303CLK
7 10 8 12 M304_CLK 4
A4 Y4 U5-2 74LS244
8 9
1 M304CLK
B TLP281-4(GB)
PC11
19
G EN
1 16 11 9 M306_CLK 4
A1 Y1
2 15
1 M306CLK
3 14 13 7 M309_CLK 4
A2 Y2
4 13
1 M309CLK
5 12 15 5 M310_CLK 4
A3 Y3
6 11
1 M310CLK
7 10 17 3 M311_CLK 4
U6-1 74LS244 A4 Y4
8 9
1 M311CLK
1
TLP281-4(GB) G EN
PC12
1 16 2 18 M313_CLK 4
A1 Y1
2 15
1 M313CLK
3 14 4 16 M314_CLK 4
A2 Y2
4 13
1 M314CLK
C 1 M315CLK
5
6
7
8
12
11
10
9
6
8
A3
A4
Y3
Y4
14
12
U6-2 74LS244
M315_CLK 4
M403_CLK 4
1 M403CLK
19
TLP281-4(GB) G EN
PC13
1 16 11 9 YOBI1_CLK 4
A1 Y1
2 15
1 YOBI1CLK
3 14 13 7
A2 Y2 Sub-scanning drive motor
4 13
1 YOBI2CLK
5 12 15 5 (M305)
A3 Y3
6 11
1 YOBIIN1 P+24V23
7 10 17 3
A4 Y4
8 9
VCC
TLP281-4(GB)
PC14
D 1
1
7 + C24
2 R2 R3 47u
1 M305CLK 50V PDC3
3 470 10k
1 M305PD
2
6 1/10W 1/10W 1
4 5% 5% 5
U7-1 2
TLP2630 6
1 2 3
7
VCC 4
74LS07 8
VCC U7-2
C25 3 4
0.1u
74LS07
5
U8 VCC
E 1 8
VCC
CT RESET /RESET 3,4

2 7 TP5 RCU00000C TP6 RCU00000C
VSC VSA
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
3 6 C26
OUTC VSB/RESIN 0.1u RA22 RA23
4
GND
330 330
C27 MB3771PF U9-1 74LS240 TP7 RCU00000C 1/16W 1/16W
1u 1 5% 5% “H” level when an abnormal
G EN
condition is detected.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PC15
Reset time of 100 msec 1 16 PIOON 1
2 18 2 15
3 PIOON_PDC A1 Y1
3 14 P+5V 1
4 16 4 13
A2 Y2
5 12 YOBIOUT1 1
6 14 6 11
A3 Y3
7 10 P+24V 1
8 12 8 9
VCC VCC A4 Y4
TP8 RCU00000C TLP281-4(GB)
F VCC
R4
2.2k
R5
2.2k
1
U10-1 74LS244
G EN
TP9 RCU00000C
“H” level when the sensor detects
the specified condition.
Cutter signal 1/10W 1/10W PC16
5% 5% 1 16 D312 1
PDC2 2 18 2 15
A1 Y1
1 3 14 D313 1
2 4 16 4 13
A2 Y2
3 5 12
4 R6 10 1/10W 5% 6 14 6 11
A3 Y3 D312PLD 4
5 7 10
VCC 6 8 12 8 9
A4 Y4 D313PLD 4
P+24V01 P+24V21 P+24V23 P+24V31 P+24V41 P+24V43 R7 10 1/10W 5%
C28 C29 TLP281-4(GB)
0.047u 0.047u
VCC
R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 C30
6.8k 6.8k 6.8k 6.8k 6.8k 6.8k 0.1u
G 1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
C31
0.1u
TP10 RCU00000C
U10-2 74LS244
1 U11 19
G EN
2
3 VCC VCC
4
8 11 9
A1 Y1 D2
5
6 13 7 2 1 R14
A2 Y2 K A
11
12 74LS30 U9-2 74LS240 15 5 2 D3 1 R15
A3 Y3 SML-310MT K A 680
19
G EN 1/10W
17 3
A4 Y4 SML-310MT 5% 680
1/10W
11 9 5%
R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 A1 Y1
H 0.82k
1/4W
5%
0.82k
1/4W
5%
0.82k
1/4W
5%
0.82k
1/4W
5%
0.82k
1/4W
5%
0.82k
1/4W
5%
13
15
A2
A3
Y2
Y3
7
17 3
A4 Y4
This circuit detects whether or not the P+24 V is turned on.

(The input voltage to 74LS30 must be between 2.24 V and 2.58 V.)
21-43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Parallel I/O
A 1
U12-1 74LS240
G EN
1
U13-1 74LS240
G EN
M301PD_dum 2 18 M301PD 4,6 M313PD_dum 2 18 M313PD 4,10

A1 Y1 A1 Y1
A2 Y2 A2 Y2
A3 Y3 A3 Y3
A4 Y4 A4 Y4
U12-2 74LS240 U13-2 74LS240

19 19
G EN G EN
B M306PD_dum 11
A1 Y1
9 M306PD 4,11 M402A_dum 11
A1 Y1
9 M402A 7
M309PD_dum 13 7 M309PD 4,8 M402B_dum 13 7 M402B 7
A2 Y2 A2 Y2
M310PD_dum 15 5 M310PD 4,8 M404_dum 15 5 M404 7
A3 Y3 A3 Y3
M311PD_dum 17 3 M311PD 4,9 PU407_dum 17 3 PU407 7
A4 Y4 A4 Y4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA24 RA25 RA26 RA27 RA28 RA29 RA30 RA31
10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k VCC VCC
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W VCC VCC
5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
C32 C33
0.1u R22 R207 0.1u
22k 22k
1/10W 1/10W
C
5% 5%
U15-1
1 2 PLDYOBI1A 4
U14
8 30 M301PD_dum
1 BD0 D[0] P0[0] 74LS06
9 31 M302PD_dum
1 BD1 D[1] P0[1]
10 32 M303PD_dum
1 BD2 D[2] P0[2]
11 33 M304PD_dum
1 BD3 D[3] P0[3] U15-2
26 34 M306PD_dum
1 BD4 D[4] P0[4]
27 35 M309PD_dum
1 BD5 D[5] P0[5]
28 36 M310PD_dum 3 4 PLDYOBI1B 6
1 BD6 D[6] P0[6]
29 37 M311PD_dum
1 BD7 D[7] P0[7]
40 M313PD_dum
P1[0] 74LS06
18 41 M314PD_dum
1 IA0 ADR[0] P1[1]
20 42 M315PD_dum
1 IA1 ADR[1] P1[2]
21 43 M403PD_dum
1 IA2 ADR[2] P1[3]
D 1
2,4
IA3
/RESET
22
23
14
ADR[3] P1[4]
P1[5]
L_SYSCLR P1[6]
44
45
46
47
PLDYOBI2 4
VCC
15
L_CS P1[7]
48
Processor drive motor (M401)
L_RD P2[0] M301DIR 4
16 49 M304DIR 4
1 PIOWR L_WR P2[1]
50 M310DIR 4
VCC P2[2] C34 P+24V42
51 M314DIR 4
P2[3] 0.1u
52 PLDYOBI3 4
P2[4] R23 R24
53 M307A 4
P2[5]
54 M307B 4 22k 22k
P2[6] 1/10W 1/10W
55 M307C 4
P2[7]
1
56 5% 5% + C35
P3[0] DOT11 5
57 47u PDC11
P3[1] DOT12 5
58 U15-3 50V 1
P3[2] DOT13 5
2
59 DOT14 5 4
P3[3]
60 DOT15 5 5 6 2
P3[4]
61 DOT16 5 5
P3[5]
64 DOT17 5 3
P3[6]
E P3[7]
P4[0]
P4[1]
65
66
67
DOT21
DOT22
5
5
DOT18 5
74LS06
U15-4
VCC
6
68 DOT23 5
P4[2]
69 DOT24 5 9 8
P4[3]
70 DOT25 5
P4[4]
71 DOT26 5
P4[5] 74LS06
72 DOT27 5
P4[6]
73 DOT28 5
P4[7]
75 M401
P5[0] R25
76 M401DIR
P5[1]
77 M402A_dum 22k
P5[2] 1/10W PDC6
78 M402B_dum
P5[3] U15-5 5%
79 M404_dum 1
P5[4]
80 PU407_dum 2
P5[5]
81 11 10 3
P5[6]
82
P5[7]
83 F401 13
P6[0] 74LS06
84 F402 13
F
P6[1]
85 F403 13
P6[2]
86 F404 13
P6[3]
P6[4]
87 F406 13
VCC Buzzer connector
89 F407 13
P6[5]
90
P6[6]
91
VCC VCC P6[7]
92 S401 12
P7[0] R208
93 S402 12
P7[1]
94 S403 12 22k
C36 C37 P7[2] 1/10W
95 S404 12
0.1u 0.1u P7[3] U15-6 5%
96 S405 12
P7[4]
97 S406 12
P7[5]
98 S407 12 13 12
P7[6]
99 S408 12
P7[7]
100 S409 12
P8[0] 74LS06
1 S410 12
P8[1]
2 S411 12
P8[2]
3 S411DIR 12
P8[3]
4
G 19
IC
P8[4]
P8[5]
P8[6]
P8[7]
5
6
7 PIOON_PDC 2
TX180
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA32 RA33 RA34 RA35 RA36 RA37 RA38 RA39 RA40 RA41
10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
21-44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
U17-1 74LS244
PLD circuitry 1
G EN
This circuitry is used to
reshape the pulse motor clocks.
A 2
4
A1
A2
Y1
Y2
18
16 1
U18-1 74LS244
G EN
6 14 CUTTER_OUT1 6
A3 Y3
8 12 CUTTER_OUT2 6 2 18 M301A 6
A4 Y4 A1 Y1
4 16 M301B 6
U17-2 74LS244 A2 Y2
19 6 14 M301/A 6
G EN A3 Y3
8 12 M301/B 6
A4 Y4
11 9 M403A 7
A1 Y1
13 7 M403B 7
A2 Y2 U18-2 74LS244
15 5 M403/A 7 19
A3 Y3 G EN
B R26 33 1/10W 5%
R27 33 1/10W 5%
17
A4 Y4
3 M403/B 7
11
A1 Y1
9 M304A 8
13 7 M304B 8
R28 33 1/10W 5% A2 Y2
R29 33 1/10W 5% 15 5
A3 Y3 M304/A 8
VCC
R30 33 1/10W 5% 17 3
A4 Y4 M304/B 8
R31 33 1/10W 5%
R32 33 1/10W 5%
R33 33 1/10W 5%
TCK R34 33 1/10W 5%
R35 33 1/10W 5% U19-1 74LS244
R36 33 1/10W 5% 1
R37 33 1/10W 5% G EN
R38 33 1/10W 5%
2 D312PLD R39 33 1/10W 5%
2 D313PLD R40 33 1/10W 5% 2 18 M309A 8
3 M307C R41 33 1/10W 5% A1 Y1
TDO
C 3 PLDYOBI2 VCC
VCC
R42 33 1/10W 5% 4
6
A2
A3
Y2
Y3
16
14
M309B 8
M309/A 8
8 12 M309/B 8
A4 Y4
121
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
U19-2 74LS244
19
TDO
I/ O
I/ O
TCK
G EN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VCC/3.3V
122 80 R43 33 1/10W 5%

I/O I/O
123 79
3 PLDYOBI3 I/O VCC/3.3V R44 33 1/10W 5%
128 78
2 M403_CLK I/O I/O R45 33 1/10W 5%
129 73 11 9 M310A 8
2 M315_CLK I/O I/O R46 33 1/10W 5% A1 Y1
130 72
2 M314_CLK I/O I/O R47 33 1/10W 5%
131 71 13 7 M310B 8
2 M313_CLK I/O I/O R48 33 1/10W 5% A2 Y2
132 70
2 M311_CLK I/O I/O R49 33 1/10W 5%
133 69 15 5 M310/A 8
VCC/3.3V U20 I/O R50 33 1/10W 5% A3 Y3
134 68
2 M310_CLK I/O I/O R51 33 1/10W 5%
135 67 17 3 M310/B 8
2 M309_CLK I/O EPM7128SQC160-15 I/O R52 33 1/10W 5% A4 Y4
136 65
D 2
2
M306_CLK
M304_CLK
137
139
140
I/O
I/O
INPUT/GCLK1
INPUT/OE1
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
64
63
62
R54 33 1/10W 5%
R53 33
R55 33
1/10W 5%
1/10W 5% 1
U21-1 74LS244
G EN
2,3 /RESET 141 59 R56 33 1/10W 5%
INPUT/GCLRn I/O R57 33 1/10W 5%
142 58
INPUT/OE2/GCLK2 I/O R58 33 1/10W 5%
144 57
2 M303_CLK I/O I/O R59 33 1/10W 5%
145 56 2 18 M311A 9
2 M302_CLK I/O I/O A1 Y1
146 55
2 M301_CLK I/O VCC/3.3V R60 33 1/10W 5%
147 54 4 16 M311B 9
3 M307A I/O I/O R61 33 1/10W 5% A2 Y2
149 53
3 M307B I/O I/O R62 33 1/10W 5%
150 52 6 14 M311/A 9
3,6 M301PD I/O I/O R63 33 1/10W 5% A3 Y3
151 51
3 M301DIR I/O I/O R64 33 1/10W 5%
152 50 8 12 M311/B 9
3,10 M302PD I/O I/O R65 33 1/10W 5% A4 Y4
153 49
3,10 M303PD I/O I/O R66 33 1/10W 5%
158 48
3,8 M304PD I/O I/O U21-2 74LS244
VCC/3.3V
VCC/3.3V
159 43
3 M304DIR I/O I/O
160 41 19
3,11 M306PD I/O I/O G EN
TMS
I/ O
I/ O
TDI
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
E
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
VCC 11 9
A1 Y1 M313A 9
VCC VCC VCC VCC 13 7
A2 Y2 M313B 9
15 5 M313/A 9
C38 C39 C40 C41 A3 Y3
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 17 3
A4 Y4 M313/B 9
TDI U22-1 74LS244

1
3,8 M309PD G EN
3,8 M310PD
3 M310DIR
3,9 M311PD
2 18 M315A 9
3,9 M313PD A1 Y1
3,11 M314PD
4 16 M315B 9
3 M314DIR A2 Y2
3,9 M315PD
6 14 M315/A 9
3,7 M403PD A3 Y3
F 2
3
YOBI1_CLK
PLDYOBI1A
19
U23-2 74LS244
G EN
8
A4 Y4
12 M315/B 9
U22-2 74LS244
19
G EN
R67 33 1/10W 5% 11 9
A1 Y1 M306A 11
TMS
R68 33 1/10W 5% 13 7 11 9
A2 Y2 M306B 11 A1 Y1 M302A 10
R69 33 1/10W 5% 15 5 13 7
A3 Y3 M306/A 11 A2 Y2 M302B 10
R70 33 1/10W 5% 17 3 15 5
A4 Y4 M306/B 11 A3 Y3 M302/A 10
17 3 M302/B 10
A4 Y4
U24-1 74LS244 U23-1 74LS244

1 1
G EN G EN
G VCC R71 33 1/10W 5% 2

A1 Y1
18 M314A 11 2
A1 Y1
18 M303A 10
VCC
R72 33 1/10W 5% 4 16 4 16
A2 Y2 M314B 11 A2 Y2 M303B 10
C42 R73 33 1/10W 5% 6 14 6 14
A3 Y3 M314/A 11 A3 Y3 M303/A 10
8
7
6
5
0.1u
RA42 R74 33 1/10W 5% 8 12 8 12
A4 Y4 M314/B 11 A4 Y4 M303/B 10
1K
1/16W
5%
VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC
1
2
3
4
U24-2 74LS244
1 19
G EN C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 C49
2
3 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
4
5 R75 33 1/10W 5% 11 9
A1 Y1 MYOBI1A 11
6
H 7
8
9 R77 33 1/10W 5%
R76 33 1/10W 5% 13
15
A2
A3
Y2
Y3
7
5
MYOBI1B 11
MYOBI1/A 11
10
PDC26
R78 33 1/10W 5% 17 3
A4 Y4 MYOBI1/B 11
PLD_ISP function connector
21-45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Back printer circuitry VCC
P+24V21
R79
A 4.7k
1/10W
5%
QA1-1
1
U25-1 74HC244
SMA5106
G
1
1 /STB G EN
D
2 ZD1
6 3 2 1
S
4 K A
2 18 R80 100 1/10W 5%
D
3 DOT11 A1 Y1 U1ZB36
G
4 16 R81 100 1/10W 5%
3 DOT12 A2 Y2
5
6 14 R82 100 1/10W 5%
3 DOT13 A3 Y3
QA1-2
8
8 12 R83 100 1/10W 5%
3 DOT14 A4 Y4 SMA5106
D
9 ZD2
B 7 10 2 1
4
3
2
1
S
11 K A
RA43
D
4.7K U1ZB36
G
1/16W
12
5%
5
6
7
8
P+24V21
C QA2-1
1
U25-2 74HC244
SMA5106
G
19
G EN Back printer
D
2 ZD3
6 3 2 1
S
4 K A P+24V21
11 9 R84 100 1/10W 5%
D
G
13 7 R85 100 1/10W 5% PDC4
3 DOT16 A2 Y2
5
1
15 5 R86 100 1/10W 5% 11
3 DOT17 A3 Y3
2
QA2-2
8
17 3 R87 100 1/10W 5% 12
3 DOT18 A4 Y4 SMA5106
G
3
D
9 ZD4 13
7 10 2 1 4
4
3
2
1
S
11 K A 14
D RA44 5
D
4.7K U1ZB36 15
G
1/16W 6
12
5% 16
7
5
6
7
8
17
8
18
9
19
10
20
VCC
P+24V21
E C50
0.1u P+24V21
QA3-1
1
U26-1 74HC244
SMA5106
G
1
G EN
1
D
2 ZD5 + C51
6 3 2 1 10000u
S
4 K A 50V
2
2 18 R88 100 1/10W 5%
D
G
4 16 R89 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT22 A2 Y2
5
6 14 R90 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT23 A3 Y3
QA3-2
8
8 12 R91 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT24 A4 Y4 SMA5106
G
ZD6
F 7
9
10 2 1
4
3
2
1
11 K A
RA45
D
4.7K U1ZB36
G
1/16W
12
5%
5
6
7
8
P+24V21
G QA4-1
1
U26-2 74HC244
SMA5106
G
19
G EN
D
2 ZD7
6 3 2 1
S
4 K A
11 9 R92 100 1/10W 5%
D
G
13 7 R93 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT26 A2 Y2
5
15 5 R94 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT27 A3 Y3
QA4-2
8
17 3 R95 100 1/10W 5%

3 DOT28 A4 Y4 SMA5106
G
9 ZD8
7 10 2 1
H
4
3
2
1
11 K A
VCC VCC RA46
D
4.7K U1ZB36
G
1/16W
12
C52 C53 5%
0.1u 0.1u
5
6
7
8
21-46
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC
P+24V02
A Paper supply motor (M301)

Feed drive motor1 (M302)
C54
0.1u
1
+ C55
Spare motor 47u
50V
2
NF1
U27 DSS306-55FZ103N100
11 5 1 3
CVCC L SPLY
G
13 1
4 M301A PHASE1 OUT1A
2
14 17 NF2
4 M301/A ENA1 OUT1B DSS306-55FZ103N100
12 18
RC1 E1
1 3
16 G
SENSE1
2
8 2
4 M301B PHASE2 OUT2A NF3
7 4
4 M301/B ENA2 OUT2B DSS306-55FZ103N100
9 3
RC2 E2
1 3
B VCC
SENSE2
6 G
1
15
REF.
2
D12 D13
K
10 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 NF4
CGND R96 R97 DSS306-55FZ103N100
A
R98 A2918SWV 1 3
2
1
1
1k G
1/10W 2.4k 2.4k D14 D15
2
1% 1/10W 1/10W EC31QS09 EC31QS09
1% 1%
Current values 1.28/0.64
A
C56 R99 C57 R100
2
680p 27k 680p 27k C58 C59 R101
1/10W 1/10W 3300p R102 3300p 0.39
1% 1% 0.39 2W
R103 2W 2%
1k 2%
1/10W
1%
C
3
Q1 C
2
3,4 M301PD B
DTC113ZKA E
1
VCC
VCC P+24V22
C102
0.1u
R146
910
1
1/10W C103 + C104

1% 0.1u 47u
50V
2
D Current values 1.0/0.5 R147

180
1/10W C105 NF33
1% 0.1u DSS306-55FZ103N100
U38 1 3
3
Q9 C R148 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 180 20
3,4 M302PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF34 PDC16
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10 1
DTC113ZKA E Vref B Out 1
12 1 3 7
Out 2
1
1 G 2
Vs A
27 14 8
Vs B Out 3
2
18 3
Out 4 NF35
4 9
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11 4
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3 10
4 M302A Phase A Rs B D44 D45
K
23 G 5
4 M302B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 11
E 4 M302/A ENA A
2
22 6
A
4 M302/B ENA B NF36

24 3 12
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R149 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D46 D47
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
2
R150 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R151
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C106
4700p
VCC
VCC
F C122
VCC P+24V22
0.1u
R170
1k
1/10W
1
1% C123 + C124
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R171
91 C125
Current values 0.5/0.25 1/10W 0.1u NF49
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U42 1 3
3
Q13 C R172 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
G 3 PLDYOBI1B
2 91 Vmm B
20
2
B 1/10W 2 NF50
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF51
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
4 MYOBI1A Phase A Rs B D60 D61
K
23 G
4 MYOBI1B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 MYOBI1/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 MYOBI1/B ENA B NF52

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R173 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D62 D63
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
R174 MTD2005
2
13k
H 1/10W
1%
R175
0.82
2W
2%
C126
4700p
21-47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (M402) VCC
Paper reverse feed motor (M403) P+24V32
A Sorter drive motor (M404)

C62
1
0.1u + C63
47u
50V
2
U29 RT1
11 10
CVCC VS
1 4 PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790
3 M402A IN1 OUT1 P+24V31
2 8
3 M402B IN2 OUT2
12 6
ST PGND
B
1
TA8429H + C64 PDC9
U7-3 47u 1
50V 6
2
5 6 2
3 PU407
7
VCC P+24V31 3
74LS07 8
4
9
5
1
C65 + C66 10
0.1u 47u NFB2
50V
2
RXE075
0.75A
C U30 RT2
11 10
CVCC VS
1 4 PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790
IN1 OUT1
2 8
3 M404 IN2 OUT2
12 6
ST PGND
TA8429H U7-4
9 8
74LS07
D VCC
U7-5
11 10
74LS07
C67 U7-6
0.1u
VCC P+24V42 13 12
R104 74LS07
1k
1/10W
1
1% C68 + C69
E 0.1u 47u
50V
2
R105
Current values 0.8/0.4 C70
150
1/10W 0.1u NF5
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U31 1 3 M403OUTA 12
3
Q2 C R106 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 150 20
3,4 M403PD B 1/10W Vmm B 2
NF6
2
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3 M403OUT/A 12
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
F 27
Vs B Out 3
14
2
18
Out 4 NF7
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3 M403OUTB 12
K
23 G
4 M403B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M403/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M403/B ENA B NF8

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R107 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D18 D19
K
7 0.82 1 3 M403OUT/B 12
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
R108 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R109
1%
G 0.82
2W
2%
C71
4700p
21-48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC
Register drive motor (M304) VCC P+24V22
A Register nip motor (M309)

C72
0.1u
R110
Width detecting drive motor (M310) 1k
1/10W
1
1% C73 + C74
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R111
Current values 0.5/0.25 91 C75
1/10W 0.1u NF9
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U32 1 3
3
Q3 C R112 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 91 20
3,4 M304PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF10
Vref A
B DTC113ZKA E
1% 26
Vref B Out 1
Out 2
10
12
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1 3
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF11
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M304B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M304/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M304/B ENA B NF12
24 3
Decay ALARM
2
1
1
VCC R113 DSS306-55FZ103N100
D22 D23
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
2
R114 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R115
1% 0.82
C C76
2W
2%
4700p
VCC
C77
0.1u VCC P+24V22
R116
1k
1/10W
1
1% C78 + C79
0.1u 47u
50V
2
D R117 1
PDC14
Current values 0.5/0.25 91 C80 9
1/10W 0.1u NF13 2
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100 10
U33 1 3 3
3
Q4 C R118 25 8 G 11
CVCC Vmm A
2 91 20 4
3,4 M309PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF14 12
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10 5
12 1 3 13
Out 2
1
1 G 6
Vs A
27 14 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18 7
Out 4 NF15 9 M315OUTA
4 15
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100 9 M315OUT/A
11 8
Rs A 9 M315OUTB
1
5 17 1 3 16
4 M309A Phase A Rs B D24 D25 9 M315OUT/B
K
23 G
4 M309B Phase B
E 4 M309/A
6
ENA A EC31QS09 EC31QS09
2
22
A
4 M309/B ENA B NF16

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R119 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D26 D27
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
2
R120 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R121
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C81
VCC 4700p
C82
F 0.1u
VCC P+24V22
R122
1k
1/10W
1
1% C83 + C84
0.1u 47u
50V
2
Current values 0.5/0.25 R123

91 C85
1/10W 0.1u NF17
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U34 1 3
3
Q5 C R124 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
G 3,4 M310PD
2 91 Vmm B
20
2
B 1/10W 2 NF18
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF19
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M310B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M310/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M310/B ENA B NF20

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R125 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D30 D31
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
R126 MTD2005
2
13k
H 1/10W
1%
R127
0.82
2W
2%
C86
4700p
21-49
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) VCC
Pre-register drive motor (M315)

A C87
VCC P+24V23
0.1u
R128
1k
1/10W
1
1% C88 + C89
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R129
1/10W 0.1u NF21
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
B U35 1 3
3
Q6 C R130 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 91 20
3,4 M311PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF22 PDC15
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10 1
12 1 3 3
Out 2
1
1 G 2
Vs A
27 14 4
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF23
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M311B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M311/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M311/B ENA B NF24
24 3
Decay ALARM
2
C
1
VCC R131 DSS306-55FZ103N100
D34 D35
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
2
R132 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R133
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C91
4700p
VCC
VCC P+24V23
E C97 R140
0.1u 1k
1/10W
1
1% C98 + C99
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R141
Current values 0.5/0.25 C100
91
1/10W 0.1u NF29
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U37 1 3 M315OUTA 8
3
F 3,4 M315PD
2
Q8 C R142
91
25
CVCC Vmm A
Vmm B
8
20
G
2
B 1/10W 2 NF30
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3 M315OUT/A 8
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF31
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3 M315OUTB 8
K
23 G
4 M315B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M315/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M315/B ENA B NF32

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R143 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D42 D43
K
7 0.82 1 3
G 21
LG A
LG B PGND
13 2W
2%
EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
M315OUT/B 8
A
R144 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R145
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C101
4700p
21-50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Feed drive motor 2 (M311) VCC
Feed nip motor (M313)

A
C107 VCC P+24V22
0.1u
R152
910
1/10W
1
1% C108 + C109
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R153
B Current values 1.0/0.5 180

1/10W
1%
C110
0.1u NF37
DSS306-55FZ103N100
U39 1 3
3
Q10 C R154 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 180 20
3,4 M303PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF38
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF39
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M303B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
C 4 M303/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M303/B ENA B NF40
24 3
Decay ALARM
2
1
1
VCC R155 DSS306-55FZ103N100
D50 D51
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
2
R156 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R157
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C111
4700p
D
PDC18
1
6
2
7
3
VCC 8
4
9
5
10
C92 VCC P+24V23
E 0.1u
R134
1k
1/10W
1
1% C93 + C94
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R135
1/10W 0.1u NF25
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U36 1 3
F
3
Q7 C R136 25 8 G
CVCC Vmm A
2 91 20
3,4 M313PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF26
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF27
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M313B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M313/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M313/B ENA B NF28

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
VCC R137 DSS306-55FZ103N100

D38 D39
G
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
R138 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R139
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C96
4700p
21-51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC
Exit drive motor (M306)

A Exit section up/down belt motor (M314)
C112
0.1u
VCC P+24V23
R158
and the cutter drive motor (M307) 910
1/10W
1
1% C113 + C114
0.1u 47u
50V
2
R159
1/10W 0.1u NF41
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100
U40 1 3
3
Q11 C R160 25 8 G
B 3,4 M306PD
2 180
CVCC Vmm A
Vmm B
20
2
B 1/10W 2 NF42
1% Vref A DSS306-55FZ103N100
26 10
12 1 3
Out 2
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF43
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M306B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M306/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M306/B ENA B NF44
24 3
Decay ALARM
2
1
1
VCC R161 DSS306-55FZ103N100
D54 D55
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND
C 2%
2
R162 MTD2005
2
13k
1/10W R163
1% 0.82
2W
2%
C116
4700p
VCC
VCC P+24V22
C117
0.1u
D R164
1k
1/10W
1
1% C118 + C119
0.1u 47u
50V
2
PDC17
R165 1
91 C120 5
Current values 0.5/0.25 1/10W 0.1u NF45 2
1% DSS306-55FZ103N100 6
U41 1 3 3
3
Q12 C R166 25 8 G 7
CVCC Vmm A
2 91 20 4
3,4 M314PD Vmm B
2
B 1/10W 2 NF46 8
E DTC113ZKA E
1% 26
Vref A
Vref B Out 1
Out 2
10
12
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1 3
1
1 G
Vs A
27 14
Vs B Out 3
2
18
Out 4 NF47
4
CR DSS306-55FZ103N100
11
Rs A
1
5 17 1 3
K
23 G
4 M314B Phase B
6 EC31QS09 EC31QS09
4 M314/A ENA A
2
22
A
4 M314/B ENA B NF48

24 3
Decay ALARM
2
2
1
1
VCC R167 DSS306-55FZ103N100
D58 D59
K
K
7 0.82 1 3
LG A 2W
21 13 EC31QS09 EC31QS09 G
LG B PGND 2%
A
2
R168 MTD2005
2
F 13k
1/10W
1%
R169
0.82
2W
2%
C121
4700p
G
VCC P+24V02
C60
1
0.1u + C61
47u
50V
2
NFB1
U28
H 4 CUTTER_OUT1
11
1
CVCC
IN1 OUT1
VS
10
4
RXE090
0.90A 1
PDC13
2 8 2
4 CUTTER_OUT2 IN2 OUT2
12 6
ST PGND
TA8429H
21-52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VCC P+24V31
VCC
A C127
3 S411DIR
VCC
0.1u C128
VCC 0.1u C129
1
0.1u + C130
47u
50V
2
U43-1
U44-1 74HC123 1
1 & 7
A U45
2 13 2
B Q
Two-way solenoid 3
Q
4
TC7W08F
11
CVCC VS
10
3 S411 CLR R U46-1
14 1 4 S411OUT1
Cext CX U43-2 IN1 OUT1
15 2 8 S411OUT2
R176 Rext/Cext RX/CX IN2 OUT2
1 7 5
33k 3 12 6
ST PGND
B 1/10W
1% TC7W04F
6
TC7W08F
TA8429H
U46-2
C131 VCC P+24V31
1u 3 5
C132
0.1u TC7W04F U44-2 74HC123
9 &
U46-3 A
10 5
B Q PDC10
12
Q
6 2 11 1
P+24V31 CLR R
6 8
Cext CX
7 2
TC7W04F Rext/Cext RX/CX
9
3
10
C Solenoid valve
3 S405
R177
QA5-1 7 M403OUTA
4
11
5
1
12
100 SMA5106 7 M403OUT/A
G
6
1/10W 7 M403OUTB
D
2 13
5% 7 M403OUT/B
6 3 7
S
4 14
D
5G
R178 100 1/10W 5% R179
3 S406
3 S401 15
R180 100 1/10W 5% 5W
QA5-2
8
5%
SMA5106
D
9
7 10
S
11
D
G
12
R181
3 S402
1
+ C133
47u
100 50V
2
1/10W
5%
P+24V32
1
+ C134
47u
E 50V PDC12
2
1
10
2
11
R182 3
3 S403
12
QA6-1
1
4
100 SMA5106
G
13
1/10W
D
2 5
5% 6 3 14
S
4 6
15
D
7
G
16
5
R183 100 1/10W 5% 8

3 S404
17
R184 100 1/10W 5% 9
QA6-2
8
F SMA5106
18
G
9
7 10
S
11
D
G
12
R185
100
1/10W
5%
P+24V32
R186
3 S407
G QA7-1
1
100 SMA5106
G
1/10W
D
2
5% 6 3
S
4
D
5G
R187 100 1/10W 5%

3 S408
3 S409 R188 100 1/10W 5%
QA7-2
8
SMA5106
G
9
7 10
S
11
D
H
G
12
R189
3 S410
100
1/10W
5%
21-53
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Controlled fans
A
P+24V41
1
P+24V41 + C135
47u Uncontrolled fans
50V
2
R190
3 F401
B QA8-1
1
PDC7
100 SMA5106
G
1 P+24V01
1/10W
D
2 2
5% 6 3 3
S
4 4
5
D
6
G
1
7 + C136
5
R191100 1/10W 5% 8 47u

3 F402 50V
9
2
R192100 1/10W 5%
3 F403
QA8-2
8
SMA5106
G
C 7 10
S
11
D
G
PDC19 PDC20 PDC21

12
R193100 1/10W 5% 1 1 1
3 F406
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
R194100 1/10W 5% 6 6 6
3 F404
7 7 7
QA9-1
1
PDC8 8 8 8
SMA5106
G
1
D
2 2
6 3 3 DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA
S
4 4
D 5
D
6
G
7
5
R195100 1/10W 5% 8
3 F407
E
QA9-2
8
SMA5106
G
9
7 10
S
11
D
G
12
21-54
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
P+24V21
R196 D64 TP11 RCU00000C
NF53 1 2
NFM46P11C155 A K
1 3 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
A G
2
4
P+24V22
R197 D65 TP12 RCU00000C

NF54 1 2
NFM46P11C155 A K
1 3 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
G
2
4
PDC22
1
P+24V23
2 R198 D66 TP13 RCU00000C
1 2
3 NF55 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
4 1 3
B 5
G
2
4
6
P+24V02
7 R199 D67 TP14 RCU00000C
1 2
8 NF56 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
9 1 3
G
10
2
4
P+24V01
R200 D68 TP15 RCU00000C
1 2
NF57 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
C 1
G
3
2
4
TP16 TP17 TP18 TP19
TP20 RCU00000C
D R201 D69 P+24V41

1 2 TP21 RCU00000C
NF58 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
1 3
G
2
4
R202 D70 P+24V42

1 2 TP22 RCU00000C
NF59 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
1 3
E PDC23
1
G
2
4
3 R203 D71 P+24V43

1 2 TP23 RCU00000C
4 NF60 A K
NFM46P11C155 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
5 1 3
G
6
2
4
F
P+24V31
R205 D73 TP25 RCU00000C

NF62 1 2
NFM46P11C155 A K
1 3 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT
G
2
4
PDC24
1 P+24V32
G 2 NF63
NFM46P11C155
R206
1
D74
A K
2
TP26 RCU00000C
3 1 3 4.7k 1/4W 5% SML-310DT

G
4
2
4
VCC
R204 D72
1 2
A K
1
680 1/10W 5% SML-310LT TP24 RCU00000C + C137 C138

47u 0.1u
H NF61 50V
2
PDC25 NFM46P11C155
1 1 3
G
2
2
4
21-55
21.6 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit
21.6.1 DC Power System

1. Alpha 400 Power Supply Unit (PS1)
Slot Voltage Fuse LED Connector Name Destination

SLOT5 D+3.3V FH16 (4A) to 20 PD17 to PD21 PWR6 GMB22/24 circuit board (Image processing)
SLOT4A A+24V1 FH12(4A) PD13 PWR11 LDD22 circuit board
A+24V2 FH13(4A) PD14 PWR11 LDD22 circuit board
SLOT4B A+8V1 FH14(4A) PD15 PWR11 LDD22 circuit board
SLOT3A A+13V1 FH9(4A) PD9 PWR12 LTC22 circuit board
SLOT3B A-13V1 FH11(5A) PD12 PWR11,12 LDD22 and LTC22 circuit boards
SLOT2A A+20V FH8(1.6A) PD8 PWR9 CCD22 circuit board
SLOT2B D+5V FH5(5A) PD5 PWR7 CTP22/24 circuit board
FH6(4A) PD6 PWR8 CTC22/24 circuit board
FH7(4A) PD7 PWR8 Manual carrier M69D
SLOT1A A+12V FH1(1.6A) PD1 PWR9 ADC22 circuit board
FH2(1.6A) PD2 PWR10 Manual carrier M69D
SLOT1A A-12V FH3(1.6A) PD3 PWR9 CCD22 circuit board
FH4(1.6A) PD4 PWR10 Manual carrier M69D
2. Alpha 600 Power Supply Unit (PS2)
Slot Voltage Fuse LED Connector Name Destination

SLOT5A A+5V FH38(1.6A) PD39 PWR9 CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards
SLOT5B A-5V FH39(1.6A) PD40 PWR9 CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards
SLOT4A P+5V1 FH35(5A) PD36 PWR13,14 CTC22/24 and PDC22/24 circuit boards
SLOT4B P+9V1 FH36(4A) PD37 PWR13 CTC24 circuit board
P+9V2 FH37(1.6A) PD38 PWR13 PZR22 circuit board
SLOT3A +24V01 FH30(4A) PD31 PWR15,16 CTC22/24, PDC22/24, and PAC22 circuit
boards
+24V02 FH31(4A) PD32 PWR16 PDC22/24 circuit board
SLOT3B +24V11 FH32(4A) PD33 PWR15 CTC22/24 circuit board
+24V12 FH33(4A) PD34 PWR15 Manual carrier M69D
+24V13 FH34(1.6A) PD35 PWR13 Light table
SLOT2 +24V21 FH27(4A) PD28 PWR16 PDC22/24 circuit board
SLOT1A +24V30 FH21(4A) PD22 PWR17 PAC22 circuit board
SLOT1B +24V41 FH24(4A) PD25 PWR18 PDC22/24 circuit board 21
21-57
3. LED Colors
Color Function
Green AC power supplies (starts when the Start switch is pressed)
Yellow Power supplies controlled by the CPU
Red Power supplies linked to the interlock switches
4. Fuse Used
Type Rated Current Quantity

AC Power Fuse 2A 2
3.2A 4
5A 1
DC Power Fuse 0.5A 2
1A 4
1.6A 11
2A 9
3.2A 3
4A 28
5A 8
5. PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (1/2)
21-58
PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (2/2)
21
21-59
21.6.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board
LED
LED No. Voltage coordinates Remarks
(on the circuit board)
D3 24V 4-G Not lit:
1) The interlock cover is open.
2) The 24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
D11 D+5V 7-G Not lit: The D+5V is not supplied from the CTP22/24 circuit board.
D12 P+24V 5-G Not lit: The P+24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
D13 P+5V 5-G Not lit: The P+5V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
21.6.3 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22/24 Circuit Board
LED
Load
Number
D1 5V 6-A – Used in the PDC24 circuit board.
Not lit:
When an error occurs in the CTP24 or PDC24 circuit
board.
D64 24V
(24V21) 10-F S301 Back printer drive solenoid 1
S302 Back printer drive solenoid 2
D65 24V
(24V22) 10-F M302 Feed drive motor1
M303 Feed drive motor2
M304 Register drive motor
M309 Register nip motor
M310 Width sensor drive motor
M314 Exit section up/down belt motor
D66 24V
(24V23) 10-G M311 Sub-scanning nip motor
M313 Feed nip motor
M306 Exit section drive motor
D67 24V
(24V02) 10-G M301 Paper supply motor
M307 Cutter drive motor
D68 24V
(24V01) 10-G F301 Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan
F308 Printer suction fan 1
F311 Printer exhaust fan 1
F314 Laser unit cooling fan
D69 24V
(24V41) 10-E F317 Control section exhaust fan
F401 P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan
F402 PS processing tank heater cooling fan
F403 Processing tank heater cooling fan
F406 Processing tank exhaust fan
D70 24V
(24V42) 10-E M401 Processor drive motor
D71 24V
(24V43) 10-E – Densitometer power supply
21-60
LED
Load
Number
D72 5V 10-B D312 Cutter home position sensor 1
D313 Cutter home position sensor 2
– Sorter full sensor buzzer power supply
D73 24V
(24V31) 10-B S401 P1 rack auto washing valve
S402 P2 rack auto washing valve
S403 PS1 rack auto washing valve
S404 (Not used)
M404 Sorter flapper drive motor
D74 24V
(24V32) 10-D S407 P1R replenisher cartridge washing valve
S408 P2RA replenisher cartridge washing valve
S409 P2RB replenisher cartridge washing valve
S410 P1R replenisher stirring valve
M402 Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor
M403 Sorter belt drive motor
21.6.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22/24 Circuit Board
LED
Load
Number
D2 3.3V 1-F – Lit: Abnormality (Refer to *1 below)
D5 3.3V 1-F – Lit: When the software starts.
D6 5V 9-B H401 Lit: When the P1 processing tank heater is turned on.
D7 5V 9-B H402 Lit: When the P2 processing tank heater is turned on.
D8 5V 9-B H403 Lit: When the PS1/PS2/PS3 processing tank heater is
turned on.
D9 5V 9-B H404 Lit: When the PS4 processing tank heater is turned
on.
D16 5V 9-B H406A Lit: When the Dryer heater A is turned on.
D17 – 9-B – Not used
D18 – 9-B – Not used
D19 5V 9-B H406B Lit: When the Dryer heater B is turned on.
D20 5V 8-B RESET Lit: When the circuit board is reset.
D21 5V 8-B REON Lit: When the processing tank level is normal.
D22 5V 8-B CN Lit: When the contacts at the connectors CTP1,
CTP4, CTP16, and CTP21 are proper.
D31 5V 10-H – Lit: When the 5 V, which is output from the CTP22/24
circuit board to an external load, is normal (D31 is
not lit when FA1 is blown or the power supply
fails). (Refer to Note *2 below)
D33 A5V 11-H A+5V A+5V is used in the CTP22/24 circuit board.
Lit: When the power supply is normal.
*1: Confirm that there are good contacts at the following connectors:
CTP1: PDC22/24 circuit board 21
CTP4: Sub-scanning unit sensor
CTP16: Replenisher solution level sensor
CTP21: PAC22 circuit board
*2: 1) Failure in the PDC22/24 circuit board
2) Check D31 when the temperature does not rise while D6 to D16 are lit.
3) Abnormality with one of the sensors: D302, D306 to D313, D315 to D319, D321, D407 to D409, D411 and D414
21-61
21.6.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22/24 Circuit Board
LED
Load
Number
D64 5V 1-A – 5V used in the internal circuitry
Not lit: The fuse is blown due to a problem in the
CTC22/24 circuit board.
D65 5V 1-A D211 Conjugate length variable home position sensor
D212 Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor
D213 Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor
D214 Lens home position sensor
D215 Shutter home position sensor
D66 3.3V 2-G – Control voltage of the LED driver
D67 9V 1-G – Four LED light source power supplies
Not lit: Harness breakage or short circuit
D68 5V 3-F – Used in the internal circuitry.
D69 24V 7-J F201/D204 Light source cooling fan
F216/D216 CCD cooling fan
F217/D217 Image processing section cooling fan 1
F218/D218 Image processing section cooling fan 2
D70 24V 7-H M201 Conjugate length variable motor
M202 Lens drive motor
M203 Shutter drive motor
D71 24V 7-G M101 Feed motor
M102 Supply motor
M103 Mask motor
M104 Door motor
S101 Solenoid
Meaning of the LED colors
Control system power supplies (5 V, 3.3 V, etc.): Red
Power system (12 V, 24 V, etc.): Orange
Analog system (±12 V and A5V, etc.): Yellow
21-62
21.6.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board
LED
Load
Number
D35 5V 6-A D101 135 leading end sensor
D102 135 upstream perforation sensor
D103 135 downstream perforation sensor
D104 IX240 TAP & leading end sensor
D105 IX240 perforation sensor
D106 135 check tape sensor
D108 IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor
D109 IX240 front unexposed frame sensor
D112 Door open/close sensor
D113 IPI sensor
D114 Supply motor home position sensor
D115 Cartridge sensor
D117 Mask motor home position sensor
L101 Indicator lamp
D36 12V 9-D D107 135 frame sensor
D110 135 rear fogging sensor
D111 135 front fogging sensor
D116 Magnetic head (Read)
MG101 Magnetic head (Write)
D37 -12V 8-D D107 135 frame sensor
D110 135 rear fogging sensor
D111 135 front fogging sensor
D116 Magnetic head (Read)
MG101 Magnetic head (Write)
21
21-63
21.7 DC Voltage Adjustment
21.7.1 DC Voltage Check List

Preparations before turning the system power on −Short-circuit PIns 2 and 3 on the CTP22/24 circuit board.
−Turn the five interlock switches on.
−Press the Start switch to turn the system power on.
NOTE: Slot number suffix A or B indicates module location (A: lower channel/B: upper channel).
Main Power Supply Circuit Board Check Point on Circuit Board Check Point on PWR22 Circuit Board
PS1(ALPHA400)
PS2(ALPHA600)
Modul-type
Slot-1
Slot-2
Slot-3
Slot-4
Slot-5
PWR22 Power Local Power in Ground Standard Voltage Standard
Supply Channel Name Power Name Circuit Board LED +Termainal Terminal Range +Termainal Ground Terminal Voltage Range
1 2A PL D+5V1 CTP22/24 D+5V TP10 TP16 5.05 ±0.2V PWR7-1 PWR7-4 5.15 ±0.2V
D+3.3V TP14 TP16 3.3 ±0.16V
FA1 D31 (RLED) ON
FA2 D1 (RLED) ON
A+5V D33 (RLED) ON
1 2A PL D+5V2 CTC22/24 VCC TP41 TP43 5.05 ±0.2V PWR8-2 PWR8-4 5.20 ±0.2V
+3.3V TP50 TP52 5.05 ±0.2V
FE2 VCC2(D65) (RLED) ON
2 4B EL P+5V1 CTC22/24 P5V TP57 TP58 5.1 ±0.15V PWR13-1 PWR13-2 5.20 ±0.15V
2 4A EL P+9V1 CTC22/24 L9V TP54 TP51 9.0 ±0.45V PWR13-3 PWR1-5 9.0 ±0.45V
2 3B HL +24V01 CTC22/24 M24V0 TP61 TP62 24.0 ±1.2V PWR15-1 PWR15-3 24.0 ±1.2V
2 3A HL +24V11 CTC22/24 M24V1 TP65 TP62 24.0 ±1.2V PWR15-4 PWR15-6 24.0 ±1.2V
FE7 M24V2(D71) (OLED) ON
1 2A PDC22/24 <ctp22→> D+5V (D+5V1) TP1 TP2 5.0 ±0.25V PWR7-1 PWR7-4 5.15 ±0.25V
2 4B EL P+5V1 PDC22/24 P+5V TP24 TP20 5.0 ±0.25V PWR14-1 PWR14-2 5.15 ±0.25V
2 1B HL +24V31 PDC22/24 P+24V31 TP25 TP20 24.0 ±1.2V PWR18-2 PWR18-4 24.0 ±1.2V
2 1A HL +24V41 PDC22/24 P+24V41 TP21 TP20 24.0 ±1.2V PWR18-5 PWR18-8 24.0 ±1.2V
2 2 DL +24V21 PDC22/24 P+24V21 TP11 TP20 24.0 ±1.2V PWR16-7 PWR16-10 24.0 ±1.2V
2 1B +24V30 PAC22 P+24V TP3 TP4 24.0 ±1.2V PWR17-1 PWR17-4 24.0 ±1.2V
<PWR22→> D416-IL.pwr (+24V30) PAC15-1 PAC15-2 24.0 ±1.2V PWR17-1 PWR17-4 24.0 ±1.2V
2 4B EL P+5V1 PAC22 P+5V TP2 TP4 5.1 ±0.15V PWR13-8 PWR13-9 5.15 ±0.15V
1 2A PAC22 <ctp22→> D+5V (D+5V1) TP1 TP5 5.0 ±0.25V PWR7-1 PWR7-4 5.15 ±0.25V
2 3B HL +24V01 PAC22 P+24V0 PAC16-3 PAC16-6 24.0 ±1.2V PWR15-11 PWR15-12 24.0 ±1.2V
2 4A EL P+9V2 PZR22 P+9V2 PZR1-1 PZR1-2 9.0 ±0.45V PWR13-11 PWR13-12 9.0 ±0.45V
1 5 Q D+3.3V1-5 Image D+3.3V1 CN16-1 CN16-2 3.45 ±0.15V PWR6-1 PWR6-7 3.58 ±0.15V
Processing Box
1 2B PL A+20V CCD22 A+20V JSA5-1 JSA5-8 20.0 ±1.0V PWR9-1 PWR9-2 20.0 ±1.0V
(JSA8-1) (JSA8-2)
1 1A EL A-12V1 CCD22 A-12V JSA5-9 JSA5-2 -12.1 ±0.5V PWR9-6 PWR9-5 -12.1 ±0.5V
(JSA8-4) (JSA8-3)
2 5B EL A+5V CCD22 A+5V JSA5-3 JSA5-4 5.05 ±0.2V PWR9-8 PWR9-9 5.10 ±0.2V
(JSA8-5) (JSA8-6)
2 5A EL A-5V CCD22 A-5V JSA5-10 JSA5-4 -5.05 ±0.15V PWR9-10 PWR9-9 -5.10 ±0.15V
(JSA8-7) (JSA8-6)
1 1B A+12V1 ADC22 A+12V JSA5-5 JSA5-6 12.1 ±0.5V PWR9-13 PWR9-15 12.1 ±0.5V
2 5B EL A+5V ADC22 A+5V JSA5-7 JSA5-13 5.02 ±0.2V PWR9-18 PWR9-19 5.10 ±0.2V
2 5A EL A-5V ADC22 A-5V JSA5-14 JSA5-13 -5.05 ±0.2V PWR9-20 PWR9-19 -5.10 ±0.2V
1 3B EL A+13V1 LTC22 A+13V LTC1-1 LTC1-2 13.1 ±0.55V PWR12-7 PWR12-10 13.1 ±0.55V
1 3A EL A-13V LTC22 A-13V LTC1-3 LTC1-4 -13.0 ±0.65V PWR12-12 PWR12-11 -13.0 ±0.65V
1 3B EL A+13V2 LDD22 A+13V A+13V AGND 13.0 ±0.65V PWR11-8 PWR11-10 13.0 ±0.65V
A+5V A+5V AGND 5.0 ±0.25V
PR+5V PR+5V AGND 5.0 ±0.25V
PRREF2.5V PRREF2.5V AGND 2.495 ±0.05V
LDA22 D+5V D+5V GND 5.0 ±0.3V
1 3B EL A+13V3 LDD22 IL+13V IL+13V AGNG 13.0 ±0.65V PWR11-21 PWR11-22 13.0 ±0.65V
L+5V L+5V AGNG 5.0 ±0.25V
1 3A EL A-13V LDD22 A-13V A-13V AGNG -13.0 ±0.65V PWR11-12 PWR11-11 -13.0 ±0.65V
A-5V A-5V AGNG -5.0 ±0.25V
LDA22 +3.3V +3.3V GND 3.3 ±0.2V
1 4A PL A+8V1 LDD22 A+8VG A+8VG AGND 8.05 ±0.35V PWR11-4 PWR11-6 8.05 ±0.35V
1 4A PL A+8V2 LDD22 A+8VB A+8VB AGND 8.05 ±0.35V PWR11-17 PWR11-18 8.05 ±0.35V
1 4B PL A+24V1 LDD22 +24V +24V AGND 24.0 ±1.2V PWR11-1 PWR11-3 24.0 ±1.2V
1 4B PL A+24V2 LDD22 IL+24V IL+24V AGND 24.0 ±1.2V PWR11-14 PWR11-15 24.0 ±1.2V
21-65
21.7.1 DC Voltage Check List

21.7.2 Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages
A+24V A+13V A+20V A+12V A+5V P+5V +24V0 +24V4
D+3.3V A+8V A-13V D+5V A+12V A+5V P+9V +24V1 +24V2 +24V4
SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1 SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1
PS1 (ALPHA 400) PS2 (ALPHA 600)

CD170
21
21-67
22. APPENDIX
22.1 Adjustment Jigs ........................................................................................ 22-2
22.2 Required Adjustments After Parts Replacement ................................... 22-4

22.2.1 Operation Section/Film Carrier Section .................................................................. 22-4
22.2.2 Scanner Section ........................................................................................................ 22-4
22.2.3 Printer Section ........................................................................................................... 22-6
22.2.4 Processor Section ..................................................................................................... 22-7
22.2.5 Electrical Section....................................................................................................... 22-7
22.3 Index ........................................................................................................... 22-8
22
22-1
22.1 Adjustment Jigs
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose Refer to
1 Carrier Extension Cable 136C967885 Connection between the carrier and the 5.5.14
scanner to enable input, output and
operation checks to be carried out.
CD837
2 Carrier Lever Stopper 332C1024011 Insert it between the scanner cover and the 5.5.14
lever for NC100AC to turn ON 24V when
the carrier extension cable is used.
Steel Plate Bracket
Scanner Cover
Carrier Extension
Cable
Carrier Lever Stopper

Lever for
NC100AC
CD1216 CD1217
3 Focusing Chart Jig 899C21498A0 Focus calibration (Menu 0347) 5.4.12
Optical axis adjustment (Menu 0345) 5.4.10
Optical magnification calibration 5.4.11

(Menu 0346)
RD661
4 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig 898C889490 Back printer head clearance adjustment 10.3.6
EZ1814
22-2
22.1 Adjustment Jigs
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose Refer to
5 Spectral Calibration Chart (for reversal) 610C895788 Spectral calibration (Menu 0348) 5.4.13
EZ1815
6 Spectral Calibration Chart (for negative) 899C21478A0 Spectral calibration (Menu 0348) 5.4.13
EZ1815
7 Exposure Section Frame Locating Jig 310C1023994 Locating the exposure section frame 11.3.1
CD1026
8 Adjusting Plate Set 347C1024036A Exit up/down belt height adjustment. 12.1.17
(0.5t/1.0t/1.5t/2.0t/2.5t/3.0t)
Exit Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment 12.1.18

Against the Sub-scanning Unit Exit Guide
Plate
CD1180
22
22-3
22.2 Required Adjustments After Parts Replacement
22.2.1 Operation Section/Film Carrier Section

No. Replacement Parts Adjustment Item Menu Remarks Refer to
1 Monitor (1) Monitor Color Adjustment – –

(2) Monitor Brightness – –
(3) Monitor Contrast – –
(4) Monitor Adjustment 0222 Adjust to match print (Control of 5.3.4
optical system, scanner and film
carrier).
2 Feed Motor (M101) (1) Belt Tension Adjustment – Auto film carrier NC100AC 7.2.27
3 Feed Rollers/IX240 Drive Belt (1) Belt Tension Adjustment – Auto film carrier NC100AC 7.2.27
4 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (1) Focus Position Adjustment 0321 5.4.4
(2) Carrier Inclination Display 0341 5.4.7
(3) Mask Position Adjustment 0420 Remove the upper mask for 5.5.2
IX240-lane.
(4) Film Carrier ID Setup/ 0447 Delete data for old ID carrier and 5.5.15
Delete save data for new one.
(5) Scanner Correction – (Pre-operational Check) –
5 Manual Carrier M69D (1) Focus Position Adjustment 0321 5.4.4
(2) Mask Position Adjustment 0420 Perform for all masks. 5.5.2
6 CYC22 Circuit Board (1) Film Carrier ID Setup/ 0447 Download data saved at time of 5.5.15
Delete installation.
7 Diffusion Box (1) Scanner Correction – (Pre-operational Check) –
8 Carrier Table (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 Use focusing chart jig. Adjust by 5.4.10
loosening four carrier table
mounting hex. socket head bolts.

1 LED Light Source Unit (1) LED Light Amount 0351 5.4.16
Adjustment
(2) Spectral Calibration 0348 Use spectral calibration chart 5.4.13
(3) LED Operation Time Clear 0343 5.4.8
2 CCD Unit (1) CCD Overflow Voltage 0353 5.4.18
Adjustment
(2) CCD AD Timing Auto 0354 5.4.19
Adjustment
(3) Piezoelectric Voltage – 8.4.6
Adjustment
(4) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 Use focusing chart jig. Adjust by 5.4.10
mounting hex. socket head bolts.
(5) Optical Magnification 0346 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.11
Calibration
(6) Focus Calibration 0347 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.12
(7) Focus Position Adjustment 0321 5.4.4
(8) LED Light Amount 0351 5.4.16
Adjustment
(9) Mask Position Adjustment 0420 Perform for all masks. 5.5.2
(10) Pixel Correction 0352 5.4.17
(11) Piezoelectric Actuator 0343 5.4.8
Operating Time Clear
3 PZR22 Circuit Board (1) Piezoelectric Voltage – 8.4.6
Adjustment
22-4
4 Lens Unit (1) Lens Registration 0344 5.4.9

(2) Carrier Inclination Display 0341 5.4.6
(3) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 Use focusing chart jig. Adjust by 5.4.10
(4) Optical Magnification 0346 mounting hex. socket head bolts. 5.4.11
Calibration Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.12
(6) Focus Position Adjustment 0321
(7) Mask Position Adjustment 0420 Remove the upper mask for 5.5.2
IX240-lane.
5 Lens Motor (M202) (1) Optical Magnification 0346 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.11
Calibration
6 Lens Home Position Sensor (1) Optical Magnification 0346 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.11
(D214) Calibration
7 Conjugate Length Variable (1) Optical Magnification 0346 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.11
Motor (M201) Calibration
8 Conjugate Length Drive Motor (1) Optical Magnification 0346 Use focusing chart jig. 5.4.11
Calibration
Home Position Sensor (D211) Calibration
Upper Limit Sensor (D212) Calibration
Lower Limit Sensor (D213) Calibration
22
22-5
22.2.3 Printer Section

1 Back Printer Head (1) Back Printer Head – 10.3.6

Clearance Adjustment
(2) Back Printing Quantity 0554 5.6.23
Clear
2 Platen (1) Back Printer Head – 10.3.6
Clearance Adjustment
3 Laser Unit Air Filter (1) Filter Replacement History 0541 5.6.10
4 Laser Unit (1) Main Scanning Position 0547 5.6.16
Adjustment/Laser Beam
Sync. Rough Adjustment
(2) Laser Beam Sync. Fine 0548 5.6.17
Adjustment Print
(3) G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal 0522 5.6.3
Temperature Setup
(4) Print Condition Upkeep – (Pre-operational Check) –
5 Sub-scanning Belt (1) Main Scanning Position 0547 5.6.16
Adjustment Print
6 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (1) Sub-scanning Motor 0554 5.6.23
(M305) Operation Clear
(2) Main Scanning Position 0547 5.6.16
Adjustment Print
7 Sub-scanning Unit (1) Sub-scanning Nip Roller 0551 Input data indicated on new unit. 5.6.20
Data Input
(2) Main Scanning Position 0547 5.6.16
Adjustment Print
8 Registration Unit (1) Printer Mechanism Fine 0551 Input data indicated on new unit. 5.6.20
Adjustment
(2) Side Register Calibration 0556 5.6.25
9 Printer Exit Unit (1) Printer Mechanism Fine 0551 Input data indicated on new unit. 5.6.20
Adjustment
(2) Exit Up/Down Belt Height – 12.1.18
Adjustment Against the
Sub-scanning Unit Exit
Guide Plate
10 Exit Unit Up/Down Belt and (1) Exit Up/Down Belt Height – 12.1.17
Related Parts Adjustment
22-6
22.2.4 Processor Section

1 Processing Tank Heater (1) Heater ON Time Clear 0644 5.7.12

(2) Processor Temperature 0623 5.7.5
Calibration
2 Processing Tank Temperature (1) Processor Temperature 0623 5.7.5
Sensor Calibration
3 Replenisher Filter (1) Pump Output 0640 5.7.8
Measurement/Setting
4 Replenisher Pump (1) Pump ON Time Clear 0644 5.7.12
(2) Pump Output 0640 5.7.8
Measurement/Setting
5 Replenisher Pump Valve (1) Pump Output 0640 5.7.8
Measurement/Setting
6 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) (1) Pump ON Time Clear 0644 5.7.12
(2) Auto Cleaning Output 0641 5.7.9
Measurement/Setting
7 Rack Auto Washing Valve (1) Auto Cleaning Output 0641 5.7.9
Measurement/Setting
8 Processor Drive Motor (M401) (1) Processor Operating Time 0644 5.7.12
Clear
9 Dryer Heater (1) Heater ON Time Clear 0644 5.7.12
10 DTL24 Circuit Board (1) PS Solution Concentration 0647 Measurement level is indicated on 5.7.15
Measurement Level the circuit board.
Setting
22.2.5 Electrical Section

1 Alha 400/600 DC Power (1) DC Voltage Adjustment – 21.7.1

Supply
2 DC Power Supply Unit (1) DC Voltage Check – –
(Includes DC Power Supply Unnecessary
and Circuit Board)
3 Main Control Unit (1) System Software – 4.3
Reinstallation
(2) Optional Software – –
Installation
(3) Data Save 0557 Select “All” 5.6.26
4 CTP24 Circuit Board (1) Jumper Plug J2 Switching – From1-2(OFF)to 2-3(Backup) 20.5.2
(2) System Software – 4.3
Reinstallation
(3) Data Download 0558 Select “All”. 5.6.27
5 CTC24 Circuit Board (1) System Software – 4.3
Reinstallation
(2) LED Light Amount 0351 5.4.16
Adjustment
6 GHT22 Circuit Board (1) System Software – 4.3
Reinstallation
22
22-7
22.3 Index
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) Back Printer Set Sensor (D320)
(DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement ................7-26 Replacement .................................................. 10-25
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Back Printer Test (0552)..................................... 5-101
Replacement.......................................................7-9 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........... 10-21
135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ................7-26 Back Printing Format Setting (0226)..................... 5-36
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/ Backup for Refreshing ........................................ 3-124
Reinstallation ......................................................7-9 Ball Catch Replacement ....................................... 7-66
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Belt Drive Gear Replacement ............................. 19-26
Replacement.....................................................7-11 Belt Drive Motor (M403) Replacement ............... 19-25
135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Belt Sorter (F340) ............................................... 19-20
Replacement.....................................................7-11 Belt Tension Adjustment..................................... 18-23
135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement ............7-27 Belt/Pulley/Flapper Up-Down Cam
135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) Replacement .................................................. 19-27
(FSP Circuit Board) Replacement ....................7-10 Block Diagram .................................................... 21-16
135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................. 7-20
Replacement.....................................................7-27 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation......... 7-21
135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Bottom Left-hand Cover Removal/
Replacement.......................................................7-8 Reinstallation.................................................... 7-21
135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) Brightness Correction (0301)................................ 5-42
(MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement................7-24 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ....... 20-5
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/
Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor Cam Roller Replacement...................................... 7-54
(DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement ................7-28 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)................... 5-65
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Carrier Base Assembly Replacement................... 7-70
Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/
(LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement.................7-10 Reinstallation.................................................... 7-58
135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Carrier Base Section............................................. 7-58
Replacement.......................................................8-5 Carrier Inclination Display (0341) ......................... 5-47
Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement .................... 7-63
AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ......................21-17 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation ................... 7-59
ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement.......................8-31 Carrier Table Slider Guide Replacement.............. 7-70
Adjustment Confirmation .....................................12-25 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation.......... 7-8
Adjustment Jigs .....................................................22-2 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor
Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) (D408/D409) Replacement .............................. 17-6
Replacement...................................................11-14 Cartridge Holder Replacement ............................. 7-53
Anti-static Brush Replacement ............................12-11 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement .... 17-9
AOM Driver Replacement ...................................11-10 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve
APPENDIX ............................................................22-1 Replacement .................................................. 17-27
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting CCD AD Timing Auto Adjustment (0354) ............. 5-63
(0641) .............................................................5-113 CCD Data Display (0342) ..................................... 5-48
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC CCD Overflow Voltage Adjustment (0353) ........... 5-62
(Main Body Section) .........................................7-20 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation......................... 8-21
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring
(Upper Cover Section) ........................................7-8 Diagram.......................................................... 21-20
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram ......21-37 CD-ROM Drive Inspection ...................................... 2-5
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (I/O Parts Diagram) ......21-4 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing ..... 15-8, 16-17
Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement .......17-26 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams ........................... 21-38
Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System ....................17-26 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10)
Replacement .................................................... 20-7
B Laser (B-SHG) Data (0545) ...............................5-94 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14)
Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement .................................................. 20-10
Replacement...................................................10-25 Circulation Filter (PS1/PS2/PS3)
Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment...........10-29 Replacement (F340) ........................................ 2-20
Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Circulation Pump Inspection ................................. 2-17
Replacement...................................................10-26 Circulation Pump Replacement ................. 15-7, 16-12
Back Printer Section Feed Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/
Roller Replacement ........................................10-16 Reinstallation........................................... 15-5, 16-7
Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Clear Error Log (0141).......................................... 5-15
Replacement...................................................10-15 Clearing All Operation Data (0555)..................... 5-102
Back Printer Section............................................10-21 Clearing Selected Operation Data (0644)........... 5-120
22-8
22.3 Index
Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F340) ....................... 19-33
(0554) .............................................................5-102 Dryer Heater (H406)/Safety Thermostat (D406)
Command (9942) ................................................5-131 Replacement ....................................... 18-30, 19-35
Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement ....8-30 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication ..................... 2-15
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement..... 18-10, 19-11
Replacement.....................................................8-30 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Lubrication....................... 2-22
Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement .......... 18-6, 19-7
Sensor (D211)/Upper and Lower Limit Sensor Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement ....... 18-11, 19-12
(D212 and D213) Replacement ........................8-29 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation ............. 18-8, 19-9
Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning................. 2-23
Section..............................................................8-29 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch
Connection to Imaging Controller (0100) ................5-6 (D416) Replacement ........................... 18-15, 19-17
Control Circuit Board Section ..............................20-33 Dryer Section Cover Removal/
Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Reinstallation........................................... 18-3, 19-3
Replacement...................................................20-37 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411)
Cover and Electrical Parts.....................................11-4 Replacement ........................................... 18-4, 19-5
Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly......13-3 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406)
Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly......13-4 Replacement ............................................ 18-5, 19-6
Crossover Racks (F330) .......................................13-3 Dryer Unit (F330) .................................................. 18-3
Crossover Racks (F340) .......................................14-3 Dryer Unit (F340) .................................................. 19-3
Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/ Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock
Reassembly ......................................................13-3 Switch (D417) Replacement ............... 18-15, 19-18
CTC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................20-26 DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F330)..................... 18-1
CTC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ............21-21 DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F340)..................... 19-1
CTP22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ................20-33 DTL24 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 16-6
CTP22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.............21-24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement........ 7-31
CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement ......... 18-24, 19-23 Dummy Head Replacement.................................. 7-17
Custom Button Registration/Saving (1023) .........5-127
Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)....................5-28 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS.................... 21-1
Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement ..............9-24 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout
Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Diagrams ........................................................ 21-12
Replacement.....................................................9-24 ELECTRICAL SECTION....................................... 20-1
Cutter Inspection .....................................................2-7 Electrical Section .................................................. 22-7
Cutter Unit Replacement .......................................9-23 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement.................... 11-35
Cutter Unit .............................................................9-22 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement ......... 10-13
CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation .......7-23 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement ...................... 11-33
Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement ........... 10-14
Darkness Correction (0349) ..................................5-59 Entrance Side Roller Replacement.......... 18-14, 19-16
Data Backup (0122) ................................................5-9 Error Indication Outline ........................................... 3-2
Data Download (0558) ........................................5-104 Error Information Check (0123) ............................ 5-10
Data Saving (0557) .............................................5-104 Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............ 12-13
DC Offset Cancel (0350) .......................................5-59 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement......... 12-8
DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/ Exit Feed Roller Replacement (Feed Unit) ......... 10-19
Reinstallation ..................................................20-14 Exit Feed Roller Replacement (Registration Unit)... 11-35
DC Power Supply Replacement..........................20-16 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement ................. 10-18
DC Power Supply Section ...................................20-14 Exit Nip Roller Replacement............................... 11-33
DC Power System ...............................................21-57 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ........ 7-18
DC Voltage Adjustment .......................................20-17 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller
DC Voltage Check List ........................................21-65 Replacement .................................................... 7-19
DI Manager Administrative Setting (0124) ............5-11 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor
Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation.......7-42 (D321) Replacement ........................................ 12-6
Door Drive Gear Replacement ..............................7-48 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314)
Door Motor (M104) Replacement..........................7-47 Replacement .................................................... 12-7
Door Open/Close/Cartridge Sensor (D112/D115) Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment against the
(SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ................7-40 Sub-scanning Unit Exit Guide Plate ............... 12-23
Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement ......... 13-12, 14-35 Exit Up/down Belt Height Adjustment ................. 12-20
Dryer Drive Gear Replacement ............... 13-12, 14-39 Explorer (9941) ................................................... 5-130
Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement............... 18-28, 19-33 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA20)
Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/ Replacement .................................................. 11-22 22
Reinstallation ....................................... 18-28, 19-33 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram
Dryer Fan/Heater Section (F330) ........................18-28 (Laser Unit) .................................................... 21-34
22-9
22.3 Index
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram Image Position Fine Adjustment (0527)................ 5-91
(Sensors and Mechanical System) .................21-35 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket
Opening/Closing............................................. 20-19
Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement .................... 18-3, 19-3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section ............ 20-19
Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement ...........10-12 Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring
Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement ...........10-11 Diagram.......................................................... 21-36
Feed Motor (M101) Replacement .........................7-33 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2
Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation............7-32 (F217/F218) Replacement ............................. 20-22
Feed Nip Camshaft Replacement .......................10-20 Index Conditions (0227)........................................ 5-38
Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Index ..................................................................... 22-8
Replacement...................................................10-11 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement .................... 7-22
Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement .................10-10 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement .................. 10-22
Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement ..........7-35 Input Check (0320) ............................................... 5-44
Feed Section Cover ..............................................10-3 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement..... 7-23
Feed Section Front Cover Removal/ Input Power Supply Section................................ 21-12
Reinstallation ....................................................10-5 Installation (0646) ............................................... 5-121
Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Installation Information Confirmation (0126)......... 5-13
Switch (D323) Replacement .............................10-4 Installation Information Setup (0140).................... 5-14
Feed Section Roller Replacement .......... 18-13, 19-15 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board)
Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Replacement .................................................... 7-47
Switch (D324A/B) Replacement .......................10-3 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly........................ 7-51
Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .........................10-9 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ............ 7-30
Feed Unit...............................................................10-9 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/
Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (0447)......................5-78 Reinstallation.................................................... 7-15
FILM CARRIER SECTION ......................................7-1 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller
Film Guide Replacement.......................................7-57 Replacement .................................................... 7-16
Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/ IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller
Reassembly ......................................................7-69 Replacement .................................................... 7-17
Film Mask Replacement........................................7-19 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement ......................... 7-32
Filter Replacement History (0541).........................5-93 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P)
Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting Replacement .................................................... 7-28
(0241) ...............................................................5-40 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L)
Floppy Disk Drive Inspection...................................2-4 Replacement .................................................... 7-12
Focus Calibration (0347) .......................................5-55 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor
Focus Offset Adjustment (0441) ...........................5-72 (D108P/D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board)
Focus Position Adjustment (0321) ........................5-44 Replacement .................................................... 7-29
Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement ................11-23 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED
Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation...........20-5 (D108L/D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board)
Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Replacement .................................................... 7-16
Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 15-5, 16-8 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P)
Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement ............... 7-29
(D325A/B) Replacement...................................10-6 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L)
Replacement .................................................... 7-12
G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544) ..............................5-94 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122)
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Replacement .................................................... 7-58
(0522) ...............................................................5-88
Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ...................7-65 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 11-9
Gear Replacement ................................................7-65
GHT22/GIA22/GPA22/24 Circuit Board Keyboard Replacement .......................................... 6-6
Replacement...................................................20-23
GMB22/24 Circuit Board Replacement ...............20-25 Lane Changing Linkage Lubrication ....................... 2-5
Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ..............7-52 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print
Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation....................11-34 (0548) ............................................................... 5-97
Laser Exposure Check (0542) .............................. 5-93
Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)........................5-127 Laser History Display (0549) ................................ 5-98
Hose Connection.................................................16-15 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement........................... 2-8
Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement ....... 11-4
I/O Check (0340) ...................................................5-46 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation...................... 11-11
I/O Parts Diagram .................................................21-2 Laser Unit ........................................................... 11-11
Image Correction Setup (0240) .............................5-39 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement..................... 20-27
Image Export Settings (0101) .................................5-6 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement..................... 20-28
22-10
22.3 Index
LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram..................21-27 Main Control Unit Replacement.......................... 20-29
Leak Sensor (FS421) Replacement ......................16-5 Main Control Unit Section ................................... 20-29
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram ...................... 21-30
Replacement.....................................................20-7 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test ................20-6 Sync. Rough Adjustment (0547) ...................... 5-95
LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement.............8-9 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ...................... 2-1
LED Circuit Board Replacement .........................20-15 Maintenance and Inspection................................... 2-4
LED Light Amount Adjustment (0351)...................5-60 MAINTENANCE MENU .......................................... 5-1
Left-hand Cover Removal/Reinstallation...............10-3 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) ........... 7-74
Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ................8-28 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement ........................ 7-26
Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117)
Replacement.....................................................8-26 (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement................ 7-25
Lens Registration (0344) .......................................5-51 Mask Position Adjustment (0420) ......................... 5-65
Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation .........................8-26 Message Icon ......................................................... 3-2
Lens Unit ...............................................................8-26 Message Number ................................................... 3-2
Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation......8-6 MESSAGES AND ACTIONS .................................. 3-1
Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Messages and Actions............................................ 3-3
Replacement.....................................................8-16 MNC Circuit Board Replacement.......................... 7-74
Light Source Filter Replacement (F330 Serial Monitor Adjustment (0222) ................................... 5-23
Number 8001 and after/F340) ............................8-7 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425) ....................... 5-71
Light Source Section Cover Removal/ Monitor Replacement.............................................. 6-3
Reinstallation ....................................................8-14 Monitor.................................................................... 6-3
Light Source Section ...............................................8-4 Monotone Correction Setting (0224)..................... 5-27
Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...............8-4 Mouse Replacement............................................... 6-4
Light Table (Optional) Replacement .......................6-7 Mouse/Keyboard..................................................... 6-4
List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each
DC Power Supply Unit ....................................21-57 NC100AC Feeding Operation (0452) ................... 5-83
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (0400) ................ 5-65
on the CTC22/24 Circuit Board.......................21-62 NC100AC I/O Check (0445) ................................. 5-76
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages NC100AC Input Check (0421) .............................. 5-67
on the CTP22/24 Circuit Board.......................21-61 NC100AC Installation Information
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages Display (0443) .................................................. 5-75
on the CYS22 Circuit Board............................21-63 NC100AC Installation Information
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages Setup (0444) .................................................... 5-75
on the PAC22 Circuit Board............................21-60 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (0448)................. 5-79
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading
on the PDC22/24 Circuit Board ......................21-60 (0449) ............................................................... 5-81
Low Volume Processing Setup (0622) ................5-107 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (0450) ........................ 5-82
Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ...................12-18 NC100AC Nest Section Operation (0451) ............ 5-82
Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement .................12-18 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (0440).................... 5-72
LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/ NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information
Reinstallation ....................................................8-15 (0442) ............................................................... 5-73
LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement .......................8-16 NC100AC Working Information Display (0423) .... 5-69
LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ..................21-28 Negative Mask Adjustment ................................... 7-77
Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement ......... 7-76
M69D I/O Check (0446) ........................................5-77 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement ...... 7-75
M69D Input Check (0422) .....................................5-68 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......... 7-39
M69D Working Information Display (0424) ...........5-70 Nest Section ......................................................... 7-39
Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 7-40
Switch (D322) Replacement .............................9-13 New Installation .................................................... 4-15
Magazine Drive Gear Replacement ........................9-6 Nip Belt Replacement ......................................... 11-24
Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to D310) Nip Roller Replacement (Sub-scanning Unit) ..... 11-24
Replacement.....................................................9-11 Nip Roller Replacement (Paper Magazine) ............ 9-7
Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/ No.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/
Reinstallation ....................................................9-11 Reassembly ..................................................... 14-3
Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Lubrication ...............2-7 No.2 Crossover Rack Disassembly/
Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement .........9-17 Reassembly ..................................................... 14-5
Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/ No.3 Crossover Rack Disassembly/
Reinstallation ....................................................9-14 Reassembly ..................................................... 14-7 22
Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement .........9-14 No.6 Crossover Rack Disassembly/
Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......9-19 Reassembly ..................................................... 14-9
22-11
22.3 Index
Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Plug-in Connector Replacement

Replacement...................................................20-10 (Manual Negative Carrier M69D) ..................... 7-78
Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/
Operation Information Display (0343) ...................5-51 Reinstallation.................................................... 7-20
OPERATION SECTION ..........................................6-1 Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC
Operation Section/Film Carrier Section.................22-4 Power Supply Voltages .................................. 21-67
Operational Procedure ............................................5-4 Power Supply Input Section.................................. 20-5
Opposite Roller Replacement ...............................7-30 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/
Optical Axis Adjustment (0345) .............................5-52 Reinstallation.................................................... 20-8
Optical Magnification Calibration (0346) ...............5-53 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307)
OS Recovery and Backup for Refreshing ...........3-121 Replacement .................................................. 20-39
OS Recovery .......................................................3-121 Precut Length Setting (0526)................................ 5-91
Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement ..... 11-20
P1/P2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement ..........16-3 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L)
P1R Tank Replacement ......................................17-21 Replacement .................................................. 11-21
P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
Replacement...................................................17-17 with 10L kit ..................................................... 15-14
P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement .........................17-23 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor with 4.2L kit (F330)......................................... 15-15
Replacement...................................................17-19 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-49E).......... 16-28
PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................21-29 Print Condition Setup and Check (02) .................. 5-17
PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram .................21-38 Print Size Setup (0220)......................................... 5-19
PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement .....................20-13 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05) ................... 5-85
Paint (9940).........................................................5-130 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312)
Paper Condition Method Setup (0242)..................5-40 Replacement .................................................. 20-19
Paper Condition Setup (0200)...............................5-17 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement ....... 20-21
Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316)
(0550) ...............................................................5-99 Replacement .................................................... 11-8
Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement...............9-10 PRINTER EXIT SECTION .................................... 12-1
Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement ...................9-4 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............... 12-3
Paper Feed (0523) ................................................5-89 Printer Exit Unit..................................................... 12-3
Paper Feed Length Adjustment (0520) .................5-85 Printer I/O Check (0540)....................................... 5-92
PAPER FEED SECTION ......................................10-1 Printer Input Check (0525).................................... 5-90
Paper Magazine Registration (0221) ....................5-21 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551)........ 5-100
Paper Magazine Table ..........................................9-14 Printer Operation Data Display (0553)................ 5-101
Paper Magazine ......................................................9-4 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........ 20-14
Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement ...........9-22 Printer Rear Section ........................................... 21-13
Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement ..................9-21 Printer Section (I/O Parts Diagram) ...................... 21-6
Paper Supply Drive Section ..................................9-20 Printer Section (Required Adjustments After
Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/ Parts Replacement) ......................................... 22-6
Reinstallation ....................................................9-20 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309)
Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement ............9-20 Replacement .................................................... 10-7
PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ....................................9-1 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement .......... 10-7
Partition Board Blade Assembly/Seal Printer Temperature Display (0524) ..................... 5-90
Replacement...................................................14-44 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions... 15-9, 16-21
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ............21-42 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication.............. 2-16
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Replacement................20-33 Processing Rack Roller/Bearing Inspection.......... 2-21
PDC22/24 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ............21-31 Processing Rack Washing and Processing
Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement..................8-12 Solution Draining ................................. 15-10, 16-22
Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment ........................8-34 Processing Racks (F330) ..................................... 13-5
Pixel Correction (0352) .........................................5-61 Processing Racks (F340) ................................... 14-10
Platen Replacement ............................................10-30 PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION
Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement.........8-17 SYSTEM (F330) ............................................... 15-1
Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION
Replacement.......................................................8-8 SYSTEM (F340) ............................................... 16-1
Plug-in Connector Replacement (Belt Sorter) .....19-31 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection....... 2-11
Plug-in Connector Replacement Processing Solution Replacement (F330) ............ 15-9
(Auto Film Carrier NC100AC) ...........................7-37 Processing Solution Replacement (F340) .......... 16-21
Plug-in Connector Replacement PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT
(Carrier Base Section) ......................................7-66 SYSTEM .......................................................... 17-1
Processing Solution Replenishment System ...... 17-12
22-12
22.3 Index
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement ................... 20-16
Replacement...................................................20-36 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................ 21-18
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board
Replacement........................................... 15-5, 16-9 Replacement .................................................... 8-33
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................. 21-33
Replacement........................................... 15-5, 16-8
Processing Tank Heater Inspection ......................2-18 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543) ................................. 5-94
Processing Tank Heater Replacement ..... 15-6, 16-11 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement ............ 17-29
Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Rack Center Guide Replacement (P1/P2).......... 14-19
Section (F330) ..................................................15-5 Rack Center Guide Replacement ....................... 13-10
Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation
Section (F340) ..................................................16-7 (P1/P2) ........................................................... 14-18
Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ........... 13-10
Replacement........................................... 15-3, 16-3 Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS1/PS4)......... 14-20
Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Rack Drive Shaft Replacement (PS2/PS3)......... 14-22
Reinstallation ...................................... 15-11, 16-24 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement................ 7-13
Processing Temperature Setting (0620) .............5-106 Reading Magnetic Head (D116)
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06) ............5-106 Replacement .................................................... 7-14
Processor Drive Bracket Removal/ Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement................. 11-23
Reinstallation ...................................... 13-12, 14-35 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/
Processor Drive Chain Lubrication........................2-17 Reinstallation.................................................. 17-17
Processor Drive Chain Replacement ...... 13-12, 14-40 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/
Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Reinstallation.................................................. 17-17
Replacement....................................... 13-12, 14-38 Refreshing Backup Restoration .......................... 3-120
Processor Drive Motor (M401) Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement ........ 11-32
Replacement....................................... 13-12, 14-33 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316)
Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/ Replacement .................................................. 11-31
Reinstallation ...................................... 13-12, 14-33 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement ........... 11-31
Processor Drive Motor Driver Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement ............. 11-28
Replacement....................................... 13-12, 14-34 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement...... 11-28
Processor Drive System (F330) ..........................13-12 Register/Delete ................................................... 5-126
Processor Drive System (F340) ..........................14-33 REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS...... 11-1
Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Registration Section Roller Cleaning ...................... 2-9
Replacement.....................................................12-9 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........... 11-27
Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Registration Unit ................................................. 11-27
Replacement...................................................12-10 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ........... 2-3
Processor I/O Check (0642)................................5-118 Reinstallation .......................................................... 4-9
Processor Input Check (0624) ............................5-110 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement ............................. 20-9
Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625) .....5-111 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual
Processor Operation Data Display (0643) ..........5-119 Releasing ......................................................... 17-5
Processor Operation Data Display 2 (0645) .......5-121 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/
Processor Rear Cover Removal/ Reinstallation.................................................... 17-7
Reinstallation ........................................ 15-8, 16-16 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor
Processor Rear Section ......................................21-14 (M402) Replacement...................................... 17-10
PROCESSOR SECTION (F330)...........................13-1 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear
PROCESSOR SECTION (F340)...........................14-1 Replacement .................................................. 17-11
Processor Section (I/O Parts Diagram) .................21-9 Replenisher Cartridge Section.............................. 17-5
Processor Section (Required Adjustments After Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle
Parts Replacement) ..........................................22-7 Cleaning ........................................................... 2-16
Processor Temperature Calibration (0623) .........5-108 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch
Production Information (0120).................................5-6 (D410) Replacement ........................................ 17-6
PS Partition Board Replacement ........................14-43 Replenisher Filter Replacement ......................... 17-13
PS Processing Tanks ..........................................14-41 Replenisher Level Sensor Inspection ................... 2-10
PS Solution Concentration Management Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement........... 17-16
(0647) (F340 Only) .........................................5-122 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/
PS Solution Level Sensor Replacement ...............16-4 Reinstallation.................................................. 17-12
PS Solution Replacement ...................................14-41 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/
PSR Tank Replacement......................................17-24 Setting (0640)................................................. 5-112
PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replenisher Pump Replacement ........................ 17-13 22
Replacement...................................................17-20 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/
Pulse Motor Driver Replacement ........................20-26 Reinstallation.................................................. 17-12
22-13
22.3 Index
Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ..............17-15 Sorter Flapper Drive Motor (M404)
Replenisher Pump/Filters Inspection ....................2-14 Replacement .................................................. 19-20
Replenisher Rate Setting (0621) .........................5-107 Sorter Flapper Position Sensor (D414)
Replenishing Section Cover Removal/ Replacement .................................................. 19-21
Reinstallation ....................................................17-5 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement................. 18-25
Required Adjustments After Parts Sorter Full Sensor Replacement......................... 18-26
Replacement.....................................................22-4 “Sorter Full” Sensor Bracket Removal/
Reversion ..............................................................4-18 Reinstallation.................................................. 19-22
Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement ......................11-36 “Sorter Full” Sensor LED Replacement .............. 19-24
Roller Nip Camshaft Replacement ......................11-36 “Sorter Full” Sensor Replacement ...................... 19-24
Roller Replacement (P1/P2) ...............................14-13 Sorter Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation....... 19-22
Roller Replacement...............................................13-7 Sorter Operating Condition Setup (0600)
Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS1) ............14-23 (F340 Only) .................................................... 5-106
Roller/Center Guide Replacement (PS4) ............14-29 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ................. 18-19, 19-20
Roller/Gear/Center Guide Replacement Special Film CH Setting (0223) ............................ 5-24
(PS2/PS3).......................................................14-26 Special Operations (99) ...................................... 5-130
Spectral Calibration (0348) ................................... 5-56
Safety Thermostat Replacement............... 15-5, 16-10 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .............. 7-44
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03) .................5-42 Spool Rack Replacement ..................................... 7-49
Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement...........8-21 Spool Replacement .............................................. 7-50
Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/ SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement ..................... 20-9
Reinstallation ....................................................8-19 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/
Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation........8-20 Reinstallation.................................................... 12-9
Scanner Section Gear and Threaded Shaft Start Switch Replacement .................................. 20-28
Lubrication ..........................................................2-6 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22/24
Scanner Section (Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Circuit Board Discharged. .............................. 20-34
Layout Diagrams) ...........................................21-15 Step Down Transformer Replacement ............... 20-12
Scanner Section (I/O Parts Diagram)....................21-2 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation .............. 7-39
Scanner Section (Required Adjustments After Parts Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305)
Replacement) ...................................................22-4 Replacement .................................................. 11-19
SCANNER SECTION..............................................8-1 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor
Scanner Section ....................................................8-19 (D317) Replacement ...................................... 11-20
Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311)
Parameter Setup (0546) ...................................5-95 Replacement .................................................. 11-22
Screen Keyboard (9943) .....................................5-131 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301)
Self-Diagnostic/Trouble Help (09) .......................5-125 Replacement .................................................. 11-21
Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................11-20 Sub-scanning Section Roller Cleaning ................... 2-9
Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ........7-42 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement ............... 11-17
Set Lever Stopper Replacement ...........................7-53 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation......... 11-15
SETUP AND MAINTENANCE MENU .....................1-1 Sub-scanning Unit .............................................. 11-15
Shipping Information Reference (0142) ................5-16 Sub-tanks (F330) .................................................. 15-3
Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020) .........................5-126 Sub-tanks (F340) .................................................. 16-3
Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement.............8-24 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement ............ 7-46
Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation...... 7-45
Replacement.....................................................8-24 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114)
Shutter/Gear Replacement ...................................8-25 Replacement .................................................... 7-49
Side Register Calibration (0556) .........................5-103 System Operation Setup and Check (01) ............... 5-6
Simple Upgrade ......................................................4-2
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION .................................4-1 Tabletop Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................. 6-5
Solenoid (S101) Replacement ..............................7-24 Template Regist/Delete (1021)........................... 5-127
Solution Hose/Clamp Inspection ...........................2-18 Test Pattern Printing (0521).................................. 5-86
Solution Level Sensor Replacement .....................15-4 Timer Setup (0121)................................................. 5-8
Solution Preparation Tools and Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125)......................... 5-12
Procedure ........................................... 15-13, 16-27 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............. 11-4
Sorter (F330) .......................................................18-18
Sorter Belt Replacement .....................................18-20 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (0300) ......... 5-42
Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ............18-18 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation................ 12-12
Sorter Feed Section Cleaning ...............................2-23 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/
Sorter Fine Adjustment Value Setup (0648) Reinstallation.................................................. 12-11
(F340 Only).....................................................5-124 Up/Down Gear Replacement.............................. 12-12
Update .................................................................... 4-4
22-14
22.3 Index
Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120)

(MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement................7-22
Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation ..................................................12-16
Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ...................12-16
Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly.... 13-5, 14-10
UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement .................20-31
User Maintenance Schedule ...................................2-2
Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation..................7-25
Waste Solution Hose Replacement .......... 15-8, 16-20

Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415)
Replacement......................................... 15-8, 16-17
Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection...............2-13
Waste Solution System (F330) .............................15-8
Waste Solution System (F340) ...........................16-16
Waste Solution Tank Replacement ........... 15-8, 16-18
Width Detecting Belt Replacement .....................11-31
Width Detecting Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation ..................................................11-29
Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310)
Replacement...................................................11-32
Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement.........11-30
Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315)
Replacement...................................................11-27
Width Detecting Sensor (D314P)
Replacement...................................................11-28
Width Detecting Sensor LED (D314L)
Replacement...................................................11-30
Winding Gear Replacement ..................................7-55
Winding Section ....................................................7-55
Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly..............7-56
Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................7-55
Wiring Diagrams..................................................21-17
Write Head Circuit Board Replacement ................7-13
Writing Magnetic Head (MG101)
Replacement.....................................................7-15
X-#### Actions ........................................................3-2
22
22-15
FAX ; 81-3-5484-0454
E-mail ; td@eigi.tokyo.fujifilm.co.jp
Request for Feedback

Fujifilm’s Technical Division Photo Products Marketing would be most grateful if you would take copies of this
form, one for each manual being used, then complete and send them to us by FAX or E-mail.
Your opinions will contribute greatly to an accurate assessment of the overall quality of each manual.
All questions can be answered by ticking [✓] the appropriate box(es), but in addition to these answers, please
provide us with your written comments in the lined spaces following each block of questions.
< Questionnaire >

Title : Frontier 330/340 Ver.3.0 SERVICE MANUAL
Manual Title and Reference Number Servicing and Electrical Circuit Diagrams
Reference Number : PP3-C1025E
Name :
Your Name and Company
Company :
E-mail Address :
Your E-mail Address and FAX Number
FAX Number :
Question 1 • How would you rate this equipment-related manual overall?

(1) Very thorough (2) Good
(3) Slightly substandard (4) Substandard
• If you have ticked (3) or (4), please give us your reasons.
Question 2 • Have you found any technical errors, errors in spelling, or missing words in this manual?
Yes No
• If you have ticked (Yes), please let us know what these errors and missing words are.
Question 3 • How would you rate the writing (language, choice of words/phrases, etc.) and the illustrations/
diagrams, etc.?
(1) Clear and easy to follow (2) Should be simplified
(3) Difficult to follow
(1)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Of adequate size
(2)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Too small
(3)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Difficult to follow
• If you have ticked (2), (3) or (3)’, please give us your reasons.
Additional
Comments/
Requests
Please return this questionnaire to FAX No. : Tokyo 81-3-5484-0454,

or to this address E-mail address : td@eigi.tokyo.fujifilm.co.jp
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

26-30, Nishiazabu 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8620, Japan.
Printed on Recycled Paper

Ref.No.PP3-C1025E TD-03.10-FG Printed in Japan

Fr340 Service

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Fr340 Service

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.

System Disk Ver.3.0 or later First Edition

Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations

Service Manual Appropriations

2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.

K Manual copying in whole or in part.

SETUP AND MAINTENANCE MENU 1

2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ................................................................................. 2-1

3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ............................................................................................... 3-1

4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

5. MAINTENANCE MENU ......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.4.12 Focus Calibration (0347) ........................................................................................ 5-55

6. OPERATION SECTION ......................................................................................................... 6-1

7. FILM CARRIER SECTION.................................................................................................... 7-1

7.5.10 Carrier Table Slider Guide Replacement ............................................................... 7-70

8. SCANNER SECTION ............................................................................................................. 8-1

9. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................. 9-1

10. PAPER FEED SECTION ..................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2.12 Feed Nip Camshaft Replacement ........................................................................ 10-20

11. REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS ......................................................... 11-1

11.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement.......................................................... 11-32

12. PRINTER EXIT SECTION ................................................................................................... 12-1

13. PROCESSOR SECTION (F330) ....................................................................................... 13-1

13.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement......................................................... 13-12

14. PROCESSOR SECTION (F340) ....................................................................................... 14-1

15. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F330) ................................. 15-1

16. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM (F340) ................................. 16-1

16.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement ........................................... 16-17

17. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 17-1

18. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F330) ................................................................................ 18-1

19. DRYER/SORTER SECTION (F340) ................................................................................ 19-1

19.2.4 Sorter Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 19-22

20. ELECTRICAL SECTION ..................................................................................................... 20-1

20.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement ........................................................................... 20-29

21. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................. 21-1

21.7 DC Voltage Adjustment ................................................................................................... 21-65

22. APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................... 22-1

01 System 0100 Connection to Imaging Controller* K K K K K

0120 Production Information K K K K

0121 Timer Setup K K K K

0122 Data Backup K K K K

0123 Error Information Check K K K K

0124 DI Manager Administrative Setting* K K K K

0125 Timer Waiting Time Setup K K K K

0126 Installation Information Reference K K K K

0140 Installation Information Setup K K K

0141 Clear Error Log K K K

0142 Shipping Information Reference K K K

02 Print Condition 0200 Paper Condition Setup K K K K K

0221 Paper Magazine Registration K K K K

0222 Monitor Adjustment K K K K

0223 Special Film Channel Setting K K K K

0224 Monotone Correction Setting K K K K

0225 Custom Setting Register/Delete K K K K

0226 Back Printing Format K K K K

0227 Index Conditions K K K K

0240 Image Correction Setup K K K

Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.

0242 Paper Condition Method Setup K K K

03 Scanner 0300 Unexposed Frame Detection Level K K K K K

0320 Input Check K K K K

0321 Focus Position Adjustment K K K K